MP 9000

Operating Instructions
About This Machine
1 Getting Started
2 Entering Text
3 Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
This machine is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains four
AlGaAs laser diodes, 10-milliwatt, 770-810 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or indirect
reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and
interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
The following label is attached on the internal cover that is revealed when the front cover is opened.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see p.8 “Machine Type”.)
• Type 1: 90 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 16A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source.
See “Power Connection”, Troubleshooting.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
❖ About This Machine

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide

Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as register-
ing e-mail addresses and, user codes. Also refer to this manual for explana-
tions on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security func-
tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/ Document Server Reference

Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environ-
ment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
i
❖ Other manuals
• Manuals for This Machine
• Safety Information
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name General name
DeskTopBinder Lite *1 and DeskTopBinder Profes- DeskTopBinder
sional
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX En- the ScanRouter delivery software
terprise *1
*1 Optional
ii
What You Can Do with This Machine
This section introduces the features of this machine.
Note
❒ For details about options, see “Options”.
Reference
p.11 “Options”
Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions

This machine provides copier, printer (optional), and scanner (optional) functions.
APF018S
• You can make copies of originals. With a finisher (optional), you can sort and
staple copies. See Copy/Document Server Reference.
• You can print documents created in applications. See Printer Reference.
You can print documents from Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows
2000 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows XP/Server 2003 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows NT
4.0 (TCP/IP, IPP), NetWare, UNIX (TCP/IP), and Macintosh (AppleTalk) en-
vironments because the machine supports all these (multi-protocol).
• You can scan originals and send scan files to a computer. See Scanner Reference.
• You can scan originals in full colour using the scanner function.
iii
Utilizing Stored Documents
You can store files of originals scanned by this machine, or files sent from other
computers, onto the hard disk of the machine. You can print the stored docu-
ments, as well as change print settings and print multiple documents (Document
Server).
APF019S
• With DeskTopBinder, you can search, check, print and delete stored docu-
ments from your computer.
• You can also retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode.
• You can retrieve documents scanned in copier mode, if the Printer/Scanner
unit is installed.
For details, see Scanner Reference.
• With File Format Converter (optional), you can even download documents
stored in copy and printer functions to your computer. See Network Guide.
• For more information about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings”,
General Settings Guide.
• For more information about Document Server in printer mode, see “Saving
and Printing Using the Document Server”, Printer Reference.
• For more information about Document Server in scanner mode, see “Storing
Files Using the Scanner Function”, Scanner Reference.
• For more information about Document Server, see “Storing Originals in the
Document Server”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
• For more information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
iv
Connecting Two Machines for Copying
You can connect two machines together with Copy Connector (optional). When
you set up a copy job on one machine (the main machine), data is transferred to
the other (the sub-machine) so that copies can be made on both machines simul-
taneously (Connect Copy).
APG005S
• You can complete large volume copy runs in shorter time. See “Connect
Copy”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
• Even if one machine runs out of paper, or stops because of a paper jam, the
other machine can still continue to finish the job. See “Connect Copy”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.
v
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment
You can use a scanner over the network.
APF021S
• You can send scanned documents to other network computers using e-mail
(Sending stored scan file by e-mail). See “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”, Scan-
ner Reference.
• With the ScanRouter delivery software, you can store scanned documents in
specified destinations on network computers (File storage). See Scanner Reference.
• You can send scanned documents to other network folders (Scan to Folder).
See “Sending Scan Files to Folders”, Scanner Reference.
• You can use this machine as a delivery scanner for the ScanRouter delivery
application (Network delivery scanner). You can save scan files in the deliv-
ery server or send them to a folder in a computer on the same network. For
details about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings”, General Settings
Guide. For details about how to use the function, see “When Using E-mail,
Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery Function”, Scanner Reference.
vi
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security
Functions)
You can prevent information leakage by managing the machine and protecting
documents.
APF015S
• You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from be-
ing copied without permission. See Security Reference.
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings
from being changed without authorization. See Security Reference.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
See Security Reference.
• You can erase the data on the hard disk to prevent the information from leak-
ing out. See the manual for the DataOverWriteSecurity Unit (optional) and
Security Reference.
vii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer
You can monitor machine status and change settings using a computer.
APF017S
• Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Web browser, you can use a computer to view the machine's status, such as
checking on paper quantities, or misfeeds. See General Settings Guide.
• You can use a Web browser to make network settings. See General Settings
Guide.
• You can also use a Web browser to register and manage items such as user
codes, e-mail addresses, and folders in the Address Book.
See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
viii
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy
You can embed a pattern in the printed document to prevent it from being copied.
APG006S
• Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If
the document is copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security Unit (op-
tional), protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential
information from being copied. In addition, the machine beeps to notify that
unauthorized copying is being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit,
the hidden text becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is
unauthorized.
• Using the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for un-
authorized copy prevention. If the document is copied on this or other ma-
chines, the hidden text appears in the copy, discouraging such unauthorized
copying.
See the printer driver Help, Printer Reference, and Security Reference.
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iii
Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions .................................................................... iii
Utilizing Stored Documents....................................................................................... iv
Connecting Two Machines for Copying ..................................................................... v
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment .......................................................... vi
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security Functions) ................ vii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer.....................................................................viii
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy ............................................................................ ix
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users....................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Safety Information .................................................................................................3
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................3
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION labels ..............................................6
ENERGY STAR Program .......................................................................................7
Recycled Paper..........................................................................................................8
Machine Type.............................................................................................................8
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components ...........................................................................................9
Options.....................................................................................................................11
Control Panel........................................................................................................13
Display Panel........................................................................................................16
Simplified Display.....................................................................................................17
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed..................................................18
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................18
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................19
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................19
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................20
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................20
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................21
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................21
Changing Modes ..................................................................................................22
System Reset...........................................................................................................22
Turning On the Power .........................................................................................23
Turning On the Main Power .....................................................................................23
Turning On the Power ..............................................................................................24
Turning Off the Power ..............................................................................................24
Turning Off the Main Power .....................................................................................25
Saving Energy..........................................................................................................26
x
2. Entering Text
Entering Text ........................................................................................................27
Available Characters ................................................................................................27
Keys .........................................................................................................................28
How to Enter Text ....................................................................................................29
3. Appendix
Dos and Don'ts.....................................................................................................31
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ...............................................32
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM ......................................................................33
Printer Drivers for This Printer..................................................................................33
TWAIN Driver ...........................................................................................................34
DeskTopBinder Lite..................................................................................................35
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ................................................................................36
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................................37
Copy Paper ...........................................................................................................38
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types...................................................................38
Unusable Paper .......................................................................................................42
Paper Storage ..........................................................................................................43
INDEX......................................................................................................... 44
xi
xii
Notice
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users
Notice to Users in EEA Countries

This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Direc-
tive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999
on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mu-
tual recognition of their conformity.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use
of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
1
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.

Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of this manual.

Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of this manual.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

tions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find fur-
ther relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
2
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the in-
side front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly
into a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do
not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this
manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might
ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner con-
tainers in accordance with local regulations.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power
cord. Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend
it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Op-
erating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an
electric shock or fire.
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.
3
R WARNING:
• Dispose of the used toner container in accordance with the local

regulations.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aero-
sols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and func-
tionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies
available at an authorized dealer.
• Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connec-
tions, especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power
cords are a fire and electric shock hazard.
• To disconnect the power code, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the code
itself. Doing so may result in damage to the code, leading to fire or elec-
tric shock.
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and
snow.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an
electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples
over, an injury might occur.
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Oth-
erwise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated
and spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the ma-
chine is used heavily.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the ma-
chine. While moving the machine, you should take care that the power
cord will not be damaged under the machine.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall
inside the machine.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of the reach of
children. See a doctor immediately if you accidentally swallow toner.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move
into a fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
4
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of

water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam
or replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the
affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and func-
tionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies
available at an authorized dealer.
• If your skin comes into contact with toner or used toner, wash the affect-
ed area thoroughly with soap and water.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take
place at an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch any parts oth-
er than specified in this document when removing misfed paper. Other-
wise, it may cause burn injury.
• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
• Open toner cartridges carefully. If you open them forcefully, toner can
spill, dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental
ingestion.
5
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION
labels
This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions
shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine
as indicated.
APG007S
6
ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental is-
sues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equip-
ment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
❖ Low-Power mode
This product automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after
the last copy or print job has finished. Printing is still possible in Low Power
Mode, but if you wish to make copies first press the {Energy Saver} key.
❖ Off Mode (Copier only)

To conserve energy, this product automatically turns off 90 minutes (Type 2,
3: 120 minutes) after the last copying or printing job has been completed.
Printing is still possible in Off Mode, but if you wish to make copies first press
the operation switch.
❖ Sleep Mode (Printer, Scanner installed)

If the printer and scanner are installed, this product automatically lowers fur-
ther its power consumption 90 minutes (Type 2, 3: 120 minutes) after it has
shifted to Low Power Mode. Printing is still possible in Sleep Mode, but if you
wish to make copies first press the operation switch.
7
❖ Duplex Priority
The ENERGY STAR Program recommends the duplex function. By conserv-
ing paper resources this function reduces a burden to the environment. For
applicable machines, duplex function (one-sided originals→two-sided cop-
ies) is selected preferentially when the operation switch or the main power
switch is turned on, the {Energy Saver} key is pressed, or the machine resets
automatically.
Copier only
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Low-power Mode Power consumption 113.3W 129.7W 121.1W
Default interval 15 minutes
Off Mode Power consumption 4.1W 4.0W
Default interval 90 minutes 120 minutes
Sleep mode Power consumption —
Default interval —
Duplex priority One-sided→One-sided
Reference
For details about how to change the default interval, see “Timer Settings”,
To change the settings of the Duplex Priority mode, see “User Tools Menu
(Copier and Document Server Features)”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environmentally friendly. Please contact your sales representa-
tive for recommended paper.
Machine Type
This machine comes in three models which vary in copy speed. To ascertain
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Copy speed 90 copies/minute; 110 copies/minute; 135 copies/minute;
180 copies/ minute 220 copies/ minute 270 copies/ minute
for connect copy for connect copy for connect copy
(A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)
8
1. Getting Started
This section describes how to start using this machine.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names and functions of the components.
APG008S
1. Exposure glass 6. Front cover

Place originals face down here. Open to access the inside of the machine.
2. Auto Document Feeder (ADF) 7. Paper tray (tray 1-3)
Load a stack of originals here. They will Load paper here.
be fed automatically one by one.
8. Main power switch
3. Control panel If the machine does not operate after
See “Control Panel”. turning on the operation switch, check if
the main power switch is turned on.
4. On indicator
This indicator lights when you press the 9. Toner cover
operation switch. Open to change the toner container.
5. Operation switch 10. Suspend/Resume switch
Press this switch to turn the power on Press to momentarily stop copying. Press-
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the ing again resumes the stopped operation.
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
9
Getting Started
APF009S
1. Ventilation holes
Prevent overheating. Do not obstruct the
ventilation holes by placing an object
near it or leaning things against it. If the
machine overheats, a fault might occur.
Reference
p.13 “Control Panel”
10
Guide to Components
Options
This section introduces the names and functions of main optional parts.
External Options
1
This section provides explanations about external options.
APG009S
1. Finisher SR5000 5. A3/11" × 17" tray unit

Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies. You can load A3L or 11" × 17"L paper
*1: Finisher upper tray in tray 1 using this unit.
*2: Finisher shift tray 6. Multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
2. Booklet Finisher BK5000 Use when copying or printing onto a
The saddle stitch function can staple the thick paper, OHP transparency, and cus-
copies in the centre and fold them into tom size paper.
booklets. 7. Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide
*1: Finisher booklet tray LCT)
3. Z-folding unit Holds 4,400 sheets of A3 or 11" × 17" sized
paper.
Makes two parallel folds on the copied
paper, one of which faces in and the other 8. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
facing out. Holds 5,000 sheets of paper.
4. Interposer
Inserts cover or slip sheets into the copies.
Note
❒ The punch function is not available for Type 3.
11
Getting Started
Internal Options
This section provides explanations about internal options.
• Printer/Scanner unit
1 Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions.
• USB Host Interface
Allows you to connect a variety of external devices.
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Connects to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• IEEE 1394 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1394 cable.
• IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit
Allows you to install a wireless LAN interface.
• File Format Converter
Allows you to download documents from the Document Server stored by copier
and printer functions. See “Downloading Stored Documents”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
• Bluetooth
Allows you to expand the interface.
• Copy Data Security Unit
If a document containing embedded text for unauthorized copy guard is cop-
ied, protected pages are grayed out in the copy.
• DataOverWriteSecurity Unit
Allows you to erase data on the hard disk.
• Copy Connector
Allows you to connect copy function.
• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-TX)
Allows you to communicate with 1000BASE-TX.
Note
❒ You cannot simultaneously install two or more of the options below:
IEEE 1284 Interface Board, IEEE 1394 interface board, IEEE 802.11b Interface
Unit, and Bluetooth.
❒ Remove the machine's Ethernet and USB ports before connecting a USB Giga-
bit Ethernet.
12
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section introduces the names and functions of the components on the con-
trol panel.
This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully installed.
1
APG010S
1. Status indicator 2. Operation switch

Machine status is described by this indi- Press this switch to turn the power on
cator. By default, this indicator is turned (the On indicator lights up). To turn the
off. You can select the status indicator lit power off, press this switch again (the On
or not. indicator goes off). See “Turning On the
• Off: The main power switch is turned Power”.
off or ready to make copies. 3. {Login/Logout} key
• Flashing green: Scanning originals. Press to log in or log out of the system.
• Lit green: Copying (ready to scan originals).
4. {Simplified Display} key
• Flashing red: Toner has nearly run out. Press to go to the Simplified Display screen.
• Lit red: Paper jam or other malfunction. See “Simplified Display”.
If the status indicator is blinking red, pa-
per jam has occurred in the current copy 5. {Language Selection} key
job. Bring up the current job screen. Press to change the language of the display.
13
Getting Started
6. {Interrupt} key 17. Data In indicator (printer mode)

Press to make interrupt copies during a Lights up when data is coming from the
copy run. See “Interrupt Copy”, Copy/Doc- printer.
ument Server Reference.
18. {Registered Program} key/{Other
1 7. {Energy Saver} key Function} key
Press to shift to and from Low Power mode. Calls up registered functions.
See “Saving Energy”.
19. Function status indicators
8. {Clear Modes} key These show the status of the functions.
Press to clear previously entered copy job • Green: active.
settings.
• Red: interrupted. Press the function
9. {Program} key (copier and scanner key to change the display, and then
mode) follow the displayed instructions.
Press to register frequently used settings, 20. Function keys
or to recall registered settings. Press to display the operation screen of
10. {Stop} key one of the following functions:
Press to stop a job in progress. • Copy
11. {Start} key • Document Server
Press to start copying, or to scan or print • Printer
documents stored on the Document Server. • Scanner
The indicator of the selected function
12. {Sample Copy} key goes on. See “Changing Modes”.
Press to make a single set of copies or
prints to check for print quality before 21. {Counter} Key
making multiple sets. See “Sample copy”, Press to check or print the total number of
Copy/ Document Server Reference. copies made. See “Counter”, General Set-
tings Guide.
13. {Clear} key
Press to delete a number entered. 22. {User Tools} key
Press to change the default settings and
14. {q} key (Enter key) conditions to meet your requirements.
Press to enter a numerical value. See “Accessing User Tools (System Set-
15. Number keys tings)”, General Settings Guide.
Use to enter the desired number of cop- 23. {Tray Paper Settings} key
ies, or data for a selected function. Specify the paper tray settings for delivery.
16. {New Job} key 24. Display panel
Use this key to set up the next copy job Shows the operation status, error messages,
while a copy job or storing data in the and function menus.
Document Server is in progress.
14
Control Panel
Note
❒ You can adjust the angle of the control panel.
APF059S
APF060S
Reference
p.26 “Saving Energy”
p.23 “Turning On the Power”
p.17 “Simplified Display”
p.22 “Changing Modes”
“Interrupt Copy”, Copy/Document Server Reference
“Sample copy”, Copy/Document Server Reference
“Counter”, General Settings Guide
“Accessing User Tools (System Settings)”, General Settings Guide
15
Getting Started
Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages and function menus.
1 The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by lightly pressing them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
. Keys appearing as cannot be used.
Important
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
By default the copying screen is displayed when you turn the power on.
The following display is of a machine with the options fully installed.
16
Display Panel
Simplified Display
This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.
When you press the {Simplified Display} key, the screen changes from the initial
display to the simplified display.
1
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
APG011S
❖ Simplified Display
APG012S
1. [Key Colour]
Press to change the key colour and in-
crease the brightness of the display panel.
Note
❒ To return to the initial display, press the {Simplified Display} key again.
❒ Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.
17
Getting Started
When the Authentication Screen is

Displayed
1 When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or
Integration Server Authentication is set, the Authentication Screen appears on
the screen. Unless a valid user name and password are entered, operations are
not possible with the machine.
Important
❒ Consult the User Administrator about your login user name and login pass-
word. For details of the various types of user authentication, consult the re-
spective administrators.
❒ When User Code Authentication is set, the screen for entering a user code is
displayed instead.
Note
❒ “Authentication has failed.” appears if the authentication failed. Check the
login user name and login password.
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When User Code Authentication is set, the following screen appears:
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
Note
❒ To log off, do one of the following:
• Press the Operation switch.
• Press the {User Tools} key, press [System Settings], and then press the {User
Tools} key.
• Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
18
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When User Code Authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer prop-
erties of the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
1
Login (Using the Control Panel)
Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Au-
thentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Note
❒ “Authentication has failed.”appears if the authentication failed. Check the
login user name and login password.
❒ If user code authentication is enabled, a different screen appears. See “Au-
thentication Information”, General Settings Guide.
19
Getting Started
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Au-
1
A Press the {Login/Logout} key.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or
Integration Server Authentication is set, make encryption settings in the printer
properties of the printer driver, and then specify a login user name and pass-
word. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Note
❒ When logged on using a printer driver, you do not have to log off.
20
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login]. 1
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
❒ For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)

A Click [Logout] to log off.
Note
❒ Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
21
Getting Started
Changing Modes
Note
1 ❒ You cannot switch modes during interrupt copying or initial setup.
❒ The copying screen is displayed as default after power on. You can change
this default setting. For the setting procedure, see “General Features”, Gener-
al Settings Guide.
APG014S
System Reset
The screen specified in “Function Priority” appears automatically or interrupt
copying is cancelled, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is
called “System Reset”. See “General Features”, General Settings Guide. You can
change the System Reset time. See “Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide.
22
Turning On the Power

This section discusses how to turn on/off the power.
❖ Power supply 1
This machine has two power switches: Operation switch and main power
switch.
• Operation switch (right side of the control panel)
Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up,
you can make copies.
• Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Turning off this switch will completely turn off power to the machine.
Note
❒ This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you
do not use it for a certain period. See “Timer Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
Turning On the Main Power

Turn on the main power as follows:
A Make sure the power code is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
B Open the switch cover and turn on the main power switch.
The main power indicator turns on.
APF008S
Note
❒ Do not turn off the main power immediately after it has been turned on.
Otherwise it may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to
the malfunctioning of the machine.
❒ When the message “Functional problem detected. Press [Restart]
after the current process. Repeat settings after the machine
has restarted.” is displayed, follow the instructions and press [Restart]
at the bottom right-hand corner of the screen after the process is completed.
23
Getting Started

Turn on the power as follows:
1 A Press the Operation switch.

The On indicator lights up.
APG015S
Note
❒ If the power is not turned on when the operation switch is pressed, check
if the main power switch is on. If not, turn it on.
Turning Off the Power

Turn off the power as follows:
A Press the Operation switch.

The On indicator goes off.
APG015S
Note
❒ In the following cases, the indicator will not go off but will instead blink
when you press the operation switch:
• During communication with external equipment.
• When the hard disk is active.
24
Turning Off the Main Power

Turn off the main power as follows:
Important 1
❒ Do not turn off the main power switch when the On indicator is lit or blink-
ing. Failure to observe this may result in damage to the hard disk or memory,
leading to malfunction.
❒ Be sure to pull out the power cord only after you have turned off the main
power switch. Not doing this may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
A Make sure the On indicator is not lit.

B Open the switch cover, and turn off the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes off.
Note
❒ The On indicator does not go off, but blinks in direct dialing mode even if
you press the Operation switch. When this happens, check the items below,
and turn off the main power switch.
• the computer is not controlling the machine.
25
Getting Started
Saving Energy
This machine has the following two energy saving functions.
1 ❖ Energy Saver
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, or when
you press the {Energy Saver} key, the display disappears and the machine
goes into Energy Saver mode. When you press the {Energy Saver} key again,
the machine returns to the ready condition. The machine uses less electricity
in Energy Saver mode.
You can change the amount of time the machine waits before switching to En-
ergy Saver mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
See “Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❖ Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself off when the job is finished, after a cer-
tain period of time has elapsed without any operation. This function is called
“Auto Off”.
You can change the Auto Off time. See “Timer Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
Note
❒ The Auto Off Timer function will not operate in the following cases:
• When a warning message appears
• When the service call message appears
• When paper is jammed
• When the cover is open
• When the “Add Toner” message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When the User Tools/Counter/Enquiry screen is displayed
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When the printer or other functions are active
• When operations were suspended during printing
• When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
• When the sample print or locked print screen is displayed
Reference
“Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
26
2. Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters.
Entering Text
When you enter a character, it is shown at the position of the cursor. If there is a
character already at the cursor position, the entered character is shown before
that character.
Available Characters
You can enter the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789
27
Entering Text
Keys
You can change the entry screen using the keys below.
APG016S
Note
❒ When entering uppercase or lowercase letters continuously, use [Shift Lock] to
lock the case.
28
Entering Text
How to Enter Text

You can enter text as described below.
A Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press the letters you want to enter.
2
Deleting Characters
A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.

Entering Symbols
A Press [Symbol Entry] to enter into the Symbols mode.
B Press the symbols you want to enter.
29
Entering Text
Selecting a User Text

You can select and use a User Text that is registered in [Program / Change / Delete
User Text].
For details about registering User Texts, see “General Features”, General Set-
tings Guide.
2 A Press [User Text].
B Select the User Text you want to use.
Reference
“General Features”, General Settings Guide
30
3. Appendix
This section describes Dos and Don'ts, key accessories, copy paper, and consum-
ables.
Dos and Don'ts

The following items should be followed during use of this machine.
R WARNING:
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• Do not turn off the main power switch while the On indicator is lit or blink-
ing. This may cause damage to the hard disk or memory.
• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
• After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become
warm—this is not a malfunction.
• When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good
ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable,
we recommend that you keep it well ventilated.
• The area around the ventilation hole may become warm. This is caused by ex-
haust air and is not a malfunction.
• Do not turn off the power when the machine is in operation.
• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if condensation forms
inside due to rapid temperature change.
• Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, mis-
feeds might occur.
• Do not move the machine when the power is on.
• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs, settings might be
lost. Be sure to make a note of your machine settings.
• The supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from a failure
of the machine, loss of settings, or use of the machine.
Reference
p.24 “Turning Off the Power”
p.25 “Turning Off the Main Power”
31
Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-

ROM
Three CD-ROMs come with this machine: “Printer Drivers and Utilities”, “Scan-
ner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”, and “Print version Manuals”. PS Driver is
stored in “Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”. In “Print version Manu-
als”, manuals are stored in PDF format.
The following are included in the three separate CD-ROMs:
3 ❖ Font Manager 2000

For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in
the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CD-
ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

For the system administrator to manage network printers.
❖ DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

For users to manage their network print status.
❖ 1394 Utility
For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or
the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.
❖ Acrobat Reader
This utility allows you to read PDF files (Portable Document Format).
❖ Printer Utility for Mac

This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as
manage printers. For details about this utility, see PostScript Supplement.
Note
❒ Documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF
format. For details about using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader online
Help.
Reference
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help
Acrobat Reader online Help
32
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM

Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROMs.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].

Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Printer Drivers for This Printer

3
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.
Printer Language PCL 6 PCL 5e RPCS PostScript 3
Windows 95 *1 OK OK OK OK *12
Windows Me *3 OK OK OK OK *12
Windows XP *5 OK OK OK OK *13
Windows Server 2003 *6 OK OK OK OK *13
Windows NT 4.0 *7 OK *11 OK *10 OK *10 OK *11 *12
Mac OS *8 – – – OK *12
Mac OS X *9 – – – OK *14
*1 Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
*2 Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
*3
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
*4 Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
*5 Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
*6
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
*7 Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT
Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors.
*8 Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
*9 Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
*10
Requires Service Pack 4 or later.
*11
Requires Service Pack 6 or later.
*12 The Adobe PostScript 3 printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”.
33
Appendix
*13
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled
“Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”.
*14
The Adobe PostScript Printer Description (PPD) installer is included on the CD-
ROM labeled “Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”.
❖ PCL printer drivers

Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included on the CD-
ROM that comes with this machine. These drivers allow your computer to
communicate with this machine via a printer language.
❖ RPCS printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer us-
3 ing a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another
preset user interface is provided.
❖ Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files

Adobe PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-
ROM provided with this machine. Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the
computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD
files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
❖ PPD files
PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this machine. PPD files
allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
Note
❒ Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5e without having to install PCL6.
Reference
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference
PostScript 3 Supplement
TWAIN Driver
This section describes the file path to and system requirements of the TWAIN
driver.
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine
as a network TWAIN scanner, this driver must be installed.
❖ File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner/Post-
Script Drivers and Utilities” provided with this machine:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
34
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
Under Windows NT with RISC-based processors (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC), this driver is not supported.
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
3
• Display resolution
800 × 600 pixels, 256 colours or higher
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section explains the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is to be installed on the client computers for integration and manage-
ment of various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and exist-
ing scan files. This software allows you to use various functions for stored scan files such
as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you can view the
files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions for stored files.
For details about the software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite, see “DeskTop-
Binder Lite”, Scanner Reference.
❖ File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner/Post-
Script Drivers and Utilities” provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
• Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder.
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or
later/2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/
2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition Microsoft
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Reference
Scanner Reference 35
Appendix
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and
IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers
using IP address. We recommend that network administrators use this application.
❖ File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CD-
ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1
3 Operating system Protocol stack
Windows 95 / 98 / Me TCP/IP provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Novell Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003 TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003
IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
❖ Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check:
• printer supplies such as paper or toner;
• results of print jobs executed from the computer.
Reference
Network Guide
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
36
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client allows you to manage and print
various data such as files created with an application, images scanned with a
scanner, and existing images as one document.
❖ File path
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following
folder on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities”:
NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
❖ Operating environment of the printer driver 3

• Applicable computer
Machines which properly work with the applicable OS below. PC/AT
compatible machine.
• Applicable OS
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Note
❒ See “DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner Reference or Help of DeskTopBinder-
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
❒ DeskTopBinder includes SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. See Help of Desk-
TopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
37
Appendix
Copy Paper
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and
paper storage.
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The following table shows recommended types, sizes, and capacity of copy pa-
per loadable in each tray.
3 Important
❒ If you use damp or curled paper, a staple clogging or paper jam may occur.
❖ Tray 1 (Tandem tray)

Paper Type and Metric Version Inch Version Paper Ca-
Weight pacity *6
52.3-216 g/m2 *1 A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 1,100 sheets
(14-57.6 lb.) ×2
❖ Tray 1 (Optional A3/11" × 17" Tray Unit)

Weight pacity *6
52.3-216 g/m2 *2
A3L, 11" × 17"L 1,100 sheets
(14- 57.6 lb.)
2" × 14"L, 8 /2" × 11"KL, 12" × 18"L
*3 B4 JISL, A4KL, 81/ 1
❖ Tray 2, 3
Weight pacity *6
52.3-216 g/m2 A3L, A4KL, A5KL, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L,
*2 550 sheets
(14-57.6 lb.) B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 8" × 13"L,
71/4" × 101/2"KL, 8KL, 16KKL, 12" × 18"L
*3 11"× 15"L, 10" × 15"L, 11" × 14"L, 81/4" × 14"L,
10" × 14"L, 8" × 10"L
*4 *4
Custom size Custom size
Vertical: 139.7-330.2 mm Vertical: 5.5"-13.0"
Horizontal: 139.7-458 mm Horizontal: 5.5"-18.03"
38
Copy Paper
❖ Multi Bypass Tray (tray 7)

Weight pacity *6
52.3-216 g/m2 *2 *2 550 sheets
(14-57.6 lb.) A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, A3L, B4 JISL, A4K,
B5 JIS K, A5KL, A6L, B5 JISK, A5L, A6L,
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
51/2" × 81/2"L, 12" × 18"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 8" × 13"L,
8" × 13"L 12" × 18"L
*3 *3
B5 JIS L, B6 JIS L, A4L, B5 JISL, A5K,

3
81/2" × 11"L, 51/2" × 81/2"K, B6 JISL, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L,
81/4" × 13"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL,
101/2" × 71/4"KL, 11" × 15"L, 10" × 14"L,
11" × 15"L, 10" × 14"L, 81/4" × 14"L, 8" × 10"L
81/4" × 14"L, 8" × 10"L,
8KL, 16KKL
*4 *4

Vertical: 100-330.2 mm Vertical: 3.94"-13.0"
Translucent paper A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, A4K, B5 JISK *7
OHP transparen- A4L, 81/2" × 11"KL, A4K *7
cies *5
Postcards *5 100 × 148 mmL *7
Label paper B4 JISL, A4L, A4K

(adhesive labels)
❖ Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Optional) Tray 4, 5

Weight pacity *6
52 - 216 g/m2 *2 1,100 sheets
(14 - 57.6 lb.) A4K, A5KL, B5 JISK, 81/2" × 11"K, 51/2" × 81/2"KL
❖ Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Optional) Tray 6

Weight pacity *6
52 - 163 g/m2 *3 2,800 sheets
(14 - 43.4 lb.) A4K, A5KL, B5 JISK, 81/2" × 11"K, 51/2" × 81/2"KL
39
Appendix
❖ Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT) (optional) Tray 4, 5, 6

Weight pacity *6
52 - 216 g/m2 *2 *2 Tray 4, 6:
(14 - 57.6 lb.) A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, A3L, B4 JISL, A4K, 1,100 sheets
B5 JIS K, A5KL, B5 JISK, A5L, 11" × 17"L, Tray 5:
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K, 81/2" × 11"KL, 2,200 sheets
51/2" × 81/2"L, 12" × 18"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 8" × 13"L,
8" × 13"L 12" × 18"L
*3 *3
3 B5 JIS L, B6 JIS L, A6L, A4L, B5 JISL, A5K,
81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L, B6 JISL, A6L, 81/2" × 14"L,
51/2" × 81/2"K, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L,
81/4" × 13"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL,
101/2" × 71/4"KL, 11" × 15"L, 10" × 14"L,
11" × 15"L, 10" × 14"L, 81/4" × 14"L
81/4" × 14"L, 8KL, 16KKL
*4 *4

Vertical: 100-330.2 mm Vertical: 3.94"-13.0"
*1
The paper tray fence is fixed. If you wish to change the size of paper placed in this
tray, contact your service representative.
*2 The paper size is detected automatically.
*3
Select the paper size in System Settings. See “Paper Tray Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
*4 If you want to copy onto custom size paper, select the size using the Tray Paper Set-
ting function. See “Paper Tray Settings”, General Settings Guide.
*5 If you want to copy onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, select “OHP (Transpar-
ency)” or “Thick Paper”. See “Paper Tray Settings”, General Settings Guide.
*6
When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the upper limit
mark of the paper tray. The amount of paper that can be set is 10 mm/100 sheets ap-
proximately. See “Placing Originals”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
*7 When setting copy paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark.
The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness
and condition.
Note
❒ When loading paper in the paper trays 1-3, place the copy side face down.
❒ When loading paper in the multi bypass tray, the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
or Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), place the copy side face down.
❒ When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets,
and place them correctly, or a misfeed might occur. Set the paper direction to
L. For details, see Copy/Document Server Reference.
❒ When you use OHP transparencies, fan them for each use.
❒ If multiple sheet feeding occurs, load sheets one by one.
40
Copy Paper
❒ If you load paper of the same size in the same direction in two or more trays,
the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when the first tray in use
runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. (However, if
the Paper Type of one tray is recycled or special paper, the settings of the oth-
er trays must be the same for the Auto Tray Switching function to work.) This
saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large
number of copies. See “General Features” and “Tray Paper Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
❒ When you want to copy onto translucent paper or paper lighter than 20 lbs,
80 g/m2, set the paper as shown in the following illustration. Not doing so
might cause a paper jam, marked edges or the paper edges to be folded.
3
A Direction of paper grain

B How to set the copy paper in the paper tray
❒ If you want to set 20 lbs, 80g/m2 or heavier paper, set the paper as shown in
the following illustration.
A Direction of paper grain

B How to set the copy paper in the paper tray
❒ If you load recycled or special paper in the paper trays and use the Tray Paper Set-
tings, this function is not available with these trays unless their settings are identical.
❒ Feeding B5K, A5K, or 81/2" × 51/2"K paper into the machine might cause a
marked edge or a misfeed. In this case, change the orientation or turn over the
paper stack in the paper tray.
❒ When you use the multi bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper
direction to L.
❒ When you load label paper, set the paper direction to K. 41
Appendix
Unusable Paper
This section describes paper unusable on this machine.
R CAUTION:
• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
Important
❒ Do not use any of the following kinds of paper or a fault might occur:
3 • Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal fax paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed paper
• Envelopes
❒ Do not copy on the side of paper that has been already copied onto, or mis-
feed might occur or a fault might occur.
To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Perforated paper
• Slippery paper
• Torn paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with low stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
If you copy onto rough grain paper, the image might be blurred.
42
Copy Paper
Paper Storage
This section describes how to store paper.
• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• In high temperature/high humidity conditions or low temperature/ low hu-
midity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
3
43
INDEX
A F
A3/11" × 17" tray unit, 11 File Format Converter, 12
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Finisher SR5000, 11
Documents, vii Function keys, 13
Auto Off, 26 Function status indicators, 13
B G
Bluetooth, 12 Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-TX), 12
Booklet Finisher BK5000, 11
H
C
How to Read This Manual, 2
CAUTION labels, 6
CD-ROM, 32 I
Changing Modes, 22
Character, 27, 29 IEEE 1284 Interface Board, 12
Clear key, 13 IEEE 1394 interface board, 12
Clear Modes key, 13 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit, 12
Components, 9 Internal option, 12
Connect Copy, v Interposer, 11
Control panel, 13 Interrupt key, 13
Copier functions, iii Invoke, 30
Copy Connector, 12
Copy Data Security Unit, 12
K
Copy paper, 38, 42, 43 Key arrangement, 28
Counter key, 13
L
D
Language Selection key, 13
Data In indicator, 13 Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 11
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit, 12 Log in, 18
Delete, 29 Login, 19, 20, 21
DeskTopBinder Lite, 35 Login/Logout key, 13
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Log Off, 20, 21
Client, 37 Low-Power mode, 7
Display panel, 13, 16
Dos and Don'ts, 31 M
Duplex Priority, 7
Machine Types, 8
E Main power, 23, 25
Manuals for This Machine, i
Energy Saver, 26 Monitoring the Machine Via Computer, viii
Energy Saver key, 13 Multi bypass tray (Tray 7), 11
Energy saving, 7, 26
ENERGY STAR Program, 7 N
Enter, 27, 29
Entering Symbols, 29 Name, 11
Entering text, 27, 29 Names of the components, 9
Enter key (# key), 13 New Job key, 13
Entry screen, 28 Notice, 1
External option, 11 Number keys, 13
44
O T
Off Mode, 7 Tray Paper Settings key, 13
Operation switch, 13 Turn off, 23, 24, 25
Option, 11, 12 Turn on, 23, 24
Other Function key, 13 TWAIN Driver, 34
P U
Paper, 38 Unusable, 42
Paper size, 38 USB Host Interface, 12
Paper type, 38 User Code Authentication, 18, 19
Power, 23, 24 User Text, 30
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy, ix User Tools key, 13
Printer Drivers for This Printer, 33 Using a Printer Driver, 19, 20
Printer functions, iii Using the Control Panel, 18, 19, 20
Printer/Scanner unit, 12 Using the Scanner in a
Program key, 13 Network Environment, vi
Using Web Image Monitor, 21
R Utilizing Stored Documents, iv
Recycled Paper, 8 V
Registered Program key, 13
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM, 33
S
W
Safety During Operation, 3
Safety information, 3 WARNING labels, 6
Sample Copy key, 13 What You Can Do with This Machine, iii
Scanner functions, iii Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), 11
Security Functions, vii
Simplified Display, 17 Z
Simplified Display key, 13
Sleep mode, 7 Z-folding unit, 11
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 36
Software, 32
Software on CD-ROM, 32
Start key, 13
Status indicator, 13
Stop key, 13
Storage, 43
Symbol Entry, 29
Symbols, 2
System Reset, 22
45
46 GB GB B235-7730
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending di-
rectives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.”
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, Acrobat®, are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
• The product names of Windows NT® are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2005
Operating Instructions About This Machine
B235-7730
GB GB
General Settings Guide
1 Connecting the Machine

2 System Settings
3 Tray Paper Settings
4 Copier/Document Server Features
5 Printer Features
6 Scanner Features
7 Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions
8 Other User Tools
9 Appendix
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes:
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Notes:
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see p.253 “Specifications for the Main Unit”.)
• Type 1: 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP9000
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the ma-
chine.

ing e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual for explana-
❖ Troubleshooting
❖ Copy / Document Server Reference

❖ Network Guide
i
❖ Other manuals
• UNIX Supplement
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types. For details, refer to the ap-
pendix in About This Machine.
❒ For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ "PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display ....................................................................................................................2
Accessing User Tools (System Settings) ............................................................3
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................3
Quitting User Tools ....................................................................................................4
Displaying Counter.....................................................................................................5
About Menu Protect ...................................................................................................5
1. Connecting the Machine

Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................7
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................8
Connecting with the USB Interface ............................................................................9
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface....................................................................10
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................11
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................12
Network Settings..................................................................................................15
Settings Required to Use the Printer........................................................................15
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ...............................................................18
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function ..................................................22
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................25
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................28
Settings Required to Use Document Server ............................................................31
Using Utilities to Make Settings................................................................................33
2. System Settings
General Features..................................................................................................43
Output tray settings ..................................................................................................48
Timer Settings ......................................................................................................49
Interface Settings.................................................................................................52
Network ....................................................................................................................52
Parallel Interface ......................................................................................................56
IEEE 1394 ................................................................................................................57
IEEE 802.11b ...........................................................................................................59
Print List ...................................................................................................................60
File Transfer .........................................................................................................62
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................68
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server ................................................................77
Programming the LDAP server ................................................................................78
System Settings on Main and Sub-machines ...................................................83
General Features .....................................................................................................83
Timer Settings ..........................................................................................................84
Administrator Tools ..................................................................................................86
iii
3. Tray Paper Settings
Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................89
Changing Tray Paper Settings .................................................................................89
Quitting Tray Paper Settings ....................................................................................90
Items of Tray Paper Settings ..............................................................................91
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines..............................................111
4. Copier/Document Server Features

General Features................................................................................................113
Reproduction Ratio............................................................................................ 120
Edit ......................................................................................................................124
Stamp .................................................................................................................. 130
Background Numbering .........................................................................................130
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................130
User Stamp ............................................................................................................133
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................135
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................137
Stamp Text.............................................................................................................140
Input/Output ....................................................................................................... 142
Settings for the Document Server.................................................................... 145
Copier/Document Server Features on Main and Sub-machines ................... 146
General Features ...................................................................................................146
Reproduction Ratio ................................................................................................148
Edit .........................................................................................................................149
Stamp.....................................................................................................................151
Input/Output ...........................................................................................................155
5. Printer Features
List / Test Print ...................................................................................................157
Printing the configuration page ..............................................................................158
Interpreting the configuration page ........................................................................159
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 161
System ................................................................................................................ 162
Host Interface ..................................................................................................... 167
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................168
PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 170
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................171
6. Scanner Features
General Settings ................................................................................................173
Scan Settings ..................................................................................................... 175
Send Settings ..................................................................................................... 177
iv
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions
Address Book..................................................................................................... 179
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................182
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial .................................................................................182
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................183
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........183
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................183
Registering Names ............................................................................................ 184
Registering Names.................................................................................................184
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................185
Deleting a Registered Name ..................................................................................186
Authentication Information ............................................................................... 187
Registering a User Code........................................................................................187
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................189
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................190
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................191
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................192
Printing the Counter for All User ............................................................................193
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................194
E-mail Destination.............................................................................................. 196
Registering an E-mail Destination..........................................................................196
Changing an E-mail Destination.............................................................................198
Deleting an E-mail Destination...............................................................................199
Registering Folders ........................................................................................... 200
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................200
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................207
Using NCP to Connect ...........................................................................................212
Registering Names to a Group ......................................................................... 218
Registering a Group ...............................................................................................218
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................219
Adding a Groupe to Another Group .......................................................................221
Displaying Names Registered in a Group ..............................................................222
Removing a Name from a Group ...........................................................................223
Deleting a Group Within Another Group ................................................................224
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................226
Deleting a Goup .....................................................................................................227
Registering a Protection Code ......................................................................... 228
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................228
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................230
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication.................................................. 231
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................231
LDAP Authentication ..............................................................................................233
8. Other User Tools

Changing the Display Language ...................................................................... 235
Inquiry ................................................................................................................. 236
Counter ............................................................................................................... 238
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................238
Method of Counting................................................................................................239
v
9. Appendix
Adjustment Settings for Operators ..................................................................241
Changing the Adjustment Settings for Operators...................................................241
Setting Values ........................................................................................................242
Specifications for the Main Unit ....................................................................... 253
Document Server ...................................................................................................258
Auto Document Feeder ..........................................................................................259
Specifications for Options ................................................................................ 260
Finisher SR5000 ....................................................................................................260
Booklet Finisher BK5000........................................................................................261
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000................................................................................262
Punch Unit PU5000................................................................................................263
Z-folding Unit ZF4000 ............................................................................................264
LCIT RT5000..........................................................................................................264
LCIT RT5010..........................................................................................................265
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7) .......................................................................265
Others ....................................................................................................................266
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................267
Open SSL...............................................................................................................267
Open SSH ..............................................................................................................269
Open LDAP ............................................................................................................274
INDEX....................................................................................................... 276
vi
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Ma-
chine.

"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instruc-

[]
{}
1
Display
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
Important
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
To display the following screen, press the {User Tools} key to display the User
Tools menu, and then press [System Settings].
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how
to use the machine’s control panel.
APD018S
1. The menu tabs for various settings appear. To display the setting you want
to specify or change, press the appropriate menu tab.
2. A list of settings appears. To display the setting you want to specify or
change, select the appropriate entry in the list.
3. Press this to close the User Tools menu.
2
Accessing User Tools (System Settings)
This section is for Administrators in charge of this machine.
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
Note
❒ Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit
User Tools when you have finished.
❒ Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} or {Clear
Modes} key is pressed.
Reference
p.4 “Quitting User Tools”
Changing Default Settings

This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
Important
❒ If the Administrator Authentications specified, contact your administrator.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
APD014S
B Select the menu.

To change the System Settings, Press [System Settings].
To change the Copier/Document Server Features, Press [Copier/Document
Server Features].
To change the Printer Features, Press [Printer Features].
To change the Scanner Features, Press [Scanner Features].
To adjust color registration or gradation, press [Maintenance].
To find out who to contact for maintenance and where to order consumables,
press [Inquiry].
C Select the menu tab.
3
D Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press
[OK].
Note
❒ To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press
the {User Tools} key.
Reference
p.43 “System Settings”
p.113 “Copier/Document Server Features”
p.157 “Printer Features”
p.173 “Scanner Features”
p.235 “Other User Tools”
Quitting User Tools

This section describes how to end User Tools.
APD014S
Note
❒ You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].
4
Displaying Counter
This section describes how to display Counter.
A Press the {Counter} key.
APD016S
Note
❒ You can quit displaying Counter by pressing the {Counter} key again.
About Menu Protect

Using Menu Protect, you can limit the settings available to users other than the
administrator. In the following User Tools menus, you can specify Menu Protect
for each setting.
• Copier/Document Server Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
For details about menu protect, contact your administrator.
5
6
1. Connecting the Machine
Connect the machine to the network to configure network environment.
Connecting to the Interfaces

This section explains how to check the machine’s interface, connect the machine
according to the network environment, and specify the network settings.
1. IEEE 1394 ports (optional) 5. Wireless LAN port (optional)

Ports for connecting the IEEE 1394 inter- Port for using the wireless LAN
face cable
Note
2. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port ❒ You cannnot install two or more of the
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or options below: IEEE 1394 interface
100BASE-TX cable board, IEEE 1284 interface board,
Port for connecting the 1000BASE-T, IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN
100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T cable when
the Gigabit Ethernet (Optional) is in-
stalled
3. USB2.0 port
Port for connecting the USB2.0 interface
cable
4. IEEE 1284 port (optional)
Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 inter-
face cable
7
Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface

Connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.
1 Important
❒ If the main power switch is turned "On", turn it "Off".
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is "Off".

B Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.
C Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
D Turn the main power switch of the machine on.
AME005S
A Indicator (green)
Remains green when the machine is properly connected to the network.
B Indicator (yellow)
Turns yellow when 100 BASE-TX is operating. Turns off when 10 BASE-T
is operating.
Note
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine"
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine" Printer Reference
8
Connecting with the USB Interface

Make the connection with the USB 2.0 interface.
A Connect the USB 2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port. 1
B Connect the other end to the USB port on the host computer.
Note
❒ Purchase a USB cable separately according to a personal computer in use.
❒ The USB 2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP,
Windows Server 2003, Mac OS X v10.3.3 or higher.
• For Windows Me:
Make sure to install “USB Printing Support". If USB 2.0 is used with
Windows Me, only a speed equal to that of USB 1.1 is possible.
Printer Reference
Reference
9
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface board (optional).
1 A Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 port.
B For IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, plug the other end of the cable into
the interface connector on the host computer.
Make sure about the shape of the connector to the computer. Fasten the con-
nector securely to the computer.
Note
❒ Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board (op-
tional).
❒ Make sure the interface cable is not looped.
❒ Two interface ports are available for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface ca-
ble. Either is suitable.
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About this machine
10
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board (optional).
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is "Off". 1

If the main power switch is turned "On", turn it "Off".
B Turn off the main power switch of the host computer

C Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.
To make the connection, use the conversion connector (1) supplied with the
optional IEEE 1284 interface board.
D Plug the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host com-
puter.
Make sure about the shape of the connector to the computer. Fasten the con-
nector securely to the computer.
E Turn the main power switch of the machine "On".

F Turn on the host computer.
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.
Note
❒ Don't connect the cable in loop state.
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About this machine
11
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface

Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
1 Note
❒ Check the setting of IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.
❒ For how to set IPv4 address and subnet mask from the control panel of the
machine, see "Interface Settings."
Reference
p.52 “Network”
Setup Procedure
Setup IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following flow:
AME006S
12
Note
❒ Select [802.11 Ad-hoc] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless LAN
client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using the
infrastructure mode.
❒ For details about how to make settings of wireless LAN from the control pan- 1
el on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".
❒ For details about how to make settings of wireless LAN from other than the
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Settings".
❒ For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".
Reference
p.59 “IEEE 802.11b”
p.33 “Using Utilities to Make Settings”
Checking the Connection

Check the wireless LAN connection.
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.
❖ When using in infrastructure mode
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infra-
structure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.
13
❖ When using in ad-hoc mode / 802.11 ad-hoc mode
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is working, it is lit in orange.

2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad-hoc
mode or 802.11 ad-hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.
Print the configuration page to verify settings.
Note
❒ For more information about printing a configuration page, see "Print List".
Reference
p.158 “Printing the configuration page”
Checking the Signal

When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave sta-
tus using the control panel.
A Press [System Settings].
B Press [Interface Settings].
C Press [IEEE 802.11b].
D Press [Wireless LAN Signal].
The machine's radio wave status appears.
E After checking radio wave status, press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools} key to return to the User Tools menu.
Note
❒ To check the radio wave status, press [IEEE 802.11b] under [LAN Type] on the
[Network] screen.
14
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (Sys-
tem Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the in-
terface to be connected. 1
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consult-
ing with the systems administrator.
Settings Required to Use the Printer

This section lists the settings required for using the printer function.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using the printer function with an Eth-
ernet connection.
For details about specifying the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File Transfer".
Heading Setting Item Setting Requirements
interface settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Mandatory
interface settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
interface settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address As required
interface settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu- As required
ration
interface settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
interface settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
interface settings/Network Domain Name As required
interface settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
interface settings/Network Effective Protocol Mandatory
interface settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol As required
interface settings/Network NW Frame Type As required
interface settings/Network SMB Computer Name As required
interface settings/Network SMB Work Group As required
interface settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
interface settings/Network LAN Type Mandatory
interface settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
interface settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
interface settings/Network Host Name As required
15

interface settings/Network Machine Name As required
Note
1 ❒ IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.
❒ In [Effective Protocol], check that the protocol you want to use is set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN board is installed. If Eth-
ernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected inter-
face has priority.
Reference
p.52 “Interface Settings”
p.62 “File Transfer”
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)

This section describes necessary set items for using Printer with IEEE 1394 inter-
face cable.
interface settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Mandatory
interface settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Mandatory
Note
❒ [IEEE 1394]appears when optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒ As to [Effective Protocol], check if the protocol to use is set as [Active].
Reference
16
Network Settings
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)

This section describes necessary set items for using Printer with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
For details about specifying the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File Transfer". 1
interface settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address As required
interface settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu- As required
ration
interface settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol As required
interface settings/Network NW Frame Type As required
interface settings/Network SMB Computer Name As required
interface settings/Network SMB Work Group As required
interface settings/Network Machine Name As required
interface settings/ Communication Mode Mandatory
IEEE 802.11b
interface settings/ SSID Setting As required
IEEE 802.11b
interface settings/ Channel As required
IEEE 802.11b
interface settings/ Security Method As required
IEEE 802.11b
interface settings/ Transmission Speed As required
IEEE 802.11b
17
Note
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when optional wireless LAN inter-
face board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
1 connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail.
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with Ethernet cable.
interface settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Mandatory
File Transfer SMTP Server Mandatory
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3/IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port As required
File Transfer Program/Change/ As required
Delete E-mail Message
18
Network Settings

File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Note 1
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is in-
stalled. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the
selected interface takes precedence.
❒ When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for[Reception Proto-
col] and [POP3/IMAP4 Settings].
❒ When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], check [POP3] port number in [E-mail
Communication Port].
Reference

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with IEEE 1394 in-
terface cable.
19

1 File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Note
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒ When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for [Reception Proto-
Reference

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
20
Network Settings

IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b 1
Note
❒ When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for [Reception Proto-
Reference
21
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function

This section describes necessary set items for sending file.
1 Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for sending file with ethernet cable.
Note
Reference
22
Network Settings

This section describes necessary set items for sending file with IEEE 1394 inter-
face cable.
Note
Reference
23

This section describes necessary set items for sending file with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
1 For details about specifying the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File Transfer".
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
interface settings Channel As required
/IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
Note
face board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
24
Network Settings
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner

This section describes necessary set items for delivering data to network.
Ethernet
1
This section describes necessary set items for delivering data to network with
ethernet cable.
File Transfer Delivery Option As required
Note
stalled. When both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ If [Delivery Option] is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is set.
Reference
25

IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Note
Reference
26
Network Settings

IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
Note
face board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b)
are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
27
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner

This section describes necessary set items for using TWAIN Scanner under the
network environment.
1
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for using network TWAIN Scanner
with Ethernet cable.
Note
stalled. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
Reference
28
Network Settings

with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Note
Reference
29

with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
Note
Reference
30
Network Settings
Settings Required to Use Document Server

This section describes necessary set items for using Document Server function
under the network environment.
1
Ethernet
with Ethernet cable.
Note
stalled. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
Reference
31

with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Note
Reference

with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
interface settings/Network LAN Type As required/Mandatory
32
Network Settings

interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Mandatory
1
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b
Note
Reference
Using Utilities to Make Settings

The network settings can be specified not only on the machine’s control panel
but also using utilities such as Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min, and telnet.
Note
❒ For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Network Guide.
❒ For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.
❒ For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance", Network Guide.
Reference
"Using Web Image Monitor" Network Guide
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin" Network Guide
"Remote Maintenance by telnet" Network Guide
33
Interface Settings
Change set values of [Interface Settings] in [System Settings] of this machine by us-
ing Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
1 ❖ [Network]→[Machine IPv4 Address]→[Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor:Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet:Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network]→[Machine IPv4 Address]→[Specify]→[IPv4 Address]

❖ [Network]→[Machine IPv4 Address]→[Specify]→[Sub-net Mask]

❖ [Network]→[IPv4 Gateway Address]

❖ [Network]→[Machine IPv6 Address]→[Manual Configuration Address]

• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network]→[IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration]

❖ [Network]→[DNS Configuration]→[Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]

34
Network Settings
❖ [Network]→[DNS Configuration]→[Specify]→[DNS Server1-3]

1
❖ [Network]→[DDNS Configuration]
❖ [Network]→[Domain Name]→[Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]

❖ [Network]→[Domain Name]→[Specify] →[Domain Name]

❖ [Network]→[WINS Configuration]→[WINS Server]

❖ [Network]→[WINS Configuration]→[Scope ID]

❖ [Network]→[Effective Protocol]→[IPv4]
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the TCP/IP settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
IPX/SPX.
❖ [Network]→[Effective Protocol]→[IPv6]
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the TCP/IP settings if
IPX/SPX.
35
❖ [Network]→[Effective Protocol]→[NetWare]
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the IPX/SPX settings if
1 TCP/IP.
❖ [Network]→[Effective Protocol]→[Net BEUI]

❖ [Network]→[Effective Protocol]→[AppleTalk]
❖ [Network]→[NCP Delivery Protocol]

• telnet:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network]→[NW Frame Type]→[Auto Select]

❖ [Network]→[NW Frame Type]→[Ethernet II]

❖ [Network]→[NW Frame Type]→[Ethernet 802.2]

❖ [Network]→[NW Frame Type]→[Ethernet 802.3]

36
Network Settings
❖ [Network]→[NW Frame Type]→[Ethernet SNAP]

1
❖ [Network]→[SMB Computer Name]
❖ [Network]→[SMB Work Group]

❖ [Network]→[Ethernet Speed]
• Web Image Monitor:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network]→[LAN Type]→[Ethernet]
❖ [Network]→[LAN Type]→[IEEE 802.11b]

❖ [Network]→[Permit SNMPv3 Communication]

❖ [Network]→[Permit SSL/TLS Communication]

37
❖ [Network]→[Host Name]
1
❖ [Network]→[Machine Name]
❖ [IEEE 1394]→[IPv4 Address]→[Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]

❖ [IEEE 1394]→[IPv4 Address]→[Specify]→[Machine IPv4 Address]

❖ [IEEE 1394]→[IPv4 Address]→[Specify]→[Sub-net Mask]

❖ [IEEE 1394]→[DDNS Configuration]

❖ [IEEE 1394]→[IPv4 over 1394]

❖ [IEEE 1394]→[WINS Configuration]→[WINS Server]

38
Network Settings
❖ [IEEE 1394]→[WINS Configuration]→[Scope ID]

1
❖ [IEEE 1394]→[Host Name]
❖ [IEEE 1394]→[Domain Name]

❖ [IEEE 802.11b]→[Communication Mode]

❖ [IEEE 802.11b]→[SSID Setting]

❖ [IEEE 802.11b]→[Channel]
❖ [IEEE 802.11b]→[Security Method]

❖ [IEEE 802.11b]→[Transmission Speed]

39
❖ [File Transfer]→[Delivery Option]

1
❖ [File Transfer]→[SMTP Server]→[Server Name]
❖ [File Transfer]→[SMTP Server]→[Port No.]

❖ [File Transfer]→[SMTP Authentication]

❖ [File Transfer]→[POP before SMTP]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Reception Protocol]

❖ [File Transfer]→[POP3/IMAP4 Settings]→[Server Name]

❖ [File Transfer]→[POP3/IMAP4 Settings]→[Encryption]

40
Network Settings
❖ [File Transfer]→[Administrator's E-mail Address]

1
❖ [File Transfer]→[E-mail Communication Port]
❖ [File Transfer]→[E-mail Reception Interval]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Max. Reception E-mail Size]

❖ [File Transfer]→[E-mail Storage in Server]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[SMB User Name]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[SMB Password]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[FTP User Name]

41
❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[FTP Password]

1
❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[NCP User Name]
❖ [File Transfer]→[Default User Name/Password (Send)]→[NCP Password]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message]→[Program/Change]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message]→[Delete]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Scanner Resend Interval Time]

❖ [File Transfer]→[Number of Scanner Resends]

42
2. System Settings
This chapter describes various items of [System Settings] available in this ma-
chine.
General Features
This section describes various items of [General Features] under [System Settings].
Default settings are shown in bold type.
For the procedure of entering the [System Settings], see "Accessing User tools
(System Settings)".
❖ Program/Change/Delete User Text

You can register character strings you use frequently when specifying set-
tings, such as “.com" and “Regards".
You can register up to 40 items.
• Program/Change
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete User Text].
D Press [Program/Change]
E Select the user text you want to change.
To program new user text, press [Not Programmed].
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
• Delete
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete User Text].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the user text you want to delete.
F Press [Clear].
G Press [Exit].
❖ Panel Key Sound

The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
• Low
• Medium
• High
• Off
43
System Settings
❖ Warm–up Beeper (copier/Document Server)

You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy af-
ter leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.
• On
• Off
❖ Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)

2 The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).
• Up
• Down
❖ Function Priority
You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation
switch is turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.
• Copier
• Document Server
• Printer
• Scanner
❖ Print Priority
Print Priority is given to the mode selected.
• Display Mode
• Copier/Document Server
• Printer
• Interleave
• Job Order
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a
maximum of five sheets.
❖ Function Reset Timer

You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function.
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from
other functions.
The default time is three seconds.
• Set Time
• Immediate
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (3–30 seconds, in 1 second incre-
ments) using the number keys.
44
General Features
❖ Interleave Print
You can set the timing for functions to switch when [Print Priority] has been set
to [Interleave].
Default: 10 sheets
Depending on printing time, set values may change.
The timing for functions can be set from 1 to 20 sheets.
❖ Status Indicator
You can specify whether the status indicator shows the machine status or not. 2
• On
• Off
❖ Screen Color Setting

You can select the screen color among from five types.
• Blue Type
• Blue & Gray Type
• Gray Type
• Green Type
• Red Type
❖ Output: Copier (copier)

You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
1. Finisher Shift Tray 7. Tray 2

2. Finisher Upper Tray 8. Tray 1
3. Finisher Booklet Tray 9. Tray 6
4. Interposer Lower Tray 10. Tray 5
5. Interposer Upper Tray 11. Tray 4
6. Tray 3 12. Tray 7
45
System Settings
❖ Output: Document Server (Document Server)

• Finisher AFE
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
• Booklet Processor
2 • Finisher Booklet Tray
❖ Output: Printer (printer)

The output trays set on the printer driver have priority over the output tray
specified below.
• Finisher AFE
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
• Booklet Processor
• Finisher Booklet Tray
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier)

You can specify the tray to supply paper for output.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray 7
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Printer (printer)

You can specify the tray to supply paper for output.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray 7
46
General Features
❖ System Status/Job List Display Time

You can specify how long to display the System Status and Job List display
for.
• On
• Off
By selecting [On], you can specify a display time between 10 and 999 seconds.
The timing is set to “15 second(s)” by default.
❖ Time Interval between Printing Jobs

2
You can set the length of interval between the end of a job and the start of a
new job.
If you select “Set Time”, enter the time, 0 - 999 seconds (in 1 second incre-
ments), using the number keys. Default value is 3 seconds.
• Set Time
• Do not set
❖ ADF Original Table Elevation

You can set the timing for elevating the ADF original table.
• When original is set
• When [Start] is pressed
❖ ADF Feed Speed

When you use thick paper, you can slow down the printing speed to avoid
fusing the image by selecting [slow].
• Normal
• Slow
❖ Optimum for Thick Paper

You can set the optimum for thick paper to On or Off.
• On
• Off
❖ Key Repeat
You can enable or disable repetition of an operation if a key on the screen or
control panel is pressed continuously.
• Off
• Normal
• Repeat Time: Medium
• Repeat Time: Long
47
System Settings
❖ Z-fold position
Set the folding-back position in units of 1 mm when you specify Z-folding.
The machine is shipped from the factory with this value set to 2 mm (metric
version) or 0.1 inch (inch version).
The setting range of the folding position for each paper size is given below:
• Metric version
• A3: 2 - 25 mm
2 • B4 JIS: 2 - 40 mm
• A4: 2 - 10 mm
• 11 × 17: 2 - 20 mm
• 81/2 × 14: 2-35 mm
• Inch version
• A3: 0.1 - 1.0 inch
• B4 JIS: 0.1 - 1.6 inch
• A4: 0.1 - 0.4 inch
• 11 × 17: 0.1 - 0.8 inch
• 81/2 × 14: 0.1 - 1.4 inch
Note
❒ If the Panel Key Sound setting is [Off], the beeper does not sound, whatever
the Warm Up Notice setting.
❒ The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if Interleave is set for Print Prior-
ity.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools (System Settings)”
"Function Compatibility", Copy/Document Server Reference
Output tray settings

Important
❒ You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even if a stapling job is specified
by a different function.
❒ When the 3000-sheet finisher or booklet finisher are installed and stapling or
shift sorting are specified for a job, the job will be delivered to the finisher
shift tray regardless of the output tray specified.
❒ Paper that is fed from the bypass tray cannot be delivered to finisher trays.
48
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
This section describes various items of [Timer Settings] under [System Settings].
❖ Auto Off Timer

After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine
automatically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called
"Auto Off". The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as 2
"Off mode", or "Sleep mode". For the Auto Off Timer, specify the time to
elapse before Auto Off.
The timing is set to "60 minute(s)" by default.
The time can be set from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Auto Off may not work when error messages appear.
❖ Energy Saver Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to lower-power
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
❖ Panel Off Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 10 seconds.
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes, using the number
keys.
❖ System Auto Reset Timer

The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the func-
tion set in Function Priority when no operations are in progress, or when an
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.
• On
• Off
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys
The timing is set to "60 second(s)" by default.
❖ Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (copier/Document Server)

Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server modes reset.
• On
• Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
49
System Settings
❖ Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)

Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.
• On
• Off
❖ Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)

2 Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.
• On
• Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
❖ Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
To change between year, month, and day, press [←] and [→].
❖ Set Time
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Enter the time using the 24–hour format (in 1 second increments).
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press [←] and [→].
❖ Auto Logout Timer

You can specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user
does not operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.
• On
• Off
When [On] is selected, the time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one sec-
ond increments, using the number keys.
❖ Weekly Timer Code

Set an eight-digit code to turn the main power on and off at the time set in
“Weekly Timer”.
• Off
• On
If “On” is selected, enter the Weekly Timer Code with number keys. Not do-
ing so may result in the machine being disabled, even if the power is turned
on.
50
Timer Settings
❖ Weekly Timer: Monday-Sunday

Set the time to turn on/off the power for each day of the week.
• Power On Time
• Power Off Time
Enter the Power On Time and the Power Off Time using the 24-hour system.
Enter the "hour" and "minute" using the number keys.
51
System Settings
Interface Settings
This section describes various items of [Interface Settings] under [System Settings].
Network
2 This section describes various items of [Network] under [Interface Settings].
❖ Machine IPv4 Address

Before using this machine in the network environment, you must configure
the IP address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the [Machine IPv4 Address] and [Sub-net Mask]
as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
If you install the optional IEEE 1394 interface board and use the IEEE 1394 in-
terface, you must set the address of the domain, different from the [IPv4 Ad-
dress] of [IEEE 1394]. If you intend to set the address for the same domain, set
a different value for the [Sub-net Mask].
When you select [Specify], be sure not to set the same [Machine IPv4 Address] as
that of another machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you use the interface for Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) at the same
time, settings must be made carefully.
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
• Specify
• Machine IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
❖ IPv4 Gateway Address

A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.
Configure the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gate-
way.
• IPv4 Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
❖ Machine IPv6 Address

You can specify the machine’s IPv6 network address.
• Link-local Address
The machine’s specified link-local address appears.
• manual Configuration Address
The machine’s manually configuration address appears.
• Stateless Address: 1-5
The specified stateless address appears.
❖ IPv6 Gateway Address

The machine’s IPv6 gateway address appears.
52
Interface Settings
❖ IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration

You can set “IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration” to “Active” or “Inactive”.
• Active
• Inactive
❖ DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
When you select [Specify], enter the [DNS Server] IP address as “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"(“x"
indicates a number).
2
• Specify
• DNS Server 1: 000.000.000.000
• DNS Server 2: 000.000.000.000
• DNS Server 3: 000.000.000.000
❖ DDNS Configuration
You can specify the DDNS settings.
• Active
• Inactive
❖ Domain Name
You can specify the domain name.
• Specify
❖ WINS Configuration
You can specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, enter the [WINS Server] IP address as “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"(“x"
indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the [Scope ID].
Enter a [Scope ID] using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• On
• Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Scope ID
• Off
❖ Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
• IPv4: Active / Inactive
• IPv6: Active / Inactive
• NetWare: Active / Inactive
• NetBEUI: Active / Inactive
• AppleTalk: Active / Inactive 53
System Settings
❖ NCP Delivery Protocol

Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
• IPX Priority
• TCP/IP Priority
• IPX Only
• TCP/IP Only
2 ❖ NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
• Auto Select
• Ethernet II
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
❖ SMB Computer Name

Specify the SMB computer name.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 alphanumerical characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Setting a computer name starting with RNP and rnp is inhibited.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
❖ SMB Work Group

Specify the SMB work group.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 alphanumerical characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
❖ Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should
usually be selected.
• Auto Select
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
54
Interface Settings
❖ LAN Type
When you have installed the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select inter-
face, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or Ethernet.
• Ethernet
• IEEE 802.11b
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the ma-
chine, the selected interface takes precedence. 2
❖ Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping command using given IP address.
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the
ping command.
• Check TCP/IP of the printer is active.
• Check that the machine with assigned IP address is connected to the net-
work.
• There is a possibility that same IP address is used for the specified equip-
ment.
❖ Permit SNMPv3 Communication

Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.
• Encryption Only
• Encryption/Clear Text
If you set to [Encryption Only], you need to set password for the machine.
❖ Permit SSL/TLS Communication

Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
• Ciphertext Only
• Ciphertext Priority
• Ciphertext/Clear Text
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the server authentification for
the machine.
❖ Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
❖ Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
Enter the machine name using up to 31 alphanumerical characters.
55
System Settings
Parallel Interface
This section describes various items of [Parallel Interface] under [Interface Settings].
[Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1284
interface board (optional).
❖ Parallel Timing
2 Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.
• ACK outside
• ACK inside
• STB down
❖ Parallel Communication Speed

Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.
• High Speed
• Standard
❖ Selection Signal Status

Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.
• High
• Low
❖ Input Prime
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon receipt.
• Active
• Inactive
❖ Bidirectional Communication
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a
parallel interface.
• On
• Off
When set to [Off], bidirectional communication function will be disabled. Al-
so, printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect function.
❖ Signal Control
Sets procedure to error during printing.
• Job Acceptance Priority
• Printer Priority
56
Interface Settings
IEEE 1394
This section describes various items of [IEEE 1394] under [Interface Settings].
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1394 inter-
face board (optional).
❖ IPv4 Address
When you connect the machine to a network using the IEEE 1394 interface, 2
you must configure the IP address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the [Machine IPv4 Address] and [Sub-net Mask]
as “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”(“x” indicates a number).
When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the Eth-
ernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same do-
main, set different values for the [Sub-net Mask].
If you use the interface for Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) at the same
time, settings must be made carefully.
• Specify
• Machine IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
❖ DDNS Configuration
You can specify the DDNS settings.
• Active
• Inactive
❖ Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
❖ Domain Name
Make settings for the domain name.
• Specify
Enter the domain name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
57
System Settings
❖ WINS Configuration
You can specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, specify the [WINS Server] IP address as “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
(“xxx" indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the [Scope ID].
Enter [Scope ID] using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• On
2 • Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Scope ID
• Off
❖ IPv4 over 1394

When you use the IP over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to connect
the machine to the network, or you print from computer with the IP over 1394
driver, you must specify [Active] for [IP over 1394].
• Active
• Inactive
Printing with IP over 1394 is possible under Windows Me/XP and Windows
Server 2003.
❖ SCSI print (SBP-2)

When you print using the SCSI print client function supported by Windows
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, you must set [SCSI print (SBP-2)].
• Active
• Inactive
❖ Bidirectional SCSI print

Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for status requests when using the
IEEE 1394 interface.
• On
• Off
If this is set to [Off] bidirectional communication will not work.
58
Interface Settings
IEEE 802.11b
This section describes various items of [IEEE 802.11b] under [Interface Settings].
[IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN
interface board (optional).
Implement respective settings simultaneously.
❖ Communication Mode 2
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
• 802.11 Ad-hoc
• Ad-hoc
• Infrastructure
❖ SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11
ad-hoc mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
If blank is specified in 802.11b ad-hoc mode or ad-hoc mode, “ASSID" ap-
pears.
❖ Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b ad-hoc mode or ad-hoc mode.
The following channels are available:
• Metric version: 1-14
• Inch version: 1-11
❖ Security Method
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
If set to [WEP], always enter WEP key. If set to [WPA], set encryption method
and authentication method.
You can specify “WPA”, if you set [Communication Mode] to [Infrastructure].
• Off
• WEP
• WPA
• WPA Encryption Method
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP(AES)".
• WPA Authent. Method
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA802.1X)". If you have selected “WPA-
PSK”, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8- 63 characters in ASCII code.
❖ Wireless LAN Signal

Shows the radio wave conditions of the access point connected in infrastruc-
ture mode.
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].
59
System Settings
❖ Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
• Auto Select
• 11Mbps Fixed
• 5.5Mbps Fixed
• 2Mbps Fixed
2 • 1Mbps Fixed
❖ Restore Factory Defaults

You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
• No
• Yes
Print List
You can check items related to the network in use.
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network infor-
mation.

B Press [Interface Settings].
C Press [Print List].
60
Interface Settings
D Press the {Start} key.

The configuration page is printed.
E Press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
❒ You can also exit by pressing [Exit] on the User Tools main menu. 2
61
System Settings
File Transfer
This section describes various items of [File Transfer] under [System Settings].
❖ Delivery Option
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents to ScanRouter V2
delivery server.
2 • On
• Main Delivery Server IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
• Sub Delivery Server IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
• Off
Set this option when specifying whether or not to use ScanRouter V2. If you
do, you will have to re-register I/O devices in ScanRouter V2.
❖ Capture Server IP Address

Specify the capture server IP address.
This setting appears when the media link board is installed, and that the cap-
ture function is being used by the ScanRouter V2.
❖ SMTP Server
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.
If DNS is not in use, enter the SMTP server IP address.
• Server Name
• Port No.
Enter the [Server Name] using up to 127 alphanumeric characters. Spaces can-
not be used.
Enter [Port No.] between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then press
the {#} key.
The Port No. is set to 25 by default.
62
File Transfer
❖ SMTP Authentication
You can configure SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DI-
GEST-MD5).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server secu-
rity level by authentication that requires entering the user name and password.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],
and then specify [User Name], [Password], and [Encryption].
• SMTP Authentication
• On
2
User Name
Enter [User Name] using up to 191 alphanumeric characters. Spaces can-
not be used. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be spec-
ified. Add "@" after the user name, as in "user name@realm".
E-mail Address
Password
Enter [Password] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot
be used.
Encryption: Auto / On / Off
[Encryption]-[Auto]: If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[On]: If the authentication method is CRAMMD5 or DI-
GEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Off]: If the authentication method is PLAIN, or LOGIN.
• Off
❖ POP before SMTP

You can configure POP authentication (POP before SMTP).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the
time specified for [Wait Time after Authent.] has elapsed.
If you select [On], enter [Server Name] in [POP3/IMAP4 Setting]. Also, check the
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].
• On
• Wait Time after Authent.
Using the number keys, you can set [Wait Time after Authent.] from zero to
10,000 milliseconds, in increments of one millisecond. The timing is set
to 300msec by default.
• User Name
Enter [User Name] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces can-
not be used.
• E-mail Address
• Password
Enter [Password] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot
be used.
• Off 63
System Settings
❖ Reception Protocol
Specify Reception Protocol for the function "Auto E-mail Notification". For
details about the function "Auto E-mail Notification", see the Web Image-
Monitor Help.
• POP3
• IMAP4
• SMTP
2
❖ POP3/IMAP4 Settings
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for sending or receiving E-mail.The
specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].
• Server Name
If DNS is in use, enter the host name. If DNS is not in use, enter the
POP3/IMAP4 or server IP address. Enter POP3/IMAP4 [Server Name] us-
ing up to 127 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot be used.
• Encryption
• Auto
Password encryption is automatically set according to the POP/IMAP
server settings.
• On
Encrypt password.
• Off
Do not encrypt password.
❖ Administrator's E-mail Address

On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified this appears as
the sender's address.
If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP Authentica-
tion], make sure to specify this setting.
Enter within up to 128 alphanumerical characters.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify
the sender.
❖ E-mail Communication Port

Specify the port numbers for sending or receiving E-mail. The specified
POP3port number is used for [POP before SMTP].
• POP3: 110
• IMAP4: 143
• SMTP: 25
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the [#] key.
64
File Transfer
❖ E-mail Reception Interval

Specify, in minutes, the time interval for the function "Auto E-mail Notifica-
tion" via POP3 or IMAP4 server. For details about the function "Auto E-mail
Notification", see the Web ImageMonitor Help.
• On: 15 minute(s)
• Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 2 to 1440 in increments
of one minute, using the number keys. 2
❖ Max. Reception E-mail Size
Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for the function "Auto E-mailNo-
tification". For details about the function "Auto E-mail Notification", see the
Web ImageMonitor Help.
• 2MB
Using the number keys, enter a size from one to 50 MB in increments of one
megabyte.
❖ E-mail Storage in Server

Specify whether or not to store received e-mails of the function "Auto E-mail-
Notification" on the POP3 or IMAP4 server.For details about the function
"Auto E-mail Notification", see the Web ImageMonitor Help.
• Off
• All
• Errors Only
❖ Default User Name/Password (Send)

You can specify the user name and password required when sending scan file
directly to a shared folder on a computer running Windows, to an FTP server,
or to a NetWare server.
• SMB User Name
• SMB Password
• FTP User Name
• FTP Password
• NCP User Name
• NCP Password
Enter in up to 128 alphanumerical characters.
65
System Settings
❖ Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message

You can program, change, or delete the e-mail message used when sending
scan file as an attachment.
• Program/Change
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message].
2 D Press [Program/Change].
E Press [Not Programmed].
F Press [Change].
G Enter a name, and the press [OK].
Enter the name using up to 20 alphanumerical characters.
H Press [Edit].
To start a new line, press [OK] to return to the e-mail message screen,
and then press [T] in "Select Line to Edit:".
I Enter the text, and then press [OK].
Enter up to five lines of text. Each line can consist of up to 80 alphanu-
meric characters.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
• Delete
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the e-mail message to delete.
The confirmation message about deleting appears.
F Press [Yes].
❖ Auto Specify Sender Name

Set whether or not to specify the name of the sender when sending e-mail.
• On
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address will appear in the “From:"
box. If you do not specify the sender’s address, the administrator’s e-mail
address will appear in the “From:" box.
• Off
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address will appear in the “From:" box,
but you cannot send e-mail without specifying the sender’s e-mail address.
66
File Transfer
❖ Scanner Resend Interval Time

Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending scan file, if they can-
not be sent to the delivery server or mail server.
The interval time can be set from 60 to 900 seconds in one second increments,
using the number keys.
This setting is for the scanner function.
❖ Number of Scanner Resends 2

Sets a maximum number of times scan file is resent to the delivery server or
mail server.
• On: 3 time(s)
• Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 1 to 99 using the num-
ber keys. This setting is for the scanner function.
67
System Settings
Administrator Tools
This section describes various items of [Administrator Tools] under [System Set-
tings].
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,
contact the administrator.
2 We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Ad-
ministrator Tools settings.
❖ Address Book Management

You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.
For details, see “Address Book”.
• Program/Change
You can register and change names as well as user codes.
• Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-
lection.
• Auth. Info
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP
server.
• Protection
You can register a protection code.
• E-mail
You can register an e-mail address.
• Folder
You can register the protocol, SMB, FTP, NCP, path.
• Add to Group
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a name from the Address Book.
You can register up to 2,000 names.
You can register up to 500 user codes.
You can also register and manage names in the Address Book using Web Im-
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
68
Administrator Tools
❖ Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group

Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.
• Program/Change
You can register and change groups.
• Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-
lection. 2
• Programmed User/Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
• Protection
You can register a protection code.
• Add to Group
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a group from the Address Book.
You can register up to 100 groups.
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web Im-
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
❖ Address Book: Change Order

Changes the order of registered name.
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot move
items to another page.
For example, you cannot move an item from “PLANNING” ([OPQ]) to “DAI-
LY” ([CD]).
B Press [Administrator Tools].
C Press [Address Book: Change Order].
69
System Settings
D Press the name key to be move.
You can select a name using the number keys.

E Press the name key in the place you want to move to.
The selected user key is moved to the selected position, and the user key
currently at the selected position is moved forward or backward.
If you move the selected user key forward, the user key currently at the se-
lected position is moved backward.
If you move the selected user key backward, the user key currently at the
selected position is moved forward.
You can also select a name using the number keys.
70
Administrator Tools
❖ Print Address Book: Destination List

You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.
• Print in Title 1 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order.
Prints the Address Book in Title 2 order.
Prints the Address Book in Title 3 order. 2
• Print Group Dial List
Prints the group Address Book.
C Press [Print Address Book: Destination List].
D Select the print format.
E To print the list on two-sided pages, select [Print on 2 Sides].
F Press the {Start} key.
The list prints out.
❖ Address Book: Edit Title

You can edit the title to easily find a user.
C Press [Address Book: Edit Title].
D Press the title key you want to change.
71
System Settings
E Enter the new name, and then press [OK].

F Press [OK].
❖ Address Book: Switch Title

Specifies the title to select a name.
• Title 1
• Title 2
2 • Title 3
❖ Back Up / Restore Address Book

You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage or restore the
backup copy from the external storage.
• Back Up
You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage.
• Restore
You can restore the backup copy of the address book from external storage.
• Format
You can format the external storage.
• Obtain Media Info
The free space and occupied space of the external storage are displayed.
❖ Display / Print Counter

Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
• Display/Print Counter
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, and Copier, Printer,
A3/DLT, Duplex, Send/TX Total Color, Send/TX Total Black & White,
Scanner Send Color, Scanner Send Black & White, GPC, GPC Printer).
• Print Counter List
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
❖ Display / Clear / Print Counter per User

Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
Press [UPrevious] and [TNext] to show all the numbers of prints.
The number of prints may differ from the counter value shown in Display /
Print Counter.
• Print Counter
• Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter values for all the users.
• Clear Counter for All Users
Sets the counter value for all the users.
• Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter values for each user.
• Clear Counter per User
Sets the counter value for each user.
72
Administrator Tools
• Scanner Counter
• Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter values for all the users.
• Clear Counter for All Users
Sets the counter value for all the users.
• Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter values for each user.
• Clear Counter per User 2
Sets the counter value for each user.
❖ User Authentication Management

• User Code Auth.
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions and
supervise their use.
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints cor-
responding to the codes entered using the printer driver.
If User Code Authentication has been specified, Auto color Selection can-
not be used.
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your ad-
ministrator.
• Functions to Restrict
• Copier
• Printer
• Document Server
• Printer: PC Control
• Scanner
• Printer Job Authentication
• Entire
• Simple (Limitation)
• Simple (All)
• Basic Auth.
• Windows Auth.
• LDAP Auth.
• Integration Svr. Auth.
• Off
❖ Enhanced Authentication Management

For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖ Administrator Authentication Management

73
System Settings
❖ Program/Change Administrator
❖ Key Counter Management

You can specify that functions that you want to manage with the key counter.
• Copier
• Document Server
2 • Printer
• Scanner
❖ Extended Security
You can specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For de-
tails about the extended security functions, consult your administrator.
❖ Auto Delete File in Document Server

You can specify whether documents stored in the Document Server will or
will not be deleted after a specified period of time.
• On: 3 day(s)
• Off
If you select [On], documents stored subsequently are deleted after the speci-
fied period.
If you select [Off], documents are not automatically deleted.
If you select [On], enter a number of days from 1 to 180 (in 1 day increments).
The default is 3 days, this means documents are deleted 3 days (72 hours) af-
ter they are stored.
❖ Delete All Files in Document Server

You can delete files stored in the Document Server, including files stored for
Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print under the printer
function.
• No
• Yes
Even if a password is always set, all documents are deleted.
A confirmation message appears. To delete all documents, select [Yes].
74
Administrator Tools
❖ Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server

Program the LDAP server to find up e-mail destinations in the LDAP server
Address Book directly. This function is possible when sending scan files by e-
mail using the scanner.
• Name
• Server Name
• Search Base
• Port Number 2
• Use Secure Connection (SSL)
• Authentication
• Search Conditions
• Search Options
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.
• Server Name
• Search Base
• Port Number
• Search Conditions
• Authentication method selection
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under LDAP server.
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Ver 2.0 does not support
High Security authentication.
• Program/Change
B Press [Administrator Tools], and then press [TNext] twice.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
D Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
E Set each item as necessary.

F Press [OK] after setting each item.
G Press [Exit] twice.
H Press the {User Tools} key.
75
System Settings
• Delete
C Press [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.
2 F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
❖ LDAP Search
You can specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.
• Off
• On
If you select [Off], [Search LDAP] will not appear on the searching display.
❖ AOF (Always On)

Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
• On
• Off
❖ Firmware Version
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.
❖ Network Security Level

❖ Transfer Log Setting

Reference
p.179 “Address Book”
p.192 “Printing the Counter for Each User”
p.238 “Counter”
76
Administrator Tools
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To program / change the LDAP server
A Press [System Settings]. 2

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
E Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
F Set each item as necessary.

G Press [OK] after setting each item.
For details about LDAP server, see "Programming the LDAP server".
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {User Tools} key.
Reference
p.78 “Programming the LDAP server”
To delete the programmed LDAP server

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Press [Delete] is selected.
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
77
System Settings
Programming the LDAP server

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To enter an identification name
2 A Press [Change] under “Name”.

Register a name for the LDAP server that will appear on the server selection
screen of the LDAP search operation.
B Enter the server’s identification name.

C Press [OK].
To enter a server name
A Press [Change] under “Server Name”.

Register the LDAP server’s host name or IPv4 address.
B Enter the LDAP server name.

C Press [OK].
To enter the search base
A Press [Change] under “Search Base”.

Select a route folder to start the search from e-mail addresses registered in the
selected folder are search targets.
B Enter the search base.

For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, en-
ter “dc=sales department, o=ABC”. (In this example, the description is for an
active directory. “dc” is for the organization unit, and “o” is for the company.)
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environ-
ment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check you server environment and enter any required specifications.
C Press [OK].
78
Administrator Tools
To enter a port number
A Press [Change] under ““Port No.”.

Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a
port that is compliant with your environment.
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to “636”. 2
To start SSL communication
A Press [On].
Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "689".
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your net-
work administrator.
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to “636”.
To set authentication
A Press [TNext].
B Press [On] or [High Security] under “Authentication”.
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account
for authentication.
Authentication settings must comply with your server’s authentication set-
tings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.
[High Security] is available only with LDAP Version 3.0.
When [High Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted be-
fore it is sent to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent with-
out encryption.
79
System Settings
To enter the user name and password
A Press [Change] under “Name”.

When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator
account name and password when using authentication for each individual
or each search.
2
B Enter the user name, and then press [OK].
Procedures for the user name setting differ depending on server environ-
ment. Check your server environment before making the setting.
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name,
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name
C Press [Change] under “Password”.

D Enter the password, and then press [OK].
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to
access the LDAP server.
You can set the user name and password in this machine's Address Book to
allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administra-
tor Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.
To test the connection
A Press [Connection Test].
Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check
authentication works according to the authentication settings.
A connection test is carried out.
B Press [OK].
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.
80
Administrator Tools
To set search conditions
A Press [TNext] twice.

B Press [Change] for items you want to use as search conditions from the fol-
lowing: [Name], [E-mail Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name].
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered at-
tribute, the function searches the LDAP server’s Address Book. 2
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.
To set search options
A Press [TNext] three times.

B Press [Change] under "Attribute".
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared key-
words such as Name, E-mail Address, Company Name, and Department
Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your LDAP server,
and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the search. For ex-
ample, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter “employ-
eeNo.” in the Attribute field, and “Employee No.” in the key display field.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.
D Press [Change] under "Key Display".
81
System Settings
E Enter the key display, and then press [OK].

The registered “key display” appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.
• Without key display registration
• With key display registration
The key does not appear on the search screen unless both “Attribute” and
“Key Display” are registered. Make sure you register both to use the optional
search.
Reference
p.233 “LDAP Authentication”
82
System Settings on Main and Sub-machines

This section explains the System Settings on the two machines during Connect
Copy.
While combined copying is under way, the {User Tools} keys of the sub-ma-
chines remain disabled. If it is desired to change the defaults, press [Combined
Copying] that appears in reverse video on the control screen of the main machine,
and then, clear the combined copying before making changes. 2
General Features
How the defaults in the General Features of copying of the main and sub-ma-
chines are used in combined copying will be explained.
❖ Program/Change/Delete User Text

• The main and sub-machines follow their respective set values.
❖ Panel Key Sound

❖ Warm Up Notice (copier/Document Server)

❖ Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)

• The set values of the main and sub-machines do not affect the combined
copying.
• The copy counter is always displayed as Up (count up).
❖ Function Priority
copying.
• When the Auto Reset time of the main machine has lapsed, Connect Copy
will be cancelled. After that, the machine switches back to the mode select-
ed in Function Priority upon reaching the System Reset time.
❖ Print Priority
copying.
• When the Auto Reset time of the main machine has lapsed, Connect Copy
will be cancelled. After that, the machine switches back to the mode select-
ed in Function Priority upon reaching the System Reset time.
❖ Function Reset Timer

copying.
83
System Settings
❖ Interleave Print
copying.
❖ Output: Copier
❖ Output: Document Server

2 • The main and sub-machines follow their respective set values.
❖ Output: Printer
❖ ADF Original Table Elevation

• The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The set values of the
sub-machines do not affect the combined copying.
❖ System Status/Job List Display Time

The main and sub-machines follow their respective set values.
❖ Key Repeat
❖ Z-fold Position
• Make the same settings on both machines.
Timer Settings
How the defaults in the Timer Settings of copying of the main and sub-machines
are used in combined copying will be explained.
❖ Auto Off Timer

❖ Energy Saver Timer

copying.
• In Connect Copy mode, neither machine will enter Energy Saver modes
(Low Power mode, or Energy Saver mode).
84
❖ Power Off Timer

copying.
• In Connect Copy mode, neither machine will enter Energy Saver modes
(Low Power mode, or Energy Saver mode). When the preset time elapses
after the combined copying is cleared, the machines will transit to the pow-
er-saving status.
❖ System Auto Reset Timer

2
• The set values of the main machine do not affect the combined copying.
The sub-machines can be used with the interruption copying function
only.
• When the sub-machines is copying by interruption, the interruption copy-
ing is cleared as the time period set on the sub-machines elapses.
❖ Copy/Document Server Auto Reset Timer

copying.
❖ Printer Auto Reset Timer

copying.
❖ Scanner Auto Reset Timer

copying.
❖ Set Date
❖ Set Time
❖ Auto Logout Timer

copying.
❖ Weekly Timer Code

copying.
❖ Weekly Timer: Monday-Sunday

copying.
• In Connect Copy mode, Weekly timer settings on the sub-machine will be
disabled.
85
System Settings
Administrator Tools
How the defaults in the Administrator Tools of copying of the main and sub-ma-
❖ Address Book Management

2 copying.
❖ Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group

copying.
❖ Address Book: Change Order

copying.
❖ Print Address Book: Destination List

copying.
❖ Address Book: Edit Title

copying.
❖ Address Book: Select Title

copying.
❖ Back Up / Restore Address Book

copying.
❖ Display/Print Counter
copying.
❖ Display/Clear/Print Counter per User

copying.
❖ User Authentication Management

86
❖ Enhanced Authentication Management

❖ Administrator Authentication Management

❖ Program/Change Administrator 2
• The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The sub-machines
follows the settings made on the main machine, regardless of the settings
made in it.
❖ Key Counter Management

made in it.
• In combined copying, management performed using the coin rack or a pre-
set keycard can only be done by using the adding method.
❖ Extended Security
copying.
❖ Auto Delete File in Document Server

❖ Delete All Files in Document Server

❖ Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server

copying.
❖ LDAP Search
copying.
❖ AOF (Always On)

copying.
• During combined copying, neither the main machine nor the sub-ma-
chines is automatically switched off. Once the combined copying is
cleared, the power is cut off as the time period set in "Auto-Off Time Set-
ting" elapses in accordance with the setting of AOF.
87
System Settings
❖ Firmware Version
copying.
❖ Network Security Level

copying.
2 ❖ Auto Erase Memory Setting
copying.
❖ Erase All Memory

copying.
❖ Delete All Logs

❖ Transfer Log Setting

❖ Data Security for Copying

❖ Back Up Printing: Delete All Documents

copying.
❖ Back Up Printing: Settings for Compressing

copying.
❖ Settings for Back Up Printing: Initial Values for Types

copying.
❖ Settings for Back Up Printing: Initial Values for Resolution

copying.
88
3. Tray Paper Settings
This section describes various items of {Tray Paper Settings} available in this ma-
chine. If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded
in the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not
detected.
Tray Paper Settings
Changing Tray Paper Settings

This section describes how to change the settings of Tray Paper Settings.
A Press the {Tray Paper Settings} key.
APD017S
B Select the tray that you want to change the settings.
89
Tray Paper Settings
C Change settings, and then press [OK].
3
Quitting Tray Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of Tray Paper Settings.
A Press the {Tray Paper Settings} key.
APD017S
Note
❒ You can also quit Tray Paper Settings by pressing [Exit].
90
Items of Tray Paper Settings

❖ Tray 1
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 1 (LCT).
This information is used by the print function to automatically select the paper tray.
❖ The paper types

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper 3
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Prepunched Paper
❖ The paper sizes (without the LCT, A3 / 11”×17” Tray Unit TK5000)
"11×81/2K", "A4K"
Note
❒ The paper size is fixed for a paper size. It is not available to change the size.
❖ The paper sizes (utilizing the LCT, A3 / 11”×17” Tray Unit TK5000)
"11×17L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×11L", "11×81/2K", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L",
"B4 JISL"
Custom Size: 210.0 - 305.0 mm (vertically) and 210 - 439.0 mm (horizontally).
Note
❒ The paper guide of the optional LCT is fixed for a paper size. Contact
your service representative if you need to change the paper size.
91
Tray Paper Settings
❖ Copying Method in Duplex

• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy
❖ Apply Auto Paper Select

• Yes
• No
❖ Thick Paper Setting

If the LCT (A3 / 11”×17” Tray Unit TK5000) is utilized, this function is not
3 available.
• On
• Off
❖ Designation Sheet 1 - 9
You can specify and display the paper tray to set designation sheets. You can
also specify the display time and copying method for two sided copying.
• Display Time
You can select [At Mode Selected] or [Full Time].
• Copying Method in Duplex
You can select [2 Sided Copy] or [1 Sided Copy].
Copy Method in Duplex is enabled only when you select [At Mode Select-
ed] in Display Time.
❖ Front Cover
You can specify and display the paper tray to set front cover sheets. You can
• Display Time
❖ Back Cover
You can specify and display the paper tray to set back cover sheets. You can
• Display Time
92
❖ Slip Sheets
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to set slip sheets. You
can also specify the display time.
• Display Time
❖ Separation Sheets
• Display Time
3
❖ Tray 2 - 3
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the trays
This information is used by the print function to automatically select the pa-
per tray.
❖ The paper types

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• OHP (Transparency)
• Translucent Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
93
Tray Paper Settings
❖ The paper sizes

"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×15L", "11×14L", "10×15L",
"10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L", "81/2×11L", "11×"81/2K", "81/4×14L",
"8 1 / 4 ×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L", "71 / 4 ×10 1 / 2 L", "10 1 / 2 ×7 1 / 4 L",
"51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
"B4 JISL", "B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Custom Size:
• Metric version: Max. 330.2 mm (vertically) and 458.0 mm (horizontally).
• Inch version: Max. 13.00 inch (vertically) and 18.03 inch (horizontally).

3 • 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy

• Yes
• No

• On
• Off
• Display Time
❖ Front Cover
• Display Time
94
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
❖ Slip Sheets
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to set slip sheets. You 3
• Display Time
• Display Time
❖ Tray 4
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded in the tray 4.
per tray.
❖ The paper types utilizing LCIT RT5000 (A4 LCT)

If the LCIT RT5000 is utilized, the paper types are available as follows:
• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
95
Tray Paper Settings
• Index Paper
The Index Paper is available using the Index Fence.
• Tab Stock
• Tab Position Shift
• Number of Tabs
3 ❖ The paper types utilizing LCIT RT5010 (A3 LCT)
• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Index Paper
• Tab Stock
• Number of Tabs
96
❖ The paper sizes utilizing LCIT RT5000 (A4 LCT)

If the LCIT RT5000 is utilized, the paper sizes are available as follows:
"Auto Detect", "11×81/2K", "81/2×51/2K", "51/2×81/2L", "A4K", "A5K",
"A5L", "B5 JISK"
Custom Size: 139.0 - 230.0 mm (vertically) and 210.0 - 305.0 mm (horizon-
tally)

• Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L", 3
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15L", "10×14L",
"81/4×14L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "B6 JISL", "A6L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Custom Size: 100.0 - 330.2 mm (vertically) and 139.7 - 458.0 mm (hori-
zontally)
Note
❒ The paper width between 100 and 139.7 mm are available only when
the special side fence is utilized.
❒ "Auto Detect" is available for "12×18L" and "11×17L", "11×81/2K",
"51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "B5 JISK",
"A5K", "A5L".
• Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15L", "10×14L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "B6 JISL", "A6L"
Custom Size: 3.93 - 13.00 inch (vertically) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizon-
tally)
Note
❒ The paper width between 3.93 and 5.50 inch are available only when
"81/2×11L", "81/2×51/2K", "51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L",
"B4 JISL", "A4K", "B5 JISK", "A5L".

• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy

• Yes
• No
97
Tray Paper Settings

• On
• Off
• Display Time
3 You can select [2 Sided Copy] or [1 Sided Copy].
❖ Front Cover
• Display Time
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
❖ Slip Sheets
• Display Time
• Display Time
98
❖ Tray 5
You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the tray 5
per tray.

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead 3
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Label Paper
• Index Paper
• Tab Stock
• Number of Tabs
99
Tray Paper Settings

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
3 • Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Label Paper
• Index Paper
• Tab Stock
• Number of Tabs

"Auto Detect", "11×81/2L", "81/2×51/2L", "51/2×81/2K", "A4K", "A5K",
"A5L", "B5 JISK"
Custom Size: 139.0 - 230.0 mm (vertically) and 210.0 - 305.0 mm (horizon-
tally)
100

• Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K", "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
zontally)
Note 3
"51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
• Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
tally)
Note
"81/2×11L", "81/2×51/2K", "51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L",

• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy

• Yes
• No

• On
• Off
101
Tray Paper Settings
• Display Time
❖ Front Cover
3 You can specify and display the paper tray to set front cover sheets. You can
• Display Time
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
❖ Slip Sheets
• Display Time
• Display Time
❖ Tray 6
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 6
per tray.
102

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green 3
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
103
Tray Paper Settings
• Index Paper
• Tab Stock
• Number of Tabs
3 ❖ The paper sizes utilizing LCIT RT5000 (A4 LCT)
"11×81/2K", "81/2×51/2K", "51/2×81/2L", "A4K", "A5K", "A5L", "B5 JISK"
Custom Size: 139.0 - 230.0 mm (vertically) and 210.0 - 305.0 mm (horizontally)

• Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
zontally)
Note
"51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
• Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K", "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
Custom Size: 3.93 - 13.00 inch (vertically) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Note
"81/2×11L", 81/2×51/2K", 51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L",
104

• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy

• Yes
• No
also specify the display time and copying method for two sided copying. 3
• Display Time
❖ Front Cover
• Display Time
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
❖ Slip Sheets
• Display Time
105
Tray Paper Settings
• Display Time
❖ Tray 7
You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 7
per tray.
3 ❖ The paper types

• Do not Display
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
• Letterhead
• Color Paper 1
• Color Paper 2
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Index Paper
• Tab Stock
• Number of Tabs
106
❖ The paper sizes

• Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
"81/4×14L", "8×10L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5000 is installed): 100.0 - 305.0 mm (verti-
cally) and 139.7 - 458.0 mm (horizontally)
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5010 is installed): 100.0 - 330.2 mm (verti-
cally) and 139.7 - 458.0 mm (horizontally)
3
Note
"51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
• Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5000 is installed): 3.93 - 12.00 inch (vertical-
ly) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5010 is installed): 3.93 - 13.00 inch (vertical-
ly) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Note
"81/2×11L", "81/2×51/2K", "51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L",

• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy

• Yes
• No

• On
• Off
107
Tray Paper Settings
• Display Time
❖ Front Cover
3 You can specify and display the paper tray to set front cover sheets. You can
• Display Time
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
❖ Slip Sheets
• Display Time
• Display Time
❖ Interposer Upper - Lower

You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the trays.
per tray.
108
❖ The paper sizes

• Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13K",
"8×13K", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
zontally)
Note
❒ "Auto Detect" is available for "12×18L" and "11×17L", "11×81/2K", 3
"51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
• Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "11×8 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 ×14L",
"81/2×11L", "51/2×81/2L", "81/2×51/2K, "81/2×13L", "81/4×13K",
"8×13K", "101 /2 ×71 /4 K", "71 /4 ×101 /2 L", "11×15K", "10×14L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL"
tally)
Note
"81/2×11L", "81/2×51/2K", 51/2×81/2L", "8×13L", A3L",
You can specify the paper trays to set designation sheets.
❖ Front Cover
• Display Time
109
Tray Paper Settings
❖ Back Cover
• Display Time
Note
3 ❒ When paper of the same type and size is loaded in two different paper trays
and you want to specify tray for 2 Sided Copy. If one of the trays is specified
as the default in Paper Tray Priority, assign 2 Sided Copy to that tray.
❒ A mark appears next to the paper tray if [No] is selected in [Apply Auto Paper
Select].
❒ [Apply Auto Paper Select] is effective for the copier function only if [Do not Dis-
play] or [Recycled Paper] are selected. If [No] is selected, Auto Paper Select is not
valid for the tray.
110
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines

This section explains the Tray Paper Setting on the two machines during Con-
nect Copy.
and then, clear the combined copying before making changes.
How the defaults in the Tray Paper Settings of copying of the main and sub-ma-
3
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Copier (Copier/Document Server)
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Printer (Printer)

❖ Paper Type: Tray 1 (LCT)

• In combined copying, only the paper tray corresponding to the paper size,
orientation, and type that are set in common on the main and sub-ma-
chines can be used. To make the most of the combined copying function, it
is advisable that you make the same paper settings on both the main and
sub-machines.
❖ Paper Type: Tray 2 - 3

sub-machines.
❖ Paper Type: Tray 4

sub-machines.
111
Tray Paper Settings

sub-machines.

3 • In combined copying, only the paper tray corresponding to the paper size,
sub-machines.

• The Tray 7 on both of the main and sub-machines utilizes only for the cov-
er sheet and the designation sheet.
❖ Paper Type: Interposer Upper - Lower

sub-machines.
112
4. Copier/Document Server
Features
This chapter describes various items of [Copier/Document Server Features] avail-
able in this machine.
General Features
This section describes various items of [General Features] under [Copier/Document
Server Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Copier/Document Server Features], see "Access-
ing User Tools (System Settings)".
❖ Auto Image Density Priority

You can set whether Auto Image Density is “On” or “Off” when the machine
is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
• Text
• On
• Off
• Text/Photo
• On
• Off
• Photo
• On
• Off
• Pale
• On
• Off
• General Copy
• On
• Off
❖ Original Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
• Top to Top
• Top to Bottom
❖ Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode

You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
• Top to Top
• Top to Bottom
113
Copier/Document Server Features
❖ Reserve Job Mode

You can set whether to reset the mode to the initial state or return to the mode
in use before the reserved operation was started when you return to the initial
screen after reserved copying finishes.
• Reset
• Previous job
❖ Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer

You can set the time required until the display is switched to the reserved first
job display after reservation is set.
If you select “Switch”, use the numbers keys to enter the time (10-99 seconds).
The default setting is 15 seconds.
• Yes
4 • No
❖ Max. Copy Quantity

The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 9999.
The default setting is 9999 sheets.
❖ Original counter reset key

You can set whether to enable the document counter reset key.
• On
• Off
❖ Auto Tray Switching

When the paper runs out during copying, it can be automatically fed from a sub-
stitute paper feed tray, irrespective of the orientation of paper in that tray – pro-
vided it is the same size as that set in the other paper feed tray during automatic
paper selection. This function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. You can set
whether to perform the Auto Tray Switching.
• With Image Rotation
You can copy using the Auto Tray Switching function. Depending on the
function being performed rotation may not be possible.
• Without Image Rotation
You can make continuous copies provided paper of the same size and ori-
entation is loaded. The “Supply paper” message appears when paper of
the same size and orientation runs out. Copying is interrupted when this
happens.
• Off
The “Supply paper” message appears when paper runs out. Copying is in-
terrupted when this happens.
114
General Features
❖ Text
You can adjust the edges of finished image.
The outline of a character becomes soft when you select "Soft". The outline of
a character can be sharply copied when you select "Sharp".
• Copy Quality
• Soft
• Normal
• Sharp
• Custom Setting
• Image Density
• Light
• Normal
• Dark 4
❖ Text/photo
You can select which has priority, photographs or characters, when an origi-
nal contains both.
If you select “Normal”, character and photo quality is balanced in the copy.
• Copy Quality
• Photo priority
• Normal
• Text Priority
• Custom Setting
• Image Density
• Light
• Normal
• Dark
115
❖ Photo
You can adjust the quality of finished images according to the type of photo original.
“Printed photo” is set for magazine and catalog photo originals. You can
smooth photos by selecting “Printed photo”.
"Glossy Photo" is set for the silver-salt photos printed from photo film.
If you select “Normal”, you can finish characters that exist together in a photo
block.
• Copy Quality
• Printed photo
• Normal
• Glossy Photo
• Custom Setting
• Image Density
4 • Light
• Normal
• Dark
❖ Pale
You can adjust the image quality of a pale original so the copy is at normal density.
• Copy Quality
• Soft
• Normal
• Sharp
• Custom Setting
• Image Density
• Light
• Normal
• Dark
❖ Generation Copy
You can adjust the image quality to prevent characters in the copy becoming too
thick.
• Copy Quality
• Soft
• Normal
• Sharp
• Custom Setting
• Image Density
• Light
• Normal
• Dark
116
General Features
❖ Dark Background
You can set whether "Deep document" can be selected as an original type.
• On
• Off
❖ Panel Features Default

You can set which items will appear as the function buttons on the basic dis-
play.
• Off
• Reduce/Enlarge
• Dup./Combine/Series
• Edit Image
• Cover/Slip Sheet 4
• Stamp
• Output/Customize Function/Finisher
❖ Image Adjustment Priority

You can set the items, to be preferentially displayed, to the function buttons
on the basic display.
• Off
• Erase Inside
• Edit Image
❖ Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown on the ini-
tial display.
• Hide
• Display
❖ Original Type Display

You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
• Hide
• Display
❖ Special Original Display

You can set whether to show the original types on the initial display.
• On
• Off
117
❖ Special Original Display Defaults

You can set up to three items for displaying on the initial display from five
items below.
• Mixed Sizes
• Batch
• SADF
• Thin Paper
• Original Size
❖ Tone: Original Remains

You can set whether to use a buzzer to alert you when you forget to remove
an original.
• On
4 • Off
If the “Panel key sound” during system settings is set to “Off”, this function
is invalidated even if it is set to “On”.
❖ Job End Call

You can set whether to generate a buzzer sound (“pi”) when a copy is com-
pleted.
If “Panel key sound” when performing system settings is set to “On”, the
buzzer sounds four times if copying is interrupted because the paper has run
out or become jammed. This notifies you that the copy job could not be com-
pleted.
• On
• Off
❖ Connect Copy Key Display

You can set whether to display the [Connect Copy]. If you select "Off", the key
does not appear and a master unit cannot be obtained.
• On
• Off
❖ Switch Original Counter Display

You can set whether to count the two-sided documents by number of sheets
or pages.
• Original Sheet Counter
• Original Page Counter
118
General Features
❖ Customize Function: Copier

A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the function
keys.
• Off
• Mixed Sizes
4
• Batch
• SADF
• Thin Paper
❖ Customize Function: Document Server Storage

A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the function
keys. Registered functions can also be changed.
• Off
• Mixed Sizes
• Batch
• SADF
• Thin Paper
Reference
p.43 “Panel Key Sound”
"Selecting the Original Type Setting", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Adjusting Copy Image Density", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy/ Document Server Reference
119
Reproduction Ratio
This section describes various items of [Reproduction Ratio] under [Copier/Docu-
ment Server Features].
❖ Shortcut R/E
You can register up to two frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios other than
the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial display.
You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
• Metric version
• 25%
• 50% (A3→A5, F→A5)
4 • 65% (A3→F)
• 71% (A3→A4, A4→A5)
• 75% (B4→F4)
• 82% (F→A4, B4→A4)
• 93%
• 115% (B4→A3)
• 122% (F→A3, A4→B4)
• 141% (A4→A3, A5→A4)
• 200% (A5→A3)
• 400%
• User R/E Ratio (25-400%)
• Off
Default:
• F1: 71%
• F2: 141%
120
Reproduction Ratio
• Inch version
• 25%
• 50% (11”×17”→51/2”×81/2”)
• 65% (11”×17”→81/2”×11”)
• 73% (11”×15”→81/2”×11”)
• 78% (81/2”×14”→81/2”×11”)
• 85% (F→81/2”×11”)
• 93%
• 121% (81/2”×14”→11”×17”)
• 129 (%81/2”×11”→11”×17”)
• 155% (81/2”×81/2”→81/2”×14”)
• 200% (51/2"×81/2"→11"×17") 4
• 400%
• Off
Default:
• F1: 73%
• F2: 155%
❖ R/E Ratio
You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Re-
duce/Enlarge] is pressed on the copier screen.
121
• Metric version
• 25%
• 50% (A3→A5, F→A5)
• 65% (A3→F)
• 71% (A3→A4, A4→A5)
• 75% (B4→F4)
• 82% (F→A4, B4→A4)
• 93%
• 115% (B4→A3)
• 122% (F→A3, A4→B4)
• 141% (A4→A3, A5→A4)
4 • 200% (A5→A3)
• 400%
• Inch version
• 25%
• 50% (11”×17”→51/2”×81/2”)
• 65% (11”×17”→81/2”×11”)
• 73% (11”×15”→81/2”×11”)
• 78% (81/2”×14”→81/2”×11”)
• 85% (F→81/2”×11”)
• 93%
• 121% (81/2”×14”→11”×17”)
• 129% (81/2”×11”→11”×17”)
• 155% (81/2”×81/2”→81/2”×14”)
• 200% (51/2"×81/2"→11"×17")
• 400%
122
Reproduction Ratio
❖ R/E Ratio Priority

You can set the ratio with priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is pressed.
• Metric version
• 400%
• 200%
• 141%
• 122%
• 115%
• 93%
• 82%
• 75%
• 71% 4
• 65%
• 50%
• 25%
• Inch version
• 400%
• 200%
• 155%
• 129%
• 121%
• 93%
• 85%
• 78%
• 73%
• 65%
• 50%
• 25%
❖ Ratio for Create Margin

You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a
shortcut key.
Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range of 90 to 99%).
The ratio is set to 93% by default.
Note
❒ For the procedure of entering the [Copier/Document Server Features], see p.3
“Accessing User Tools (System Settings)”
Reference
123
Edit
This section describes various items of [Edit] under [Copier/Document Server Fea-
tures].
Enter the width of the binding margin with the number keys as follows:
• Metric version: 0–30 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0"-1.2" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Enter the width of the erased margin with the number keys as follows:
• Metric version: 2–99 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0.1"-3.9" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
4 An image of approximately 1.5 mm (0.06”) will not be displayed as the width of
the separation line, when specifying solid or broken lines.
❖ Front Margin: Left/Right

You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
• Left
• Right
Default:
• Metric version: Left 5 mm
• Inch version: Left 0.2"
❖ Back Margin: Left/Right

You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
• Left
• Right
Default:
• Metric version: Right 5 mm
• Inch version: Right 0.2"
❖ Front Margin: Top/Bottom

You can specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
• Top
• Bottom
Default:
• Metric version: Top/Bottom 0 mm
• Inch version: Top/Bottom 0.0"
124
Edit
❖ Back Margin: Top / Bottom

You can specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
• Top
• Bottom
Default:
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT

In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back
side.
The margin is set to the same value of “Back Margin: Left/Right".
• Left 4
• Right
Default:
• Metric version: Right 5 mm
• Inch version: Right 0.2"
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB

In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back
side.
The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.
• Top
• Bottom
Default:
❖ Creep Setting for Magazine

You can specify the creep binding margin width.
Range:
• Metric version: 0 to 99 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0 to 3.9 inch (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Default:
• Metric version: 5 mm
• Inch version: 0.2"
❖ Erase Border Width

You can specify the width for erasing border in the range of "2 to 99 mm" (in
units of 1 mm).
Default:
125
❖ Erase Original Shadow in Combine

In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary
margin around all four edges of each original.
• On
• Off
❖ Erase Center Width

You can specify the width of the erased center margins with this function.
Default:
❖ Front Cover Copy in Combine

You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you select
4 Front Cover mode.
GCST019E
• Combine
• Do not Combine
❖ Copy Order in Combine

You can set the copy order in Combine mode.
• From Left to Right

• From Right to Left
• Top to Bottom from Left
• Top to Bttm from Right
126
Edit
❖ Orientation: Booklet, Magazine

You can select the orientation of copies to open when using Booklet or Mag-
azine mode.
• Open to Left
• Open to Right
❖ Copy on Designating Page in Combine

You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets
in Desig./Chapter mode.
• Combine
• Don not Combine
❖ Image Repeat Separation Line

You can select a separation line from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or
Crop Marks.
4
• None
• Solid
• Broken A
• Broken B
• Crop Marks
127
❖ Double Copies Separation Line

You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from: None,
Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
• None
• Solid
• Broken A
4
• Broken B
• Crop Marks
❖ Separation Line in Combine

You can select a separation line using the Combine function from: None, Sol-
id, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
• None
• Solid
• Broken A
• Broken B
128
Edit
• Crop Marks
❖ Copy Back Cover

When copying the back cover, you can specify whether to have the back cover
outside (outside page) or inside (inside page).
• Outside
• Inside
❖ Double Copies Position

You can select the copy position of bottom or left page according to top or
right page as the original image position.
• Same Position as Original Image Position 4
• Symmetrical to Original Image Position
Note
Reference
"Booklet/Magazine", Copy/ Document Server Reference
129
Stamp
This section describes various items of [Stamp] under [Copier/Document Server Fea-
tures].
Background Numbering
This section describes various items of [Background Numbering] under [Stamp].
❖ Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
4 • Small
• Normal
• Large
❖ Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
• Light
• Normal
• Dark
• Very Dark
Preset Stamp
This section describes various items of [Preset Stamp] under [Stamp].
❖ Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.
• English
• German
• French
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
• Portuguese
• Polish
• Czech
• Swedish
• Finnish
• Hungarian
130
Stamp
• Norwegian
• Danish
• Russian
• Japanese
• Simplified Chinese
• Traditional Chinese
• Hangul
❖ Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is pressed.
• COPY
• URGENT
• PRIORITY 4
• For Your Info.
• PRELIMINARY
• For Internal Use Only
• CONFIDENTIAL
• DRAFT
❖ Stamp Format
You can specify how each of stamp is printed.
• Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the stamp.
• Top Left
• Top Center
• Top Right
• Center Left
• Center
• Center Right
• Bottom Left
• Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
131
• Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the stamp within the available range
as shown below.
Metric version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• "Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
• "Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• "Center Left"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• "Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
• "Center Right"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• "Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
4 • "Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Top Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Top Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center Left"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Center Right"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• Size
You can set the size of the stamp.
• 1X
• 2X
• 4X
• Density
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.
• Normal
The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot check which parts will
overlap.
• Lighter
The image can be seen through the stamp.
• Lightest
The image appears even clearer than in the Lighter setting.
132
Stamp
• Page to Stamp
You can specify whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first
page.
• All Pages
• 1st Page Only
• Dup. Back Pg. Stamp Pos.
You can adjust the stamp position for back side in duplex mode, within the
available range as shown below.
Metric version:
• Left-Right: Left 432 mm – Right 432 mm
• Top-Bottom: Top 432 mm – Bottom 432 mm
Inch version:
• Left-Right: Left 17.0” – Right 17.0”
• Top-Bottom: Top 17.0” – Bottom 17.0”
4
Reference
"Preset Stamp", Copy/ Document Server Reference
User Stamp
This section describes various items of [User Stamp] under [Stamp].
❖ Program/Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete these designs as user stamps.
You can register up to five custom stamps with your favorite designs.
❖ Stamp Format:1-5
You can specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 5 is printed.
• Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the User Stamp.
• Top Left
• Top Center
• Top Right
• Center Left
• Center
• Center Right
• Bottom Left
• Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
133
• Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the User Stamp within the available
range as shown below.
Metric version:
• "Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
4 • "Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Top Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Top Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center Left"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• Page to Stamp
page.
• All Pages
• 1st Page Only
Metric version:
Inch version:
Reference
Copy/ Document Server Reference"User Stamp"
134
Stamp
Date Stamp
This section describes various items of [Date Stamp] under [Stamp].
❖ Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
• MM/DD/YYYY
• MM.DD.YYYY
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
Default:
• Metric version: DD/MM/YYYY 4
• Inch version: MM/DD/YYYY
❖ Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
• Font 1
• Font 2
• Font 3
❖ Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
• Auto
• Large
• Middle
• Small
❖ Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
• On
• Off
135
❖ Stamp Setting
You can specify how Date Stamp is printed.
• Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the Date Stamp.
• Top Left
• Top Center
• Top Right
• Bottom Left
• Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
• Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the Date Stamp within the available
4 range as shown below.
Metric version:
• "Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
• "Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Top Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Top Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center Left"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• Page to Stamp
page.
• All Pages
• 1st Page Only
136
Stamp

Metric version:
Inch version:
Page Numbering
This section describes various items of [Page Numbering] under [Stamp].
4
❖ Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page Numbering]
is pressed.
• P1,P2…
• 1/5,2/5…
• -1-,-2-…
• P.1,P.2…
• 1,2…
• 1-1,1-2…
❖ Font
You can select the font in Page Numbering mode.
• Font 1
• Font 2
• Font 3
❖ Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.
• Auto
• Large
• Middle
• Small
❖ Duplex Back Page Stamping Position

You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed in Duplex
mode.
• Opposite Position
• Same Position
137
❖ Page Numbering in Combine

You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and the Page
Numbering function together.
• Per Original
• Per Copy
❖ Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet

You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Des-
ignate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering function together.
• On
• Off
❖ Stamp Position
You can specify how each of stamp is printed.
4
• Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the stamp.
• Top Left
• Top Center
• Top Right
• Bottom Left
• Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
For the patterns of "P1, P2, ---", "1/5, 2/5, ---", "P.1, P.2, ---", "1, 2, --", and "Page
1, Page 2, ---", the machine is shipped from the factory with this position set
to "Top Right".
For the patterns of "-1-, -2-, ---" and "1-1, 1-2, --- ", the machine has this position
set to "Bottom Center".
The setting range is as follows:
• Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the stamp within the available range
as shown below.
Metric version:
• "Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
• "Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
138
Stamp
Inch version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Top Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Top Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center Left"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
4
Metric version:
Inch version:
❖ Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap black parts
of the image.
• On
• Off
❖ Page Numbering Initial Letter

Switch the page print language.
• P1, P2, ... / P.1, P.2 ...
• S1, S2, ... / S.1, S.2 ...
139
Stamp Text
This section describes various items of [Stamp Text] under [Stamp].
❖ Font
You can select the font in Stamp Text mode.
• Font 1
• Font 2
• Font 3
❖ Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Stamp Text mode.
• Auto
4 • Large
• Middle
• Small
❖ Superimpose
You can have the Stamp Text printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
• On
• Off
❖ Stamp Setting
You can specify how Stamp Text is printed.
• Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the Stamp Text.
• Top Left
• Top Center
• Top Right
• Bottom Left
• Center Right
140
Stamp
• Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the Stamp Text within the available
range as shown below.
Metric version:
• "Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
• "Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm 4
Inch version:
• "Top Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Top Center"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Top Right"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center Left"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• "Center"…T/B: 2.8-2.8”, L/R: 2.8-2.8”
• "Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1-5.7”, L/R: 0.1-5.7”
• Page to Stamp
page.
• All Pages
• 1st Page Only
Metric version:
Inch version:
Note
141
Input/Output
This section describes various items of [Input/Output] under [Copier/Document Serv-
er Features].
❖ SADF Auto Reset

In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the pre-
vious original has been fed.
You can adjust this time from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second.
❖ Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode

You can specify the way in which copies are delivered when copying an orig-
inal placed on the exposure glass.
4 • Face Up
• Face Down
❖ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart

When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make
copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning re-
maining originals.
• On
You can leave the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages
will not be sequential.
• Off
When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to
remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
❖ Sort/Stack Shift setting

You can specify whethere to shift the Shift Tray in sort mode or stack mode.
• On
• Off
❖ Insert Separation Sheet

You can specify the number of copy pages for inserting the Separation Sheet
from 1 to 999 pages in increments of 1 page.
142
Input/Output
❖ Staple Position
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display with pri-
ority.
The optional Finisher AFE, or the Booklet Processor is required to use this
function.
• Top 1
• Slant
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Bottom 1
• Top Right 1
• Right 2
• Off 4
❖ Punch Type
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be shown on the
initial display.
The optional Finisher AFE and Multi-hole Punch Unit is required to use this
function.
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Right 2
• Left 3
• Top 3
• Right 3
• Off
❖ Finisher: Staple Position

Specify the stapling position.
The optional Finisher AFE, or the Booklet Processor is required to use this
function.
• Top 1
• Slant
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Bottom 1
• Center
• Top Right 1
• Right 2
• Off
143
❖ Finisher: Punch Type

Specify the punch type.
The optional Finisher AFE and Multi-hole Punch Unit are required to use this
function.
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Right 2
• Left 3
• Top 3
• Right 3
• Off
❖ Simplified Screen: Finishing Types

4 You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for “Finishing
Types” on the Simplified Screen.
• Stack
• Slant
• Top 1
• Bottom 1
• Left 2
• 2 Holes Left
• 3 Holes Left
• Do not Display
Reference
"Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper", Troubleshooting
"Batch mode", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Sort", Copy/ Document Server Reference
144
Settings for the Document Server
Settings for the Document Server

For details, see "System Settings", and "Copier/Document Server Features".
❖ Copier/Document Server Features

Heading items Default
General Features Document Server Storage key 2 Sided original:
Top to Top
General Features Document Server Storage key 1 Sided → 1 Sided
Combine: 2 origi-
nals
Combine: 4 origi-
nals
4
Combine: 8 origi-
nals
General Features Document Server Storage key Create Margin
General Features Document Server Storage key Original Orienta-
tion
❖ System Settings
Heading Item Default
General Features Warm Up Notice On
General Features Copy Count Display Up
General Features Output: Document Server Finisher Upper
Tray
General Features Paper Tray Priority: Copier Tray 1
Tray Paper Settings Cover Sheet Tray Off
Tray Paper Settings Slip Sheet Tray Off
Timer Settings Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer 60 second(s)
Administrator Auto Delete File in Document Server 3 day(s)
Tools
Administrator Delete All Files in Document Server -
Tools
Reference
p.113 “Copier/Document Server Features”
145
Copier/Document Server Features on

Main and Sub-machines
This section explains the Copier/Document Server Features on the two ma-
chines during Connect Copy.
and then, clear the combined copying before making changes.
General Features
4 How the defaults in the General Features of copying of the main and sub-ma-
❖ Auto Image Density Priority

• The paper size, orientation, and paper type currently set in common on the
main and sub-machines are selected automatically.
❖ Original Orientation in Duplex Mode

❖ Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode

❖ Reserve Job Mode

❖ Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer

❖ Max. Copy Quantity

❖ Original Counter Reset Key

146
Copier/Document Server Features on Main and Sub-machines
❖ Auto Tray Switching

❖ Text
❖ Text/Photo
❖ Photo
4
❖ Pale
❖ Generation Copy
❖ Dark Background
❖ Panel Features Default

❖ Image Adjustment Priority

❖ Paper Display
❖ Original Type Display

❖ Special Original Display

147
❖ Special Original Display Default

❖ Tone: Original Remains

❖ Job End Call

• When [On] is selected, only the main machine beeper sounds.
❖ Switch Original Counter Display

4 • The main and sub-machines follow their respective set values.
❖ Customize Function: Copier

❖ Customize Function: Document Server Storage

Reproduction Ratio
How the defaults in the Reproduction Ratio of copying of the main and sub-ma-
❖ Shortcut R/E
❖ R/E Ratio
❖ R/E Ratio Priority

❖ Ratio for Create Margin

148
Edit
How the defaults in the Edit of copying of the main and sub-machines are used
in combined copying will be explained.
❖ Front Margin: Left/Right

made in it.
• The operation takes place using the set values of the main machine.
❖ Back Margin: Left/Right

follows the settings made on the main machine, regardless of the settings 4
made in it.
❖ Front Margin: Top/Bottom

made in it.
❖ Back Margin: Top/Bottom

made in it.
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT

made in it.
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB

made in it.
❖ Creep Setting for Magazine

149
❖ Erase Border Width

made in it.
❖ Erase Original Shadow in Combine

made in it.
❖ Erase Center Width

4 made in it.
❖ Front Cover Copy in Combine

made in it.
❖ Copy Order in Combine

made in it.
❖ Orientation: Booklet, Magazine

made in it.
❖ Copy on Designating Page in Combine

made in it.
❖ Image Repeat Separation Line

made in it.
❖ Double Copies Separation Line

made in it.
150
❖ Separation Line in Combine

made in it.
❖ Copy Back Cover

made in it.
❖ Double Copies Position

4
Stamp
How the defaults in the Stamp of copying of the main and sub-machines are
used in combined copying will be explained.
❖ Size
made in it.
❖ Density
made in it.
Preset Stamp
❖ Stamp Language
made in it.
❖ Stamp Priority
made in it.
151
❖ Stamp Format
made in it.
❖ Dup. Back Pg. Stanp Pos.

made in it.
User Stamp
❖ Program/Delete Stamp
4 • The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The sub-machines
made in it.
❖ Stamp Format:1-5
made in it.
❖ Dup. Back Pg. Stanp Pos.

made in it.
Date Stamp
❖ Format
made in it.
❖ Font
made in it.
❖ Size
made in it.
152
❖ Superimpose
made in it.
❖ Stamp Setting
made in it.
❖ Dup. Back Pg. Stamp Pos.

made in it.
4
Page Numbering
❖ Stamp Format
made in it.
❖ Font
made in it.
❖ Size
made in it.
❖ Duplex Back Page Stamping Position

made in it.
❖ Page Numbering in Combine

made in it.
❖ Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet

made in it.
153
❖ Stamp Position
made in it.
❖ Superimpose
made in it.

made in it.
4
Stamp Text
❖ Font
made in it.
❖ Size
made in it.
❖ Superimpose
made in it.
❖ Stamp Setting
made in it.
❖ Page to Stamp
made in it.
❖ Stamp Position
made in it.
154

made in it.
Input/Output
How the defaults in the Stamp of copying of the main and sub-machines are
used in combined copying will be explained.
❖ SADF Auto Reset

❖ Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode

4
copying.
❖ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart

made in it.
• Main machine settings have priority.
❖ Sort/Stack Shift setting

The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The set values of the
❖ Insert Separation Sheet

made in it.
❖ Stapling Position
made in it.
❖ Select Punch Type

made in it.
❖ Finisher: Staple Position

made in it.
155
❖ Finisher: Punch Type

made in it.
❖ Simplified Screen: Finishing Types

copying.
• When the main machine is set to the simplified screen, you can not utilize
the combined copying.
156
5. Printer Features
This chapter explains various items of [Printer Features] available in this machine.
List / Test Print

This section describes various items of [List / Test Print] under [Printer Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Printer Features], see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
❖ Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
❖ Configuration Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
❖ Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The
most recent 50 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when
there are 50 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the
oldest error belongs to one of the following print jobs, it is not deleted. The
error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30. You can
check any of these print jobs for error log information.
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• Hold Print
• Stored Print
The records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control
panel can be printed.
❖ Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
❖ PCL Configuration/Font Page

You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
❖ PS Configuration/Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is in-
stalled.
157
Printer Features
❖ PDF Configuration/Font Page

You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is in-
stalled.
❖ Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Printing the configuration page

A Press [Printer Features].
B Press [Configuration Page]] on the [List / Test Print].
The configuration page is printed.
C Press the {User Tools} key.
158
List / Test Print
Interpreting the configuration page

❖ System Reference
• Unit Number
Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
• Total Memory
Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.
• Firmware Version
• Printer
Displays the version number of the printer firmware.
• System
Displays the version number of the system firmware.
• Engine
Displays the version number of the printer engine.
• LCDC
Displays the version number of the panel display.
5
• NIB
Displays the version number of the Network interface.
• Device Connection
This item(s) appears when the device option(s) is installed.
• HDD: Font / Macro Download
Displays the capacity of the hard disk drive.
• Printer Language
Displays the version number of the printer driver language.
• Connection Equipment
Displays the installed optional equipments.
❖ Paper Input
Displays settings made under Tray Paper Settings menu.
❖ System
Displays settings made under the System menu.
❖ PCL Menu
Displays settings made under PCL Menu.
❖ PS Menu
Displays settings made under PS Menu.
❖ PDF Menu
Displays settings made under PDF Menu.
159
Printer Features
❖ Host Interface
Displays settings made under the Host Interface menu.
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
❖ Interface Information
Displays the interface information.
160
Maintenance
Maintenance
This section describes various items of [Maintenance] under [Printer Features]
❖ List / Test Print Lock

You can Lock the [List/Test Print] menu.
• On
• Off
❖ Delete All Temporary Print Jobs

You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
❖ Delete All Stored Print Jobs

You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
Reference
5
161
Printer Features
System
This section describes various items of [System] under [Printer Features].
❖ Print Error Report

Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error oc-
curs.
• On
• Off
❖ Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
• Off
• Immediate
• 1 minute
5
• 5 minutes
• 10 minutes
• 15 minutes
❖ Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
• Do not Print
• Error Information
❖ Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
• On
• Off
❖ Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs

You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily stored in the ma-
chine.
• On
• Off: 8 hours
If you select [on], you can set up to 200 hours for auto file deleting.
❖ Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs

You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the machine.
• On: 3 days
If you select [on], you can set up to 180 days for auto file deleting.
• Off
162
System
❖ Initial Print Job List

You can set the desired type of print job list that appears on the screen when
you press [Print Jobs].
• Complete List
Displays the list of print jobs stored in the machine.
• List Per User ID
Displays the list of the User ID who stored a file in the machine.
❖ Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,
according to paper size or resolution.
• Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
• Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
❖ Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each pages. 5
• Off
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
❖ Copies
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the num-
ber of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another
command.
• 1–9999
Default: 1
❖ Blank Page Print

You can select whether or not to print blank pages.
• On
• Off
Pages that match one of the following conditions are identified as blank.
• There are no images.
• There are images but they are outside of the printable area.
• There are only blank characters.
❖ Toner Saving
Select either to apply or not to apply Toner Saving.
• On
• Off
163
Printer Features
❖ Spool Image
You can select to print spool images. The print job transmitted from the com-
puter is temporarily stored on the machine's hard disk as bit map images that
can be printed when transmission is complete. If more than one print job is
transmitted, a spool image is printed for each.
• Off
• On
❖ Reserved Job Waiting Time

You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a print job before al-
lowing other functions such as the copier and scanner functions to interrupt
it.
• Long Wait
• Medium Wait
• Short Wait
• In Reserved Job Order
5
❖ Printer Language
You can specify the printer language.
• Auto
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit (optional) is installed.
❖ Sub Paper Size

You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4.LT) feature.
• Auto
• Off
❖ Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
• 12×18
• 11×17
• 81/2×14
• 81/2×11
• 51/2×81/2
• 71/4×101/2
• 8×13
• 81/2×13
• 81/4×13
• A3
• B4 JIS
164
System
• A4
• B5 JIS
• A5
• B6 JIS
• A6
• 8K
• 16K
• Custom Size
Default:
• Metric version: A4
• Inch version: 81/2×11
❖ Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted 5
paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rota-
tion.
• Off
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
• Auto Detect
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted
paper automatically, and does not rotate them.
• On (Always)
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate the original images.
This function reduces printing speed.
❖ Bypass Tray Setting Priority

You can specify which of the two options, (Printer) Driver / Command or
Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper size for the bypass
tray.
• Driver / Command
• Machine Settings
❖ Edge to Edge Print

You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.
• On
• Off
The 5 mm margin along the edges may not be printed properly.
165
Printer Features
❖ Default Printer Language

You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer
language automatically.
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit (optional) is installed.
❖ Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
• Off
• On
Reference
"Loading paper", Troubleshooting
166
Host Interface
Host Interface
This section describes various items of [Host Interface] under [Printer Features].
❖ I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
• 128KB
• 256KB
❖ I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you
should increase this timeout period.
• 10 seconds
• 15 seconds
5
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds
167
Printer Features
PCL Menu
This section describes various items of [PCL Menu] under [Printer Features].
❖ Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
• Portrait
• Landscape
❖ Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
• 5 to 128 by 1
Default:
• Metric version: 64
5 • Inch version: 60
❖ Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
• Resident
• RAM
• HDD
• SD
RAM, HDD and SD can be selected only when fonts have been downloaded
to the machine.
❖ Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
• 0 to 63 by 1
The ID is set to "0" by default.
❖ Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
• 4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
The size is set to "12.00" by default.
❖ Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
• 0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
The font pitch is set to "10.00" by default.
168
PCL Menu
❖ Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for the selected font. The available
options are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK,
Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21,
ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
❖ Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
• Regular
• Dark
❖ Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
• Off
• On 5
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
❖ Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF,
FF=CR−FF.
• Off
• On
❖ Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
169
Printer Features
PS Menu
This section describes various items of [PS Menu] under [Printer Features].
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖ Data Format
You can select a data format.
• Binary Data
• TBCP
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or
EtherTalk connection.
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is can-
celed under the following conditions;
5 • The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the
display panel is Binary Data.
• The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on
the display panel is TBCP.
❖ Resolution
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
• 1200 dpi
170
PDF Menu
PDF Menu
This section describes various items of [PDF Menu] under [Printer Features].
❖ Change PDF Password

Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Current Password
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the Control Panel.
❖ PDF Group Password

Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder Lite.
• Current Password
5
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the Control Panel.
❖ Resolution
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
• 1200 dpi
171
Printer Features
172
6. Scanner Features
This chapter describes various items of [Scanner Features] available in this ma-
chine.
General Settings
Following describes various items of [General Settings] under [Scanner Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Scanner Features], see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
❖ Switch Title
Sets index to use when the list of receivers from the machine is displayed.
❖ Update Delivery Server Destination List

Press [Update Delivery Server Destination List] to update the receivers from the
delivery server. To use this function, it is necessary to set [Delivery Option] to
[On].
❖ Search Destination
Select an object receiver to search in the default state from the address book
of this machine of from LDAP server.
To search from LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in
[System Settings] and set [LDAP Search] to [On].
❖ TWAIN Standby Time

When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as
Document Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the
machine as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN
scanner function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switch-
es to the network TWAIN scanner function.
• Immediate
When [Immediate] is selected, the machine will switch to the network
TWAIN scanner function at once.
• Set Time: 10 second(s)
When [Set Time] is selected, you can enter the delay time with the number
keys (3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the network TWAIN scan-
ner function when the time set here passes after the last key operation.
❖ Destination List Display Priority 1

Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.
You can select either [E-mail / Folder] or [Delivery Server].
• E-mail / Folder
• Delivery Server
173
Scanner Features
❖ Destination List Display Priority 2

In the machine’s address book, select which address book appears by default.
You can select either [E-mail Address] or [Folder].
• E-mail Address
• Folder
❖ Print & Delete Scanner Journal

Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If
the stored transmission/delivery results reach 100, select whether to print the
delivery journal.
• On
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed
journal is deleted.
• Off
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are
stored.
• Do not Print: Disable Send
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest
6 record.
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.
❖ Print Scanner Journal

The scanner journal is printed and deleted.
❖ Delete Scanner Journal

The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.
174
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
Following describes various items of [Scan Settings] under [Scanner Features].
❖ A.C.S. Sensitivity Level

Sets the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning orig-
inals when [Scan Type] is set to [Auto Color Selection].
❖ Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass

When dividing originals and scanning them individually with the exposure
glass to form a single file, select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] for the
waiting status.
• Continuous Wait
• Off
• Set Wait Time: 60 second(s)
If you select [SADF] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the [Wait
Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid.
If you select [Batch] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the
[Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid, and the ma-
chine waits for an additional original to be put in place.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
6
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start if additional
originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed within this time. You can
end scanning and begin transmission by pressing the {#} key within this time.
Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for additional originals
until the {#} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals are
placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin send-
ing by pressing the {#} key.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations is performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {#} key is pressed.
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF
• Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
175
Scanner Features
❖ Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF

When dividing originals and scanning them separately with the ADF to form
a single file, select [Set Wait Time] or [Continuous Wait] for the waiting status.
• Continuous Wait
• Set Wait Time: 60 second(s)
This setting is valid if [SADF] is specified for [Original Feed Type] when scan-
ning.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start automatically
if additional originals are placed within this time. You can end scanning and
begin transmission by pressing the {#} key within this time. Once the speci-
fied time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for the additional origi-
nals until the {#} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals
are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {#} key.
Even if originals are placed on the exposure glass, the machine will operate
according to the specified settings. However, every time originals are placed
on the exposure glass, you must press the {Start} key to start scanning. Scan-
ning will start if additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed
6 within this time. You can end scanning and begin transmission by pressing
the {#} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmis-
sion starts automatically.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations is performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {#} key is pressed.
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF
• Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
❖ Background Density of ADS (Full Color)

Characteristics due to the type of paper such as non-whiteness like newspaper
or transparent originals can be reduced by correcting the scanning density.
Reference
"Batch, SADF", Scanner Reference
"Items for Specifying Scan Settings", Scanner Reference
"Setting Items for Original Feed Type", Scanner Reference
"Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File", Scanner Reference
176
Send Settings
Send Settings
This section describes various items of [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].
❖ Compression (Black & White)

Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.
• On
• Off
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
❖ Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)

Specify whether or not to compress multi level (gray scale) scan files.
• On: Compression Level 3
• Off
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for
file transfer increases accordingly.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size 6
and network load.
❖ High Compression PDF Level

Select compression level when creating high compression PDF files.
• Higher
• Standard
❖ Max. E-mail Size

Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is at-
tached.
• On: 2048KB
• Off
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-102400 KB) with the number
keys.
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.
177
Scanner Features
❖ Divide & Send E-mail

This function is effective only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail.
• Yes (per Max. Size): 5
• Yes (per Page)
• No
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2-
500) with the number keys.
When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multipage: PDF] is selected for [File Type Priority], the
image will not be divided even if [Yes (per Page)] is selected.
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.
When [No] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.
❖ E-mail Information Language

Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, document
name, and sender's name is sent.
6 Select one of the following 20 languages:
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Dan-
ish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.
Default:
• Metric version: British English
• Inch version: American English
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.
❖ No. of Digits for Single Page Files

Sets digit number for serial number to attach to Single Page file name.
• 4 Digits
• 8 Digits
❖ Stored File E-mail Method

Specify the e-mail setting for sending stored files. You can select [Send File] or
[Send URL Link]. This setting can be used for the following:
• Send File
• Send URL Link
If you select [Send File], actual files are attached to e-mails.
If you select [Send URL Link], URL Links to file locations are attached to e-mails.
178
7. Registering Addresses and
Users for Scanner Functions
Following describes the procedure for registering the destination and the user.
Address Book
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.
Important
❒ Address Book data is stored on the hard disk. It can be lost if there is some
kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any
damages resulting data loss.
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:
❖ Names
You can register the name of the user and the key display. This is the basic in-
formation required for managing user of the machine.
To register a e-mail address in the address book, you must register informa-
tion such as the user name and destination name in advance.
❖ Auth. Info
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to fold-
ers, or accessing an LDAP server.
179
Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions
❖ Protection
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders
from being accessed without authorization.
❖ E-mail
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.
180
Address Book
❖ Folder
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.
• SMB
• FTP
7
• NCP
181
❖ Add to Group
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier
management.
Note
❒ You can also use a Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book.
With the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can register multiple names at
the same time.
❒ Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can
backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the
Address Book.
❒ For details about using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
❒ For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
7
Managing names in the Address Book
By registering a name and key display beforehand, you can specify e-mail and
folder destinations simply by selecting the name key.
Reference
p.184 “Registering Names”
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial

You can also specify an e-mail address by selecting the destination shown on the
initial scanner display when sending a document using the scanner function. A
registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's
address are automatically entered in the “From" field of an mail header.
Reference
p.196 “E-mail Destination”
182
Address Book
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly

After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a
shared folder simply by selecting the destination shown on the initial scanner
display whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared folder.
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.
Reference
p.200 “Registering Folders”
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine

After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.
Reference
p.228 “Registering a Protection Code”
Managing users and machine usage 7

Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
• Copier
• Document Server
• Scanner
• Printer
Reference
p.187 “Authentication Information”
183
Registering Names
Register user information including their names.
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending e-mail. You can
also use it as a folder destination.
You can register up to 2000 names.
Registering Names
Following describes the procedure for registering names.
7
C Press [Address Book Management].
D Check that [Program/Change] is selected.
E Press [New Program].
F Press [Change] on the right of the Name.
The name entry display appears.
G Enter the name, and then press [OK].

H Press the key for the classification you want to use under Select Title.
184
Registering Names
I Press [OK] twice.

J Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
❒ The name can be used for documents in the Document Server. For details
about the Document Server.
❒ The keys you can select are as follows:
• [Freq.]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]:
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
❒ You can select [Freq.] and one more page for each title.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
"Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Changing a Registered Name

This section describes the procedure for changing a name.

7

E Select the registered name you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F To change the name or key display, press [Change] on the right of the name
or key display.
G Enter the name or key display, and then press [OK].
185
H To change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from
Select Title.
Note
❒ You can search by the registered name, user code, folder name, or e-mail
address.
Reference
To change a registration number
A Press [Change] to the right of “Registration No.”

B Enter a new registration number using the number keys, and then press the
{#} key.
Deleting a Registered Name

Following describes the procedure for deleting a user.

7

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
186
Authentication Information
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Important
❒ The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code be-
come invalid.
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Scanner
Printer
Note
❒ You can register up to 500 user codes.
❒ The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.
❒ To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Printer: PC Con-
trol] for the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in
User Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver. 7
❒ For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver Help.
Reference
p.73 “User Authentication Management”
Registering a User Code

Following describes the procedure for registering a user code.

187

E Press the name whose code is to be registered, or enter the registered num-
ber using the number key.
You can search by the registered name, user code, folder name, or e-mail address.
F Press [Auth. Info].

G Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press {#} key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.
H Press [TNext] twice.

I Select the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.
7
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
L Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
❒ User codes can contain up to eight digits.
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names”.
Reference
188
Changing a User Code

Following describes the procedure for changing a registered user code.
Important
❒ Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.

E Select the user whose user code you want to change. 7

G Press [Change], and then enter the new user code using the number keys
H Press {#} key.

I To change the available functions, press [Auth. Info] and then press [TNext]
twice.
189
J Press the key to select the functions to enable them.

Press the key to highlight it, and then the function is enabled. To cancel a se-
lection, press the highlighted key.
K Press [OK].
L Press [Exit].
M Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see “Changing a Registered Name”.
Reference
p.185 “Changing a Registered Name”
Deleting a User Code

Following describes the procedure for deleting a user code
Important
❒ After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.

7

D Press [Program/Change].
E Select the name whose code is to be deleted.
190
G Press [Change] to delete the user code, and then press {#} key.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
Note
❒ To delete a name from the Address Book entirely, see “Deleting a Regis-
tered Name”.
Reference
p.186 “Deleting a Registered Name”
7
Displaying the Counter for Each User
Following describes the procedure for displaying the counter on individual user
basis.

C Press [Display/Clear/Print Counter per User].
D Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter] or [Scanner Counter].
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.
191
Printing the Counter for Each User

Following describes the procedure for printing the counter that counts on indi-
vidual user basis.

D Select a user code from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
E Press [Print Counter List] under Per User.
Enter the user code, and then press {#} if the user code is registered.
192
F Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
G Press [Print].
Printing the Counter for All User

Following describes the procedure for printing the counter for all users.

7
D Press [Print Counter List] under All Users.
Enter the user code, and then press {#} if the user code is registered.
E Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Scanner Counter] and [All Counters].
F Press [Print].
193
Clearing the Number of Prints

Following describes the procedure for clearing the counter.

D Select the user code to clear.
E To clear the number of prints made under a user code, Select the user code
from the left side of the display.
7
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
F Press [Clear] under Per User Codes.
194
G Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Scanner Counter] and [All Counters].
H Press [OK].
I To clear the number of prints for all user codes, press [Clear] under All Users.
J Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
K Press [OK].
195
E-mail Destination
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every
time, and can send scan files from scanner function by e-mail.
• It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register “Name" and “Key Dis-
play" as the e-mail destination.
• You can register e-mail destinations as a group.
• You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the send-
er address to prevent unauthorized access.
Note
❒ You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in
the Address Book. See “Sending Scan File by E-mail", Scanner Reference.
Reference
Registering an E-mail Destination

7

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [E-mail].
196
E-mail Destination
G Press [Change].
H Enter the e-mail address.
I Press [OK]. 7
J Select [E-mail].
K Press [OK].
Note
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
❒ To register the name, see “Registering Names”.
Reference
p.187 “Registering a User Code”
p.219 “Registering Names to a Group”
197
Changing an E-mail Destination


E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to change.
7
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
H Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].

I Press [OK].
Note
Reference
198
E-mail Destination
Using the e-mail address as the sender
A Press [Protection].
B Press [Sender ] under [Use Name as].
Deleting an E-mail Destination


C Press [Address Book Management]. 7
E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
H Press [Delete All].
I Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ To delete the name, key display, and title, see “Deleting a Registered Name”.
Reference
199
Registering Folders
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.
There are three types of protocol you can use:
• SMB
For sending files to shared Windows folders.
• FTP
Use when sending files to an FTP server.
• NCP
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.
Note
❒ For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your net-
work administrator.
❒ You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the ma-
chine. See "Registering a Protection Code".
❒ You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after fin-
ishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.
❒ You can register folder destinations in a group.
7 Using SMB to Connect

Note
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see “Using FTP to Connect”.
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see “Using NCP to Connect”.
Reference
p.207 “Using FTP to Connect”
p.212 “Using NCP to Connect”
Registering a Folder
200
Registering Folders

E Select the name whose folder you want to register. Press the name key, or
enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK]. 7
J Press [Change] under Login Password.
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
M Press [Folder].
N Press [SMB].
O Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

P Press [Exit].
Q Press [OK]. 201
R Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
❒ To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
❒ If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
❒ When Do not Specify is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies.
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.202 “To locate the folder manually”
p.203 “Using Browse Network to locate the folder”
To locate the folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

7 B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],
and then enter the path again.
Note
❒ Enter the path using the format as follows : ”\\ServerName\ShareName\Path-
Name”
❒ You can also enter an IPv4 address.
202
Registering Folders
Using Browse Network to locate the folder
A Press [Browse Network].

Work groups on the same network are displayed.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
B Select the work group.

Computers in the selected work group are displayed.
C Select a client computer.

Shared folders under it appear.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register.

7
E [OK].
If a Login Screen Appears
This section explains how to log on to the machine if the login screen appears
when you try to access a folder by browsing the network.
If you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or
password has been entered for folder authentication, the login screen appears.
A Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.
B Enter the password, and then press [OK].

The path to the selected folder appears.
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and
password again.
203
Changing a Folder

E Select the name whose folder you want to change.
7 F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
When specifying a folder, enter the path directly or select it by referencing the
network. For more information, see "To locate the folder manually" and "Us-
ing Browse Network to locate the folder".
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
204
Registering Folders
To change the protocol
A Press [FTP] or [NCP].
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].

Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
C Enter each items again.

Reference
p.207 “Registering a Folder”
Changing SMB settings

7
To change SMB settings:
A Press [Change] of path name.

B Enter the name of the path on which the folder is located, and then press
[OK].
Note
❒ The folder destination can be selected using Network Reference.
Reference
205
Deleting a registered folder
A [System Settings].

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
7 F Press [ Folder].
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
❒ To delete the name, key display, and title, see “Deleting a Registered Name”.
Reference
206
Registering Folders
Using FTP to Connect

Note
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see “Using SMB to Connect”.
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see “Using NCP to Connect”.
Reference
p.200 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.212 “Using NCP to Connect”
7
E Select the name whose folder you want to register.

I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
M Press [Folder].
207
N Press [FTP].
O A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].

P Press [Change] under Server Name.
Q Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
R Press [Change] under Path.
S Enter the path.
T Press [OK].
U Press [Change] under “Port Number”.
7 V Enter Port Number.
W Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
X Press [Exit].
Y Press [OK].
208
Registering Folders
Z Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the password.
❒ You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.
❒ You can enter an absolute path, using this format: “/user/ home/user-
name"; or a relative path, using this format: “directory/sub-directory".
❒ If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current
working directory.
❒ You can also enter an IPv4 address.
❒ To change the port number, press [Change] under Port No.. Enter the port
number using the number keys, and then press {#}.
❒ Specify the port number within the range of 1 to 65535.
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the FTP User Name and FTP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator. 7
Reference
Changing a Folder

209

E Select the name whose folder you want to change, and then press [Folder].
F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
To change the protocol
7 A Press [SMB], or [NCP].
B A confirmation message appears.Press [Yes].

C Enter each items again.

Reference
210
Registering Folders
Changing items under FTP
A Press [Change] under “Port Number”.

B Enter the new port number, and then press {#}.
C Press [Change] under Server Name.
D Enter the new server name, and then press [OK].
E Press [Change] under “Path”.
F Enter the new path, and then press [OK].
Deleting a Folder

E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
211
J Press [Exit].
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see “Deleting a Registered Name”.
Reference
Using NCP to Connect

Note
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see “Using SMB to Con-
nect”
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see “Using FTP to Connect”
Reference
p.200 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.207 “Using FTP to Connect”

7

E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys.

212
Registering Folders

M Press [Folder].
N Press [NCP].
O A confirmation message appeares. Press [Yes].
P Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
Q Specify the folder.

R Press [OK].
S Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name. 7
❒ If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], enter the user name followed
by the name of the context where the user object is located. If the user name
is “user" and the context name is “context", enter “user.context"
❒ To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
213
To locate the folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C [OK].
D Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
E Press [Exit].
Note
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the Net-Ware server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
7 Using Browse Network to locate the folder
A Press [Browse Network].

B If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the
NetWare server appears.
C Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register.

E [OK].
Note
❒ Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].
❒ If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.
❒ Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.
214
Registering Folders
Changing a registered folder

E Select the user of the registered folder you want to change.
F Press [Folder]. 7
G Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
H Specify the folder.

To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network.
I Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
215
Changing NCP settings

To change NCP settings:
A Select the type of connection.

B Press [Change] of path name.
C Enter the name of the path on which the folder is located, and then press
[OK].
D Press [Connection Test] to make sure the path is correctly set up.
E When you have made the necessary changes to the information, press [Set].
F Press [Close].
Note
❒ To specify a folder, enter its path directly or select it using Browser Net-
work.
Reference
7 To change the protocol
A Press [SMB], or [FTP].

B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
C Enter each item again.

Reference
216
Registering Folders
Deleting a Folder

D Check that [Proglam/Change] is selected.
E Select a user of the folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder]. 7
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
J [Exit].
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name”.
Reference
217
Registering Names to a Group

You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail address-
es and folders for each group.
To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.
Important
❒ When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group
with over 50 folders registered.
❒ The maximum number of destinations registerable to a group is 500.
Note
❒ You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders
registered in a group. For details, see “Registering a Protection Code".
Reference
Registering a Group
7

C Press [Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group].
E Press [New Program].
218
F Press [Change] under Group Name.
G Enter the group name, and then press [OK].

The Key Display name is set automatically.
H Press the title key under Select Title, if necessary.

I When you want to change the key display, press [Change] under Key Dis-
play. Enter the key display, and then press [OK].
J Press [OK].
Note
❒ The keys you can select are as follows:
• [Freq.]: Added to the page that is displayed first. 7
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]…
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
❒ You can select [Freq.] and one more page for each title.
Reference

You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.
219

E Select the name to register in a group.
F Press [Add to Group].

G Select a group to which you want to add the name to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
7 added to it.
H Press [OK].
220
Adding a Groupe to Another Group

You can add a group to another group.

C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
E Select the group that you want to put into another group.
Press the group key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, user code, folder name, or e-mail address. 7
221
G Select the group which you want to add to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the group is
added to it.
7
H Press [OK].
Displaying Names Registered in a Group

You can check the names or groups registered in each group.

222
E Select the group where the members you want to check is egistered.
F Press [Programmed User/Group].

All the names registered will be displayed.
G Press [OK].
Removing a Name from a Group

B Press [Administrator Tools]. 7

E Select the name to remove from a group.
223
G Select the group from which you want to remove the name.
The group key is deselected, and the name is removed from the group.
7 H Press [OK].
Deleting a Group Within Another Group


D Check that [Program / Change] is seleced.
224
E Select the group that you want to delete from.

Press the group key, or enter the registered number during the number keys.

The keys of groups in which the group is registered appear highlighted.
G Select the group that you want to delete from.
The group key is deselected and the group is deleted from it.
H Press [OK].
225
Changing a Group Name


E Press the group key you want to change.
7 F To change the group name and key display, press [Change] under Group
Name or Key Display.
G Enter the new group name or key display, and then press [OK].
H To change the title, press the title key under Select Title.
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..
J Enter the new registration number using the number keys.
K Press the {#} key.
L Press [OK].
226
Deleting a Goup

D Press [Delete].
E Press [Yes].
F Press a group key you want to delete.
7
G Press [Yes].
227
Registering a Protection Code

You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection code.
You can use this function to protect the following:
• Folders
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.
• Sender's names
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.
Reference
p.187 “Registering a User Code”
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User


E Select the name whose protection code you want to register.
228
Registering a Protection Code
F Press [Protection].
G Press [Destination] or [Sender] under Use Name as.
Both [Destination] and [Sender] can be selected at the same time. 7

H Press [Change] under Protection Code.
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press {#}.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify
“Protection” without specifying a protection code.
229
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User


E Press the group key you want to register or enter the registered number us-
ing the number keys.
7
G Press [Folder Destination] under Protection Object.
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify
“Protection” without specifying a protection code.
230
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Trans-
fer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
7
the number keys

G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of SMTP Authentication.
231

M [OK].
Note
7 ❒ When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 al-
phanumeric characters.
❒ To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
p.15 “Network Settings”
232
LDAP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand. For details, see
“LDAP Server Settings", Network Guide.
Important
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server of
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details, see "LDAP Server Settings".
❒ If there is user authentication in place, check with the administrator.
7
the number keys.

G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of LDAP Authentication.
233

M Press [OK].
Note
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
7 and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server
of Administrator Tools settings applies.
❒ To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
234
8. Other User Tools
Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of
printed papers by displaying the counter.
Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
A Press the {Language Selection} key.
APD015S
Note
❒ If you want to return the display language to “English”, repeat the step
above.
235
Other User Tools
Inquiry
The Inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs,
or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer
to verify the following:
❖ Consumables
• Telephone No. to order
• Toner
• Staple
• Staple (Center)
❖ Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No.
• Serial No. of Machine
❖ Sales Representative
• Telephone No.
A Press [Inquiry].
Inquiry information appears.
B Press [Print Inquiry List].
236
Inquiry
C Press the {Start} key.

The inquiry information list is printed out.
D Press [Exit] twice.
237
Other User Tools
Counter
Displaying the Total Counter

You can display the total counter value used for all functions.
You can also print out a counter data list.
A Press {Counter} key.
APD016S
B To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List].

A counter list prints out.
D Press [Exit] twice.
238
Counter
Method of Counting
The counter increments “1” for each original sheets. In duplex mode, it counts
“2” for front and back of original sheet.
❖ The counter increments at the functions below:

• Copying
• Printing
• Scanning
• Test Print (Multiple Lists, Configuration Page, Error Log, Menu List, PCL
Configuration/Font Page, PS Configuration/Font Page, PDF Configura-
tion/Font Page, Hex Dump)
• Printing Destination List of Address Book
❖ The counter does not count at the functions below:

• Printing Counter List
• Printing Error Report
• Printing in SP Mode
• Printing Inquiry List
• Printing Interface Settings Configuration List
• Cover sheet and Designation sheet, Slip sheet, Separation sheet, without
printing
239
Other User Tools
240
9. Appendix
Adjustment Settings for Operators
Changing the Adjustment Settings for Operators

APD014S
B Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators].
C Select the item that you want to change the value.

D Specify the setting value.
To select the setting value, press the value on the display.
To input the value, use the number keys.
E Press {enter}.
F Press [Exit] twice.
241
Appendix
Setting Values
Feed
❖ Shift Image With Feed
❖ 1-710-001 : Front Side

• Max.: 2 mm
• Min.: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
• Initial value: 0
❖ 1-710-002 : Back Side

• Max.: 2 mm
• Min.: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-710-003 : Front Side (Low Speed Mode)

• Max.: 2 mm
• Min.: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-710-004 : Back Side (Low Speed Mode)

9 • Max.: 2 mm
• Min.: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ Shift Image Across Feed
❖ 1-720-001 : Tray 1
• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
242
❖ 1-720-002 : Tray 2
• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-720-003 : Tray 3
• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-720-004 : Tray 4 LCT

• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-720-005 : Tray 5 LCT

• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-720-006 : Tray 6 LCT

• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm 9
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 1-720-007 : Tray 7 Bypass

• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
• Initial: value 0
❖ 1-720-008 : Duplex
• Max: 2 mm
• Min:-2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
• Initial: value 0
243
Appendix
❖ Set Fusing Temparature
❖ 1–740–001 : Set Fusing Temparature

• 1: Raise temperature to improve fusing
• 2: Lower temperature to reduce curl
❖ Double-Feed Detection
❖ 1-908-001 : Tray 1
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-002 : Tray 2
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-003 : Tray 3
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-004 : Tray 4 (LCT Tray 1)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-005 : Tray 5 (LCT Tray 2)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
9 ❖ 1-908-006 : Tray 6 (LCT Tray 3)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-007 : Tray 7 (Bypass Tray)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-908-008 : After Double-Feed Detection
244
❖ CIS Img Pos Adj: Feed Setting
❖ 1-911-001 : Tray 1
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-002 : Tray 2
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-003 : Tray 3
• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-004 : Tray 4 (LCT Tray 1)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-005 : Tray 5 (LCT Tray 2)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-006 : Tray 6 (LCT Tray 3)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
❖ 1-911-007 : Tray 7 (Bypass Tray)

• 0: Off
• 1: On
9
❖ 1-911-008 : Duplex Tray
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Drum
❖ Magnification Adjustment Across Feed
❖ 2-750-001 : Copy Image: Front Side

• Max: 0.3 %
• Min: -0.3 %
• Step: 0.1 %
• Initial value: 0 %
245
Appendix
❖ 2-750-002 : Copy Image: Back Side

• Max: 0.3 %
• Min: -0.3 %
• Step: 0.1 %
❖ 2-750-003 : Print Image: Front Side

• Max: 0.3 %
• Min: -0.3 %
• Step: 0.1 %
❖ 2-750-004 : Print Image: Back Side

• Max: 0.3 %
• Min: -0.3 %
• Step: 0.1 %
❖ Magnification Adjustment With Feed
❖ 2–760–001 : Magnification Adjustment With Feed

• Max: 0.3 %
• Min: -0.3 %
• Step: 0.1 %
❖ Temp / Humidity Display

9
❖ 2-770-001 : Internal Temperature
• Max: 60 °C
• Min: -20 °C
• Step: 1 °C
• Initial value: –
❖ 2-770-002 : Internal Humidity

• Max: 100 %
• Min: 0 %
• Step: 1 %
• Initial value: –
246
Process
❖ Select Test Pattern
❖ 3–740–001 : Select Test Pattern

• Trim Pattern
❖ Reset to Defaults
❖ 3–740–002 : Reset to Defaults
Peripherals
❖ Staple Position Adjustment
❖ 6-700-001 : A3-Lengthwise
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
• Initial value: 0 mm
❖ 6-700-002 : B4 SEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-003 : A4 SEF
9
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-004 : A4 LEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
247
Appendix
❖ 6-700-005 : B5 SEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 6-700-006 : B5 LEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.1 mm
❖ 6-700-007 : DLT SEF

• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-008 : LG SEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-009 : LT SEF
• Max: 2 mm
9 • Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-010 : LT LEF
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-700-011 : Other
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
248
❖ Adjust Punch Hole : With Feed
❖ 6-705-001 : 2-Hole: JPN

• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-705-002 : 3-Hole: NA
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-705-003 : 4-Hole: Europe

• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-705-004 : 4-Hole: NA
• Max: 2 mm
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ 6-705-005 : 2-Hole: NA
• Max: 2 mm
9
• Min: -2 mm
• Step: 0.5 mm
❖ Adjust Booklet Stapling Position
❖ 6-730-001 : A3 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
249
Appendix
❖ 6-730-002 : B4 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-003 : A4 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-004 : B5 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-005 : 12 x 18 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-006 : DLT SEF

• Max: 3.0 mm
9 • Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-007 : LG SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-730-008 : LT SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
250
❖ 6-730-009 : Custom Size

• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ Adjust Booklet Fold Position
❖ 6-735-001 : A3 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-002 : B4 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-003 : A4 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-004 : B5 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
9
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-005 : 12 x 18 SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
251
Appendix
❖ 6-735-006 : DLT
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-007 : LG
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-008 : LT SEF
• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
❖ 6-735-009 : Custom Size

• Max: 3.0 mm
• Min: -3.0 mm
• Step: 0.2 mm
252
Specifications for the Main Unit

❖ Configuration:
Console
❖ Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum (∅100)
❖ Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
❖ Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
❖ Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
❖ Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system
❖ Resolution:
1200 dpi
❖ Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
❖ Original reference position:

Rear left corner
❖ Warm-up time:
Less than 300 seconds (23°C)
❖ Originals:
9
Sheet/Book/Objects
❖ Original size:
A3L - A5KL, 11" × 17"L - 51/2" × 81/2" KL
❖ Copy paper size:

12" × 18" – Postcard (depending on the paper trays)
253
Appendix
❖ Copy paper weight:

• Tray 1 - Tray 3 : 52 - 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover
• Tray 4, Tray 5 (LCIT RT5000), Tray 4 - Tray 6 (LCIT RT5010) : 52 - 216 g/m2,
16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb. Index
• Tray 6 (LCIT RT5000): 52 - 163 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover
• Tray 7 (Multi Bypass Tray BY5000): 52 - 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover,
110 lb. Index
Reference
p.264 “LCIT RT5000”
p.265 “LCIT RT5010”
❖ Non-reproduction area:
• Leading edge: More than 4 ± 2 mm
• Trailing edge: More than 2 + 2/−1.7 mm
• Left edge: More than 2 ± 1.5 mm
• Right edge: More than 2 ± 1.5 mm
❖ First copy time:

• Type 1
• 3.5 seconds (for Face Up)
• 5 seconds (for Face Down)
• Type 2
• 3.2 seconds (for Face Up)
• 4.5 seconds (for Face Down)
• Type 3
9 • 3 seconds (for Face Up)
• 4 seconds (for Face Down)
❖ Copying speed:
• Type 1
• 90 copies/minute (A4 K, 81/2" × 11"K)
• Type 2
• Type 3
254
❖ Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
• Enlargement
Metric version: 400 %, 200 %, 141 %, 122 %, 115 %
Inch version: 400 %, 200 %, 155 %, 129 %, 121 %
• Full Size
Metric version: 100 %
Inch version: 100 %
• Reduction
Metric version: 93 %, 82 %, 75 %, 71 %, 65 %, 50 %, 25 %
Inch version: 93 %, 85 %, 78 %, 73 %, 65 %, 50 %, 25 %
• Zoom
From 25 % to 400 % in 1 % steps
❖ Maximum number of continuous copy sets

1 – 9999 copies
❖ Copy paper capacity:

• Tray 1 (Tandem tray) : 2,000 sheets (1,000 sheets × 2) (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
• Tray 2 (550-sheet tray) : 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
• Tray 3 (550-sheet tray) : 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
• Tray 4 (LCIT RT5000): 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
• Tray 7: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond) 9
❖ Power consumption (Type 1: 90 copies/minute model):
Main machine only Full system *1
Warm-up 2210W 2290W
Stand-by 370W 420W
Copying 1680W 1830W
Maximum 2940W 3060W
*1 Main machine with the finisher, Booklet FInisher, A3 LCIT, Multi bypass tray
(Tray 7), ADF, interposer and Z-folding Unit.
255
Appendix

Warm-up 2190W 2250W
Stand-by 400W 460W
Copying 1890W 2110W
Maximum 2960W 3080W

Warm-up 2240W 2310W
Stand-by 430W 480W
Copying 2160W 2340W
Maximum 3730W 3850W
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):

870 × 858.5 × 1,000 mm, 34.23" × 33.78" × 39.34"
❖ Space for main machine (W × D):

• 1,202 × 858.5 mm, 47.3" × 33.78" (ADF external extender is not used, option-
al output tray is installed.)
• 2,218 × 858.5 mm, 87.3" × 33.78" (ADF external extender is used for larger
size originals, optional finisher proof tray is installed.)
9
❖ Noise emission *1 (Type 1):
Sound power level
Main machine only Complete system *3
Copying less than 74 dB (A) less than 78 dB (A)
Stand-by less than 60 dB (A) less than 64 dB (A)
Sound pressure level *2

Copying less than 68 dB (A) –
Stand-by less than 54 dB (A) –
*1
The above measurements are ISO 7779 actual values.
*2 Measured at the position of the bystander/operator. During printing.
*3
Main machine with full options.
256

Sound power level

*1
*2
Measured at the position of the bystander/operator. During printing.
*3
Main machine with full options.

Sound power level

*1
*2
Measured at the position of the bystander/operator. During printing.
*3
Main machine with full options. 9
❖ Weight:
Approx. 270 kg, 594 lb (main machine with the ADF)
257
Appendix
Document Server
❖ HDD:
160 GB × 2
❖ HDD (Document Server):

45 GB
❖ Capacity:
• Copy: Approx. 3,000 sheets (ITUT-No.4 chart)
• Batch mode: Approx. 3,000 sheets (ITUT-No.4 chart)
• Printer: Approx. 15,000 sheets (600 dpi)
• Scanner: Approx. 3,000 sheets (200 dpi/Text) (ITUT-No.4 chart) *1
Note
❒ If you need to change the capacity of the document server, contact your
service representative.
❖ Maximum number of stored documents:

3,000
❖ Maximum pages of stored documents:

15,000 sheets
❖ Maximum number of pages per document:

2,000
❖ Capacity (Memory Sorting):

6.75 GB (A4/81/2" × 11" : Approx. 333 sheets-3000 sheets at maximum) *2
9 ❖ Capacity (Others):
10.0 GB
*1 Scanning Condition: ITUT-No.4 chart/200 dpi/Text/A4/MMR
*2
The capacity will change when the multiple functions are used.
258
Auto Document Feeder

❖ Mode:
ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Thin mode
❖ Original size:
• A3L–A5KL
• 11" × 17"L– 81/2" × 51/2"KL
❖ Original weight:
• 1-sided originals: 52 - 157 g/m2 (14 - 42 lb. Bond)
• 2-sided originals: 52 - 128 g/m2 (14 - 34 lb. Bond) (Duplex)
• Thin paper mode: 40 - 156 g/m2 (11 -42 lb. Bond)
❖ Number of originals that can be set:

100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) of less than 12 mm, 0.5"
❖ Copying speed:
80 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 1 to 1 copying)
❖ Power Source:
Supplied from the main machine.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
259
Appendix
Specifications for Options
Finisher SR5000
Finisher Upper Tray:
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond
❖ Stack capacity:
• 500 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 250 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Finisher Shift Tray:
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 300 g/m2, 14 – 80 lb. Bond
❖ Stack capacity:
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
9 • 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 500 sheets (A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 100 sheets (A5L, 51/2" × 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
❖ Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L,81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
❖ Staple paper weight:

64 – 80 g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond
❖ Staple capacity:
• 100 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 50 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
260
❖ Stack capacity after stapling

• 200–30 sets (10–100 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150–30 sets (10–50 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
❖ Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
❖ Power consumption:
Approx. 120 W (supplied from the main machine)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
800 × 730 × 980 mm, 31.5" × 28.7" × 38.6"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 75 kg, 163.3 lb.
Note
Booklet Finisher BK5000

To use the Booklet Finisher BK5000, the Finisher SR5000 is required.
❖ Saddle stitch paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 12" × 18"L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L 9
❖ Saddle stitch paper weight:
64 – 90 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb. Bond
❖ Saddle stitch capacity:

Max. 15 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
❖ Stack capacity after Saddle stitching

• 30 sets (2–5 sheets) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
❖ Saddle stitch position:

center 2 position
Approx. 100 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)
261
Appendix
600 × 730 × 980 mm, 23.6” × 28.7” × 38.6” inch
❖ Weight:
Approx. 70 kg, 152.4lb
Note
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000

To use the Cover Interposer Tray CI5000, the Finisher SR5000 or the Booklet Fin-
isher BK5000 are required.
❖ Paper size:
• Widrh: 13” – A5K / 51/2" × 81/2"K
• Length: A5L / 51/2" × 81/2"L – 19”
❖ Paper weight:
64 – 216 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond – 80 lb. Cover
❖ Paper capacity:
200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) × 2
❖ Power consumption (Max):

Approx. 95 W (supplied from the main machine)
543 × 730 × 1270 mm, 21.3” × 28.7” × 50”
❖ Weight:
9 Approx. 45 kg, 98.0 lb
Note
262
Punch Unit PU5000

To use the Punch Unit PU5000, the Finisher SR5000 or the Booklet Finisher
BK5000 are required.
❖ Paper size:
• 2 holes
L: A3 - A6, 11" × 17" - 51/2" × 81/2"
K: A4 - A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
• 3 holes
L: A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K: A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"
• 4 holes (Europe)
L: A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K: A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"
• 4 holes (North Europe)
L: A3 - B6, 11" × 17" - 51/2" × 81/2"
K: A4 - A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
❖ Paper weight:
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 lb. – 43 lb. Bond
• 2 holes
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 lb. – 43 lb. Bond
• 3 holes
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 lb. – 43 lb. Bond
• 4 holes (Europe)
52 – 128 g/m2, 14 lb. – 34 lb. Bond
• 4 holes (North Europe)
52 – 128 g/m2, 14 lb. – 34 lb. Bond 9
Note
263
Appendix
Z-folding Unit ZF4000

To use the Z-folding Unit ZF4000, the Booklet Finisher BK5000 is required.
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
❖ Paper weight:
64 – 80 g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond
❖ Power consumption
Maximum. 100 W (a separate power source is required)
177 × 620 × 960 mm, 6.9" × 24.4" × 37.8"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 55 kg, 121.3 lb
Note
LCIT RT5000
A4 Large Capacity Tray
❖ Paper size:
A4L, B5L, A5KL, 17" × 11"L, 81/2" × 51/2"KL
❖ Paper weight:
Tray 4, 5: 52 – 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond – 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb Index
9 Tray 6: 52 – 163 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond – 60 lb. Cover
❖ Paper capacity:
Tray 4, 5: 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Tray 6: 2,550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Total 4,550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Maximum. 135 W (supplied from the main machine)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H, option unit):

540 × 730 × 980 mm, 21.3" × 28.8" × 38.6"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 87 kg (192 lb) or less
Note
264
LCIT RT5010
A3 Large Capacity Tray
❖ Paper size:
Length: A5K / 81/2" × 51/2"K – 19”
Width: A5L / 81/2" × 51/2"L – 13”, 100 mm width with the special side fence
❖ Paper weight:
Tray 4 – Tray 6: 52 – 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond – 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb. Index
❖ Paper capacity:
Tray 4, 6: 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Tray 5: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Total 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H, option unit):

880 × 730 × 980 mm, 21.3" × 28.8" × 38.6"
❖ Weight:
Approx. 163 kg, 359.5lb
Note
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7)

❖ Paper size: 9
Width: 100 mm – 13”
Length: A5L / 81/2" × 51/2"L – 19”
❖ Paper weight:
52 - 216 g /m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover
❖ Paper capacity:
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
702 × 556 × 202 mm, 27.6” × 21.9” × 8.0”
265
Appendix
❖ Weight:
Approx. 18 kg (39.7 lb) or less
Note
Others
❖ A3 / 11" × 17" Tray Unit TK5000
You can load A3L or 11" × 17"L paper in tray 1 using this unit.
❖ Copy Connector Type 3260

You can utilize the connect copy function bridging two machines with the
Copy Connector Type 3260.
❖ Copy Data Security Unit Type E

The Copy Data Security Unit Type E deletes images and prints the gray
ground color of the paper, when the documents marked unauthorized are
copied.
❖ Data Overwrite Security Unit E

The Data Over Write Security Unit E overwrites the data that remains on the
hard disk, automatically.
266
Information about Installed Applications
Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must dis-
play the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software devel-
oped by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to en-
dorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written per-
mission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may 9
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowl-

edgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
267
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT `ÀS IS'' AND

ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-
ITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the follow-
ing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
9 code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code
are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or tex-
tual) provided with the package.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of con-
ditions and the following disclaimer.
268

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must dis-
play the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic'
can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS IN-
TERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or deriv-
ative of this code cannot be changed. i.e this code cannot simply be copied and
put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
9
Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a li-
cence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol de-
scription in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure
Shell".
269
Appendix
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my di-
rect control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restric-
tively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed
from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library

- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
9 Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific li-
brary, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "ht-
tp://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possess-
ing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any respon-
sibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
270
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-
CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-
FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, RE-
PAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO

IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT-
TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN-
ERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCU-
RATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code

Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
9
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or with-
out modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLA-
RY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MIS-
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by the
University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code.
271
Appendix
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
`ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
9 BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
272 tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-
CIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
9
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
273
Appendix
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
`ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Soft-

ware"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright state-

9 ments and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each re-
vision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of
the license.
274
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND

ITS CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-
TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP-
TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all
times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,

USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this document is granted.
275
INDEX
A C
About Address Book, 179 Capture Server IP Address, 62
Accessing User Tools (System Settings), 3 Change Original Counter Display, 113
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level, 175 Change PDF Password, 171
Address Book Changing a FTP Folder Destination, 209
Change Order, 68 Changing a Group Name, 226
Edit Title, 68 Changing an E-mail Destination, 198
Program/Change/Delete Group, 68 Changing a Registered Name, 185
Select Title, 68 Changing a User Code, 189
Address Book Management, 68 Changing the Display Language, 235
ADF Original Table Elevation, 43 Changing the registered SMB Folder
Adjustment Settings for Operators, 241 Destination, 204
Administrator Authentication Changing Tray Paper Settings, 89
Management, 68 Channel, 59
Administrator's E-mail Address, 62 Checking the Connection, 13
Administrator Tools / System Settings, 68 Clearing the Counter, 194
AOF (Always On), 68 Clearing the Number of Prints, 194
Append CR to LF, 168 Communication Mode, 59
Authentication Information, 187, 231 Compression, 177
Auto Continue, 162 Configuration Page, 157
Auto Delete File in Document Server, 68 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface, 8
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs, 162 Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface, 11
Auto Delete Temporary Print, 162 Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface, 10
Auto Image Density Priority, 113 Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless
Auto Logout Timer, 49 LAN) Interface, 12
Auto Off Timer, 49 Connecting to the Interface, 7
Auto Specify Sender Name, 62 Connecting with the USB Interface, 9
Auto Tray Switching, 113 Copier/Document Server Auto Reset
Timer, 49
B Copier/Document Server Features / Edit, 124
Copier/Document Server Features /
Background Density of ADS (Full Color), 175 General Features, 113
Background Numbering, 130 Copier/Document Server Features /
Back Margin Input/Output, 142
Left/Right, 124 Copier/Document Server Features on
Top / Bottom, 124 Main and Sub-machines, 146
Back Up / Restore Address Book, 68 Copier/Document Server Features /
Bidirectional Communication, 56 Reproduction Ratio, 120
Bidirectional SCSI print, 57 Copier/Document Server Features /
Blank Page Print, 162 Stamp, 130
Booklet Finisher BK5000, 261 Copies, 162
Bypass Tray Setting Priority, 162 Copy Back Cover, 124
Copy Count Display, 43
Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode, 142
Copy on Designating Page in Combine, 124
Copy Order in Combine, 124
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode, 113
Counter, 238
Courier Font, 168
276
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000, 262 E
Creep Setting for Magazine, 124
Customized Function Edge to Edge Print, 162
Document Server Storage, 113 Edit / Copier/Document Server Features, 124
Customize Function Effective Protocol, 52
Copier, 113 E-mail Communication Port, 62
E-mail Destination, 196
D E-mail Information Language, 177
E-mail Reception Interval, 62
Dark Background, 113 E-mail Storage in Server, 62
Data Format, 170 Energy Saver Timer, 49
Date Stamp, 135 Enhanced Authentication Management, 68
DDNS Configuration, 52 Erase Border Width, 124
DDNS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 57 Erase Center Width, 124
Default Printer Language, 162 Erase Original Shadow in Combine, 124
Default User Name/Password (Send), 62 Error Log, 157
Delete All Files in Document Server, 68 Ethernet Speed, 52
Delete All Stored Print Jobs, 161 Extend A4 Width, 168
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs, 161 Extended Security, 68
Delete Scanner Journal, 173
Deleting a FTP Folder Destination, 211 F
Deleting a Goup, 227
Deleting a Group Within Another Group, 224 File Transfer / System Settingse, 62
Deleting a NCP Folder Destination, 217 Finisher
Deleting an E-mail Destination, 199 Punch Type, 142
Deleting a Registered Name, 186 Stapling Position, 142
Deleting a User Code, 190 Finisher SR5000, 260
Delivery Option, 62 Firmware Version, 68
Density (Background Numbering), 130 Folder Destination, 200
Destination List Display Priority 1, 173 Font (Date Stamp), 135
Destination List Display Priority 2, 173 Font Number, 168
Display, 2 Font (Page Numbering), 137
Display / Clear / Print Counter per User, 68 Font Pitch, 168
Displaying Names Registered in a Group, 222 Font Source, 168
Displaying the Counter for Each User, 191 Font (Stamp Text), 140
Display of concatenated copy key, 113 Format (Date Stamp), 135
Display / Print Counter, 68 Form Lines, 168
Divide. Send E-mail, 177 Front Cover Copy in Combine, 124
DNS Configuration, 52 Front Margin
Document Server, 145 Left/Right, 124
Domain Name, 52 Top/Bottom, 124
Domain Name (IEEE 1394), 57 Function Priority, 43
Double Copies Position, 124 Function Reset Timer, 43
Double Copies Separation Line, 124
Duplex, 162 G
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
General Features / Copier/Document
(Page Numbering), 137 Server Features, 113
General Settings / Scanner Features, 173
General Settings / System Settings, 43
Generation Copy, 113
277
H M
Hex Dump, 157 Machine IPv4 Address, 52
High Compression PDF Level, 177 Machine IPv6 Address, 52
Host Interface / Printer Features, 167 Machine Name, 52
Host Name, 52 Maintenance / Printer Features, 161
Host Name (IEEE 1394), 57 Max. Copy Quantity, 113
Max. E-mail Size, 177
I Max. Reception E-mail Size, 62
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 142
IEEE 1394, 57 Memory Overflow, 162
IEEE 802.11b, 14, 59
Memory Usage, 162
Image Adjustment Priority, 113
Menu List, 157
Image Repeat Separation Line, 124
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7), 265
Input/Output / Copier/Document
Multiple Lists, 157
Server Features, 142
Input Prime, 56 N
Inquiry, 236
Insert Separation Sheet, 142 Network, 52
Interface Settings / System Settings, 52 Network Security Level, 68
Interleave Print, 43 Network Settings, 15
Interpreting the configuration page, 159 No. of Digits for Single Page Files, 177
I/O Buffer, 167 Number of Scanner Resends, 62
I/O Timeout, 167 NW Frame Type, 52
IPv4 Address (IEEE 1394), 57
IPv4 Gateway Address, 52 O
IPv4 over 1394, 57
IPv6 Gateway Address, 52 Orientation, 168
IPv6 Stateless Address Booklet, Magazine, 124
Autoconfiguration, 52 Original counter reset key, 113
Items of Tray Paper Settings, 91 Original Orientation in Duplex Mode, 113
Original Type Display, 113
J Output
Copier, 43
Job End Call, 113 Document Server, 43
Job Separation, 162 Printer, 43
Output tray settings, 48
K
P
Key Counter Management, 68
Key Repeat, 43 Page Numbering, 137
Page Numbering in Combine
L (Page Numbering), 137
Page Numbering Initial Letter
LAN Type, 52 (Page Numbering), 137
LCIT RT5000, 264 Page Size, 162
LCIT RT5010, 265 Pale, 113
LDAP Authentication, 233 Panel Features Default, 113
LDAP Search, 68 Panel Key Sound, 43
Letterhead Setting, 162 Panel Off Timer, 49
List / Test Print Lock, 161 Paper Display, 113
Paper Tray Priority
Copier, 43
Printer, 43
278
Parallel Communication Speed, 56 R
Parallel Interface, 56
Parallel Timing, 56 Ratio for Create Margin, 120
PCL Configuration/Font Page, 157 Reception Protocol, 62
PCL Menu / Printer Features, 168 Registering a FTP Folder Destination, 207
PDF Configuration/Font Page, 157 Registering a Group, 218
PDF Group Password, 171 Registering a NCP Folder Destination, 212
PDF Menu / Printer Features, 171 Registering an E-mail Destination, 196
Permit SNMPv3 Communication, 52 Registering an SMB Folder Destination, 200
Permit SSL/TLS Communication, 52 Registering a Protection Code to a Group
Photo, 113 User, 230
Ping Command, 52 Registering a Protection Code to a Single
Point Size, 168 User, 228
POP3/IMAP4 Settings, 62 Registering a User Code, 187
POP before SMTP, 62 Registering Folders, 200
Preset Stamp, 130 Registering LDAP Authentication, 231, 233
Print Address Book Registering Names, 184
Destination List, 68 Registering Names to a Group, 219
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 173 Registering SMTP Authentication, 231
Printer Auto Reset Timer, 49 Registering user names and destination
Printer Features / Host Interface, 167 names, 184
Printer Features / Maintenance, 161 Removing a Name from a Group, 223
Printer Features / PCL Menu, 168 Reproduction Ratio / Copier/Document
Printer Features / PDF Menu, 171 Server Features, 120
Printer Features / PS Menu, 170 R/E Ratio, 120
Printer Features / System, 162 R/E Ratio Priority, 120
Printer Features / Test Print, 157 Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer, 113
Printer Language, 162 Reserved Job Waiting Time, 162
Print Error Report, 162 Reserve Job Mode, 113
Printing the configuration page, 158 Resolution, 168, 170, 171
Printing the Counter for All User, 193 Restore Factory Defaults, 59
Printing the Counter for Each User, 192
Print List, 60
S
Print Priority, 43 SADF Auto Reset, 142
Print Scanner Journal, 173 Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 49
Program/Change Administrator, 68 Scanner Features / General Settings, 173
Program/Change/Delete E-mail Scanner Features / Scan Settings, 175
Message, 62 Scanner Features / Send Settings, 177
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Scanner Resend Interval Time, 62
Server, 68, 77 Scan Settings / Scanner Features, 175
Program/Change/Delete User Text, 43 Screen Color Setting, 43
Program/Delete Stamp (User Stamp), 133 SCSI print (SBP-2), 57
Programming the LDAP server, 78 Search Destination, 173
PS Configuration/Font Page, 157 Security Method, 59
PS Menu / Printer Features, 170 Selection Signal Status, 56
Punch Unit PU5000, 263 Select Punch Type, 142
Send Settings / Scanner Features, 177
Q
Separation Line in Combine, 124
Quitting Tray Paper Settings, 90 Set Date, 49
Set Time, 49
Settings for the Document Server, 145
279
Settings Required to Use Document Simplified Screen
Server, 31 Finishing Types, 142
Settings Required to Use Document Size (Background Numbering), 130
Server / Ethernet, 31 Size (Date Stamp), 135
Settings Required to Use Document Size (Page Numbering), 137
Server / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 32 Size (Stamp Text), 140
Settings Required to Use Document Server / SMB Computer Name, 52
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 32 SMB Work Group, 52
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function / SMTP Authentication, 62, 231
Ethernet, 18 SMTP Server, 62
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function / Sort/Stack Shift setting, 142
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 19 Special Original Display, 113
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function / Special Original Display Defaults, 113
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 20 Specifications, 253
Settings Required to Use Network Specifications for the Main Unit, 253
TWAIN Scanner, 28 SSID Setting, 59
Settings Required to Use Network Stamp / Copier/Document Server
TWAIN Scanner / Ethernet, 28 Features, 130
Settings Required to Use Network Stamp Format
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1-5 (User Stamp), 133
1394), 29 Stamp Format (Page Numbering), 137
Settings Required to Use Network Stamp Format (Preset Stamp), 130
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 802.11b Stamp Language (Preset Stamp), 130
(wireless LAN), 30 Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder (Page Numbering), 137
Function, 22
Stamp Position (Page Numbering), 137
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Stamp Setting (Date Stamp), 135
Function / Ethernet, 22
Stamp Setting (Stamp Text), 140
Stamp Text, 140
Function / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 23
Stapling Position, 142
Status Indicator, 43
Function / IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 24
Stored File E-mail Method, 177
Settings Required to Use the Network
Sub Paper Size, 162
Delivery Scanner, 25
Superimpose (Date Stamp), 135
Settings Required to Use the Network
Superimpose (Page Numbering), 137
Delivery Scanner / Ethernet, 25
Settings Required to Use the Network Superimpose (Stamp Text), 140
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over Switch Title of Quick Dial Table, 173
1394), 26 Symbol Set, 168
Settings Required to Use the Network System Auto Reset Timer, 49
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 802.11b System / Printer Features, 162
(wireless LAN), 27 System Settings / Administrator Tools, 68
Settings Required to Use the Printer, 15 System Settings / File Transfer, 62
Settings Required to Use the Printer/ System Settings / General Features, 43
Ethernet, 15 System Settings on Main and Sub-
Settings Required to Use the Printer/ machines, 83
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 16 System Settings / Timer Settings, 49
Settings Required to Use the Printer/ System Status/Job List Display Time, 43
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 17
Setup IEEE 802.11b, 12
Setup Wireless LAN, 12
Shortcut R/E, 120
Signal Control, 56
280
T W
Test Print / Printer Features, 157 Wait Time for Next Orig.
Text, 113 Exposure Glass, 175
Text/photo, 113 Wait Time for Next Original(s)
Time Interval between Printing Jobs, 43 SADF, 175
Timer Settings / System Settings, 49 Warm Up Beeper, 43
Tone Weekly Timer
Original Remains, 113 Monday-Sunday, 49
Toner Saving, 162 Weekly Timer Code, 49
Transfer Log Setting, 68 WINS Configuration, 52
Transmission Speed, 59 WINS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 57
Tray 1, 91 Wireless LAN Signal, 59
Tray 2 - 3, 91
Tray 4, 91 Z
Tray 5, 91
Z-folding Unit ZF4000, 264
Tray 6, 91
Z-fold position, 43
Tray 7, 91
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-
machines, 111
Tray Paper Settings, 89
Tray Switching, 162
TWAIN Standby Time, 173
U
Update Delivery Server Destination List, 173
User Authentication Management, 68
User Code, 187
User Stamp, 133
Using SMB to Connect, 200
Using Utilities to Make Settings, 33
281 EN USA B235-7807

a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
The product names of Windows® NT are as follows:
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide
Type for 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP9000

EN USA B235-7807
Troubleshooting
1 When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted

2 Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
3 Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
4 Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
5 Adding paper, Toner and Staples
6 Clearing Misfeeds
7 Remarks
Introduction
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing cer-
tain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Important
ating the machine.
Notes:
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Caution:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
Power Source
220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 16 A or more.
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as shown above. For details about power
source, see p.112 “Power Connection”.
Trademarks
TrueType is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PostScript® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to Ricoh
Company Limited.
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
• The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:

chine.

❖ Trouble Shooting

❖ Network Guide
i
❖ Other manuals
• Manuals for This Machine
• Safety Information
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• UNIX Supplement
Note
dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Names of Major Options ............................................................................................2
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted

Indicators................................................................................................................3
Panel Tone..............................................................................................................4
Checking Machine Status and Settings...............................................................5
When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key is Lit ....................................8
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................9
When a Job is Not Performed.............................................................................14
2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function

When a Message Appears...................................................................................19
Display During Connect Copy ............................................................................25
If Connect Copy is Cancelled .............................................................................26
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy..............................................................27
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies ...............................................................28
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted .....................................................30
When Memory is Full ...............................................................................................34
3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver................35
Windows 95/98/Me...................................................................................................35
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................36
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................36
Windows NT 4.0.......................................................................................................37
If USB Connection Fails ......................................................................................38
When a Message Appears...................................................................................39
Status Messages...................................................................................................... 39
Alert Messages ........................................................................................................40
Checking the Error Log ............................................................................................41
When You Cannot Print.......................................................................................42
Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................45
4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

When Scanning is Not Done as Expected .........................................................51
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files .............................................................52
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed .................................................................52
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file ................................... 52
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started ............................................................ 52
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited.......................................................................53
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used............................................53
Operations are not possible when messages appear .............................................. 53
iii
When a Message is Displayed ............................................................................54
When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel ...............................................54
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................61
5. Adding paper, Toner and Staples

Loading paper ...................................................................................................... 65
Loading paper into Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) ............................................................... 65
Loading Paper into the A3/11” × 17” Tray Unit.........................................................67
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3..............................................................................68
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT) ................................................. 69
Loading Paper into the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT) ...............................70
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7)..................................................71
Loading Paper in the Interposer...............................................................................72
Changing the Paper Size.....................................................................................75
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3 ................................................................76
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5) ......................78
Changing the Paper Size in the Wide Large Capacity Tray.....................................81
Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected............................................84
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher ..................................................................86
Adding Toner........................................................................................................87
Inserting Toner ......................................................................................................... 89
Used Toner ..............................................................................................................89
Adding Staples.....................................................................................................90
Finisher .................................................................................................................... 90
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)...............................................................................91
6. Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Paper ...................................................................................93
Locating Jammed Paper ..........................................................................................94
Removing Jammed Paper........................................................................................ 96
When Z-folded paper is not properly aligned .........................................................105
Removing Jammed Staples .............................................................................. 106
Finisher .................................................................................................................. 106
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch).............................................................................107
Removing Punch and Staple Waste.................................................................108
Finisher .................................................................................................................. 108
7. Remarks
Where to Put Your Machine .............................................................................. 109
Machine Environment ............................................................................................109
Moving....................................................................................................................111
Power Connection..................................................................................................112
Access to the Machine ...........................................................................................113
Maintaining Your Machine ................................................................................114
Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................................114
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder.....................................................................114
INDEX....................................................................................................... 115
iv
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Ma-
chine.

“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.

[]
{}
1
Names of Major Options
Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder → ADF
• Finisher SR5000 → Finisher
• Booklet Finisher BK5000 → Booklet Finisher
2
1. When the Machine Does
Not Operate As wanted
This chapter explains basic troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all
functions of this machine.
Indicators
This section explains Indicators displayed when the machine requires the user
to remove misfed paper, add paper, or other perform other procedures.
x: Misfeed indicator Appears when a misfeed occurs.
See p.93 “Removing Jammed Paper”.
B: Add Paper indicator Appears when paper-out condition occurs.
See p.65 “Loading paper”.
D: Add Toner indicator Appears when toner runs out.
See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
d: Add Staple indicator Appears when staples run out.
See p.106 “Removing Jammed Staples”.
y: Empty Hole Punch Receptacle Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
indicator See p.108 “Removing Punch and Staple Waste”
F: Empty Waste Staple Receptacle Appears when the waste staple receptacle is full.
indicator See p.108 “Removing Punch and Staple Waste”
3
When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted
Panel Tone
The following table explains the meaning of the various beep patterns that the ma-
chine produces to alert users about left originals and other machine conditions.
1
Beep pattern Meaning Cause
Two long beeps. Machine has warmed up. After cooling or being switched on, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
Single short beep. Panel/screen input ac- A control panel or screen key was
cepted. pressed. Single short beeps are pro-
duced only when valid keys are
pressed.
Single long beep. Job completed. A Copier/Document Server Features
job has finished.
Four long beeps. Soft alert. The screen is changing back to the ini-
tial screen after the machine came out
of energy-saving mode or was reset.
Four long beeps repeated Soft alert. An original has been left on the expo-
five times. sure glass.
Five short beeps repeated Strong alert. Machine requires user attention. Paper
five time. might have jammed or toner might
need replenishing.
Note
❒ Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert
users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and
closed repeatedly within a short space of time, the beep alert might continue,
even after normal status has resumed.
Reference
For details about enabling or disabling beep alerts, see “The System Settings”,
4
Checking Machine Status and Settings

You can check the machine's system status.
❖ Maintenance Info 1
You can check the following items under [Maintenance Info]:
• [Remaining Toner]
Displays the amount of remaining toner.
• [No Staples]
Displays the amount of remaining staples.
• [Punch Receptacle Full]
Displays whether the hole punch receptacle is full.
• [Waste Staple Receptcl Full]
Displays whether the waste staple receptacle is full.
• [Paper Tray]
Displays the paper type and size loaded in the paper tray.
• [Output Tray Full]
Displays whether the output tray is overloaded.
• [Original Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for original misfeeds.
• [Paper Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for paper jams.
• [Cover Open]
Indicates whether front cover, duplex unit, etc, is open.
❖ Data Storage
You can check the following items under [Data Storage]:
• [HDD Remaining Memory]
Displays the amount of available hard disk drive memory.
• [HDD File(s)]
Displays the total number of jobs stored in the hard disk drive.
• [Print Job(s)]
Displays the number of jobs for Hold print/Saved print/Locked
print/Sample print.
• [Memory Erase Status]
Displays the state of the memory data.
5
❖ Machine Address Info

You can check the following items under [Machine Address Info]:
• [Machine IPv4 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv4 address.
1 • [Machine IPv6 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv6 address.
❖ Enquiry
You can check the following items under [Enquiry]:
• [Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number that are required for
service.
• [Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
• [Supply Order]
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
• [Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc, used on the machine.
A On the control panel, press [System Status] on the control panel.
B Press each tab and check the contents.
6
C After checking the information, press [Exit]. The previous screen returns.
Note
❒ [Output Tray Full], [Original Misfeed], [Paper Misfeed], and [Cover Open] appear
only when these errors occur.
❒ For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see “Checking
Jammed Paper” or “Removing Jammed Paper”.
Reference
p.94 “Locating Jammed Paper”.
p.93 “Removing Jammed Paper”.
7
When an Indicator to the Right of a

Function Key is Lit
1 When an indicator to the right of a function key lights up, press the correspond-
ing function key. Then, follow the instructions displayed on the control panel.
Problem Cause Solution
Documents and reports The paper output tray is Remove the paper from the tray.
do not print out. full.
Documents and reports There is no copy paper Add more paper. See p.65 “Loading pa-
do not print out. left. per”.
An error has occurred. The function whose indi- Record the code number shown in the
cator is lit is defective. display and contact your service repre-
sentative. See “When a Message dis-
played” of each chapter.
You can use other functions normally.
The machine is unable to A network error has oc- • Check the displayed message and
connect to the network. curred. take an appropriate action. See
“When a Message displayed” of
each chapter.
• Check that the machine is correctly
connected to the network, and that
the machine is correctly set. See
“Network Settings”, General Set-
tings Guide.
• Contact the administrator.
• When the function key is still lit,
even if you take the measures
above, contact your service repre-
sentative.
Note
❒ If an error occurs in the function you are using, check the message that ap-
pears on the control panel, and then refer to “When a Message is Displayed”
for the relevant function.
Reference
p.19 “Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function”.
p.35 “Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function”.
p.51 “Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function”.
8
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
When You Have Problems Operating the

Machine
The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messages. 1
If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed.
Important
❒ Check the contact address and Serial No. of Machine shown in the call service
message, and then contact your service representative.
“Please wait.” This message appears Wait for the machine to get ready.
appears. when you turn on the op-
eration switch.
“Please wait.” This message appears Wait for the machine to get ready.
appears. when you change the ton-
er bottle.
Although the copier screen Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
appears when the machine copier function are not
is turned on using the yet ready.
main power switch, it can-
not be switched to another
screen by pressing the
{Printer} or {Scanner} key.
The machine has just Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
been turned on and the copier function are not
User Tools screen is dis- yet ready. Time required
played, but the User varies by function. Func-
Tools menu has items tions appear in the User
missing. Tools menu when they
become ready for use.
The display is off. The machine is in Energy Press the {Energy Saver} key to cancel
Saver mode. Energy Saver Mode. mode.
The display is off. The operation switch is Turn on the operation switch.
turned off.
Nothing happens when The main power switch is Turn on the main power switch.
the operation switch is turned off.
turned on.
“Memory is full. The scanned originals ex- • Press [Store File] to store pages that
Do you want to ceed the number of have been scanned. Delete unneces-
store scanned sheets/pages that can be sary files with [Delete File].
file?” appears. stored in the hard disk. • Press [No] if you are not storing pag-
es that have been scanned. Delete
unnecessary files with [Delete File].
9

The main power indica- This occurs in the follow- Close ADF, and check if the machine is
tor continues blinking ing cases: communicating with a computer.
and does not turn off • ADF is open.
1 when pressed.
• The machine is com-
municating with ex-
ternal equipment.
• The hard disk is ac-
tive.
“Self checking...” The machine is perform- The machine may perform periodic
appears. ing image adjustment op- maintenance during operations. The
erations. frequency and duration of maintenance
depends on the humidity, temperature,
and printing factors such as number of
prints, paper size, and paper type. Wait
for the machine to get ready.
Original images are You may have loaded the Load paper correctly. Place paper in the
printed on the reverse paper incorrectly. paper tray with the print side up. Load
side of the paper. paper into the bypass tray with the
print side down. See p.74 “Orientation-
Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper”.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side fences • Remove the paper. See p.93 “Re-
may not be locked. moving Jammed Paper”.
• Check the side fences are locked.
See p.75 “Changing the Paper Size”.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's end fence may • Remove the paper. See p.93 “Re-
not be set properly. moving Jammed Paper”.
• Check the end fence is set properly.
See p.75 “Changing the Paper Size”.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Paper of undetectable • Remove the paper. See p.93 “Re-
size has been loaded. moving Jammed Paper”.
• When loading the paper of undetec-
table size, specify the paper size in
“Tray Paper Size”. See “Paper Size:
Tray 1-7”, General Settings Guide
and “Copy Paper”, About This Ma-
chine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object • Remove the paper. See p.93 “Re-
on the finisher tray. moving Jammed Paper”.
• Do not place anything on the finish-
er tray. It may cause a paper jam.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The staple cartridge is not The Booklet Finisher requires the sad-
set correctly. dle stitch stapler cartridge also. See p.90
“Adding Staples”.
10

An error message re- • When a misfeed mes- Clear misfed paper, and then open and
mains, even if misfed pa- sage appears, it re- close the front cover. see p.93 “Clearing
per is removed. mains until you open Misfeeds”.
and close the cover as
required.
1
• Paper is still jammed
in the tray.
Cannot print in duplex [1 Sided Copy] is selected Select [2 Sided Copy] for Paper Type:
mode. for Paper Type: Tray 1-7. Tray 1-7 See “Paper Size: Tray 1-7”,
Cannot print in duplex You cannot select duplex Select a paper type that allows duplex
mode. printing if the paper type printing. See “Paper Size: Tray 1-7”,
is set to [OHP], [Tab Stock], General Settings Guide.
[Translucent] or [Label Pa-
per].
The user code entry Users are restricted by Enter the user code (up to eight digits),
screen is displayed. user management. and then press {q}.
The Authentication Basic Authentication, Enter your login user name and user
screen appears. Windows Authentica- password. See “When the Authentica-
tion, LDAP Authentica- tion Screen is Displayed”, About This
tion or Integration Server Machine.
Authentication is set.
“You do not have The use of the function is Contact the administrator.
the privileges to restricted to authenticat-
use this function.” ed users only.
is displayed.
“You do not have This user code is not al- Press the {Energy Saver} key. Confirm
the privileges to lowed to use the function that the display goes off, and then press
use this function.” selected. the {Energy Saver} key again. The display
continues to be displayed will return to the user code entry dis-
even though you have play. When printing under the copier or
entered a valid user code. printer function, press the {Energy Saver}
key only after printing has finished.
Authentication failed. The entered login user Inquire the user administrator for the
name or login password correct login user name and login pass-
is not correct. word.
Authentication failed. The machine cannot per- Contact the administrator.
form authentication.
The selected file(s) con- You have tried to delete Files can be deleted by the person who
tained file(s) without ac- files without the authori- created the file. To delete a file which
cess privileges. Only ty to do so. you are not authorized to delete, con-
file(s) with access privi- tact the person who created the file.
leges will be deleted.
11
❖ Document Server
“Exceeded max. The number of scanned To store scanned pages as a file, press
number of pages pages exceeds the capaci- [Store File]. Scanned data is stored as a
1 per file. Do you ty per file of the Docu- file in the Document Server. If you do
want to store the ment Server. not want to store scanned pages, press
scanned pages as [No]. Scanned data is deleted.
1 file?” appears.
You forgot your pass- You cannot access a pro- Contact the administrator.
word. tected file without enter- To delete the files stored in the docu-
ing the password. ment server, select [Delete All Files in Doc-
ument Server]. As this will permanently
delete every single file, make sure the
document server does not contain any
files you want to keep. See “Delete All
Files in Document Server”, General Set-
tings Guide.
You cannot find out what You may not be able to You can switch the Select File screen be-
is stored in a file. ascertain the contents of a tween [List] and [Thumbnail] display to
file simply from the file check the contents of the file. In list dis-
name. play, the file name, date and time of
storage, and user name are shown. In
thumbnail display, an image of the
stored file appears. You can enlarge the
image by pressing [Preview]. Use the Se-
lect File screen to check information
other than the file name. See “Checking
the Details of a Stored Document”,
Memory frequently be- The document server Delete unnecessary files. On the file se-
comes full. memory is full. lection display, select unnecessary files,
and then press [Delete File]. If this does
not increase available memory, do the
following.
• Switch to the scanner screen, and
then delete unnecessary files stored
under the scanner function.
• Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files stored
under Sample Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, or Stored Print.
12

You want to check print You can print a single Check print quality by printing out
quality before making a copy without specifying only the first set using the {Sample
large print run. the setting again. Copy} key.
“Original is being Copier or Scanner func- To cancel a job in progress, first press 1
scanned by another tion is in use. [Exit], and then press the {Copy} key or
function. Please {Scanner} key. Next, press the {Stop}
wait.” appears. key. When the message “The Stop
key was pressed. Stop cop-
ying?” press [Stop].
“Cannot display The image data may have Pressing [Exit] displays the preview
preview of this been corrupted. screen without a thumbnail.
page.” appears, and
you can not check the
thumb nail image.
Note
❒ If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
❒ Using curled paper often causes misfeeds, soiled paper edges, or slipped po-
sitions while performing staple or stack printing. When using curled paper,
take the stiffness out of the paper with your hands to straighten out the curl,
or load the paper up side down. Also, to prevent paper from curling, lay pa-
per on a flat surface, and do not lean it against the wall.
13
When a Job is Not Performed

If you cannot execute a function, it may be that the machine is being held up by
another function.
1 If you cannot execute a function, terminate any other functions currently active,
and then try executing the function again. In certain cases, you can carry out an-
other job (copier, document server, printer, scanner) without canceling the cur-
rent job being performed. Performing multiple functions simultaneously like
this is called “Multi-accessing”.
Combination Chart
❖ Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when print priority is set to “Inter-
leave”. See “Print Priority”, General Settings Guide.
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and re-
mote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the {Interrupt} key is pressed to interrupt the
preceding operation.
→ : Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
× : The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simul-
taneous operations are not possible.)
14
Copy
Printer
Scanner
TWAIN
Copying
Interrupt
Print
Sort
Printing
Stapling
Stapling
Copying
Mode before you select
Scanning
Scanning
Operations
Operations
Operations
for Copying
for Copying
Data Reception
for scanning
×
×
*1
*1
Operations for Copying
×
×
Mode after you select Copy
*2
*1
*1
Stapling
×
×
*2
*1
*1
Sort
→ →
→ →
×
×
×
Operations for Copying Interrupt Copying
×
×
×
*4
*4
Copying
Data Reception
Printing Print
Printer
Stapling
→ →
→ →
→ → →
→ →
→
×
×
×
Operations for Scanning Scanner
×
×
×
*2
*2
Scanning
×
×
×
Scanning TWAIN
×
×
×
Operations for Document Server Document Server
×
×
×
*2
*2
*2
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
×
×
*3
*3
Printing from Document Server
*3
Printing from Document Server DeskTopBinder
*3
*3
Printing Web Document Server
→ →
15
1
Mode after you select Copy Printer
Web Document Server

Interrupt Copying
Document Server
DeskTopBinder
TWAIN
Scanner
1
Print
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server

Operations for Document Server

Operations for Scanning
Data Reception
Scanning
Scanning
Copying
Stapling
Stapling
Printing
Printing
Sort
Mode before you select

Document Operations × × ×
Server for Docu-
ment Server
Scanning a × × × × × ×
Document to *2
Store in Doc-
ument Server
Printing
from Docu- *5 *5 *5
ment Server
DeskTop- Printing ×
Binder from Docu-
ment Server
Web Docu- Printing ×
ment Server
*1
Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all
scanned and [New Job] key appears.
*2 You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
*4
Stapling is not available.
*5 Simultaneous operation become possible after you press [New Job] key.
16
Note
❒ Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
❒ If the machine is capable of executing multiple functions simultaneously,
specify which function should have priority in “Print Priority”. This setting is
factory-preset to “Display Mode”. For setting of Printing Priority Function, 1
see “Print Priority”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When Finisher or Booklet Finisher is installed on the machine, you can specify
the output tray where documents are delivered. See “Output tray settings”,
❒ Operation speed might be reduced if you scan originals while a print job is in
progress.
17
18
2. Troubleshooting When
Using the Copy Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for copier function
problems.
When a Message Appears

This section explains the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow the instructions they contain.
Important
❒ For messages that are not listed here, see p.9 “When You Have Problems Op-
erating the Machine”.
Message Cause Solution
Cannot detect Improper original is Select paper manually, not in Auto Pa-
original size. placed. per Select mode, and do not use Auto
Reduce/Enlarge function. See “Sizes
difficult to detect”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
Cannot detect Improper original is Place the original on the exposure glass.
original size. placed. See “Placing Originals on the Exposure
Glass” and “Sizes difficult to detect”,
Cannot detect Original is not placed. Place your originals.
original size.
Check original Original is not placed in a Change the orientation of the original.
orientation. proper orientation.
Check paper size. Improper paper size is If you press the {Start} key, copy will
set. start onto the selected paper.
Rotate Sort is A size of paper for which Select the proper paper size. See “Sort”,
not available Rotate Sort is not availa- Copy/Document Server Reference.
with this paper ble is selected.
size.
Rotate Sort is A size of paper for which Select the proper paper size. See “Sort”,
not available Rotate Sort is not availa- Copy/Document Server Reference.
with this paper ble is selected.
size.
19
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function

Cannot punch this The Punch function can- The following paper sizes are available
paper size. not be used with paper for Punch mode:
size selected. • 2 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6L, A6L, 12”×18”L,
11”×17”L, Legal(81/2”×14”)L, Let-
ter(81/2”×11”)KL, Half Letter
2 (51/2”×81/2”)KL, Executive
(71/4”×101/2”)KL, F/GL
(8”×13”)L, Foolscap (81/2”×13”)L,
Folio (81/4”×13”)L, 11”×15”L,
11”×14”L, 10”×15”L, 10”×14”L,
81/4”×14”L, 8”×10”L, 8KL,
16KKL. Select one of these sizes.
• 3 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 12”×18”L,
11”×17”L, Letter(81/2”×11”)K, Ex-
ecutive (71/4”×101/2”)K,
11”×15”L, 11”×14”L, 8KL,
16KK. Select one of these sizes.
• 4 holes:
Metric version:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 12”×18”L,
11”×17”L, Letter(81/2”×11”)K, Ex-
ecutive (71/4”×101/2”)K, 11”×15”L,
11”×14”L, 10”×15”L, 10”×14”L,
8KL, 16KK. Select one of these sizes.
Narrow 2 × 2 version:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6L, 12”×18”L,
11”×17”L, Legal(81/2”×14”)L, Let-
ter(81/2”×11”)KL, Half Letter
(51/2”×81/2”)KL, Executive
(71/4”×101/2”)KL, F/GL
(8”×13”)L, Foolscap (81/2”×13”)L,
Folio (81/4”×13”)L, 11”×15”L,
11”×14”L, 10”×15”L, 10”×14”L,
8KL, 16KKL. Select one of these
sizes.
Stapling capacity The number of sheets per Check the stapler capacity. See “Sup-
exceeded. set is over the staple ca- plementary Informations”, Copy/Doc-
pacity. ument Server Reference.
Cannot staple pa- The Staple function can- Select a paper size that can be used in
per of this size. not be used with paper Staple mode. See “Supplementary In-
size selected. formations”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
20

Duplex is not A paper size not available The following paper sizes are available
available with in Duplex mode has been for Duplex mode: A3L, B4L, A4KL,
this paper size. selected. B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L,
12”×18”L, 11”×17”L, Legal
(81/2”×11”)L, Letter (81/2”×11”)KL,
Half Letter (51/2”×81/2”)KL, Execu-
tive (71/4”×101/2”)KL, F/GL
(8”×13”)L, Foolscap (8”×13”)L, Folio 2
(81/4”×13”)L, 11”×15”L, 11”×14”L,
10”×14”L, 81/4”×14”L, 8”×10”L,
8KL, 16KKL. Select one of these sizes.
Maximum number of The number of copies ex- You can change the maximum copy
sets is nn. ceeds the maximum copy quantity. See “Max. Number of Sets”,
quantity. General Settings Guide.
(A figure is placed at n.)
File being stored The scanned originals Press [Exit], and then store again with
exceeded max. have too many pages to an appropriate number of pages.
number of pages store as one document.
per file. Copying
will be stopped.
Magazine or Book- You selected the Maga- Make sure originals for the Magazine
let mode is not zine or Booklet function or Booklet function are scanned using
available due to for originals scanned us- the same function.
mixed image mode. ing different functions,
such as copy and printer.
Orig. is being Document Server or To cancel the job in process, press [Exit],
scanned by anoth- Scanner function is in and then press the {Document Server} or
er function. use. {Scanner} key. Next, press the {Stop}
Please wait. key. When the message “The Clear
/ Stop key was pressed. Are
you sure you want to stop
scanning?” appears, press [Cancel].
You do not have This user code is not al- Contact the administrator.
the privileges to lowed to use the function
use this func- selected.
tion.
You do not have This user code is not al- If the message continues to be dis-
the privileges to lowed to use the function played and you cannot switch the
use this func- selected. screen, press the {Energy Saver} key.
tion. Confirm that the display goes off, and
then press the {Energy Saver} key again.
The display will return to the user code
entry display. When printing under the
copier or printer function, press {Energy
Saver} only after printing has finished.
21

Authentication The entered login user Inquire the user administrator for the
has failed. name or login password correct login user name and login pass-
is not correct. word.
Authentication The machine cannot per- Contact the administrator.
has failed. form authentication.
The selected You have tried to delete Files can be deleted by the person who
2 file(s) contained files without the authori- created the file. To delete a file which
file(s) without ty to do so. you are not authorized to delete, con-
access privileg- tact the person who created the file.
es. Only file(s)
with access priv-
ileges will be
deleted.
Please wait. The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
updated from the network not switch off the power while this
using SmartDeviceMoni- message is displayed.
tor for Admin. Depending
on the number of destina-
tions to be updated, there
may be some delay before
you can resume operation.
Operations are not possi-
ble while this message is
displayed.
It will be neces- A misfeed occurred when Remove the jammed sheet.
sary to start unneeded tab stock was If cycle printing is specified for tab
over and reload ejected. stock sheets, both needed and unneed-
the tab stock to ed tab stock is ejected when copying re-
the trays. starts. Reload the tab stock trays before
the new print cycle begins.
After resetting the tab stock pages,
press [Exit]. To resume printing, press
the {Start} key.
22
❖ Connect Copy
Cannot connect to • The L indicator is lit. Press [Exit] on the main machine and
the sub-machine. • The hard disk of the follow the instructions on the display.
Check the status of sub-machine is mal-
the sub-machine. functioning.
A paper misfeed has oc- Follow the instructions displayed. For
Cannot print from
the sub-machine. curred on the sub-ma- details, see p.87 “Adding Toner”, p.93 2
Check the status of chine, or toner or other “Removing Jammed Paper”, p.106 “Re-
the sub-machine. supplies need to be removing Jammed Staples”.
plenished. If the sub-machine's display indicates
that a cover is open, follow the instruc-
tions displayed.
Cannot print from The sub-machine's User Press the {User Tools} key to close the
the sub-machine. Tools menu is open. User Tools menu.
Check the status of
the sub-machine.
Sub-machine is in The sub-machine is in In- Press the {Interrupt} key on the sub-ma-
Interrupt mode. terrupt mode. chine to cancel Interrupt mode.
Sub-machine does Paper type or tray set- Make the same settings on both ma-
not have the same tings on the two machines.
paper setting(s). chines do not match.
The Cover Sheet Cover settings on the two Make the same settings on both ma-
setting(s) of the machines do not match. chines.
sub-machine is
different from
the main machine.
The Slip Sheet Slip Sheet settings on the Make the same settings on both ma-
setting(s) of the two machines do not chines.
sub-machine is match.
different from
the main machine.
The Designation Designation Sheet set- Make the same settings on both ma-
Sheet setting(s) tings on the two machines.
of sub-machine is chines do not match.
different from
main machine.
Sub-machine paper Paper tray settings on the Make the same settings on both ma-
settings must be two machines do not chines.
the same to use match.
this tray.
No stamp data in Stamp data on the sub-ma- Reprogram the stamp on the sub-ma-
the sub-machine. chine has been deleted. chine.
23

Cannot print from The sub-machine has Continue copying using the main ma-
the sub-machine. stopped due to power fail- chine.
Sub-machine will ure or communication error.
be disconnected.
Z-fold is availa- Sort has not been selected Select the Sort function.
ble only when with Z-fold.
2 Sort mode is se-
lected in Connect
Copy.
Reference
p.9 “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”
24
Display During Connect Copy
Display During Connect Copy

This section explains about the display during Connect Copy.
[Connect Copy] is not dis- The sub-machine's main Turn on the sub-machine's main power.
played. power is off.
[Connect Copy] is not dis- Functions that cannot be Cancel the functions selected on the 2
played. used with Connect Copy main machine.
are selected on the main
machine (such as storing
or copying the first page
of a document in the Doc-
ument Server).
[Connect Copy] is not dis- The main machine is in Press the {Interrupt} key on the sub-ma-
played. Interrupt mode. chine to cancel Interrupt mode.
[Connect Copy] is not dis- The [Connect Copy Key Dis- Select [Display] for the [Connect Copy Key
played. play] setting is off. Display] setting.
[Connect Copy] is not dis- The cable connecting the Contact your service representative.
played. two machines is dam-
aged.
[Connect Copy] is not dis- The L is lit. Follow the instructions displayed.
played.
[Connect Copy] appears Functions that cannot be Press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the
faded. used with Connect Copy settings.
have been set.
25
If Connect Copy is Cancelled

This section explains about causes and remedies when Connect Copy is cancelled.
The machine cancels The main machine's Turn on the sub-machine's main power
Connect Copy. main power is off, or the or operation switch, and then press
2 operation switch has
been pressed.
[Connect Copy].
The machine cancels The sub-machine's main A message instructing you to check the
Connect Copy. power is off. sub-machine appears on the display of
the main machine. Press [Cancel] to clear
Connect Copy. Turn on the sub-ma-
chine's main power, press [Connect
Copy] and then make your settings
again.
The machine cancels The Weekly Timer set- Turn on the main machine's operation
Connect Copy. ting is coming into effect switch , and then press [Connect Copy].
on the main machine.
An error message indi- The L is lit. Copying is not possible. Follow the in-
cates the main machine structions displayed.
has broken down.
26
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy

This section explains about causes and remedies if you cannot exit from Connect Copy.
There is no response when Scanning is in progress. Press the {Stop} key on the main ma-
you press [Connect Copy]. chine, and then press [Stop].
There is no response when Copying is in progress. Press the {Stop} key on the main ma- 2
you press [Connect Copy]. chine, and then press [Stop].
There is no response when A paper misfeed has oc- Follow the instructions displayed.
you press [Connect Copy]. curred on either the main For details, see p.93 “Removing
machine or sub-machine. Jammed Paper” and p.106 “Removing
Jammed Staples”.
If the sub-machine's display indicates
that a cover is open, follow the instruc-
tions displayed.
There is no response when A paper misfeed has oc- To cancel Connect Copy, Press the
you press [Connect Copy]. curred on either the main {Stop} key on the main machine, and
or sub-machine. then press [Stop].
There is no response when A paper misfeed has oc- Follow the instructions displayed.
you press [Connect Copy]. curred on one of the ma- For details, see p.65 “Loading paper”,
chine, or toner or other p.87 “Adding Toner”, and p.93 “Re-
supplies need to be removing Jammed Paper”.
placed.
There is no response when A paper misfeed has oc- To cancel Connect Copy, press the
you press [Connect Copy]. curred on one of the ma- {Stop} key on the main machine, and
chine, or toner or other then press [Stop].
supplies need to be re-
placed.
There is no response when A paper misfeed has oc- Removed the jammed paper.
you press [Connect Copy]. curred during stapling. For details, see p.106 “Removing
Jammed Staples”.
To cancel Connect Copy, press the
{Stop} key on the main machine, and
then press [Stop].
27
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Copies appear dirty. Image density is too high. Adjust the image density. See “Adjust-
ing Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
2 ment Server Reference.
Copies appear dirty. Auto Image Density is Adjust the auto density. See “Adjusting
not selected. Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
ment Server Reference.
The reverse side of an Image density is too high. Adjust the image density. See “Adjust-
original image is copied. ing Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
The reverse side of an Auto Image Density is Adjust the auto density. See “Adjusting
original image is copied. not selected. Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
A shadow appears on Image density is too high. Adjust the image density. See “Adjust-
copies if you use pasted ing Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
originals. ment Server Reference.
Change the orientation of the original.
Put mending tape on the pasted part.
The same copy area is The exposure glass or Clean them. See p.114 “Maintaining
dirty whenever making ADF is dirty. Your Machine”.
copies.
The same copy area is [Original Type Select] is set Press [Others], select [Generation Copy],
dirty whenever making to [Text / Photo], and an and then begin copying. See “Genera-
copies. original with text and tion Copy”, Copy/Document Server
photographs that can Reference.
hardly be distinguished
from each other is loaded.
Copies are too light. Image density is too light. Adjust the image density. See “Adjust-
ing Copy Image Density”, Copy/Docu-
Copies are too light. A light copy may result Use the recommended paper. See
when you use damp or “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
rough grain paper. Contact your service representative.
Copies are too light. Toner bottle is almost Add toner. See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
empty.
28
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Copies are too light. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and hu-
midity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
Parts of images are not The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. See “Placing
copied. rectly. Originals”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
Parts of images are not The correct paper size is Select the proper paper size.
2
copied. not selected.
Images appear only par- The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
tially. recommended temperature and hu-
About This Machine.
Black lines appear. The exposure glass is Clean them. See p.114 “Maintaining
dirty. Your Machine”.
White lines appear. The exposure glass is Clean them. See p.114 “Maintaining
dirty. Your Machine”.
White lines appear. When D is blinking, ton- Add toner. See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
er is beginning to run out.
Copies are blank. The original is not set cor- When using the exposure glass, face the
rectly. originals down. When using the ADF,
face them up.
A moiré pattern is pro- Your original has a dot Place the original on the exposure glass
duced on copies. pattern image or many at a slight angle.
lines.
Black spots appear on the Because of high humidi- Place the print on the exposure glass in
copy of a photographic ty, the photographic print either of the following ways:
print. has stuck to the exposure • Place an OHP transparency on the
glass. exposure glass, and then place the
print on top of the OHP transparen-
cy.
• Place the print on the exposure
glass, and then place two or three
sheets of white paper on top of it.
Leave the auto-document feeder
(ADF) open when copying.
29
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
❖ Basic
2 Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets Load paper only as high as the upper
loaded exceeds the capac- limit markings on the side fence of the
ity of the machine. paper tray or bypass tray. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and hu-
About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or Use recommended paper. See “Copy
too thin. Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is Use recommended paper. Use paper
wrinkled or has been that has been stored in the recommend-
folded/creased. ed temperature and humidity condi-
tion. See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being Use recommended paper. Do not use
used. paper that has been already copied or
printed onto. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
Copy paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
creased. recommended temperature and hu-
About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. See “Copy
creased. Paper”, About This Machine.
Copies are not stapled. There are jammed staples Remove jammed staples. See p.106 “Re-
in the stapler. moving Jammed Staples”.
Copies are not stapled. The number of copies ex- Check the stapler capacity. See “Sup-
ceeds the capacity of the plementary Informations”, Copy/Doc-
stapler. ument Server Reference.
Copies are not stapled. Copy paper is curled. Turn the copy paper over in the tray.
Staples are wrongly posi- Originals are not set cor- Check the correct position to place the
tioned. rectly. originals. See “Staple”, Copy/Docu-
30

You cannot combine sev- Selected functions cannot Check the combination of functions
eral functions. be used together. and make the settings again. See “Func-
tion Compatibility”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
When sorting, the pages The memory became full You can interrupt copying when the
are divided into two in the middle of sorting memory becomes full. See “Memory
blocks. and the pages were deliv- Full Auto Scan Restart”, General Set-
ered in two blocks. tings Guide. 2
Paper does not output When you stop printing Press the {Clear Modes} key and cancel
during printing with sta- while using the staple copy settings, including stapling.
pling. function, paper not sta-
pled during printing may
be left in the staple unit.
The copy is grayed out or You have copied a copy- Check the document. See “Using [Data
a text pattern appears in guarded document pro- Security for Copying]”, Printer Reference.
the background of the tected from unauthorized
copy. copying.
Images are skewed. The side fences in the pa- Make sure the paper guide is locked.
per feed tray is not See p.75 “Changing the Paper Size”.
locked.
Images are skewed. The paper is feeding in at Load the paper correctly. See p.65
a slant. “Loading paper”.
❖ Edit
In Double Copies mode, Combination of original Select A3L for A4K originals and A4
parts of the original im- and copy paper is not cor- for A5 originals.
age are not copied. rect.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- You set a wide erased Make the margin width narrower. You
tre/ Border mode, parts margin. can adjust it between 2 - 99 mm (0.1” -
of the original image are 3.9”). See “Erase Border Width” and
not copied. “Erase Centre Width”, General Settings
Guide.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- Originals are not scanned Place the originals correctly.
tre/ Border mode, parts correctly.
of the original image are
not copied.
In Margin Adjustment You set a wide erased Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
mode, parts of the origi- margin. You can set the width between 0 - 30
nal image are not copied. mm (0” - 1.2”).
See “Front Margin: Left/Right”, “Back
Margin: Left/Right”, “Front Margin:
Top/Bottom” and “Back Margin:
Top/Bottom”, General Settings Guide.
31

In Margin Adjustment There is a lack of margin Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
mode, parts of the origi- space on the opposite You can set the width between 0 - 30
nal image are not copied. side of the binding posi- mm (0” - 1.2”).
tion. See “Front Margin: Left/Right”, “Back
Margin: Left/Right”, “Front Margin:
Top/Bottom” and “Back Margin:
Top/Bottom”, General Settings Guide.
2 In Image Repeat mode, You selected copy paper Select copy paper larger than the origi-
the original image is not the same size as the originals or select the proper reproduction
copied repeatedly. nals, or you did not select ratio.
the proper reproduction
ratio.
❖ Stamp
The stamp position is The paper orientation is Check the paper orientation and stamp
wrong. wrong. position.
The stamp is not printed The back side stamp posi- Reset the back side stamp position. See
on the back side of sheets tion is incorrect for the “Back Side Stamp Position in Duplex”,
when duplex copying. paper size. General Settings Guide.
❖ Combine
You cannot make a book You selected a setting Change the setting. See “Orientation:
from Booklet or Maga- (“Open to left”or “Open Booklet, Magazine”, General Settings
zine mode by folding to right”) that does not Guide.
copies. match the orientation of
originals.
When using Combine, You specified a reproduc- When you specify a reproduction ratio
parts of the image are not tion ratio that does not using Manual Paper Select mode, make
copied. match the sizes of your sure that the ratio matches your origi-
originals and copy paper. nals and the copy paper. Select the cor-
rect reproduction ratio before using
Combine mode.
Copies are not in correct You placed the originals When placing a stack of originals in the
order. in the incorrect order. ADF, the last page should be on the bot-
tom.
If you place an original on the exposure
glass, start with the first page to be cop-
ied.
32
❖ Duplex
Cannot print in duplex You have selected a tray Set the tray to [2 Sided Copy] in [Tray Pa-
mode. which is set to [1 Sided per Settings] in [System Settings]. See
Copy] in [Tray Paper Set- “System Settings”, General Settings
tings] in [System Settings]. Guide.
Copies are not in correct You placed the originals When placing a stack of originals in the
order. in the incorrect order. ADF, the last page should be on the bot- 2
tom.
If you place an original on the exposure
glass, start with the first page to be cop-
ied.
When using Duplex, You placed the originals Place the original in the correct orienta-
copy is made Top to Bot- in the wrong orientation. tion. See “Original Orientation”,
tom even though [Top to Copy/Document Server Reference.
Top] is selected.
❖ Connect Copy
You cannot staple, The main and sub-ma- Press [Connect Copy] to cancel Connect
punch, or Z-fold. chines do not have the Copy.
same option installed.
You get different copy re- The Copy Quality setting Make the same Copy Quality setting
sults from the main and differs on the two ma- one the two machines.
sub-machines. chines.
33
When Memory is Full

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related
to full memory.
Memory is full. The scanned originals ex- Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
2 nn originals have ceeds the number of pag-
es that can be stored in
and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Stop] to cancel the scanning data and
been scanned.
memory. not copy.
Press [Print] to
copy scanned
originals. Do not
remove remaining
originals.
“n” in the message repre-
sents a changeable
number.
Press [Continue] The machine checked if To continue copying, remove all copies,
to scan and copy the remaining originals and then press [Resume Printing]. To
remaining origi- should be copied, after stop copying, press [Stop].
nals. the scanned originals was
printed.
❖ Connect Copy
Sub-machine memo- The quantity of data ex- Continue printing on the main ma-
ry is full. Sub- ceeds the capacity of the chine.
machine will be sub-machine.
disconnected.
Note
❒ If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in User Tools to [On], even if the mem-
ory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The
machine will make copies of the scanned originals first, then automatically
proceed scanning and copying the remaining originals. In this case, the result-
ing sorted pages will not be sequential. See “Input / Output”, General Set-
tings Guide.
34
Using the Printer Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function
problems.
When a Message Appears during

Installation of the Printer Driver
This section explains what to do if a message appears when installing the printer
driver.
The following describes operations when a message appears during installation
of the printer driver. Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver
cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer]
or [Install Printer].
Windows 95/98/Me
This section explains the procedure under Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• RPCS (“Printers Drivers and Utilities” CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e (“Printers Drivers and Utilities” CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6 (“Printers Drivers and Utilities” CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3 (“Scanner Driver and Utilities” CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
35
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Windows 2000
This section explains the procedure under Windows 2000.

3 • RPCS (“Printers Drivers and Utilities” CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

This section explains the procedure under Windows XP or Windows Server
2003.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click [Add a printer].
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
36
When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver
Windows NT 4.0
This section explains the procedure under Windows NT 4.0.

3
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
37
If USB Connection Fails

This section explains how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connection.
The machine is not auto- The USB cable is not con- Turn off the power of the machine, re-
matically recognized. nected properly. connect the USB cable, and then turn it
on again.
Windows has already Check whether the com- Open Windows' Device Manager, and
configured the USB set- puter has identified the then, under [Universal Serial Bus control-
3 tings. machine as an unsup-
ported device.
lers], remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a [!] or [?] icon
by them. Take care not to accidentally
remove required devices. For details,
see Windows Help.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or
Windows Server 2003, an erroneous de-
vice is displayed under [USB Controller]
in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
Windows Me and the ma- You need to download Download USB Printing Support from
chine cannot be connect- USB Printing Support for the supplier's website.
ed. Windows Me. Search the model name you use on the
supplier's website, and download USB
Printing Support.
38

This section describes the principal messages that appear on the panel display.
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see “Turning On/Off the Power”, About
This Machine.
Status Messages 3
This section describes the machine status messages.
Message Problem
Ready This is the default ready message. The machine is ready
for use. No action is required.
Printing... The machine is printing. Wait a while.
Waiting... The machine is waiting for the next data to print.

Wait a while.
Offline The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the ma-
chine online by pressing {Online} key.
Please wait. The machine is preparing the development unit.
Wait a while.
Resetting job... The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until
“Ready” appears on the display panel.
Setting change... The machine is setting changing. Wait a while.
Hex Dump Mode In the Hex Dump mode, the machine receives data in
hexadecimal format. Turn off the machine after print-
ing, and then turn back on.
39
Alert Messages
This section describes the machine Alert messages.
Cannot connect with • IEEE 802.11b interface Turn off the machine and check the
the wireless card. unit was not inserted IEEE 802.11b interface unit is inserted
Turn the main power when the machine was correctly. Then, turn the machine on
switch off, then turned on, or it was again. If the message appears again, call
check the card. pulled out after the your service representative.
machine turned on.
/ Problems with the
3 wireless card. • The settings are not
/ Problems with the updated although the
unit is detected, or er-
wireless board.
rors are found while
accessing the unit.
Problems with An error may have oc- Turn off the main power switch, and back
IEEE 1394 Board. curred in the IEEE 1394 on again. If the message appears again,
board. contact your service representative.
Problem with Hard An error has occurred in Turn off the main power switch, and back
Disk. the hard disk drive. on again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
The entered pass- The password of the en- Enter the correct password.
word is incorrect. crypted PDF file has been
entered incorrectly.
USB has a problem. An error has occurred in Turn off the main power switch, and back
the USB interface. on again. If the message appears again,
Hardware Problem: An error has occurred in Turn off the main power switch, and back
Ethernet the Ethernet board. on again. If the message appears again,
You do not have Use of this function is re- Contact the administrator.
the privileges to stricted.
use this function.
Authentication • The login user name • Check your login user name and
has failed. or password entered password.
is incorrect. • Contact the administrator.
• The machine current-
ly cannot perform au-
thentication.
Parallel I/F board An error has occurred in Turn off the main power switch, and back
has a problem. the parallel interface on again. If the message appears again,
board. contact your service representative.
Printer font er- An error has occurred in Contact your service representative.
ror. the font settings.
40

Memory Overflow Maximum capacity of Reduce the value of [Resolution] in the
PCL 5e/6 or PostScript printer driver. Alternatively, select
3 list display has been [Frame Priority] from [Memory Usage] in
exceeded. [System]. If this message continues to
appear after taking these steps, de-
crease the number of files sent to the
machine.
Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
3
by checking the error log on the control panel.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
ANR101S
B Press [Error Log].
An error log list appears.

Note
❒ The most recent 50 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 50 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. How-
ever, if the earliest error is a Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, or
Stored print error, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the
number of errors reaches 30.
❒ If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
41
When You Cannot Print

Use the following procedures if printing does not start even after performing [Print].
Printing does not start. The power is off. Check the cable is securely plugged
into the power outlet and the machine.
Turn on the main power switch.
Printing does not start. The machine is set to “Of- Press the {Online} key.
fline”.
3 Printing does not start. The cause is displayed on Check the error message or warning
the display of the control status on the display panel and take the
panel. required action.
Printing does not start. The interface cable is not Connect the interface cable securely. If
connected correctly. it has a fastener, fasten that securely as
well. See “Connecting to the Interfac-
es”, General Settings Guide.
Printing does not start. The correct interface ca- The type of interface cable you should
ble is not being used. use depends on the computer. Be sure
to use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. See “Con-
necting to the Interfaces”, General Set-
tings Guide.
Printing does not start. The interface cable was Connect the interface cable before turn-
connected after the ma- ing on the machine.
chine was switched on.
Printing does not start. If the machine is operat- To check signal status, press the {User
ing in an extended wire- Tools} key, and then press [System Set-
less LAN, failure to print tings] on the display panel. On the [Inter-
might result from a weak face Settings] tab, select [IEEE 802.11b],
wireless signal. and then press [Wireless LAN Signal]. If
signal quality is poor, move the ma-
chine to a location where radio waves
can pass or remove objects that might
cause interference.
(You can check signal status only when
using wireless LAN in the infrastruc-
ture mode.)
Printing does not start. If the machine is operat- Check using the machine's display pan-
ing in an extended wire- el that the SSID is correctly set. See
less LAN, SSID settings “Network Settings”, General Settings
are incorrect. Guide.
42
When You Cannot Print

Printing does not start. If the machine is operat- Check access point settings when in the
ing in an extended wire- infrastructure mode. Depending on the
less LAN, the receiver's access point, client access may be limit-
MAC address may be ed by MAC address. Also, check there
preventing communica- are no problems in transmission be-
tion with the access point. tween access point and wired clients,
and between access point and wireless
clients.
Printing does not start. The extended wireless Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the
LAN has not started. green LED is lit or blinks during trans-
mission.
3
Printing does not start. The login user name, Check the login user name, login pass-
login password, or driver word, or driver encryption key.
encryption key is invalid.
Printing does not start. Advanced encryption has Check the settings of the Extended Se-
been set using the Ex- curity function with the administrator.
tended Security function.
Data-in lamp does not If the data-in lamp is unlit • When the machine is connected to a
blink or light up. or not flashing even after computer via a cable, check the
performing [Print], the computer print port settings are cor-
machine has not received rect. See “Confirming the Connec-
the data. tion Method”, Printer Reference.
• When it is networked with a com-
puter, Contact the administrator.
The status indicator of The cause is displayed on Check the error message on the display
the printer is lit. the display of the control panel and take required action. See p.39
panel. “When a Message Appears”.
“Updating the des- The destination list is be- Wait until the message disappears. Do
tination list... ing updated from the not switch off the power while this mes-
Please wait. Speci- network using SmartDe- sage is displayed. Depending on the
fied destination(s) viceMonitor for Admin. number of destinations to be updated,
or sender's name there may be some delay before you can
resume operation. Operations are not
has been cleared.”
possible while this message is displayed.
appears.
[List / Test Print] is disa- A mechanical error might Contact your service representative.
bled. have occurred. See “List/Test Print”, General Settings
Guide.
Printing does not start The correct Communica- Turn the main power off and back on.
when using the extended tion mode is not set. See “Turning On/Off the Power”,
wireless LAN in Ad-hoc About This Machine.
mode. Or, change the settings for [System Set-
tings], [Interface Settings], and [Network].
See “Network Settings”, General Set-
tings Guide.
If the printing does not start, consult your service representative.
43
❖ When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
The following shows how to check the print port when the data-in lamp does
not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel
interface, connect it to LPT1 or LPT2.
For Windows 95/98/Me

A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
3 D In the [Print to the following port:] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0

A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2003

A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
44
Other Printing Problems

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Print is smudges. Settings for thick pa- • PCL 5e/6 and PostScript 3
per have not been Select [Thick] in the [Type:] list on the [Paper]
made when printing tab.
on thick paper in the • RPCS
bypass tray. Select [Thick] in the [Paper type:] list on the
[Print Settings] tab. 3
The print on the entire When D is blinking, Add toner. See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
page is faded. toner is beginning to
run out.
The print on the entire The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the recom-
page is faded. mended temperature and humidity condition.
See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
The print on the entire The paper is unsuita- Use the recommended paper. (Printing on
page is faded. ble. coarse or treated paper might result in faint
print image.) See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
The print on the entire If the [Toner saving] For the RPCS printer driver, [Toner saving] is lo-
page is faded. check box is selected cated on the [Print Quality] tab. For the Post-
in the printer driver Script 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3
settings, the entire Supplement. See the printer driver Help.
page will be faded
when printed.
Image bleeds when If you are using thick On the printer driver's [Setup] tab, set [Paper
rubbed. paper, [Paper type:] type:] to [Thick]. See the printer driver Help.
might not be set to
[Thick].
Paper is not fed from When you are using a Set the desired input tray using the printer
the selected tray. Windows operating driver. See the printer driver Help.
system, printer driver
settings override
those set using the
display panel.
The printed image is With certain func- In the application, change the layout, character
different from the im- tions, such as enlarge- size, and character settings.
age on the computer's ment and reduction,
display. image layout might
be different to that on
the computer display.
The printed image is You might have se- To print an image similar to that of the compu-
different from the im- lected to replace True ter display, make settings to print True Type
age on the computer's Type fonts with ma- fonts as an image. See the printer driver Help.
display. chine fonts in the
printing process.
45

Images are printed at The tray's side fences Check the side fences are locked. See p.75
slant. might not be locked. “Changing the Paper Size”.
Print is slanted. The paper is feeding Load the paper correctly. See p.65 “Loading
in at a slant. paper”.
Misfeeds occur fre- The number of sheets Load paper only as high as the upper limit mark-
quently. loaded exceeds the ca- ings on the side fences of the paper tray or bypass
pacity of the machine. tray. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur fre- The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the recom-
quently. mended temperature and humidity condition.
3 See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur fre- The paper is too thick Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”,
quently. or too thin. About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur fre- The copy paper is Use recommended paper. Use paper that has
quently. wrinkled or has been been stored in the recommended temperature
folded/creased. and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur fre- Printed paper is being Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”,
quently. used. About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the recom-
creased. mended temperature and humidity condition.
See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”,
creased. About This Machine.
White lines appear. When D is blinking, Add toner. See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
toner is beginning to
run out.
When printing graph- If the printer driver is If you want to print accurately, set the printer
ics, the output and the configured to use the driver to print without using the graphics
screen are different. graphics command, command. See the printer driver Help.
the graphics com-
mand from the ma-
chine is used to print.
Garbled characters The correct printer Set the correct printer language.
are printed. language might have
not been selected.
Images are printed in The feed orientation Set the machine's feed orientation and the
the wrong orienta- you selected and the printer driver's feed orientation accordingly.
tion. feed orientation select- See the printer driver Help.
ed in the printer driv-
er's option setup might
not be the same.
There is considerable “Off mode / Sleep The machine requires time to warm up if it has
delay between the mode” might be set. been in “Off mode/Sleep mode”. Specify “Off
print start instruction mode/Sleep mode” in [System Settings], [Auto
and actual printing. Off Timer].
46

There is considerable Processing time de- If the data-in lamp is blinking, data has been
delay between the pends on data vol- received by the printer. Wait for a moment.
print start instruction ume. High volume Making the following setting on the printer
and actual printing. data, such as graph- driver may reduce the computer's workload.
ics-heavy documents,
take longer to process. ❖ PCL 5e/6
Select the lower value for [Resolution] on
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer proper-
ties dialog box.
❖ PostScript 3
Select the lower value in [Resolution]. The
3
location of this setting is given below. If
your operating system is Windows, select
[PostScript (optimize for speed)] in [PostScript
Output Option]. [PostScript Output Option] is
located as follows:
• Windows 95 / 98 / Me
[Print Quality] tab in the printer proper-
ties dialog box.
• Windows 2000 / XP, Windows 2003
Server
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript
Options] on [Advanced...] on [Layout] tab
in the printing preferences dialog box.
• Windows NT 4.0
[File] on [Advanced...] on [Document De-
faults] tab in the printing preferences di-
alog box.
• Mac OS 9.x
[Printer Specifications] in the print dialog
box.
• Mac OS X
[Set 3] tab in [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
If you use Windows, select [PostScript (opti-
mize for speed)].
• Windows 95 / 98 / Me
[PostScript output format:] on the [Post-
Script] tab in the printer properties dia-
log box.
• Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server
2003
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript
Options] on [Advanced...] on [Layout] tab
in the printing preferences dialog box.
• Windows NT 4.0
[File] on [Document Defaults] on [Ad-
vanced...] tab in the printing preferences
dialog box.
47

There is considerable Processing time de- ❖ RPCS
delay between the pends on data vol- Select the lower value for [Resolution:] on
print start instruction ume. High volume the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's
and actual printing. data, such as graph- dialog box.
ics-heavy documents, Select [Fast] for the [Document type] list on
take longer to process. the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's
dialog box.
To enable [Change User Settings...], select the
[User settings] check box.
See the printer driver Help.
3 Paper is discharged The time specified in Under [Printer Features], set [Feed Timeout] to
when printing is only [Feed Timeout] under [Off], or increase the specified time. See “Sys-
half complete, or a [Printer Features] might tem”, General Settings Guide.
single page is printed be too short.
over two pages.
Images are cut off, or You may be using pa- Use the same size paper as that selected in the
excess is printed. per smaller than the application. If you cannot load paper of the
size selected in the ap- correct size, use the reduction function to re-
plication. duce the image, and then print. See the printer
driver Help.
Page layout is not as Print areas differ de- Adjust the [Printable area:] setting in the [Printer
expected. pending on machine Configuration...] dialog box on the [Print Settings]
used. Information that tab in the RPCS printer driver. See the printer
fits on a single page on driver Help.
one machine may not
fit on a single page of
another machine.
Photo images are Some applications Use the application's settings to specify a high-
coarse. print at lower resolu- er resolution.
tion.
Solid lines are printed Dither patterns do not Make the following settings with the printer
as broken lines. match. driver: Change the [Dithering:] setting on the
[Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Set-
tings...] dialog box, on the [Print Quality] tab in
the RPCS printer driver. See the printer driver
Help.
Optional components Bidirectional commu- Set up optional devices on the Properties of the
connected to the ma- nication is not work- printer.
chine are not recog- ing. See the printer driver Help.
nized when using
Windows 95 / 98 /
Me, Windows 2000 /
XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows
NT 4.0.
48

The printer language Under [Printer Features], Specify a longer time for [I/O Timeout], or set
changes during print- when [Emulation SW] is [Emulation SW] to “Off”. See “System” and “In-
ing. set to “On” and the terface Setting”, General Settings Guide.
time specified for [I/O
Timeout] is too short,
the printer language
can change mid-print.
Duplex printing is Duplex printing can- When using duplex printing, make settings to
malfunctioning. not be done with paper use paper from a tray other than the bypass
set in the bypass tray. tray.
Duplex printing is The upper tray cannot Specify a another output tray. 3
malfunctioning. be used as an output
destination in duplex
mode.
Duplex printing is Duplex printing can- Change the Paper Type setting for the tray to
malfunctioning. not be done with a tray [2 Sided Copy] on the System Settings menu.
for which [1 Sided Copy] See “System Settings”, General Settings
has been specified as Guide.
Paper Type on the Sys-
tem Settings menu.
When using Windows The correct applica- Make sure the application's paper size and ori-
95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / tion or printer driver entation settings match those of the printer
XP, Windows Server settings are not made. driver. If a different paper size and orientation
2003, or Windows NT are set, select the same size and orientation.
4.0, combined printing
or booklet printing
does not come out as
expected.
A print instruction User Authentication Contact the administrators.
was issued from the may have been set.
computer, but print-
ing did not start.
No transmission • Interface connec- Check using the following procedure:
when using 1394 in- tion has not been A Confirm the IEEE 1394 interface cable is
terface connection. made. connected securely.
• The correct com- B Restart the computer. If the error occurs
puter settings are even after executing the above operation,
not made. proceed to the following steps.
C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable con-
nected to the computer.
D Run the utility tool for the IEEE 1394 interface
board, which is stored in the following path on
the CD-ROM “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
\UTILITY\1394\
(For more information about using the util-
ity tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file
in the same directory on the CD-ROM.)
E Restart the computer.
49

PDF files do not print PDF files are pass- To print password-protected PDF files, enter
out/cannot perform word-protected. the password in the [PDF Menu] or on Web Im-
[PDF Direct Print]. age Monitor.
• For details about [PDF Menu], see “PDF
Menu”, General Settings Guide.
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see
the Web Image Monitor Help.
PDF files do not print PDF files cannot be Change the PDF File Security setting.
out/cannot perform printed if they are
[PDF Direct Print]. print-disabled via
3 PDF File Security.
PDF files do not print High compression Open the application used to create the PDF,
out/cannot perform PDF files created us- and then print the file using the application's
[PDF Direct Print]. ing the machine's driver.
scanner function can- Re-save the file in normal (non-compressed)
not print directly. PDF format.
Some types of High Compression PDF files are
not supported. Consult your sales representa-
tive about the supported file types.
[PDF Direct Print] pro- Fonts were not em- Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to print
duces strange or mal- bedded. and then print.
formed characters.
Printing by Bluetooth The number of jobs Reduce the number of jobs.
is slow. exceeds the capacity
of the machine.
Printing by Bluetooth • A communication • Remove the machine from close proximity
is slow. error might have with IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN devices.
occurred. • If there are active IEEE 802.11b wireless
• Interference from LAN devices or other Bluetooth devices
IEEE 802.11b nearby, relocate the machine or disable
(wireless LAN) those devices.
devices can reduce
communication
speed.
• Bluetooth trans-
mission speeds are
not high.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your service representative.
50
Using the Scanner Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function
problems.
When Scanning is Not Done as Expected

This section explains causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.
The scanned image is The exposure glass or auto docu- Clean these parts. See p.114
dirty. ment feeder (ADF) is dirty. “Maintaining Your Machine”.
The image is distorted The original was moved during Do not move the original during
or out of position. scanning. scanning.
The image is distorted The original was not pressed flat Make sure that the original is
or out of position. against the exposure glass. pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The scanned image is The original was placed upside Place the original in the correct
upside down. down. orientation. See “Placing Origi-
nals”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
No image results from The original was placed with the When the original is placed direct-
scanning. front and back reversed. ly on the exposure glass, the side
to be scanned must face down.
When the original is fed via the
ADF, the side to be scanned must
face up. See “Placing Originals”,
Copy/Document Server Refer-
ence.
Images are scanned in If you set the original with its up- When placing a stack of originals
rotated. per edge backward and save full in the ADF, place their upper
colour/grey scale images as a edges first.
TIFF or JPEG file, they are
scanned in rotated.
The scanned image • If you scan originals using Scanning at a higher resolution
contains white spaces. functions other than the net- may reduce the margins.
work TWAIN scanner func-
tion, certain paper size and
resolution settings may pro-
duce scanned images that are
larger than the specified size
because of margins being
added to the sides.
• If the File Format Converter
(optional ) is installed, the
margins may become wider.
51
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

The following sections explain likely causes of and solutions for Network Deliv-
ery and E-mail Sending-related problems.
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for job access-relat-
ed problems.
The stored file is locked The file, which is password pro- Contact the administrator.
and is not accessible. tected, is locked because the pass-
4 word was incorrectly entered ten
times.
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Browser Net-
work failing to operate when files are sent.
The network cannot be The following machine settings Check the settings. See “Network
browsed when specify- may not be correct: Settings ”, General Settings
ing the destination fold- • IPv4 address Guide.
er.
• Subnet Mask
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driv-
er failing to operate.
The Scanner Properties Advanced encryption has been For details about the extended se-
dialog box cannot be specified in the extended security curity setting, contact an admin-
displayed. setting. istrator.
52
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driv-
er failing to operate.
Stored files cannot be Limits have been imposed using Contact the administrator.
deleted. File names and the available extended security
passwords cannot be function.
changed. Files cannot
be redelivered.
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Network De-
4
livery function failing to operate.
The network delivery The delivery software may be an Contact the administrator.
function cannot be old version or a security setting
used. may be specified.
The network delivery The network delivery function Specify it correctly. See “Settings
function cannot be setting is not correct. Required to Use the Network De-
used. livery Scanner”, General Settings
Guide.
Operations are not possible when messages appear

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for messages that
appear and when the machine fails to operate.
Destination list / The destination list is being up- Wait until the message disap-
machine settings dated from the network using pears. Do not switch off the pow-
are updated. Se- SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. er while this message is
lected destina- Depending on the number of des- displayed.
tions or function tinations to be updated, there
may be some delay before you
settings have been
can resume operation. Opera-
cleared. Please tions are not possible while this
re-select the set- message is displayed.
tings.
53
When a Message is Displayed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for error messages
that may appear on the machine's control panel.
When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel

This section explains causes and remedies if an error message appears on the
display of the control panel.
Important
❒ If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For in-
formation about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This Ma-
4 chine.
Connection with A network error has oc- Try the operation once more. If the mes-
LDAP server has curred and connection sage is still shown, the network may be
failed. Check the has failed. Try the opera- crowded. Check the information of Sys-
server status. tion once more. tem Settings. See “System Settings”,
LDAP server au- The user name and pass- Make settings correctly for the user
thentication has word differ from those name and the password for LDAP serv-
failed. Check the set for LDAP Authentica- er authentication.
settings. tion.
The destination A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's

list has been up- sender's name was name again.
dated. Specified cleared when the destina-
destination(s) or tion list in the delivery
sender's name has server was updated.
been cleared.
Updating the des- A network error has oc- Check whether the server is connected.
tination list has curred.
failed. Try again?
The destination A network error has oc- If a destination or sender's name was al-
list has been up- curred. ready selected, re-select it after this
dated. Specified message disappears.
destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
54

Exceeded max. The number of files ex- Reduce the number of files and send
number of files ceeded the maximum them again.
which can be sent number possible.
at the same time.
Reduce the number
of the selected
files.
Cannot detect You have loaded paper of • Place the original correctly.
original size. a size not shown on the • Specify the scan size.
Place original paper size selector.
• When placing an original directly
again, then press on the exposure glass, the lifting/
the Start key. lowering action of the ADF triggers
the automatic original size detection
process. Lift the ADF by more than 4
30 degrees. See “Placing Originals”,
Exceeded max. No. Search results have ex- Search again after changing the search
of results to ceeded the max. display- conditions.
display. Max.: able number.
You do not have The machine has not been Contact the administrator.
the privileges to set to allow you to use the
use this function. function.
Exceeded max. The maximum number of There are 100 files waiting in the send-
number of standby standby files was exceeding queue for e-mail, Scan to Folder, or
files.Try again ed. delivery functions. Wait until files have
after the current been sent.
file is sent.
Exceeded time A network error has oc- Try the operation once more. If the mes-
limit for LDAP curred and connection sage is still shown, the network may be
server search. has failed. crowded. Check the information of Sys-
Check the server tem Settings. See “System Settings”,
status. General Settings Guide.
The specified group The specified group con- To select destinations for sending by e-
contains some des- tains some destinations mail, press [Select] for the message dis-
tination(s) that do for sending by e-mail played on the e-mail screen. To select
not have access and some destinations destination for sending by Scan to Fold-
privileges. Do you for sending by Scan to er, press [Select] for the message dis-
Folder. played on the Scan to Folder screen.
want to select only
the privileged des-
tination(s)?
55

Cannot find the The destination compu- Check whether the computer name and
specified path. ter name or folder name the folder name for the destination are
Please check the is invalid. correct.
settings.
Exceeded max. The maximum number of The maximum number of characters
number of alpha- specifiable alphanumeric which can be entered for the path is 128.
numeric charac- characters in a path has Check the number of character you en-
ters for the path. been exceeded. tered, and then enter the path again.
See “Transmission function”, Scanner
Reference.
The selected You have tried to delete The files can be deleted by the file ad-
file(s) contained files without the authori- ministrator. To delete a file which you
file(s) without ty to do so. are not authorized to delete, contact the
4 access privileg- administrator.
es. Only file(s)
with access priv-
ileges will be
deleted.
Some of selected You cannot delete a file Cancel transmission (“Waiting...”status
files are cur- which is waiting to be cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
rently in use. transmitted (“Waiting...” and then delete the file.
They could not be status displayed) or
deleted. whose information is be-
ing changed with Desk-
TopBinder.
Selected file is You cannot change the Change the file name after canceling
currently in use. name of a file whose sta- delivery or completing editing.
Cannot change tus is “Waiting...” or that
file name. is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Selected file is You cannot change the Delete the password after canceling de-
currently in use. name of a file whose sta- livery or completing editing.
Cannot change tus is “Waiting...” or that
password. is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Selected file is You cannot change the A sender's name should be specified
currently in use. password of a file whose before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
Cannot change status is “Waiting...” or specifying the sender's name.
user name. that is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
56

Connection with The correct Network set- • Check the network settings of the
the destination tings are not made. client computer.
has failed. Check • Check that components such as the
the status and LAN cable are connected properly.
connection. To • Check that the server settings are
check the current correct and the server is working
status, press properly.
[Scanned Files
Status].
Authentication The entered user name or • Check that the user name and pass-
with the destina- password was invalid. word are correct.
tion has failed. • Check that the ID and password for
Check settings. the destination folder are correct.
To check the cur- • A password of 128 or more charac- 4
rent status, ters may not be recognized.
press [Scanned
Files Status].
Sender has not The sender's name was A sender's name should be specified
been specified. not specified. before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
specifying the sender's name.
Exceeded max. E- The maximum e-mail size • Increase the size of [Max. E-mail Size].
mail size. Sending has been exceeded. • Set [Divide & Send E-mail] to [Yes (per
E-mail has been Page)] or [Yes (per Max. Size)].
cancelled. Check See “Send Settings”, General Settings
[Max. E-mail Size] Guide.
in Scanner Fea-
tures.
Sending the data A network error has oc- Wait until sending is retried automati-
has failed. The curred and a file was not cally after the preset interval. If sending
data will be resent correctly. fails again, contact the administrator.
sent later.
Transmission has While a file was being Try the operation once more. If the mes-
failed. To check sent, a network error oc- sage is still shown, the network may be
the current sta- curred and the file could crowded. Contact the administrator. If
tus, press not be sent correctly. multiple files were sent, use the
[Scanned Files Scanned Files Status screen to check for
which file the problem occurred.
Status].
57

Transmission has Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.
failed. Insuffi- There was not enough
cient memory in free space on the hard
the destination disk of the SMTP server,
hard disk. To FTP server, or client com-
puter at the destination.
check the current
status, press
[Scanned Files
Status].
Output buffer is The file being stored has Specify whether to use the data or not.
full. Sending the exceeded the max. Scan the pages that were not scanned
data has been number of pages for one and store them as a new file. See Storing
cancelled. Please file. Files Using the Scanner Function Scan-
4 try again later. ner Reference.
Exceeded maximum Too many files are wait- Please try again after they have been
number of file to ing to be delivered. delivered.
store. Delete all
unnecessary
files.
Exceeded max. Too many files are wait- Please try again after they have been
number of stored ing to be delivered. delivered.
files. Cannot send
the scanned data
as capturing files
is unavailable.
Exceeded max. The maximum number of Check the files stored by the other func-
number of files files that can be stored in tions, and then delete unneeded files.
which can be used the document server has See “Document Server”, Copy/Docu-
in Document Server been exceeded. ment Server Reference.
at the same time.
Entered protec- The correct protect desti- Make sure the protection code is cor-
tion code for nation code was not en- rect, and then enter it again. See “Regis-
destination is tered. tering a Protection Code”, General
incorrect. Please Settings Guide.
re-enter.
Entered user code The entered password is Check the authentication setting, and
is not correct. incorrect. then specify a correct password.
58

Exceeded max. The maximum enterable Make sure the maximum number of
number of alpha- number of alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
numeric charac- characters has been ex- then enter it again. See “Values of vari-
ters. ceeded. ous set items for transmission/stor-
age/delivery function”, Scanner
Reference.
Authentication The entered login user Check the login user name and login
has failed. name or login password password. The machine is unable to au-
is incorrect. thenticate. Contact an administrator.
The entered path The entered path format Confirm the destination computer and
is not correct. is incorrect. the path, and then enter it again.
Please re-enter.
Captured file ex- The maximum number of Reduce the number of pages in the
ceeded max. number pages per file has been transmitted file, and then resend the 4
of pages per file. exceeded. file. See “Storage function”, Scanner
Cannot send the Reference.
scanned data.
Original is being The machine is using an- Retry scanning after the operation with
scanned by anoth- other function such as the other function is completed.
er function. copying.
Please wait.
E-mail address The entered e-mail ad- Make sure the e-mail address is correct,
entered is not dress is incorrect. and then enter it again.
correct. Please
re-enter.
Memory is full. Because there is not Specify whether to use the data or not.
Scanning has been enough free hard disk
cancelled. Press space in the machine for
[Send] to send delivering or sending
the scanned data, by e-mail while storing
in the Document Server,
or press [Cancel]
only some of the pages
to delete. could be scanned.
Memory is full. Because of insufficient Try one of the following measures:
Cannot scan. The hard disk space, the first • Wait for a while, and then retry the
scanned data will page could not be scan operation.
be deleted. scanned.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. See “Setting items for
Scan Settings”, Scanner Reference.
• Delete unneeded stored files. See
“Deleting a Stored File”, Scanner
Reference.
59

Memory is full. Because there is not Specify whether to use the data or not.
Do you want to enough free hard disk
store scanned space in the machine for
file? storing in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.
No paper. Load No paper is set in the Load paper of the sizes listed in the
paper of one of specified paper tray. message.
the following
sizes, then press
[Start Printing].
Exceeded max. data The scanned original ex- Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity.Check ceeded maximum data again. Note that it may not be possible
4 the scanning reso- capacity. to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. See “Relationship between
lution, then reset
original(s). Resolution and File Size”, Scanner Ref-
erence.
Exceeded max. data The scanned data exceed- Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity.Check ed maximum data capac- again. Note that it may not be possible
scanning resolu- ity. to scan very large originals at a high
tion, then press resolution. See “Relationship between
Start key again. Resolution and File Size”, Scanner Ref-
erence.
Exceeded max. The number of scanned Select whether to send the data so far.
page capacity per pages exceeded maxi-
file. Press mum page capacity.
[Send] to send
the scanned data,
or press [Cancel]
to delete.
60
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error
messages displayed on the client computer when using the TWAIN driver.
Important
❒ If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For in-
formation about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This Ma-
chine.
Clear Misfeed(s) A paper misfeed has oc- Remove jammed originals, and place
in ADF. curred inside the ADF. them again.
Check whether the originals are suita-
ble to be scanned by the machine. 4
Invalid Winsock You are using an invalid Install the operating system of the com-
version. Please version of Winsock. puter or copy Winsock from the operat-
use version 1.1 ing system CD-ROM.
or higher.
The name is al- You tried to register a Use another name.
ready in use. name that is already in
Check the regis- use.
tered names.
Cannot detect the The set original was mis- • Place the original correctly.
paper size of the aligned. • Specify the scan size.
original. Specify • When placing an original directly
the scanning on the exposure glass, the lift-
size. ing/lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the ADF by
more than 30 degrees.
Cannot add any The maximum number of The maximum number of modes that
more scanning registerable scan modes can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
mode. has been exceeded. modes.
Cannot specify The maximum number of The maximum number of scanning are-
any more scanning registerable scan areas as that can be stored is 100. Delete un-
area. has been exceeded. needed scanning area.
Call Service An unrecoverable error Call your service representative.

Please call your has occurred in the ma-
service repre- chine.
sentative.
Scanner is not The TWAIN scanner Contact your service representative.
available on the function cannot be used
specified device. on this machine.
61

Scanner is not • The machine's main • Set the main power switch to “On”.
available. Check power switch is off. • Check whether the machine is con-
the scanner con- • The machine is not nected to the network correctly.
nection status. connected to the net- • Deselect the personal firewall func-
work correctly. tion of the client computer.
• Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machine’s protocol. See
tings Guide and “Using telnet”,
Network Guide.
No response from The machine is not con- Check whether the machine is connect-
the scanner. nected to the network ed to the network correctly.
4 correctly.
No response from The network is crowded. Wait for a while, and then try to recon-
the scanner. nect.
Error has occurred The application-speci- Check whether the scanning settings
in the scanner. fied scan conditions have made with the application exceed the
exceeded the setting setting range of the machine.
range of the machine.
Fatal error has An unrecoverable error An unrecoverable error has occurred in
occurred in the has occurred on the ma- the machine. Call your service repre-
scanner. chine. sentative.
Cannot connect to An access mask is set. Contact the network or scanner admin-
the scanner. Check istrator.
the network Access
Mask settings in
User Tools.
Scanner is not The ADF cover is open. Check whether the ADF cover is closed.
ready. Check the
scanner and the
options.
Insufficient mem- Scanner memory is insuf- • Reset the scan size.
ory. Reduce the ficient. • Lower the resolution.
scanning area. • Set with no compression. See
TWAIN Driver help.
The problem may be due to the follow-
ing cause:
• “The Relationship between the Res-
olution and the Scanning Area”
chart in Help for halftone scanning
might not always apply. Scanning
cannot be performed if large values
are set for brightness when using
halftone or high resolution.
62

Insufficient mem- When a paper misfeed After the misfed paper has been re-
ory. Reduce the occurs in the machine moved, proceed with scanning.
scanning area. during printing, scanning
cannot be performed.
Cannot find "XXX" • The main power • Check whether the main power
scanner used for switch of the previ- switch of the scanner used for the
the previous ously used scanner is previous scan is turned off.
scan. "YYY" will not set to “On”. • Check the previously used scanner
be used instead. • The machine is not is connected to the network correct-
connected to the net- ly.
(“XXX” and “YYY” indi-
work correctly. • Cancel the Personal Firewall of the
cate scanner names.)
client computer.
• Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machine’s protocol. See
4
tings Guide and “Using telnet”,
Network Guide.
• Select the scanner used for the pre-
vious scan.
Error has oc- An error has occurred in • Check whether the network cable is
curred in the the driver. connected correctly to the client
scanner driver. computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is recognized
correctly by Windows.
• Check whether the client computer
can use the TCP/IP protocol.
Communication er- A communication error Check whether the client computer can
ror has occurred has occurred on the net- use the TCP/IP protocol.
on the network. work.
Scanner is in use A function of the machine Wait for a while and reconnect.
for other func- other than the scanner
tion. Please wait. function is being used
such as the copier func-
tion.
Insufficient Memory is insufficient. • Close all the unnecessary applica-
memory. Close all tions running on the client compu-
other applica- ter.
tions, then re- • Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
start scanning. then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.
No User Code is Access is restricted with Contact the administrator of the ma-
registered. Con- user codes. chine.
sult your system
administrator.
63

Any of Login User The entered login user • Check the login user name, login
Name, Login Pass- name, password, or driv- password, and driver encryption
word or Driver er encryption key was key.
Encryption Key is invalid. • Permission to use this function has
incorrect. not been granted. Contact the ad-
ministrator.
64
5. Adding paper, Toner and
Staples
This chapter explains troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all the
machine's functions.
Loading paper
This section explains what to do when paper runs out and needs reloading.
R CAUTION:
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Note
❒ Fan the paper before loading.
❒ Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
❒ When paper in trays that are set to automatically eject unnecessary tab stock
sheets runs out, reload the tab stock from the beginning of the cycle (the first
sheet).
❒ For paper types and sizes, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”,
About This Machine.
❒ To load paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), see “Using the Multi Bypass
Tray (Tray 7)”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Loading paper into Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)

The following procedure explains how to load paper into Tray 1.
Important
❒ When paper loaded in the right side of Tray 1 runs out, paper on the left is
automatically shifted to the right. While the paper is moving, a message in-
structing you to wait appears. Do not pull out the tray at this time.
❒ For the right stack, align the right edge of the copy paper with the right edge
of the tray. For the left stack, align the left edge of the copy paper to the left
edge of the tray.
❒ Tray 1 uses only A4 K paper. If you want to load 8 1/2” × 11” K, contact your
service representative.
❒ Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
65
Adding paper, Toner and Staples
A Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
ANQ001S
B Square the paper and place it print side down.

• Whole tray pulled out
ANQ002S
• Left half of the tray pulled out
ANQ003S
C Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

Note
❒ You can load paper even while making copies from Tray 1. You can pull
out the left half of the tray while copying is in.
66
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the A3/11” × 17” Tray Unit

The following procedure explains how to load paper into the A3/11” × 17” tray
unit. To use the A3/11” × 17” tray unit, you must replace Tray 1.
Important
❒ Make sure that the paper stack is flush to the right side fence.
5
ANQ008S
B Place the paper in the tray along the edge on the left.
ANQ009S

Note
❒ The tray can hold up to 550 sheets.
67
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3

The following procedure explains how to load paper into Tray 2 and 3.
Important
❒ Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 2 and 3 by adjusting the positions
of side fence and end fence.
❒ Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
ANQ004S
B Square the paper and load it print side down.
ANQ005S

Note
❒ If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you will need to
specify the paper size with the control panel. Following paper sizes that
are not selected automatically.
Reference
p.75 “Changing the Paper Size”
p.84 “Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected”
68
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

The following procedure explains loading paper into the large capacity tray
(LCT). The LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
Important
❒ Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 4 and Tray 5 by adjusting the po-
sitions of side fence and end fence.
❒ If you want to change the paper size of Tray 6, contact your service representative.
❒ Check the paper's edges are aligned at the left side.
ANQ006S
B Load paper into the paper tray by pushing it against to the left side of the
paper tray.
Load the paper print side up.
ANQ007S

Note
❒ The tray can hold up to 1100 sheets in Tray 4 and 5, and 2800 sheets in Tray 6.
Reference
69
Loading Paper into the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
The following procedure explains loading paper into the wide large capacity
tray (Wide LCT). The Wide LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
Important
❒ Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the Wide LCT by adjusting the posi-
tions of side fence and end fence.
❒ Check that the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
❒ Do not load paper above the upper mark in the paper tray
ANQ060S
B Load paper into the paper tray by pushing the paper to the left side of the
paper tray.
Place paper with printing side up.
ANQ065S

Note
❒ The tray can hold up to 1100 sheets in Tray 4 and 6, and 2200 sheets in Tray 5.
❒ If you load paper that cannot be automatically detected, specify its size us-
ing the control panel.
Reference
70 p.84 “Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected”
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7)

The following procedure explains loading paper into the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
Important
❒ The maximum number of sheets you can load into the multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
depend on paper type. The number should not exceed the upper limit.
A Set the side fence to the paper size.
5
APF028S
B Place paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).

C Set the end fence.
ANQ068S
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right.
ANQ069S
71
D Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
APF030S
The green lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the tray is going up
and down, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down original table if you want to either
add paper or remove jammed ones.
5 Note
❒ For details about using the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), see “Using the Multi
Bypass Tray (Tray 7)”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Reference
Loading Paper in the Interposer

The following procedure explains loading paper into the interposer.
Important
❒ Load paper on the side already printed (the front side). If you are using the
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch), load sheets print side down.
❒ Load paper in the interposer in the same orientation as paper in the paper
tray.
❒ The staple or punching location will be on the left side of the paper, when you
are facing the machine.
❒ Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may
lead to the paper size not being correctly scanned or paper jams.
❒ When using the Z-fold function, the paper in the interposer must be of the
same size as the prints after they have been Z-folded. If the paper in the inter-
poser is larger than the Z-folded sheets, a misfeed might occur.
72
Loading paper
A While pressing the release lever, align the side fence with the paper size to
be loaded.
ANQ010S
B Load paper orderly. Tightly fit the side fence to the loaded paper.
ANQ012S
C When loading paper larger than A4, draw out the paper extender.
Note
❒ To set the paper in the interposer, align the orientation of originals in the
ADF as shown below.
ANR026S
❒ When paper is loaded which cannot be detected automatically, the user

must set the paper size on the control panel.
Reference
73
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper

The following describes paper with its orientation and printing surface specified
(letterhead paper).
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead
paper, punched paper, or copied paper) might not print correctly, depending on
how the originals and paper are placed. Select [On] in [Letterhead Setting] under
[Copier / Document Server Features], and then place the original and paper as
shown below. See “Letterhead Setting”, General Settings Guide. When printing
with the printer function, placement orientation is the same.
For printing using the printer function, load paper in the same orientation.
❖ Paper orientation
Note
❒ Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key, specify Letterhead as “Paper Type” for the
paper tray you want to use. See “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
74
Changing the Paper Size

This section explains how to change a paper size.
Procedures for changing the paper size differ depending on the tray (tray 1 or
other optional paper tray units). Make sure you are following the appropriate
procedure before you begin.
Note
❒ Be sure to select the paper size with User Tools. If you do not, misfeeds might
occur.
❒ Fan the paper before loading.
❒ Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
❒ For details about paper sizes and types, see “Copy Paper”, About This Ma-
chine.
75
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in Tray 2 and 3.
Important
❒ If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the posi-
tion of the tray's side fence may slip out of place.
❒ Check that the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
A Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used for copying, and then
pull the tray carefully out until it stops.
ANQ014S
B Remove paper if loaded.

C Release the lock on the side fence.
ANQ015S
76
D While pressing down the release lever, slide the side fences until they are
aligned the paper size you want to load.
ANQ016S
E Slide the end fence until it is aligned with the size of paper to you want to
load.
ANQ017S
F Square the paper and load it print side up.

Re-lock the side fences again.
ANQ018S
G Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

H Check the size on the display.
Note
❒ If there is space between the side fence and paper, bring the side fence
flush against the edge of the paper.
77
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5)
The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the LCT (Tray 4
and 5).
Important
❒ As for changing paper sizes of Tray 6, contact your service representative.
ANQ006S
B Pull out the screws fixing the side fence.
ANQ020S
C Set the side fences to the size you want.
ANQ021S
78
D Fasten the side fence with the screws.
ANQ022S
E Set the end fence along the paper size.
ANQ023S
F Square the paper and set it in the tray.
ANQ024S
G Set the paper size selector in the innermost part of the tray to the new paper size.
ANQ025S
79
H Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

I Check the size on the display.
Load A4K, 81/2” × 11”K into the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5)
Follow the procedure below to set the end fence for A4K, 81/2” × 11”K.
A Set the end fence according to the paper size.
5
ANQ076S
A A4K
B 81/2” × 11”K
B Fasten the end fence using the screw provided.
ANQ077S
Note
❒ When loading index tabs, shift the end fence for A4K, 81/2” × 11”Kto po-
sition before setting the end fence for index tabs.
80
Changing the Paper Size in the Wide Large Capacity Tray

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the wide large
capacity tray (Wide LCT).
Important
5
ANQ060S
B Pull out the screws fixing the side fence.
ANQ061S
C Take the grip of the side fence with your fingers, and adjust the side fence
to the paper size.
ANQ062S
81
D Fasten the side fence with the screws.
ANQ063S
E Release the lock on the back fence.
ANQ064S
F Square the paper and set it in the tray.
ANQ066S
82
G Tightly fit the back fence to the loaded paper and then re-lock the back
fence again.
ANQ067S
H Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

I Check the size on the display.
5
83
Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected

If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you need to specify the
paper size with the control panel. This section explains how to load these paper
taking 11”× 15”L as an example.
Important
❒ Following paper sizes that are not selected automatically.
• Tray 2, Tray 3:
11” × 15”L, 11” × 14”L, 10” × 15”L, 10” × 14”L, 81/4” × 14”L, 8” × 10”L
• Tray 4, Tray 5, Tray 6 (Wide LCT):
B5L, B6L, A6L, 81/2” × 14”L, 81/2” × 11”L, 81/2” × 51/2”K, 81/2” ×
13”L, 81/4” × 13”L, 101/2” × 71/4”KL, 11” × 15”L, 10” × 14”L, 81/4” ×
14”L, 8K”L, 16KKL
• Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), Interposer:
B5L, B6L, 81/2” × 14”L, 81/2” × 11”L, 81/2” × 51/2”K, 81/2” × 13”L,
5 81/4” × 13”L, 101/2” × 71/4”KL, 11” × 15”L, 10” × 14”L, 81/4” × 14”L,
8” × 10”L, 8K”L, 16KKL
A Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key.
ANR100S
The Tray Paper Settings screen appears.
B Select the tray number on the screen.
84
C Press [Paper Size] tab.
D Select a combination of the specified paper size and orientation, and then
press [OK].
The paper size and orientation appear.
E Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key.

The initial display is shown.
Note
❒ If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing
on a paper size that is not selected automatically, you must return the set-
ting to “Auto Detect”. Reload the paper, select “Auto Detect” in step D. The
setting is returned to “Auto Detect”.
85
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher

You can pause a large volume of copies when using Finisher.
A Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key lights up.
ANQ082S
5
B Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray.
ANQ083S
C Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key turns off, and then copying restarts.
Note
❒ You can suspend copy only when the output tray is specified as the finish-
er shift tray.
86
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
This section explains adding and storing toner.
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-
nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
See a doctor immediately if you accidentally swallow toner.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION: 5
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of wa-
ter. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies availa-
ble at an authorized dealer.
R CAUTION:
• Open toner cartridges carefully. If you open them forcefully, toner can spill,
dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental ingestion.
87
Important
❒ Faults may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, settings
will be lost.
❒ Always add toner when the machine instructs you.
❒ Do not use recycled toner. This will damage the machine.
❒ During toner adding, the toner bottle is rotating. Do not touch the toner bottle.
❒ If toner remains in the bottle, you cannot remove the bottle. Do not remove
the bottle forcibly.
❒ Be sure to set the new toner bottle in the lower hole first.
❒ Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
❒ Store toner on a flat surface.
Note
❒ If both toner bottles are empty, D will appear.
5 ❒ You can still make about 200 copies after D appears, but replace the toner ear-
ly to copy degradation.
❒ If one of the toner bottle is empty, you can keep copying by using the other
bottle.
❒ You can change the toner bottle during copying.
❒ If toner remains in the bottle, you cannot pull it out.
❒ When you change one toner bottle, do not touch the other one.
❒ Press [System Status] to check contact number for consumables' order. For sys-
tem status, see p.5 “Checking Machine Status and Settings”.
88
Adding Toner
Inserting Toner
The following describes how to replace toner.
Important
❒ Do not shake the toner bottle with its mouth down after removing it. Residual
toner may scatter.
ANR001S
Used Toner
Toner cannot be re-used.
Bring the stored used container to your sales representative or service represent-
ative for recycling through our recycling system. If you discard it on your own,
treat it as general plastic waste material.
89
Adding Staples
This section explains what to do when staples need replacing.
Important
❒ Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than
that recommended.
Refill the stapler according to the finisher type. (Check the type if you are un-
sure.) For details about type of finisher, see “Options”, About This Machine.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Finisher.
ANR002S
90
Adding Staples
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Booklet Finisher.
ANR003S
91
92
6. Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter explains what to do when paper or originals misfeed (become

jammed inside the machine).
Removing Jammed Paper

R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch any parts other
than specified in this document when removing misfed paper. Otherwise, it
may cause burn injury.
R CAUTION:
• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be tak-
en when removing misfed paper.
R CAUTION:
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
Important
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings will be lost.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the ma-
chine.
❒ Remove the fusing unit only when necessary.
❒ Contact your service representative if misfeeds occur frequently.
Note
❒ For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see “Checking Jammed
Paper” or “Removing Jammed Paper”.
Reference
p.94 “Locating Jammed Paper”.
p.96 “Removing Jammed Paper”.
93
Clearing Misfeeds
Locating Jammed Paper

If a misfeed happens, remove the misfed paper or original following the proce-
dures stated on the sticker on the rear of main unit front cover.
A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the
control panel.
ANQ030S
A Press the key of the section from where you want to remove the jammed paper.
94
B After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step,
press [Previous].
C Press [Entire View], the entire machine is displayed.
D When all jammed paper are removed, restore the machine to the original
state.
Note
❒ More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the
areas indicated.
95
Clearing Misfeeds

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed paper.
Important
❒ The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken
when removing misfed paper.
❒ When removing jammed sheets, take care to touch only those areas explicitly
indicated in the manual.
❒ Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.
• When A is lit
6
ANR004S
• When B1 is lit
ANR005S
• When B4 is lit
ANR006S
96
• When C is lit
ANR007S
• When D is lit
ANR008S
97
Clearing Misfeeds
• When M is lit (when Booklet Finisher is installed)
ANR018S
98
ANR019S
• When N1 is lit (when Z-Folding Unit is installed)

6
ANS008S
99
Clearing Misfeeds
• When N2 or N3 is lit (when Z-Folding Unit is installed)
ANS009S
• When P1 is lit (when ADF is installed)
ANR011S
• When P2 is lit (when ADF is installed)
ANR027S
100
• When Q1 or Q2 is lit (when Interposer is installed)
ANR016S
• When Q3 or Q4 is lit (when Interposer is installed)

6
ANR017S
101
Clearing Misfeeds
• When R is lit (when Finisher is installed)
ANR021S
102
• When U is lit (when Large Capacity Tray is installed)
ANR012S
• When U is lit (when Wide Large Capacity Tray is installed) 6
ANR013S
103
Clearing Misfeeds
• When V is lit (when Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7) is installed)
ANR020S
• When Z1 is lit
ANR009S
• When Z4 is lit
ANR010S
104
Note
❒ Inside the finisher, or inside the front cover, there is a sticker explaining how
to remove misfed paper.
❒ If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
❒ You can also use the procedure indicated in [System Status] to remove jammed
paper.
When Z-folded paper is not properly aligned

The following procedure explains when Z-folded copies are not properly
aligned.
A Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key lights up.
ANQ082S
B Remove the copies.

C Set the auxiliary tray for the finisher shift tray.
ANQ075S
105
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Staples

This section explains how to remove jammed staples.
Important
❒ Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn copy paper over
in the tray.
❒ When the finisher is installed, after removing jammed staples, staples will not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.
Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. (Check the type if
you are unsure.) For details about type of finisher, see “Options”, About This
Machine.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
Finisher.
ANR022S
106
Removing Jammed Staples
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
Booklet Finisher.
ANR023S
107
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Punch and Staple Waste

This section explains how to remove punch and staple waste.
Note
❒ While “Hole Punch Receptacle is full.” or “Waste Staple Recepta-
cle is full.” is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function or the Staple
function.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to remove punch and staple wastes from
the Finisher.
• Remove punch wastes
ANR025S
• Remove staple wastes
ANR024S
Note
❒ If the message is still displayed, reinstall the waste box.
108
7. Remarks
This chapter describes how to maintain and operate the machine.
Where to Put Your Machine

This section provides precautions for installation, movement and disposal.
Machine Environment
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions

The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an elec-
tric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.
R CAUTION:
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Other-
wise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
R CAUTION:
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a continuous
air turnover.
• Temperature: 10-32 °C (50-89.6 °F) (humidity to be 54% at 32 °C, 89.6 °F)
• Humidity: 15-80% (temperature to be 27 °C, 80.6 °F at 80%)
• A strong and level base.
• The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both front to rear and left
to right.
• To avoid possible buildup of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a
large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30
m3/hr/person.
109
Remarks
Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more
than 1,500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form
inside the machine.)
• Locations close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy ma-
chine.
• Places where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.
110
Moving
The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
• Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections,
especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a
fire and electric shock hazard.
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Important
❒ Be careful when moving the machine. Take the following precautions:
• Turn off the main power.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you pull out the plug
from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord, thereby reduc-
ing the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Close all covers and trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
❒ Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it.
Rough handling may cause a malfunction or damage the hard disk or mem-
ory, resulting in loss of stored files.
7
❒ Do not take off the holding stand.
❒ Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impact can damage the hard disk
and cause stored files to be lost. As a precautionary measure, files should be
copied to another computer.
111
Remarks
Power Connection
The following explains power supply.
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R WARNING:
• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Oper-
ating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric
shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
R CAUTION:
• To disconnect the power code, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the code itself.
7 Doing so may result in damage to the code, leading to fire or electric shock.
• Make sure the plug is inserted firmly in the wall outlet.
• Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
• The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessi-
ble.
112
Access to the Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
1. Rear: more than 20 cm (7.8”)

2. Right: more than 3 cm (1.1”)
3. Front: more than 55.5 cm (21.6”)
4. Left: more than 40 cm (15.7”)
Note
❒ For the required space when options are installed, contact your service repre-
sentative. 7
113
Remarks
Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass or ADF belt is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean
these parts if they are dirty.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene.
If such substances get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might
occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other
parts should only be cleaned by your service representative.
❖ How to maintain
Cleaning the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth to remove the water.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass

The following procedure explains how to clean the exposure glass.
ANQ080S
Wipe the surface of the exposure glass.
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder

The following procedure explains how to clean the ADF.
ANQ081S
Wipe the surface of the belt, moving it.

114
INDEX
A E
Access to the Machine, 113 Edit, 30
Adding Enquiry, 5
Paper, 65 Environment, 109
Staples, 90 Environments to avoid, 110
Toner, 87 Error Log, 41
Adding Staples Exposure Glass, 114
Booklet Finisher, 91
Finisher, 90 F
Alert Messages, 40
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 114 Finisher, 86, 90, 106, 108
B H
Booklet Finisher, 91, 107 How to Read This Manual, 1
C I
Cannot Browse If USB Connection Fails, 38

the Network to Send a Scan File, 52 Indicators, 3
Cannot Exit from Connect Copy, 27 Inserting Toner, 89
Cannot Make Clear Copies, 28 Interposer, 72
Cannot Make Copies As Wanted, 30
Cannot Print, 42 J
Cannot Send Scanned Files, 52 Job is Not Performed, 14
Changing the Paper Size, 75
LCT (Tray 4 and 5), 78 L
Tray 2 and 3, 76
Wide LCT, 81 Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 69, 78
Changing to a Size that is Not Letterhead, 74
Automatically Detected, 84 Loading Paper, 65
Checking Machine Status and Settings, 5 Interposer, 72
Checking the Error Log, 41 LCT, 69
Cleaning Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), 71
Auto Document Feeder, 114 Tray 2 and 3, 68
Exposure Glass, 114 Wide LCT, 70
Clearing Misfeeds, 93 Locating Jammed Paper, 94
Combine, 30
Connect Copy, 25, 26, 27, 34 M
Connect Copy is Cancelled, 26
Copy Function, 19 Machine Address Info, 5
Machine environment, 109
D Maintaining Your Machine, 114
Maintenance Info, 5
Data Storage, 5 Manuals for This Machine, i
Display During Connect Copy, 25 Memory is Full, 34
Document Server, 9 Moving, 111
Duplex, 30 Multi-accessing, 14
Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), 71
115
N U
Names of Major Options, 2 Used Toner, 89
Network Delivery Function
Cannot be Used, 53 W
O When a Message Appears

Copy Function, 19
Operations are Not Possible Printer Function, 39
When Messages Appear, 53 Scanner Function, 54
Optimum environmental conditions, 109 Scanner Function (Client Computer), 61
Other Printing Problems, 45 When a Message Appears during
Installation of the Printer Driver, 35
P When an Indicator
to the Right of a Function Key is Lit, 8
Panel Tone, 4 When the Machine
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher, 86 Does Not Operate As wanted, 3
Power connection, 112 When Z-folded paper is not
Printer Function, 35 properly aligned, 105
Printing surface, 74 Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), 70, 81
Problems Operating the Machine, 9 Windows 2000, 36
Punch Waste, 108 Windows 95/98/Me, 35
Windows NT 4.0, 37
R Windows Server 2003, 36
Removing Jammed Paper, 93, 96 Windows XP, 36
Removing Jammed Staples, 106
Booklet Finisher, 107
Finisher, 106
Removing Punch and Staple Waste, 108
S
Scanner Function, 51
Scanning is Not Done as Expected, 51
Stamp, 30
Staple Waste, 108
Status Messages, 39
Stored Files Cannot Be Accessed, 52
Stored Files Cannot be Edited, 53
T
Toner, 87
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray), 65
Troubleshooting
Copy Function, 19
Printer Function, 35
Scanner Function, 51
TWAIN, 52, 61
TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started, 52
116 GB GB B235-7700
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright © 2005
Operating Instructions Troubleshooting
B235-7700
GB GB
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=228 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 11.400001 mm
Operating Instructions Security Reference
Operating Instructions Security Reference

Security Reference
1 Getting Started
2 Authentication and its Application
3 Preventing Information Leaks
4 Managing Access to the Machine
5 Enhanced Network Security
6 Specifying the Extended Security Functions
7 Troubleshooting
8 Appendix
Printed in the Netherlands Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
GB GB B235-7900 B2357900
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page i Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM


chine.

❖ Troubleshooting
❖ Security Reference(This manual)


❖ Network Guide
i
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page ii Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
❖ Other manuals
• UNIX Supplement
Note
Product name General name
DeskTopBinder Lite *1
and DeskTopBinder DeskTopBinder
Professional
ScanRouter EX Professional *1
and ScanRout- The ScanRouter delivery software
er EX Enterprise *1
*1
Optional
ii
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page iii Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ...................................................................................... i
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................... 1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security................................................................................................. 3
Glossary .....................................................................................................................4
Setting Up the Machine..............................................................................................5
Security Measures Provided by this Machine..................................................... 7
Using Authentication and Managing Users ................................................................7
Preventing Information Leaks ....................................................................................7
Limiting and Controlling Access .................................................................................9
Enhanced Network Security.....................................................................................10
2. Authentication and its Application

Administrators and Users ................................................................................... 11
Administrators ..........................................................................................................11
User..........................................................................................................................12
The Management Function .................................................................................13
About Administrator Authentication..........................................................................14
About User Authentication .......................................................................................15
Enabling Authentication......................................................................................16
Authentication Setting Procedure.............................................................................16
Administrator Authentication .............................................................................17
Specifying Administrator Privileges..........................................................................17
Registering the Administrator...................................................................................20
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................24
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................26
Changing the Administrator......................................................................................27
User Authentication.............................................................................................29
User Code Authentication ........................................................................................29
Basic Authentication.................................................................................................33
Windows Authentication...........................................................................................42
LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................50
Integration Server Authentication.............................................................................56
If User Authentication is Specified..................................................................... 65
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................65
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................65
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................66
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................67
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................68
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................68
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................68
Auto Logout..............................................................................................................69
Authentication using an external device...................................................................70
iii
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page iv Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
3. Preventing Information Leaks

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying ......................................................... 71
Unauthorized Copy Prevention ................................................................................72
Data Security for Copying ........................................................................................73
Printing Limitations...................................................................................................74
Notice .......................................................................................................................75
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security for Copying...........75
Printing a Confidential Document ...................................................................... 78
Choosing a Locked Print file ....................................................................................78
Printing a Locked Print File ......................................................................................79
Deleting Locked Print Files ......................................................................................80
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files..............................................................82
Unlocking Locked Print Files....................................................................................84
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files ...............................................85
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files .......................................86
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner Function .............89
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the User’s Stored Files ............92
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files...............................................................95
Unlocking Files.........................................................................................................97
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission............................ 99
Restrictions on Destinations.....................................................................................99
Protecting the Address Book ...........................................................................102
Address Book Access Permission .........................................................................102
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book .............................................................. 105
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk ........................................................................ 108
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk................................................................... 108
4. Managing Access to the Machine

Preventing Modification of Machine Settings .................................................117
Menu Protect ...................................................................................................... 118
Menu Protect..........................................................................................................118
Limiting Available Functions ............................................................................ 121
Specifying Which Functions are Available .............................................................121
Managing Log Files ...........................................................................................123
Specifying Delete All Logs .....................................................................................123
Transfer Log Setting...............................................................................................124
iv
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page v Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
5. Enhanced Network Security

Preventing Unauthorized Access.....................................................................127
Enabling/Disabling Protocols .................................................................................127
Access Control .......................................................................................................129
Specifying Network Security Level.........................................................................130
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords.................................................................134
Driver Encryption Key ............................................................................................ 134
Group Password for PDF files................................................................................136
IPP Authentication Password.................................................................................138
Protection Using Encryption ............................................................................ 139
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................ 140
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ...................................................... 144
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode.................................................................145
SNMPv3 Encryption ...............................................................................................147
6. Specifying the Extended Security Functions

Changing the Extended Security Functions ................................................... 149
Changing the Extended Security Functions ........................................................... 149
Settings .................................................................................................................. 151
Other Security Functions ..................................................................................155
Scanner Function ................................................................................................... 155
Weekly Timer Code................................................................................................155
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only ............................................159
Settings .................................................................................................................. 159
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly .........................................................163
A Message Appears...............................................................................................163
Machine Cannot Be Operated................................................................................165
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor...........................................................................167
Logging on as the Supervisor ................................................................................167
Logging off as the Supervisor ................................................................................168
Changing the Supervisor........................................................................................169
Resetting an Administrator’s Password .................................................................170
Machine Administrator Settings.......................................................................172
System Settings .....................................................................................................172
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................174
Printer Features .....................................................................................................174
Scanner Features................................................................................................... 175
Settings via Web Image Monitor ............................................................................176
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin........................................................... 178
Tray Paper Settings ...............................................................................................178
Network Administrator Settings .......................................................................180
System Settings .....................................................................................................180
v
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page vi Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
File Administrator Settings ...............................................................................184

System Settings .....................................................................................................184
Printer Features .....................................................................................................184
User Administrator Settings ............................................................................. 186
System Settings .....................................................................................................186
Document Server File Permissions..................................................................188
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book ..................... 189
User Settings...................................................................................................... 192
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................192
Printer Functions ....................................................................................................196
System Settings .....................................................................................................200
Web Image Monitor Setting.................................................................................... 206
Functions That Require Options ......................................................................219
INDEX....................................................................................................... 220
vi
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page 1 Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Ma-
chine.

machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the &l

[]
{}
1
2
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security
This machine's security function can be enhanced through the management of
the machine and its users using the improved authentication functions.
By specifying access limits on the machine’s functions and the documents and
data stored in the machine, you can prevent information leaks and unauthorized
access.
Data encryption can prevent unauthorized data access and tampering via the
network.
❖ Authentication and Access Limits

Using authentication, administrators manage the machine and its users. To
enable authentication, information about both administrators and users must
be registered in order to authenticate users via their login user names and
passwords.
Four types of administrator manage specific areas of machine usage, such as
settings and user registration.
Access limits for each user are specified by the administrator responsible for
user access to machine functions and documents and data stored in the ma-
chine.
Reference
For details, see p.11 “Administrators”.
❖ Encryption Technology
This machine can establish secure communication paths by encrypting trans-
mitted data and passwords.
3
Getting Started
Glossary
❖ Administrator
1 There are four types of administrator according to the administered function:
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user
administrator. We recommend only one person take each administrator role.
You can spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single
administrator.
Basically, administrators make machine settings and manage the machine;
they cannot perform normal operations, such as copying and printing.
❖ User
A user performs normal operations on the machine, such as copying and printing.
❖ File Creator (Owner)

This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
❖ Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
❖ Administrator Authentication
Administrators are authenticated by means of the login user name and login
password supplied by the administrator when specifying the machine’s set-
tings or accessing the machine over the network.
❖ User Authentication
Users are authenticated by means of the login user name and login password
supplied by the user when specifying the machine’s settings or accessing the
machine over the network.
The user’s login user name and password, as well such personal information
items as telephone number and e-mail address, are stored in the machine’s
address book. The personal information can be obtained from the Windows
domain controller (Windows authentication), LDAP Server (LDAP authenti-
cation), or Integration Server (Integration Server Authentication) connected
to the machine via the network.
❖ Login
This action is required for administrator authentication and user authentica-
tion. Enter your login user name and login password on the machine’s control
panel.
A login user name and login password may also be supplied when accessing
the machine over the network or using such utilities as Web Image Monitor
and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
❖ Logout
This action is required with administrator and user authentication. This action
is required when you have finished using the machine or changing the settings.
4
Enhanced Security
Setting Up the Machine

If you want higher security, make the following setting before using the ma-
chine:
1
A Turn the machine on.
B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press [System Settings].
D Press {Interface Settings}.
E Specify IP Address.
For details, see the General Settings Guide.
F Connect the machine to the network.

G Start the Web Image Monitor, and then log on to the machine as the admin-
istrator.
For details, see p.68 “Login (Using Web Image Monitor)”.
H Install the server certificate.

For details, see p.139 “Protection Using Encryption”.
I Enable secure sockets layer (SSL).
5
Getting Started
J Enter the administrator’s user name and password.

During steps F to I, the administrator’s default account (user name: admin,
password: blank) in unencrypted form will be vulnerable to network inter-
ception, and this account may be used for breaking into the machine over the
1 network.
If you consider this risky, we recommend that you specify a temporary ad-
ministrator password between steps A and F.
Reference
p.20 “Registering the Administrator”
6
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
Security Measures Provided by this

Machine
1
Using Authentication and Managing Users
❖ Enabling Authentication
To control administrators’ and users’ access to the machine, perform admin-
istrator authentication and user authentication using login user names and
login passwords. To perform authentication, the authentication function
must be enabled.
Reference
For details, see p.16 “Enabling Authentication”.
❖ Specifying Authentication Information to Log on

Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machine’s
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the
address book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book
by the user administrator.
Reference
For details, see p.39 “Specifying Authentication Information to Log on”.
❖ Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions availa-
ble to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions
available to users.
Reference
For details, see p.121 “Specifying Which Functions are Available”.
Preventing Information Leaks

❖ Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Unauthorized Copy Prevention)
Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern in the printed doc-
ument.
Reference
For details, see p.71 “Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying”.
❖ Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Data Security for Copying)

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you
can print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text.
To gray out the copy or stored file of a copy-guarded document when the
document is copied or stored , the optional security module is required.
7
Getting Started
Reference
For details, see p.71 “Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying”.
❖ Printing confidential files

1 Using the printer’s Locked Print, you can store files in the machine as confi-
dential files and then print them. You can print a file using the machine’s con-
trol panel and collect it on the spot to prevent others from seeing it.
Reference
For details, see p.78 “Printing a Confidential Document”.
❖ Protecting Stored Files from Unauthorized Access

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent activities such as the printing of stored
files by unauthorized users.
Reference
For details, see p.85 “Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files”.
❖ Protecting Stored Files from Theft

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent such activities as the sending and
downloading of stored files by unauthorized users.
Reference
❖ Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission

You can specify in the address book which users are allowed to send files us-
ing the Scanner.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being
sent to destinations not registered in the address book.
Reference
For details, see p.99 “Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Trans-
mission”.
❖ Protecting Registered Information in the Address Book

You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book. You
can prevent the data in the address book being used by unregistered users.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
in the address book.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
Reference
For details, see p.102 “Protecting the Address Book”.
8
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
❖ Managing Log Files

You can improve data security by deleting log files stored in the machine. By
transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify unau-
thorized access.
To transfer the log data, the log collection server is required.
1
Reference
For details, see p.123 “Managing Log Files”.
❖ Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk

Before disposing of the machine, make sure all data on the hard disk is delet-
ed. Prevent data leakage by automatically deleting transmitted printer jobs
from memory.
To overwrite the hard disk data, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit is
required.
Reference
For details, see p.108 “Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk”.
Limiting and Controlling Access

❖ Preventing Modification or Deletion of Stored Data
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in
Document Server.
You can permit selected users who are allowed to access stored files to modify
or delete the files.
Reference
❖ Preventing Modification of Machine Settings

The machine settings that can be modified depend on the type of administra-
tor account.
Register the administrators so that users cannot change the administrator set-
tings.
Reference
For details, see p.117 “Preventing Modification of Machine Settings”.
❖ Limiting Available Functions

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machine’s functions.
Reference
For details, see p.121 “Limiting Available Functions”.
9
Getting Started
Enhanced Network Security

❖ Preventing Unauthorized Access
1 You can limit IP addresses or disable ports to prevent unauthorized access
over the network and protect the address book, stored files, and default set-
tings.
Reference
For details, see p.127 “Preventing Unauthorized Access”.
❖ Encrypting Transmitted Passwords

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentica-
tion passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user
authentication.
Reference
For details, see p.134 “Encrypting Transmitted Passwords”.
❖ Safer Communication Using SSL

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can es-
tablish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine
using an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can estab-
lish encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
Note
❒ To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions.
Reference
For details, see p.139 “Protection Using Encryption”.
10
2. Authentication and its

Application
Administrators and Users
When controlling access using the authentication specified by an administrator,
select the machine’s administrator, enable the authentication function, and then
use the machine.
The administrators manage access to the allocated functions, and users can use
only the functions they are permitted to access. To enable the authentication
function, the login user name and login password are required in order to use
the machine.
Specify administrator authentication, and then specifying user authentication.
Important
❒ If user authentication is not possible because of a problem with the hard disk
or network, you can use the machine by accessing it using administrator au-
thentication and disabling user authentication. Do this if, for instance, you
need to use the machine urgently.
Reference
For details, see p.37 “Specifying Login User Name and Login Password”.
Administrators
There are four types of administrator according to the administered function:
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user ad-
ministrator.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administra-
tor. You can also specify a supervisor who can change each administrator’s pass-
word. Administrators are limited to managing the machine’s settings and
controlling user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and print-
ing. To use such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and
then be authenticated as the user.
Reference
For details, see p.20 “Registering the Administrator”.
For details, See p.167 “Operations by the Supervisor”.
11
Authentication and its Application
❖ User Administrator
This is the administrator who manages personal information in the address
book.
A user administrator can register/delete users in the address book or change
users’ personal information.
Users registered in the address book can also change and delete their own in-
formation. If any of the users forget their password, the user administrator can
delete it and create a new one, allowing the user to access the machine again.
2
❖ Machine Administrator
This is the administrator who mainly manages the machine’s default settings.
You can set the machine so that the default for each function can only be spec-
ified by the machine administrator. By making this setting, you can prevent
unauthorized people from changing the settings and allow the machine to be
used securely by its many users.
❖ Network Administrator
This is the administrator who manages the network settings. You can set the
machine so that network settings such as the IP address and settings for send-
ing and receiving e-mail can only be specified by the network administrator.
By making this setting, you can prevent unauthorized users from changing
the settings and disabling the machine, and thus ensure correct network op-
eration.
❖ File Administrator
This is the administrator who manages permission to access stored files. You
can specify passwords to allow only registered and permitted users to view
and edit files stored in Document Server. By making this setting, you can pre-
vent data leaks and tampering due to unauthorized users viewing and using
the registered data.
❖ Supervisor
The supervisor can delete an administrator’s password and specify a new
one. The supervisor cannot specify defaults or use normal functions. Howev-
er, if any of the administrators forget their password and cannot access the
machine, the supervisor can provide support.
User
Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machine’s
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the ad-
dress book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book by the
user administrator.
Reference
For details about registering users in the address book, see General Settings
Guide, the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help, or the Web Image Monitor
Help.
12
The Management Function

The machine has an authentication function requiring a login user name and
login password. By using the authentication function, you can specify access
limits for individual users and groups of users. Using access limits, you can not
only limit the machine’s available functions but also protect the machine settings
and files and data stored in the machine.
2
Important
❒ If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an adminis-
trator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisor’s authority.
❒ Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the ma-
chine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Reference
For details, see p.167 “Operations by the Supervisor”.
13
About Administrator Authentication

There are four types of administrator according to the administered function:
user administrator, machine administrator, network administrator, and file ad-
ministrator.
AYJ002S
1. User Administrator 4. File Administrator

This administrator manages personal in- This administrator manages permission
formation in the address book. You can to access stored files. You can specify
register/delete users in the address book passwords for the files stored in the Doc-
or change users’ personal information. ument Server so only authorized users
can view and change them.
2. Machine Administrator
This administrator manages the ma- 5. Authentication
chine’s default settings. You can set the Administrators must enter their login
machine so that the default such as data user name and password to be authenti-
security for copying function and delete cated.
all logs can only be specified by the ma-
chine administrator.
6. This machine
3. Network Administrator 7. Administrators manage the ma-
chine’s settings and access limits.
This administrator manages the network
For details about each administrator,
settings. You can set the machine so that
see p.11 “Administrators”.
network settings such as the IP address
and settings for sending and receiving e-
mail can only be specified by the network
administrator only.
14
About User Authentication

This machine has an authentication function to prevent unauthorized access.
By using login user name and login password, you can specify access limits for
individual users and groups of users.
AYJ001S
1. User 4. Authentication
A user performs normal operations on Using a login user name and password,
the machine, such as copying and print- user authentication is performed.
ing.
5. This Machine
2. Group 6. Access Limit
A group performs normal operations on
Using authentication, unauthorized us-
the machine, such as copying and print-
ers are prevented from accessing the ma-
ing.
chine.
3. Unauthorized User 7. Authorized users and groups can
use only those functions permitted
by the administrator.
15
Enabling Authentication
To control administrators’ and users’ access to the machine, perform administra-
tor or user authentication using login user names and passwords. To perform
authentication, the authentication function must be enabled. To specify authen-
tication, you need to register administrators.
2 Reference
For details, see p.20 “Registering the Administrator”.
Authentication Setting Procedure

Specify administrator authentication and user authentication according to the
following chart:
Note
❒ To specify Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authenti-
cation, or Integration Server Authentication, you must first specify adminis-
trator authentication.
❒ You can specify User Code Authentication without specifying administrator
authentication.
Administrator Authentication Specifying Administrator Privileges
See p.17 “Specifying Administra- See p.17 “Specifying Administrator Privileges”.
tor Privileges”. Registering the Administrator
See p.20 “Registering the Administrator”.
User Authentication Specifying User Authentication
See p.16 “Enabling Authentica- A Authentication that requires only the machine:
tion”. • User Code Authentication
See p.29 “User Code Authentication”.
• Basic Authentication
See p.33 “Basic Authentication”.
B Authentication that requires external devices:
• Windows Authentication
See p.42 “Windows Authentication”.
• LDAP Authentication
See p.50 “LDAP Authentication”.
• Integration Server Authentication
See p.56 “Integration Server Authentication”.
16
Administrator Authentication
Administrators are handled differently from the users registered in the address
book. When registering an administrator, you cannot use a login user name al-
ready registered in the address book. Windows Authentication, LDAP Authen-
tication and Integration Server Authentication are not performed for an
administrator, so an administrator can log on even if the server is unreachable
because of a network problem. 2
Each administrator is identified by a login user name. One person can act as
more than one type of administrator if multiple administrator authority is grant-
ed to a single login user name.
You can specify the login user name, login password, and encryption password
for each administrator.
The encryption password is a password for performing encryption when speci-
fying settings using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
The password registered in the machine must be entered when using applica-
tions such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Administrators are limited to managing the machine’s settings and controlling
user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and printing. To use
such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and then be au-
thenticated as the user.
Note
❒ Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
For details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Specifying Administrator Privileges

To specify administrator authentication, set Administrator Authentication Man-
agement to [On]. You can also specify whether or not to manage the items in Sys-
tem Settings as an administrator.
To log on as an administrator, use the default login user name and login pass-
word.
The defaults are “admin” for the login name and blank for the password.
Important
❒ If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an adminis-
trator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisor’s authority.
Reference
For details, see p.167 “Operations by the Supervisor”.
17
Note
❒ For details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentica-
tion, see p.24 “Logging on Using Administrator Authentication”, p.26 “Log-
ging off Using Administrator Authentication”.

B Press [System Settings].
2
C Press [Administrator Tools].
D Press [Administrator Authentication Management].
18
E Press the [User Management], [Machine Management], [Network Management], or

[File Management] key to select which settings to manage.
F Set “Admin. Authentication” to [On].
[Available Settings] appears.
G Select the settings to manage from “Available Settings”.
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

[Available Settings] varies depending on the administrator.
For details about Available Settings, see p.117 “Managing Access to the Machine”
Note
❒ To specify administrator authentication for more than one category, repeat
steps E to G.
H Press [OK].
I Press the {User Tools} key. 19
Registering the Administrator

If administrator authentication has been specified, it is recommended to assign
each administrator role to a different person.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administra-
tor.You can register up to four login user names (Administrators 1 to 4) to which
2 you can grant administrator privileges.
Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For
details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Preparation
Log on using a registered administrator name and password. The administra-
tor defaults are “admin” for the login name and blank for the password. For
details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentication,
see p.24 “Logging on Using Administrator Authentication”, p.26 “Logging
off Using Administrator Authentication”.
Note
❒ You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering
login user names and login passwords. Keep in mind that passwords are
case-sensitive.
❒ You cannot include spaces, semicolons (;), or quotes (”) in the user name nor
can you leave the user name blank.
❒ Do not use Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or Hangul
double-byte characters when entering the login user name or password.If you
use multi-byte characters when entering the login user name or password,
you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.

20
D Press [Program / Change Administrator].
21
E In the line for the administrator whose authority you want to specify, press
[Administrator 1], [Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then
press [Change].
If you allocate each administrator’s authority to a different person, the screen

appears as follows:
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
22
H Press [Change] for the login password.
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].

Follow the password policy to make the login password more secure.
For details about the password policy, see p.154 “Password Policy”.
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [Change] for the encryption password.
L Enter the encryption password, and then press [OK].
M If a password reentry screen appears, enter the encryption password, and

then press [OK].
23
N Press [OK] twice.

You will be automatically logged off.
O Press the {User Tools} key.
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication

2 If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using an administra-
tor’s user name and password.This section describes how to log on.
Note
❒ To log on as an administrator, enter the administrator’s login user name and
login password.
❒ If you log on that a user name that has the privileges of multiple administra-
tors, only one of those administrators' names is displayed.
❒ If you try to log on from an operating screen, “Selected function cannot
be used.” appears. Press the {User Tools} key to change the default.
APG012S
B Press [Enter] next to “Login User Name”.
24
C Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
Note
❒ When you log on to the machine for the first time as the administrator, en-
ter “admin”.
D Press [Enter] next to “Login Password”.
Note
❒ If assigning the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F without
pressing [Enter].
E Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
25
F Enter [Login].
“Authenticating... Please wait.” appears, followed by the screen for

specifying the default.
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication

If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after com-
pleting settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
A Press the {Login/Logout}key.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
26
Changing the Administrator

Change the administrator’s login user name and login password. You can also
assign each administrator’s authority to the login user names “Administrator 1”
to “Administrator 4” To combine the authorities of multiple administrators, as-
sign multiple administrators to a single administrator.
For example, to assign machine administrator authority and user administrator
authority to [Administrator 1], press [Administrator 1] in the lines for the machine 2
administrator and the user administrator.
Preparation
For details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentica-

27
E In the line for the administrator you want to change, press [Administrator 1],
[Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then press [Change].
F Press [Change] for the setting you want to change, and re-enter the setting.
G Press [OK].
H Press [OK] twice.
You are logged off automatically.
I Press the {User Tools} key.
28
User Authentication
User Authentication
There are five types of user authentication method: user code authentication, ba-
sic authentication, Windows authentication, Integration Server Authentication,
and LDAP authentication. To use user authentication, select an authentication
method on the control panel, and then make the required settings for the authen-
tication. The settings depend on the authentication method.
2
Note
❒ Under user code authentication, authentication is based on the user code. In
contrast, under basic authentication, Windows authentication, and LDAP au-
thentication, authentication is carried out for individual users.
❒ User authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For details
see the Web Image Monitor Help.
User Code Authentication

This is an authentication method for limiting access to functions according to the
user code. The same user code can be used by more than one user. For details
about specifying user codes, see General Settings Guide.
Limitation
❒ To control the use of DeskTopBinder for the delivery of files stored in the ma-
chine, select Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authen-
tication, or Integration Server Authentication.
Reference
For details about specifying the user code for the printer driver, see Printer
Reference or the printer driver Help.
For details about specifying the TWAIN driver user code, see the TWAIN
driver Help.
29
Specifying User Code Authentication

This can be specified by the machine administrator.

2
D Press [User Authentication Management].
30
User Authentication
E Select [User Code Auth.].
Note
❒ If you do not want to use user authentication management, select [Off].
F Select which of the machine’s functions you want to limit.
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.121 “Limiting Available
Functions”.
31
G Select the “Printer Job Authentication” level.

Note
❒ If you select [Entire], you cannot print using a printer driver or a device that
does not support authentication. To print under an environment that does
not support authentication, select [Simple (All)].
❒ If you select [Simple (Limitation)], you can specify clients for which printer
2 job authentication is not required. Specify [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB:
Simple] and the clients’ IPv4 address range in which printer job authentica-
tion is not required. Specify this setting if you want to print using unau-
thenticated printer drivers or without any printer driver. Authentication is
required for printing with non-specified devices.
❒ If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], you can print even with un-
authenticated printer drivers or devices. Specify this setting if you want to
print with a printer driver or device that cannot be identified by the ma-
chine or if you do not require authentication for printing.However, note
that, because the machine does not require authentication in this case, it
may be used by unauthorized users.
If you select [Entire], proceed to step L.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step H.
Reference
For details, see p.63 “Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job
Types”.
H Press [Simple (Limitation)]
I Press [Change].
32
User Authentication
J Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Au-
thentication.
You can specify the IPv4 address range to which this setting is applied, and
whether or not to apply the setting to the parallel and USB interfaces.
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
N Press the {User Tools} key.
Basic Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the machine’s address book to authenti-
cate for each user. Using basic authentication, you can not only manage the ma-
chine’s available functions but also limit access to stored files and to the personal
data in the address book. Under basic authentication, the administrator must
specify the functions available to each user registered in the address book.
Specifying Basic Authentication


33
E Select [Basic Auth.].
Note
34
User Authentication
F Select which of the machine’s functions you want to permit.
The selected settings will be available to users.

For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.121 “Limiting Available
Functions”.
Note
job authentication is not required. Specify [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB:
Reference
Types”.
35
I Press [Change].
thentication.
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
N Press the {User Tools} key.
36
User Authentication
Authentication Information Stored in the Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator.
If you have specified [User Authentication], you can specify access limits for indi-
vidual users and groups of users. Specify the setting in the address book for each
user.
User authentication can also be specified via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or
Web Image Monitor. 2
Preparation
You need to register a user in the address book. For details about the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
See p.121 “Limiting Available Functions”.
Specifying Login User Name and Login Password

In [User Authentication Management], specify the login user name and password.
D Press [Address Book Management].
37
E Select the user or group.
G Press [Change] for [Login User Name].
H Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

I Press [Change] for [Login Password].
38
User Authentication
J Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

K If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit] twice.
N Press the {User Tools} key. 2
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on
The login user name and password specified in [User Authentication Management]
can be used as the login information for “SMTP Authentication”, “Folder Au-
thentication”, and “LDAP Authentication”.
For details about specifying login user name and login password, see p.37 “Spec-
ifying Login User Name and Login Password”.
If you do not want to use the login user name and password specified in [User
Authentication Management] for “SMTP Authentication”, “Folder Authentication”,
or “LDAP Authentication”, see General Settings Guide.

39
If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll down to
other settings.
G Specify the login user name and password.
40
User Authentication
H Select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in “SMTP Authentication”.
other settings.
Limitation
❒ When using [Use Auth. Info at Login] for “SMTP Authentication”, “Folder
Authentication”, or “LDAP Authentication”, a user name other than “oth-
er” , “admin” , “supervisor” or “HIDE***” must be specified. The symbol
“***” represents any character.
❒ To use [Use Auth. Info at Login] for SMTP authentication, a login password
up to 128 characters in length must be specified.
Note
❒ For folder authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in “Folder Authen-
tication”.
❒ For LDAP authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in “LDAP Authen-
tication”.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
K Press the {User Tools} key.
41
Windows Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the Windows domain controller to au-
thenticate users who have their accounts on the directory server. Users cannot
be authenticated if they do not have their accounts in the directory server. Under
Windows authentication, you can specify the access limit for each group regis-
tered in the directory server. The address book stored in the directory server can
2 be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication without first using the
machine to register individual settings in the address book. If you can obtain
user information, the sender’s address (From:) is fixed to prevent unauthorized
access when sending e-mails under the scanner function.
Important
❒ During Windows Authentication, data registered in the directory server, such
as the user’s e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
❖ Operational Requirements for Windows Authentication

• To specify Windows authentication, the following requirements must be
met:
• The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
• A domain controller has been set up in a designated domain.
• This function is supported by the operating systems listed below. NTLM
authentication is used for Windows authentication. To obtain user infor-
mation when running Active Directory, use LDAP. If SSL is being used,
this requires a version of Windows that supports TLS v1, SSL v2, or SSL v3.
• Windows NT 4.0 Server
• Windows 2000 Server
• Windows Server 2003
Limitation
❒ Users managed in other domains are subject to user authentication, but they
cannot obtain items such as e-mail addresses.
❒ If you have created a new user in the domain controller and selected [User
must change password at next logon], log on to the machine from the computer
to change the password before logging on from the machine’s control panel.
Note
❒ The first time you access the machine, you can use the functions available to
your group. If you are not registered in a group, you can use the functions
available under [*Default Group]. To limit which functions are available to
which users, first make settings in advance in the address book.
❒ When accessing the machine subsequently, you can use all the functions
available to your group and to you as an individual user.
❒ Enter the login password correctly, keeping in mind that it is case-sensitive.
42
User Authentication
❒ Users who are registered in multiple groups can use all the functions availa-
ble to those groups.
❒ If you specify in the address book which functions are available to global
group members, those settings have priority.
❒ A user registered in two or more global groups can use all the functions avail-
able to members of those groups.
❒ If the “Guest” account on the Windows server is enabled, even users not reg-
istered in the domain controller can be authenticated. When this account is 2
enabled, users are registered in the address book and can use the functions
available under [*Default Group].
Specifying Windows Authentication

Note
❒ Under Windows Authentication, you can select whether or not to use secure
sockets layer (SSL) authentication.
❒ To automatically register user information such as e-mail addresses under
Windows authentication, it is recommended that communication between
the machine and domain controller be encrypted using SSL.
❒ Under Windows Authentication, you do not have to create a server certificate
unless you want to automatically register user information such as e-mail ad-
dresses using SSL.

43
E Select [Windows Auth.].
Note
44
User Authentication
F Press [Change] for “Domain Name”, enter the name of the domain controller
to be authenticated, and then press [OK].
Note
Reference
Types”.
45
I Press [Change].
thentication.
K Press [Exit].
46
User Authentication
L Press [On] for “SSL”.
If you do not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
If global groups have been registered under Windows server, you can limit
the use of functions for each global group.
You need to create global groups in the Windows server in advance and reg-
ister in each group the users to be authenticated.
You also need to register in the machine the functions available to the global
group members.
Create global groups in the machine by entering the names of the global
groups registered in the Windows Server. (Keep in mind that group names
are case sensitive.) Then specify the machine functions available to each
group.
If global groups are not specified, users can use the available functions spec-
ified in [*Default Group]. If global groups are specified, users not registered in
global groups can use the available functions specified in [*Default Group]. By
default, all functions are available to [*Default Group] members. Specify the
limitation on available functions according to user needs.
M Under “Group”, press [Program / Change], and then press [*Not Programmed].
other settings.
47
N Under “Group Name”, press [Change], and then enter the group name.
O Press [OK].
P Select which of the machine’s functions you want to permit.
For details about limiting available functions, see p.121 “Limiting Available
Functions”.
Q Press [OK] twice.
R Press the {User Tools} key.
48
User Authentication
-Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services

Specify this setting if you want the machine to automatically obtain e-mail ad-
dresses registered in Active Directory.
We recommended you install Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate
services as the Windows components.
Install the components, and then create the server certificate. 2
If they are not installed, install them as follows:
A Select [Add/Remove Programs] on the [Control Panel].
B Select [Add/Remove Windows Components].
C Select the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] check box.
D Select the [Certificate Services] check box, and then click [Next].
E Installation of the selected Windows components starts, and a warning mes-
sage appears.
F Click [Yes].
G Click [Next].
H Select the Certificate Authority, and then click [Next].
On the displayed screen, [Enterprise root CA] is selected.
I Enter the Certificate Authority name (optional) in [CA Identifying Information],
and then click [Next].
J Leave [Data Storage Location] at its default, and then click [Next].
-Creating the Server Certificate

After installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services Win-
dows components, create the Server Certificate as follows:
A Start [Internet Services Manager].
B Right-click [Default Web Site], and then click [Properties].
C On the [Directory Security] tab, click [Server Certificate].
Web Server Certificate Wizard starts.
D Click [Next].
E Select [Create a new certificate], and then click [Next].
F Select [Prepare the request now, but send it later], and then click [Next].
G Enter the required information according to the instructions given by Web
Server Certificate Wizard.
H Check the specified data, which appears as Request File Summary, and then
click [Next].
The server certificate is created.
49
LDAP Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the LDAP server to authenticate users
who have their accounts on the LDAP server. Users cannot be authenticated if
they do not have their accounts on the LDAP server. The address book stored in
the LDAP server can be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication
without first using the machine to register individual settings in the address
2 book.When using LDAP Authentication, to prevent the password information
being sent over the network unencrypted, it is recommended that communica-
tion between the machine and LDAP server be encrypted using SSL. You can
specify on the LDAP server whether or not to enable SSL. To enable this, you
must create a server certificate for the LDAP server.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliabil-
ity of the SSL server being connected to.
Important
❒ During LDAP Authentication, the data registered in the LDAP server, such as
the user’s e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
❖ Operational Requirements for LDAP Authentication

To specify LDAP authentication, the following requirements must be met:
• The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
• The network configuration must allow the machine to detect the presence
of the LDAP server.
• When SSL is being used, TLSv1, SSLv2, or SSLv3 can function on the LDAP
server.
• The LDAP server must be registered in the machine.
For details about registration, see Network Guide.
Limitation
❒ Under LDAP authentication, you cannot specify access limits for groups reg-
istered in the LDAP Server.
❒ When using LDAP Authentication, you cannot use reference functions in
LDAP Search for servers using SSL.
❒ Enter the user’s login user name using up to 32 characters and login password
using up to 128 characters.
❒ Do not use double-byte Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or
Hangul characters when entering the login user name or password. If you use
double-byte characters , you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.
50
User Authentication
Note
❒ Under LDAP Authentication, if “Anonymous Authentication” in the LDAP
server’s settings is not set to “Prohibit”, users who do not have an LDAP serv-
er account might still be able to gain access.
❒ If the LDAP server is configured using Windows Active Directory, Anony-
mous Authentication might be available. If Windows Authentication is avail-
able, we recommend you use it.
❒ The first time an unregistered user accesses the machine after LDAP authen- 2
tication has been specified, the user is registered in the machine and can use
the functions available under [Available Functions] during LDAP Authentica-
tion.
❒ To limit the available functions for each user, register each user and corre-
sponding [Available Functions] setting in the address book, or specify [Available
Functions] for each registered user. The [Available Functions] setting becomes ef-
fective when the user accesses the machine subsequently.
Specifying LDAP Authentication


51
E Select [LDAP Auth.].
Note
F Select the LDAP server to be used for LDAP authentication.
52
User Authentication

Note
not support authentication, select [Simple (All)]. 2
Reference
Types”.
53
I Press [Change].
thentication.
K Press [Exit].
L Select which of the machine’s functions you want to permit.

For details about limiting available functions, see p.121 “Limiting Available
Functions”.
54
User Authentication
M Press [Change] for “Login Name Attribute”.
N Enter the login name attribute , and then press [OK].

Note
❒ You can use the Login Name Attribute as a search criterion to obtain infor-
mation about an authenticated user. You can create a search filter based on
the Login Name Attribute, select a user, and then retrieve the user infor-
mation from the LDAP server so it is transferred to the machine’s address
book. The method for selecting the user name depends on the server envi-
ronment. Check the server environment and enter the user name accord-
ingly.
O Press [Change] for “Unique attribute”.
55
P Enter the unique attribute and then press [OK].
Note
❒ Specify Unique Attribute on the machine to match the user information in
the LDAP server with that in the machine. By doing this, if the Unique At-
tribute of a user registered in the LDAP server matches that of a user reg-
istered in the machine, the two instances are treated as referring to the
same user.You can enter an attribute such as “serialNumber” or “uid”. Ad-
ditionally, you can enter “cn” or “employeeNumber”, provided it is
unique. If you do not specify the Unique Attribute, an account with the
same user information but with a different login user name will be created
in the machine.
Q Press [OK].
R Press the {User Tools} key.
Integration Server Authentication

To use Integration Server Authentication, you need a server on which ScanRout-
er software that supports authentication is installed.
For external authentication, the Integration Server Authentication collectively
authenticates users accessing the server over the network, providing a server-in-
dependent centralized user authentication system that is safe and convenient.
For example, if the delivery server and the machine share the same Integration
Server Authentication, single sign-on is possible using DeskTopBinder.
To use [Integration Server Authentication], the machine must have access to a server
on which Ridoc Document System software and [Authentication Manager] are in-
stalled.
For details about the software, contact your local dealer.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliabil-
ity of the SSL server being connected to.
56
User Authentication
Important
❒ During Integration Server Authentication, the data registered in the server,
such as the user’s e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine.
If user information on the server is changed, information registered in the ma-
chine may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Note
❒ The built-in default administrator name is “Admin” on the Server and “ad-
min” on the machine. 2
Specifying Integration Server Authentication
This section explains how to specify the machine settings.
For details, see the Authentication Manager manual.
57
E Select [Integration Server Authentication].
Note
❒ If you do not wish to use User Authentication Management, select [Off].
F Press [Change] for “Server Name”.
Specify the name of the server for external authentication.
58
User Authentication
G Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
Enter the IPv4 address or host name.

H In “Authentication Type”, select the authentication system for external au-
thentication.
Select an available authentication system.

I Press [Change] for “Domain Name”.
J Enter the domain name, and then press [OK].

Note
❒ You cannot specify a domain name under an authentication system that
does not support domain login.
59
K Press [Obtain URL].
The machine obtains the URL of the server specified in [Server Name].
other settings.
If [Server Name] or the setting for enabling SSL is changed after obtaining the
URL, the “URL” is “Not Obtained”.
L Press [OK]
If you set “Authentication Type” to “Windows”, you can use the global
group. If you set “Authentication Type” to “Notes”, you can use the Notes
group. If you set “Authentication Type” to “Basic (Integration Server)”, you
can use the groups created using the Authentication Manager.
M Select the “Printer Job Authentication” level.
60
User Authentication
Note
tion is not required. Specify this setting if you want to print using unau- 2
If you select [Entire], proceed to step R.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step N.
Reference
Types”.
N Press [Simple (Limitation)]
O Press [Change].
61
P Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Au-
thentication.
Q Press [Exit].
R Press [On] for “SSL” and then press [OK].
To not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
S Press the {User Tools} key.
62
User Authentication
❖ Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job Types

This section explains the relationship between printer job authentication lev-
els and printer job types.
Depending on the combination of printer job authentication level and printer
job type, the machine may not print properly. Set an appropriate combination
according to the operating environment.
User authentication is supported by the RPCS and PCL printer drivers.
Machine Settings (displayed on the control panel) Printer Job Types
2
[User Authentication [Printer Job Au- [Restrict Use of A B C D E F G
Management] thentication] Simple Encryption]
[Off] — — ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
[User Code Auth.],[Ba- [Simple (All)] [Off] $ ❍ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ❍
sic Auth.], [Windows
[On] ×
Auth.],[LDAP Auth.],
[Integration Server Au- [Entire] [Off] $ ❍ × ❍ × × ❍
thentication]
[On] ×
✩: Printing is possible regardless of user authentication.

❍: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful. If user authentica-
tion fails, the print job is reset.
$: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful and [Driver Encryp-
tion Key] for the printer driver and machine match.
×: Printing is not possible regardless of user authentication, and the print job
is reset.
Reference
For details about [Restrict Use of Simple Encryption], see p.149 “Changing the
Extended Security Functions”.
❖ [Printer Job Authentication]

• [Entire]
The machine authenticates all printer jobs and remote settings, and cancels
jobs and settings that fail authentication.
Printer Jobs: Job Reset
Settings: Disabled
• [Simple (All)]
The machine authenticates printer jobs and remote settings that have au-
thentication information, and cancels the jobs and settings that fail authen-
tication.
Printer jobs and settings without authentication information are per-
formed without being authenticated.
• [Simple (Limitation)].
You can specify the range to apply [Simple (Limitation)] to by specifying [Par-
allel Interface: Simple], [USB: Simple], and the client’s IPv4 address.
63
❖ Printer Job Types

A In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] and [Encrypt] check boxes are selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [With En-
cryption] check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies advanced encryption to the login passwords.
The printer driver encryption key, enables the driver encryption to prevent
2 the login password being stolen.
B In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [With En-
cryption] check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies simple encryption to login passwords.
C In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is not selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] check box is
not selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job and is dis-
abled.
D When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job contains user
code information.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job but the
user code information is.
Note
❒ This type also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
E When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job does not contain
user code information.
Neither personal authentication information nor user code information is
added to the printer job.
Note
❒ Type 5 also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
F A printer job or PDF file is sent from a host computer without a printer
driver and is printed via LPR.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job.
G A PDF file is printed via ftp.
Personal authentication is performed using the user ID and password used
for logging on via ftp. However, the user ID and password are not encrypt-
ed.
64
If User Authentication is Specified

When user authentication (User Code Authentication, Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authen-
tication) is set, the authentication screen is displayed. Unless a valid user name
and password are entered, operations are not possible with the machine. Log on
to operate the machine, and log off when you are finished operations. Be sure to
log off to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.When auto logout 2
timer is specified, the machine automatically logs you off if you do not use the
control panel within a given time. Additionally, you can authenticate using an
external device. For details, see p.70 “Authentication using an external device”.
Note
❒ Consult the User Administrator about your login user name, password, and
user code.
❒ For user code authentication, enter a number registered in the address book
as [User Code].
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When user authentication is set, the following screen appears.
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ To log off, do one of the following:
• Press the Operation switch.
• Press the {User Tools} key, press [System Settings], and then press the {User
Tools} key again.
• Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When user authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer properties
of a printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
65
Login (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Au-
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
2
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
66
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using ap-
pears.
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Au-
thentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
67
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication
is set, make encryption settings in the printer properties of a printer driver, and
then specify a login user name and password. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
2 Note
❒ When logged on using a printer driver, logging off is not required.
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
❒ For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
❒ The procedure may differ depending on the Web Image Monitor used.
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)

A Click [Logout] to log off.
Note
❒ Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
68
Auto Logout
When using user authentication management, the machine automatically logs
you off if you do not use the control panel within a given time. This feature is
called “Auto Logout”. Specify how long the machine is to wait before perform-
ing Auto Logout.
2
C Press [Timer Settings].
D Press [Auto Logout Timer].
other settings.
69
E Select [On].
Note
❒ If you do not want to specify [Auto Logout Timer], select [Off].
F Enter “60” to “999” (seconds) using the number keys, and then press [q].
G Press the {User Tools} key.
Authentication using an external device

If you authenticate using an external device, see the Kit manual.
For details, contact your local dealer.
70
3. Preventing Information Leaks
Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying

Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed copy to discour-
age or prevent unauthorized copying.
If you enable data security for copying on the machine, printed copies of a doc-
ument with data security for copying are grayed out to prevent unauthorized
copying.
Make the setting as follows:
❖ Unauthorized Copy Prevention

A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy
prevention.
See p.75 “Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention
(Printer Driver Setting)”.
❖ Data Security for Copying

A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for
copying.
See p.76 “Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer
Driver Setting)”.
B Specifying data security for copying on the machine. Printed copies of a
document with data security for copying are grayed out.
See p.76 “Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting)”.
71
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern (for instance, a warn-
ing such as “No Copying”) in the printed document.
If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server by a copier
or multifunction printer, the embedded pattern appears clearly on the copy, dis-
couraging unauthorized copying.
AKB001S
1. Printed Documents 2. The document is copied, scanned,

Using the printer driver, you can embed or stored in the Document Server.
background images and pattern in a 3. Printed Copies
printed document for Unauthorized
Embedded pattern (for instance, a warn-
Copy Prevention.
ing such as “No Copying”) in a printed
document appears conspicuously in
printed copies.
Important
❒ Unauthorized copy prevention discourages unauthorized copying, and will
not necessarily stop information leaks.
❒ The embedded pattern is not assured to be copied, scanned, or stored prop-
erly in the Document Server.
Limitation
❒ Depending on the machine and scanner settings, the embedded pattern may
not be copied ,scanned, or stored in the Document Server.
Note
❒ To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size to at least 50 pt
(preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
Reference
To use the printer function under the User Authentication, you must enter the
login user name and password for the printer driver.
For details see the printer driver Help.
72
Data Security for Copying

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you can
print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text. Such a document is
called a data security for copying document.
If a data security for copying document is copied or stored in the Document
Server using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential information
being copied. Also if a document with embedded pattern is detected, the ma-
chine beeps. The unauthorized copy log is also stored. To gray out copies of data
security for copying documents when they are copied or stored in the Document 3
Server, the optional Copy Data Security Unit must be installed in the machine.
AKB002S
1. Documents with data security for 3. Printed Copies

copying Text and images in the document are
2. The document is copied or stored grayed out in printed copies.
in the Document Server.
Limitation
❒ If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed in the machine, you cannot use the
scanner.
❒ If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed, you cannot specify a scaling factor
less than 50% using the Control Panel under the Copier and Document Server
functions.
❒ If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
or stored in the Document Server by a copier or multi-function printer without
Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears conspicuously in the
copy. However, how conspicuously the text appears depends on the model of
the copier or multi-function printer being used and its scanning setting.
73
Note
❒ You can also embed pattern in a document protected by data security for cop-
ying. However, if such a document is copied or stored in the Document Serv-
er using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
the copy is grayed out, so the embedded pattern does not appear on the copy.
❒ If misdetection occurs, contact your service representative.
❒ If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
scanned, or stored in the Document Server using a copier or multi-function
printer without the Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears
clearly on the copy.
3 ❒ If the scanned data security for copying document is registered as a user
stamp, the machine does not beep, the file registered as a user stamp is grayed
out, and no entry is added to the unauthorized copying log.
Printing Limitations
The following is a list of limitations on printing with unauthorized copy preven-
tion and data security for copying.
❖ Unauthorized copy prevention / Data security for copying
Limitation
❒ You can print using the only RPCS printer driver.
❒ You cannot print at 200 dpi resolution.
❒ You cannot partially embed pattern in the printed document.
❒ You can only embed pattern that is entered in the [Text] box of the printer
driver.
❒ Printing with embedding takes longer than normal printing.
❖ Data security for copying Only
Limitation
❒ Select 7.2 × 10.1 inches or larger as the paper size.
❒ Select Plain or Recycled with a brightness of 70% or more as the paper type.
❒ If you select Duplex, the data security for copying function may not work
properly due to printing on the back of sheets.
74
Notice
1.The supplier does not guarantee that unauthorized copy prevention and data
security for copying will always work. Depending on the paper, the model of
copier or multi-function printer, and the copier or printer settings, unauthorized
copy prevention and data security for copying may not work properly.
2.The supplier is not liable for any damage caused by using or not being able to
use unauthorized copy prevention and data security for copying.
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security 3

for Copying
Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention (Printer Driver Setting)
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy pre-
vention.
For details see the printer driver Help.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.
A Open the printer driver dialog box.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Text] box in the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, enter the
text to be embedded in the printed document.
Also, specify [Font], [Font style:], and [Size].
E Click [OK].
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
75
Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer Driver Setting)
If a document printed using this function is copied or stored in the Document
Server by a copier or multi-function printer, the copy is grayed out.
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for copy-
ing.
For details about data security for copying, see p.73 “Data Security for Copy-
ing”.
3 For details see the printer driver Help.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, check the [Data security for
copying].
E Click [OK].
Reference
Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting)

To use this function, the Copy Data Security Unit must be installed.
If a document printed is copied or stored in the Document Server, the copy is
grayed out.
For details about data security for copying, see p.73 “Data Security for Copy-
ing”.
Preparation
Limitation
❒ If a document that is not copy-guarded is copied or stored, the copy or stored
file is not grayed out.
A Press the {User Tools}key.

76
3
D Press [Data security for copying].

If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
E Press[On].
If you do not want to specify [Data security for copying], select [Off].
F Press[OK].
G Press [Exit].
77
Printing a Confidential Document

To use this function, Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
Depending on the location of the machine, it is difficult to prevent unauthorized
persons from viewing prints lying in the machine’s output trays. When printing
confidential documents, use the Locked Print function.
❖ Locked Print
Using the printer’s Locked Print function, store files in the machine as Locked
Print files and then print them from the control panel and retrieve them im-
3 mediately, preventing others from viewing them.
Note
❒ To store files temporarily, select [Stored Print] under the printer driver. If you
select [Share stored print files], also, you can share these files.
Choosing a Locked Print file

Using the printer driver, specify a Locked Print file.
If user authentication has been enabled, you must enter the login user name and
login password using the printer driver. For details see the printer driver Help.
You can perform Locked Print even if user authentication is not enabled. For de-
tails see Printer Reference.

B Set [Job type:] to [Locked Print].
C Click [Details...].
D Enter the user ID and password.
Note
❒ The password entered here let you use the Locked Print function.
❒ To print a Locked Print file, enter the same password on the control panel.
Limitation
❒ Enter the user ID using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
❒ Enter the password using 4 to 8 numbers.
E Click [OK].
F Confirm the password by re-entering it.
G Click [OK].
H Perform Locked Print.
78
Reference
Printing a Locked Print File

Print Locked Print files using the control panel.
Consult your administrator if you have forgotten your password.
This can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
Preparation
3
For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.66
“Login (Using the Control Panel)”, p.67 “Log Off (Using the Control Panel)”.
A Press the {Printer} key.

B Press [Print Jobs].
C Press [Locked Print Job List].
Only Locked Print files belonging to the user who has logged on appear.
D Select the Locked Print file to print.
79
E Press [Print].
3
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
Note
❒ Enter the password specified in step D on p.78 “Choosing a Locked Print
file”.
G Press [Yes].
Deleting Locked Print Files

This can be specified by the file creator (owner).
To delete Locked Print files, you must enter the password for the files. If the
password has been forgotten, ask the file administrator to change the password.
Note
❒ Locked Print files can also be deleted by the file administrator.
80
3
D Select the file.

E Press [Delete].
F Enter the password of the Locked Print file, and then press [OK].
G Press [Yes].
81
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files

This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file administrator.
If the password has been forgotten, the file administrator change the password.
A Press the {Printer}key.
3

D Select the file.
E Press [Change Password].
82
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
3
The machine administrator does not need to enter the password.
G Enter the new password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
H If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
83
Unlocking Locked Print Files

If you specify “Enhance File Protection”, the file will be locked and become in-
accessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how
to unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about “Enhance File Protection”, see p.149 “Changing the Extended
3 Security Functions”.
D Select the file.

E Press [Unlock File].
F Press [Yes].
84
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files
Specifying Access Permission for Stored

Files
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in the
Document Server.
This can prevent activities such as printing or sending of stored files by unau-
thorized users.
You can also specify which users can change or delete stored files.
❖ Access Permission 3
To limit the use of stored files, you can specify four types of access permis-
sion.
Read-only In addition to checking the content of and in-
formation about stored files, you can also
print and send the files.
Edit You can change the print settings for stored
files. This includes permission to view files.
Edit / Delete You can delete stored files.
This includes permission to view and edit
files.
Full Control You can specify the user and access permis-
sion.This includes permission to view, edit,
and edit / delete files.
Note
❒ Files can be stored by any user who is allowed to use the Document Server,
copy function, or scanner function.
❒ Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the content of stored files. For
details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
❒ The default access permission for the file creator (owner) is “Read-only”.
You can also specify the access permission.
❖ Password for Stored Files

Passwords for stored files can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file
administrator.
You can obtain greater protection against the unauthorized use of files.
85
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files

Specify the users and their access permissions for each stored file.
By making this setting, only users granted access permission can access stored
files.
Preparation
3 ging off Using Administrator Authentication”.
Important
❒ If files become inaccessible, reset their access permission as the file creator
(owner). This can also be done by the file administrator. If you want to access
a file but do not have access permission, ask the file creator (owner).
A Press the {Document Server} key.

B Select the file.
C Press [Edit File].
86
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
3
E Press [Program/Change/Delete].
F Press [New Program].
87
G Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.

You can select more than one users.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
H Press [Exit].
I Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
select the permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
88
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner

Function
If user authentication is set for the scanner function, you can specify access priv-
ileges for made using these functions when storing them in the Document Serv-
er. You can also change the access privileges for the file.
Specifying Access Privileges When Storing Files

This section explains how to specify the access privileges and then store a file in
the Document Server under the scanner function. 3
A Press [Store File].
B Press [Access Privileges].
C Press [New Program].
89
D Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to. You can select
more than one users.
E Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then se-
lect the permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Con-
trol].
3 F Press [Exit].
G Press [OK].
H Store files in the Document Server.
Changing Access Privileges for Previously Stored Files
This section explains the authentication process for accessing a file stored in the
Document Server under the scanner function.
A Press [Select Stored File].
B Select the file.

C Press[Manage/Delete File].
90
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
3
E Press [Change Access Priv.].
F Press [Program/Change/Delete].
G Press [New Program].
H Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.
I Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then se-
lect the permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Con-
trol].
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
91
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the User’s
Stored Files
This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or user administrator.
Specify the users and their access permission to files stored by a particular user.
Only those users granted access permission can access stored files.
This makes the management of access permission easier than it is when permis-
sion is specified for each stored file.
3 Preparation
Important
❒ If files become inaccessible, be sure to enable the user administrator, and then
reset the access permission for the files in question.
92
3
93
G Under “Protect File(s)”, press [Program/Change/Delete] for “Permissions for

Users/Groups”.
3
other settings.
H Press [New Program].
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
94
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
3
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
O Press the {User Tools} key.
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files

Specify passwords for the stored files.
Provides increased protection against unauthorized use of files.
Preparation

B Select the file.
95
3
D Press [Change Password].
E Enter the password using the number keys.
You can use 4 to 8 numbers as the password for the stored file.
F Press [OK].
G Confirm the password by re-entering it using the number keys.
H Press [OK].
I Press [OK].
96
Unlocking Files
If you specify “Enhance File Protection”, the file will be locked and become in-
accessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how
to unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about “Enhance File Protection”, see p.149 “Changing the Extended
Security Functions”.
Preparation
For details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentica- 3

B Select the file.
97
D Press [Unlock Files].
3
E Press [Yes].
F Press [OK].
98
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission
Preventing Data Leaks Due to

Unauthorized Transmission
If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person mas-
querading as the user.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being sent
to destinations not registered in the address book.
Restrictions on Destinations
3
Make the setting to disable the direct entry of e-mail addresses and phone num-
bers under the scanner function.
By making this setting, the destinations can be restricted to addresses registered
If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [On], you can prohibit users from directly
entering telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, or Folder Path in order to send
files. If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [Off], [Restrict Adding of User Destina-
tions] appears. In [Restrict Adding of User Destinations], you can restrict users from
registering data in the address book.
If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [Off], users can directly enter des-
tination telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, and Folder Path in [ProgDest] on
the scanner screen. If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [On], users can
specify destinations directly, but cannot use [ProgDest] to register data in the ad-
dress book. When this setting is made, only the user administrator can change
the address book.
For details, see p.149 “Changing the Extended Security Functions”.
Preparation
99
3
D Press [Extended Security].
E Press [On] for “Restrict Use of Destinations”.
100
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission
F Press [OK].
Reference
This can also be specified using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMon-
itor for Admin. For details, see the Help for each application.
101
Protecting the Address Book

If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person mas-
querading as the user.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data in
the address book.
Address Book Access Permission

3
This can be specified by the registered user. The access permission can also be
specified by a user granted full control or the user administrator.
You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book.
By making this setting, you can prevent the data in the address book being used
by unregistered users.
Preparation

102
3
G Under “Protect Destination”, press [Program/Change/Delete] for “Permissions

for Users/Groups”.
103
H Press [New Program].
3
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
Select the permission, from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
104 O Press the {User Tools} key.
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book

Encrypt the data in the address book.
Reference
See p.149 “Changing the Extended Security Functions”.
Preparation
3
Note
❒ If you register additional users after encrypting the data in the address book,
those users are also encrypted.
105
3
E Press [On] for “Encrypt Address Book”.
F Press [Change] for [Encryption Key].
G Enter the encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
H Press [Encrypt / Decrypt].
106
I Press [Yes].
Do not switch the main power off during encryption, as doing so may corrupt
the data.
Encrypting the data in the address book may take a long time.
The time it takes to encrypt the data in the address book depends on the
number of registered users.
The machine cannot be used during encryption.
Normally, once encryption is complete, [Exit] appears.
If you press [Stop] during encryption, the data is not encrypted.
If you press [Stop] during decryption, the data stays encrypted. 3
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
107
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk

A Hard Disk
The machine’s hard disk lets you store data under the copy, printer, scanner,
and document server functions, as well as the address book and counters
stored under each user code.
B Data Not Overwritten in the Hard Disk
The machine’s memory lets you store network TWAIN scanner. Even if you
delete the data on the hard disk, this data remains intact.
3
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk
To use this function, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit must be installed.
To prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine,
you can overwrite all data stored on the hard disk. You can also automatically
overwrite temporarily-stored data.
Note
❒ Depending on the hard disk capacity and the method of erasing the data, this
action may take a few hours. Once you start the Erase All Memory function,
no other machine operation is possible until the function completes or you
quit the function.
❖ Auto Erase Memory Setting

To erase selected data on the hard disk, specify [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
❖ Erase All Memory

To erase all the data on the hard disk, using [Erase All Memory].
❖ Methods of Erasing the Data

You can select the method of erasing the data from the following:
The default is “NSA”.
NSA *1 Overwrites the data on the hard disk twice
with random numbers and once with zeros.
DoD *2 Overwrites the data with a number, its com-

plement, and random numbers, and then
checks the result.
Random Numbers Overwrites the data with random numbers
the specified number of times.
You can specify between 1 and 9 as the
number of times the data is overwritten with
random numbers. The default is 3 times.
*1
National Security Agency
*2
Department of Defense
Reference
For details, see the manual supplied with the DataOverwriteSecurity unit.
108
“Auto Erase Memory Setting”

A document scanned in Copier, or Scanner mode, or print data sent from a print-
er driver is temporarily stored on the machine's hard disk.
Even after the job is completed, it remains in the hard disk as temporary data.
Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over
it.
Overwriting starts automatically once the job is completed.
The Copier, and Printer functions take priority over the Auto Erase Memory
function. If a copy, or print job is in progress, overwriting will only be done after
3
the job is completed.
Preparation

109
D Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
3
other settings.
E Press [On], and then select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step F.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step H.
F Press [Change].
110
G Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
H Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is set.
Important
❒ When Auto Erase Memory is set to “On”, temporary data that remained on
the hard disk when Auto Erase Memory was “Off” might not be overwrit-
ten.
Note
❒ Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before over-
writing is completed, the temporary data will remain on the hard disk un-
til the main power switch is next turned on and overwriting is resumed.
❒ If the overwriting method is changed while overwriting is in progress, the
remainder of the temporary data will be overwritten using the method set
originally.
Canceling Auto Erase Memory
A Follow steps A to D in “Auto Erase Memory Setting”.

B Press [Off].
C Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is disabled.
Note
❒ To set Auto Erase Memory to “On” again, repeat the procedure in “Auto
Erase Memory Setting”.
111
Types of Data that Can or Cannot Be Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by Auto Copier • Copy jobs
Erase Memory
Printer • Print Jobs
• Sample Print/Locked
Print/Stored Print Jobs *1
• Spool Printing jobs
3 • PDF Direct Print data
Scanner *2 • Scanned files sent by e-mail

• Files sent by Scan to Folder
• Documents sent using
DeskTopBinder, the Scan-
Router delivery software
or a Web Image Monitor
Data not overwritten by Auto Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using
Erase Memory the Copier, Printer or Scanner functions *3
Information registered in the Address Book *4

Counters stored under each user code
Image overlay data *5

*1 A Sample Print, Locked Print, or Stored Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.Stored print jobs can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if
they have been deleted in advance.
*2 Data scanned with network TWAIN scanner will not be overwritten by Auto Erase
Memory.
*3 A stored document can only be overwritten after it has been printed or deleted from
the Document Server.
*4 Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security. For details, see p.105
“Encrypting the Data in the Address Book”.
*5 Image overlay data can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if it is deleted in
advance.
112
“Erase All Memory”

You can erase all the data on the hard disk by writing over it. This is useful if you
relocate or dispose of your machine.
Preparation
Important 3
❒ If you select Erase All Memory, the following are also deleted: user codes,
counters under each user code, user stamps, data stored in the Address Book,
printer fonts downloaded by users, applications using Embedded Software
Architecture, SSL server certificates, and the machine’s network settings.
Note
❒ Before erasing the hard disk, you can back up user codes, counters for each
user code, and Address Book data using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For
details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
A Disconnect communication cables connected to the machine.

D Press [Administrator Tools].
113
E Press [Erase All Memory].
3
other settings.
F Select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step G.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step I.
G Press [Change].
114
H Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
I Press [OK].
J Press [Yes].
K When overwriting is completed, press [Exit], and then turn off the power.
Reference
Before turning the power off, see “Turning On the Power”, About This Ma-
chine.
Important
❒ Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before Erase
All Memory is completed, overwriting is canceled.
❒ Make sure the main power switch is not turned off during overwriting.
Note
❒ If the main power is turned off when Erase All Memory is in progress,
overwriting will start again when you next turn on the main power.
❒ If an error occurs before overwriting is completed, turn off the main pow-
er. Turn it on again, and then repeat from stepB.
115
Canceling Erase All Memory
A Press [Cancel] while Erase All Memory is in progress.

B Press [Yes].
Erase All Memory is canceled.
Note
❒ If you stop this before completion, the data is not fully erased. Execute
[Erase All Memory] again to erase the data.
3 C Turn off the main power.
Note
❒ To resume overwriting after power off, turn on the main power of the ma-
chine, and then repeat the procedure in “Erase All Memory”.
116
4. Managing Access to the

Machine
Preventing Modification of Machine
Settings
Administrator type determines which machine settings can be modified. Users
cannot change the administrator settings. In [Admin. Authentication], [Available Set-
tings], the administrator can select which settings users cannot specify.
Register the administrators before using the machine.
❖ Type of Administrator
Register the administrator on the machine, and then authenticate the admin-
istrator using the administrator’s login user name and password. The admin-
istrator can also specify [Available Settings] in [Admin. Authentication] to prevent
users from specifying certain settings. Administrator type determines which
machine settings can be modified. The following types of administrator are
available:
• User Administrator
• Network Administrator
• Machine Administrator
• File Administrator
Reference
For details, see p.11 “Administrators”.
For details, see p.17 “Administrator Authentication”.
For details, see p.172 “Machine Administrator Settings”.
For details, see p.180 “Network Administrator Settings”.
For details, see p.184 “File Administrator Settings”.
For details, see p.12 “User Administrator”.
❖ Menu Protect
Use this function to specify the permission level for users to change those set-
tings accessible by non-administrators.
You can specify Menu Protect for the following settings:
• Copy / Document Server Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
Reference
For details, see p.192 “User Settings”.
117
Managing Access to the Machine
Menu Protect
The administrator can also limit users’ access permission to the machine’s set-
tings. The machine’s System Settings menu and the printer’s regular menus can
be locked so they cannot be changed. This function is also effective when man-
agement is not based on user authentication.
To change the menu protect setting, you must first enable administrator authen-
tication.
Reference
For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.192 “User Set-
tings”.
4 Menu Protect
You can set menu protect to [Off], [Level 1], or [Level 2]. If you set it to [Off], no
menu protect limitation is applied. To limit access to the fullest extent, select
[Level 2]. For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.192
“User Settings”.
Copying Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Copier / Document Server Features], set [Machine Manage-
ment] to [On] in [Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in
[System Settings].

B Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

D Press [Menu Protect].
118
Menu Protect
E Select the menu protect level, and then press [OK].

Printer Functions
4
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Printer Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].

B Press [Printer Features].
C Press [Maintenance].
119

Scanner Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Scanner Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Set-
tings].

B Press [Scanner Features].
C Press [Initial Settings].

120
Limiting Available Functions
Limiting Available Functions

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machine’s functions.
❖ Available Functions
Specify the available functions from the copier, Document Server, scanner,
and printer functions.
Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions available
to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions available
to users. 4
Preparation


121
E Select the user.

4 G In [Available Functions], select the functions you want to specify.
other settings.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
122
Managing Log Files
Managing Log Files

A Log information
To view the log, the log collection server is required.
The following log information is stored in the machine’s memory and on its
hard disk:
• Job log
Stores information about workflow related to user files, such as copying,
printing, and scan file delivery
• Access log
Stores information about access, such as logging on and off, creating and
deleting files, scanning data security for copying documents, administra-
tor procedures *1 , and customer engineer procedures. *2
*1
Deleting all log information 4
*2 Formatting the hard disk
B Deleting log information
To delete the log, the log collection server is required.
By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard
disk.
C Transferring log information
To transfer the log, the log collection server is required.
You can transfer the log information, which indicates who tried to gain access
and at what time.
By transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify un-
authorized access.
Specifying Delete All Logs

By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard disk.

123
D Press [Delete All Logs].

4 other settings.
E Press [Yes].
F Press [Exit].
G Press the {User Tools}key.
Transfer Log Setting

The machine administrator can select [On] from the log server only.
When using the machine’s control panel, you can change the setting to [Off] only
if it is set to [On].
You can check and change the transfer log setting. This setting lets you transfer
log files to the log server to check the history data and identify unauthorized ac-
cess.
For details about log collection server, contact your local dealer.
For details about the transfer log setting, see log collection server help.
124
Managing Log Files
D Press [Transfer Log Setting].

4
other settings.
E Press [Off].
F Press [OK].
G Press the {User Tools}key.
125
126
5. Enhanced Network Security
Preventing Unauthorized Access

You can limit IP addresses, disable ports and protocols, or use Web Image Mon-
itor to specify the network security level to prevent unauthorized access over the
network and protect the address book, stored files, and default settings.
Enabling/Disabling Protocols
This can be specified by the network administrator.
Specify whether to enable or disable the function for each protocol.
By making this setting, you can specify which protocols are available and so pre-
vent unauthorized access over the network.
Preparation

C Press [Interface Settings].
127
D Press [Effective Protocol].
E Press [Invalid] for the protocol you want to disable.
F Press [OK].
Reference
Advanced network settings can be specified using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
128
Access Control
The machine can control TCP/IP access.
Limit the IP addresses from which access is possible by specifying the access
control range.
For example, if you specify the access control range as [192.168.15.16]-
[192.168.15.20], the client PC addresses from which access is possible will be from
192.168.15.16 to 192.168.15.20.
Limitation
❒ Using access control, you can limit access involving LPR, RCP/RSH, FTP, IPP,
DIPRINT, Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client or DeskTop-
Binder. You cannot limit the Monitoring of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
❒ You cannot limit access involving telnet, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Open a Web Image Monitor. 5

B Enter “http://(machine's-address)/” in the address bar to access the ma-
chine.
C Log onto the machine.
The network administrator can log on using the appropriate login user name
and login password.
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Access Control].

The [Access Control] page appears.
E To specify the IPv4 Address, in [Access Control Range], enter an IP address

that has access to the machine. To specify the IPv6 Address, in [Access Con-
trol Range] - [Range], enter an IP address that has access to the machine, or in
[Mask], enter an IP address that has access to the machine and specify the
[Mask Length].
F Click [OK].
Access control is set.
G Log off from the machine.
Reference
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
129
Specifying Network Security Level

This setting lets you change the security level to limit unauthorized access.
Set the security level to [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].
Select [Level 2] for maximum security to protect confidential information.
Select [Level 1] for moderate security. Use this setting if the machine is connected
to the office local area network (LAN).
Select [Level 0] to use this setting if no information needs to be protected.
You can specify the network security level setting for the entire network using
the machine’s control panel. However, once you change the network security
level setting using Web Image Monitor, the setting will no longer appear on the
control panel.
Reference
5 For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.24
“Logging on Using Administrator Authentication”, p.26 “Logging off Using
Administrator Authentication”.

130
D Press [Network Security Level].
If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
E Select the network security level.
Select [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].

F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
H Press the {User Tools}key.
131
-Status of Functions under each Network Security Level

❍= Available
— = Unavailable
U = Port is open.
| = Port is closed.
✩ = Automatic
★ = Ciphertext Only
× = Ciphertext Priority
Function Network Security Level
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2
Interface IEEE1394 SBP-2 ❍ ❍ —
Bluetooth ❍ ❍ —
5 IPv4 over 1394 ❍ ❍ ❍
132
Function Network Security Level

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2
TCP/IP TCP/IP ❍ ❍ ❍
HTTP Port 80 U U U
Port 443 U U U
Port 631 U U |
Port 7443/7444 U U U
IPP Port 80 U U U
Port 631 U U |
Port 443 U U U
DIPRINT ❍ ❍ —
LPR ❍ ❍ —
FTP Port 21 U U U
ssh Port 22 U U U 5
sftp U U U
RFU Port 10021 U U U
RSH/RCP ❍ ❍ —
SNMP ❍ ❍ ❍
SNMP v1v2 Setting ❍ — —
Browse ❍ ❍ —
SNMP v3 ❍ ❍ ❍
SNMP
✩ ✩ ★
Encryption
TELNET ❍ — —
SSDP Port 1900 U U |
NBT Port 137/138 U U |
SSL ❍ ❍ ❍
SSL / TLS En-
× × ★
cryption Mode
DNS ❍ ❍ —
SMB ❍ ❍ —
NetWare NetWare ❍ ❍ —
AppleTalk AppleTalk ❍ ❍ —
133
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication
passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user au-
thentication.
❖ Driver Encryption Key

Encrypt the password transmitted when specifying user authentication.
To encrypt the login password, specify the driver encryption key on the ma-
chine and on the printer driver installed in the user’s computer.
Reference
❖ Group Passwords for PDF Files

DeskTopBinder Lite’s PDF Direct Print function allows a PDF group pass-
5 word to be specified to enhance security.
Note
❒ You cannot perform PDF Direct Print for compressed PDF files.
❒ To use PDF direct print, the optional PostScript3 unit must be installed.
❖ Password for IPP Authentication

To encrypt the IPP Authentication password on the Web Image Monitor, set
[Authentication] to [DIGEST], and then specify the IPPAuthentication password
set on the machine.
Note
❒ You can use Telnet or FTP to manage passwords for IPP authentication, al-
though it is not recommended.
Driver Encryption Key

Specify the driver encryption key on the machine.
By making this setting, you can encrypt login passwords for transmission to pre-
vent them from being analyzed.
Reference
Preparation
134
E For [Driver Encryption Key], press [Change].
135
F Enter the driver encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the driver encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Note
❒ The network administrator must give users the driver encryption key
specified on the machine so they can register it on their computers. Make
sure to enter the same driver encryption key as that specified on the ma-
chine.
G Press [OK].
Reference
See the TWAIN driver Help.
5 Group Password for PDF files

On the machine, specify the group password for PDF files.
By using a PDF group password, you can enhance security and so protect pass-
words from being analyzed.
Preparation
Note
❒ The network administrator must give users the group password for PDF files
that is already registered on the machine. The users can then register it in
DeskTopBinder on their computers.For details, see the DeskTopBinder Help
❒ Make sure to enter the same character string as that specified on the machine
for the group password for PDF files.
❒ The group password for PDF files can also be specified using Web Image
Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
136
B Press [Printer Features].
C Press [PDF Menu], and then press [PDF Group Password].

If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext].
D For [Current Password], press [Enter].

E Enter the password, and then press [OK]. 5
Enter the group password for PDF files using up to 32 alphanumeric charac-
ters.
F Press [OK].
G For [New Password], press [Enter].
H Enter the password, and then press [OK].
I For [Confirm New Password], press [Enter].
J Enter the password and press [OK].
K Press [OK].
137
IPP Authentication Password

Specify the IPP authentication passwords for the machine using Web Image
Monitor.
By making this setting, you can encrypt IPP authentication passwords for trans-
mission to prevent them from being analyzed.
Note
❒ When using the IPP port under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, you
can use the operating system’s standard IPP port.
A Open a Web Image Monitor.

B Enter “http://(machine's-address)/” in the address bar to access the ma-
chine.
5 C Log onto the machine.

The network administrator can log on. Enter the login user name and login
password.
D Click [Configuration], click [Security], and then click [IPP Authentication].

The [IPP Authentication] page appears.
E Select [DIGEST] from the [Authentication] list.

F Enter the user name in the [User Name] box.
G Enter the password in the [Password] box.
H Click [Apply].
IPP authentication is specified.
I Log off from the machine.
138
Protection Using Encryption

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can estab-
lish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine using
an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish en-
crypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
❖ SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
AFN001S
A To access the machine from a user’s computer, request for the SSL server
certificate and public key.
B The server certificate and public key are sent from the machine to the us-
er’s computer.
C Using the public key, encrypt the data for transmission.
D The encrypted data is sent to the machine.
E The encrypted data is decrypted using the private key.
Note
❒ To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions. 139
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption

To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication,
create and install the server certificate.
There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-cer-
tificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and
install it.
❖ Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)

A Creating and installing the server certificate
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
B Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
❖ Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)

5 A Creating the server certificate
Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the cer-
tificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate author-
ity.
B Installing the server certificate
C Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Creating and Installing the Server Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)
Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
Note
❒ To confirm whether SSL configuration is enabled, enter https://(machine’s-
address) in your Web Image Monitor’s address bar to access this machine. If
the “The page cannot be displayed” message appears, check the configura-
tion as the SSL configuration is invalid.
140
Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.
B Enter “http://(machine's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Device Certificate].

E Click [Create].
F Make the necessary settings.
5
Reference
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
The setting is changed.
H Click [OK].
A security warning dialog box appears.
I Check the details, and then click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the printer has been installed.
J Log off from the machine.

Note
❒ Click [Delete] to delete the server certificate from the machine.
141
Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.

The [Device Certificate] page appears.
5 E Click [Request].
F Make the necessary settings.
Reference
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Requesting] appears for [Certificate Status] in the [Certificate] area.
H Log off from the machine.
I Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.
The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details,
contact the certificate authority.
For the application, click the Web Image Monitor Details icon and use the in-
formation that appears in [Certificate Details].
Note
❒ Using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certif-
icate but you cannot send the application.
❒ Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request for the server certificate.
142
Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.
Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.

The [Device Certificate] page appears.
5
E Click [Install].
F Enter the contents of the server certificate.
In the [Certificate Request] box, enter the contents of the server certificate re-
ceived from the certificate authority.
Reference
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the machine has been installed.
H Log off from the machine.

Enabling SSL
After installing the server certificate in the machine, enable the SSL setting.
This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a cer-
tificate authority.

143
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [SSL/TLS].

The [SSL/TLS] page appears.
E Click [Enable] for [SSL/TLS].

F Click [OK].
The SSL setting is enabled.
G Log off from the machine.
Note
❒ If you set [Permit SSL / TLS Communication] to [Ciphertext Only], enter “ht-
tps://(machine's address)/” to access the machine.
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer),
5 you need to install the certificate on the user’s computer.
The network administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certifi-
cate to users.
If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web Im-
age Monitor or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.
A When the [Security Alert] dialog box appears, click [View Certificate].
The [Certificate] dialog box appears.
To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry
of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.
B On the [General] tab, click [Install Certificate...].
Certificate Import Wizard starts.
C Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instruc-
tions.
Note
❒ For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web Image Monitor
Help.
❒ If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer,
confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.
Reference
For details about where to store the certificate when accessing the machine
using IPP, see the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
144
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode

By specifying the SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode, you can change the
security level.
❖ Encrypted Communication Mode

Using the encrypted communication mode, you can specify encrypted com-
munication.
Ciphertext Only Allows encrypted communication only.
If encryption is not possible, the machine
does not communicate.
Ciphertext Priority Performs encrypted communication if en-
cryption is possible.
If encryption is not possible, the machine
communicates without it.
Ciphertext / Clear Text Communicates with or without encryption,
according to the setting. 5
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode
After installing the server certificate, specify the SSL/TLS encrypted communi-
cation mode. By making this setting, you can change the security level.
Preparation

145
D Press [Permit SSL / TLS Communication]
other settings.
E Select the encrypted communication mode.
Select [Ciphertext Only], [Ciphertext Priority], or [Ciphertext / Clear Text] as the en-
crypted communication mode.
F Press [OK].
Note
❒ The SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode can also be specified using
Web Image Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
146
SNMPv3 Encryption
When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or another application to make
various settings, you can encrypt the data transmitted.
By making this setting, you can protect data from being tampered with.
Preparation

147
D Press [Permit SNMP v3 Communication].
other settings.
E Press [Encryption Only].
F Press [OK].
Note
❒ To use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin for encrypting the data for speci-
fying settings, you need to specify the network administrator’s [Encryption
Password] setting and [Encryption Key] in [SNMP Authentication Information] in
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, in addition to specifying [Permit SNMP v3
Communication] on the machine.
❒ If network administrator’s [Encryption Password] setting is not specified, the
data for transmission may not be encrypted or sent.
Reference
For details about specifying the network administrator’s [Encryption Pass-
word] setting, see p.20 “Registering the Administrator”.
For details about specifying [Encryption Key] in SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin, see the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
148
6. Specifying the Extended

Security Functions
Changing the Extended Security
Functions
As well as providing basic security through user authentication and the machine
access limits specified by the administrators, you can increase security by, for in-
stance, encrypting transmitted data and data in the address book. If you need ex-
tended security, specify the machine’s extended security functions before using
the machine.
This section outlines the extended security functions and how to specify them.
For details about when to use each function, see the corresponding chapters.
Changing the Extended Security Functions

To change the extended security functions, display the extended security screen
as follows:
Preparation
Procedure for Changing the Extended Security Functions

149
Specifying the Extended Security Functions
E Press the setting you want to change, and change the setting.
F Press [OK].
150
Settings
❖ Driver Encryption Key
This can be specified by the network administrator. Encrypt the password
transmitted when specifying user authentication. The Driver Encryption Key
must match the encryption key set on the machine.
Reference
See the TWAIN driver Help.
❖ Encrypt Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator. Encrypt the data in the ma-
chine’s address book.
Reference
See p.105 “Encrypting the Data in the Address Book”.
• On
• Off
Note
6
❒ Default: Off
❖ Restrict Use of Destinations

The available scanner destinations are limited to the destinations registered
Reference
See p.99 “Restrictions on Destinations”.
A user cannot directly enter the destinations for transmission.
Limitation
❒ If you specify the setting to receive e-mails via SMTP, you cannot use [Re-
strict Use of Destinations].
Note
❒ The destinations searched by “Search LDAP” can be used.
• On
• Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
151
❖ Restrict Adding of User Destinations

When “Restrict Use of Destinations” is set to [Off]. After entering a scanner
destination directly, you can register it in the address book by pressing
[ProgDest]. If [On] is selected for this setting, [ProgDest] does not appear. If you
set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [On], users can specify destinations
directly, but cannot use [ProgDest] to register data in the address book. When
this setting is made, only the user administrator can change the address book.
• On
• Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
❖ Restrict Display of User Information

This can be specified if user authentication is specified. When the job history
is checked using a network connection for which authentication is not avail-
able, all personal information can be displayed as “********”. For example,
when someone not authenticated as an administrator checks the job history
using SNMP in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, personal information can be
displayed as “********” so users cannot be identified. Because no information
6 identifying registered users can be viewed, unauthorized users can be pre-
vented from obtaining information about the registered files.
• On
• Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
❖ Enhance File Protection

This can be specified by the file administrator. By specifying a password, you
can limit operations such as printing, deleting, and sending files, and can pre-
vent unauthorized people from accessing the files. However, it is still possible
for the password to be cracked.
By specifying “Enhance File Protection”, files are locked and so become inac-
cessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This can protect the files
from unauthorized access attempts in which a password is repeatedly guessed.
The locked files can only be unlocked by the file administrator. When “En-
hance File Protection” is specified, ( ) appears at the screen.
Note
❒ If files are locked, you cannot select them even if the correct password is
entered.
• On
• Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
152
❖ Settings by SNMP v1 and v2

This can be specified by the network administrator. When the machine is ac-
cessed using the SNMPv1, v2 protocol, authentication cannot be performed,
allowing machine administrator settings such as the paper setting to be
changed. If you select [Prohibit], the setting can be viewed but not specified
with SNMPv1, v2.
• Prohibit
• Do not Prohibit
Note
❒ Default: Do not Prohibit
❖ Restrict Use of Simple Encryption

For example, this setting is set to [On] and you want to edit the address book
in User Management Tool or Address Management Tool in SmartDevice-
Monitor for Admin, or you want to access the machine using DeskTopBinder
or the ScanRouter delivery software, enable SSL/TLS for encrypted commu-
nication. For details about specifying SSL/TLS, see p.145 “Setting the SSL /
TLS Encryption Mode”.
If you select [On], specify the encryption setting using the printer driver.
• On
6
• Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
153
❖ Authenticate Current Job

This setting lets you specify whether or not authentication is required for op-
erations such as canceling jobs under the copier and printer functions.
If you select [Login Privilege], authorized users and the machine administrator
can operate the machine. When this is selected, authentication is not required
for users who logged on to the machine before [Login Privilege] was selected.
If you select [Access Privilege], users who canceled a copy or print job in
progress and the machine administrator can operate the machine.
Limitation
❒ Even if you select [Login Privilege] and log onto the machine, you cannot
cancel a copy or print job in progress if you are not authorized to use the
copy and printer functions.
❒ You can specify [Authenticate Current Job] only if [User Authentication Manage-
ment] was specified.
• Login Privilege
• Access Privilege
• Off
6 Note
❒ Default: Off
❖ Password Policy
The password policy setting is effective only if [Basic Auth.] is specified.
This setting lets you specify [Complexity Setting] and [Minimum Character No.] for
the password. By making this setting, you can limit the available passwords
to only those that meet the conditions specified in [Complexity Setting] and [Min-
imum Character No.].
If you select [Level 1], specify the password using a combination of two types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
If you select [Level 2], specify the password using a combination of three types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
154
Other Security Functions

This section explains settings for preventing information leaks, and functions
that you can restrict to further increase security.
Scanner Function
❖ Print & Delete Scanner Journal
To prevent personal information in the transmission/delivery history being
printed automatically, set user authentication and the journal will not print
automatically. Instead, items in the Print&Delete Scanner Journal are over-
written one by one when the number of transmissions/deliveries exceeds
250. To prevent the transmission/delivery history from overwritten, change
the setting so that the Scanner Journal is printed automatically.
Weekly Timer Code

When weekly timer is set,if you set the service mode lock to [On], users must en-
ter the Weekly Timer Code. 6
Specifying Weekly Timer Code

155
D Press [Weekly Timer Code].
E Press [On].
F Enter [Weekly Timer Code] using the number keys, and then press [q].
156
Canceling Weekly Timer Code


D Press [Weekly Timer Code].
157
E Press [Off].
158
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers

Only
The machine can be set so that operation is impossible without administrator au-
thentication.
The machine can be set to prohibit operation without administrator authentica-
tion and also prohibit remote registration in the address book by a service rep-
resentative.
We maintain strict security when handling customers’ data. Also, by being au-
thenticated by an administrator to use the machine, we operate the machine un-
der the customer’s control.
Use the following settings.
• Service Mode Lock
Settings
❖ Service Mode Lock
This can be specified by the machine administrator. Service mode is used by 6
a customer engineer for inspection or repair. If you set the service mode lock
to [On], service mode cannot be used unless the machine administrator logs
onto the machine and cancels the service mode lock to allow the customer en-
gineer to operate the machine for inspection and repair. This ensures that the
inspection and repair are done under the supervision of the machine admin-
istrator.
Specifying Service Mode Lock
Preparation

159
D Press [Service Mode Lock].
E Press [On] and then [OK].

F Press [Yes].
160
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
Canceling Service Mode Lock

For a customer engineer to carry out inspection or repair in service mode, the
machine administrator must log onto the machine and cancel the service mode
lock.
Preparation

D Press [Service Mode Lock].
161
E Press [Off] and then press [OK].

The customer engineer can switch to service mode.
162
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly

This section explains what to do if a user cannot operate the machine because of
a problem related to user authentication. Refer to this section if a user comes to
you with such a problem.
A Message Appears
This section explains how to deal with problems if a message appears on the
screen during user authentication.
The most common messages are explained. If some other message appears, deal
with the problem according to the information contained in the message.
Messages Causes Solutions
You do not have the The authority to use the func- • If this appears when trying
privileges to use tion is not specified. to use a function:
this function. The function is not speci-
fied in the address book
management setting as be-
ing available. The user ad-
ministrator must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function and then
assign the authority.
• If this appears when trying
to specify a default setting:
The administrator differs
depending on the default
settings you wish to speci-
fy. Using the list of set-
tings, the administrator
responsible must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function.
163
Troubleshooting
Messages Causes Solutions

Failed to obtain The machine cannot connect Make sure the server's set-
URL. to the server or cannot estab- tings, such as the IP Address
lish communication. and host name, are specified
correctly on the machine.
Make sure the host name of
the UA Server is specified cor-
rectly.
The machine is connected to Make sure the UA service is
the server, but the UA service specified correctly.
is not responding properly.
SSL is not specified correctly Specify SSL using Authentica-
on the server. tion Manager.
Server authentication failed. Make sure server authentica-
tion is specified correctly on
the machine.
Authentication has The entered login user name Inquire the user administrator
failed. or login password is not cor- for the correct login user name
rect and login password.
The number of users regis- Delete unnecessary user ad-
tered in the address book has dresses.
reached the maximum limit
allowed by Windows Authen-
tication or , LDAP Authentica-
7 tion, or Integration Server
Authentication, so you cannot
register additional users.
Cannot access the authentica- A network or server error may
tion server when using Win- have occurred. Contact to the
dows authentication , LDAP network administrator.
Authentication, or Integration
Server Authentication.
The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files Files can be deleted by the file
contained file(s) without the authority to do so. creator (owner) or file admin-
without access priv- istrator. To delete a file which
ileges. Only file(s) you are not authorized to de-
with access privi- lete, contact the file creator
(owner).
leges will be delet-
ed.
164
Authentication Does Not Work Properly
Machine Cannot Be Operated

If the following conditions arise while users are operating the machine, provide
instructions on how to deal with them.
Condition Cause Solution
Cannot print using the printer User authentication has been Enter the login user name and
driver or connect using the rejected. login password in the printer
TWAIN driver. driver.
If using Windows authentica-
tion or , LDAP Authentica-
tion, or Integration Server
Authentication, inquire the
network administrator for the
user name and login name.
If using basic authentication,
inquire the user administra-
tor.
The encryption key specified Specify the driver encryption
in the driver does not match key registered in the machine.
the machine’s driver encryp- See p.134 “Driver Encryption
tion key. Key”.
Cannot authenticate using the Another user is logging on to Wait for the user to log off.
TWAIN driver. the machine.
Authentication is taking time Make sure the LDAP server
7
because of operating condi- setting is correct.
tions. Make sure the network set-
tings are correct.
Authentication is not possible Wait until editing of the ad-
while the machine is editing dress book data is complete.
the address book data.
After starting [User Manage- “Restrict Simple Encryption” Set “Restrict Simple Encryp-
ment Tool] or [Address Manage- is not set correctly. Alterna- tion” to [On]. Alternatively,
ment Tool] in tively, [SSL/TLS] has been ena- enable [SSL/TLS], install the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- bled although the required server certificate in the ma-
min and entering the correct certificate is not installed in chine, and then install the cer-
login user name and pass- the computer. tificate in the computer.
word, a message appears to
notify that an incorrect pass- Reference
word has been entered. See p.153 “Restrict Use of
Simple Encryption”.
Cannot log on to the machine
using [Document Server: Authen- See p.145 “Setting the SSL
tication/Encryption:] in Desk- / TLS Encryption Mode”.
TopBinder.
Cannot access the machine us-
ing ScanRouter EX Profes-
sional V3 / ScanRouter EX
Enterprise V2.
165
Troubleshooting
Condition Cause Solution

Cannot connect to the Scan- The ScanRouter delivery soft- Update to the latest version of
Router delivery software. ware may not be supported by the ScanRouter delivery soft-
the machine. ware.
Cannot access the machine us- ScanRouter EX Professional V2 does not support user authen-
ing ScanRouter EX Profes- tication.
sional V2.
Cannot log off when using the The original has not been When the original has been
copying or scanner functions. scanned completely. scanned completely, press
[q], remove the original, and
then log off.
[ProgDest] does not appear on [Restrict Adding of User Destina- Registration must be done by
the scanner screen for specify- tions] is set to [Off] in [Restrict the user administrator.
ing destinations. Use of Destinations] in [Extended
Security], so only the user ad-
ministrator can register desti-
nations in the address book.
Stored files do not appear. User authentication may have Re-enable user authentication,
been disabled while [All Users] and then enable [All Users] for
is not specified. the files that did not appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.85 “Specifying
Access Permission for Stored
Files”.
7 Destinations specified using User authentication may have Re-enable user authentication,
the machine do not appear. been disabled while [All Users] and then enable [All Users] for
is not specified. the destinations that did not
appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.102 “Protecting
the Address Book”.
Cannot print when user au- User authentication may not Specify user authentication in
thentication has been speci- be specified in the printer the printer driver.
fied. driver. For details, see the printer
driver Help.
If you try to interrupt a job With this machine, you can Only the user who executed a
while copying or scanning, an log off while copying or scan- copying or scanning job can
authentication screen ap- ning. If you try to interrupt interrupt it.Wait until the job
pears. copying or scanning after log- has completed or consult an
ging off, an authentication administrator or the user who
screen appears. executed the job.
After you execute [Encrypt Ad- The hard disk may be faulty. Contact your service repre-
dress Book] the [Exit] message The file may be corrupt. sentative.
does not appear.
166
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor

The supervisor can delete an administrator’s password and specify a new one.
If any of the administrators forget their passwords or if any of the administrators
change, the supervisor can assign a new password. If logged on using the super-
visor’s user name and password, you cannot use normal functions or specify de-
faults. Log on as the supervisor only to change an administrator’s password.
Important
❒ The default login user name is “supervisor” and the login password is blank.
We recommend changing the login user name and login password.
❒ When registering login user names and login passwords, you can specify up
to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Keep in mind that user names
and passwords are case-sensitive.
❒ Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the ma-
chine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Note
❒ You cannot specify the same login user name for the supervisor and the ad-
ministrators.
❒ Using Web Image Monitor, you can log on as the supervisor and delete an ad-
ministrator’s password.
Logging on as the Supervisor

If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using the supervisor
login user name and login password. This section describes how to log on.
APG012S
B Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].

167
Appendix
C Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

Note
❒ When you assign the administrator for the first time, enter “supervisor”.
D Press [Enter] for [Login Password].

E Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
Note
❒ When you assign the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F
without pressing [Enter].
F Press [Login].
Logging off as the Supervisor

If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after com-
pleting settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
8
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
168
Changing the Supervisor

8
E Under “Supervisor”, click [Change].
169
Appendix
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

H Press [Change] for the login password.
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [OK] twice.
Resetting an Administrator’s Password

8 A Press the {Login/Logout} key.
APG012S
B Log on as the supervisor.

You can log on in the same way as an administrator.

D Press [Administrator Tools].
E Press [Program / Change Administrator].
170
F Press [Change] for the administrator you wish to reset.
G Press [Change] for the login password.

H Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
I If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
J Press [OK].
K Press [OK].
171
Appendix
Machine Administrator Settings

The machine administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
The following settings can be specified.
❖ General Features
All the settings can be specified.
❖ Timer Settings
❖ Interface Settings
• Parallel Interface
❖ File Transfer
• Delivery Option
• SMTP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
Encryption
8
• POP before SMTP
Wait Time after Auth.
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
• Reception Protocol
• POP3 / IMAP4 Settings
Server Name
Encryption
• Administrator's E-mail Address
• Default User Name / Password (Send)
SMB User Name / SMB Password
FTP User Name / FTP Password
NCP User Name / NCP Password
Password
• Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message
172
❖ Administrator Tools
• User Authentication Management
You can specify which authentication to use.
You can also edit the settings for each function.
• Administrator Authentication Management
Machine Management
• Program / Change Administrator
Machine Administrator
You can change the user name and the full-control user’s authority.
• Key Counter Management
• Extended Security
Restrict Display of user Information
Authenticate Current Job
• Display / Print Counter
Print Counter List
• Display / Clear / Print Counter per User
• Extended Features
• AOF (Always On)
• Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
Identification Name
Server Name
Search Base
Port No.
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Authentication
8
Search Conditions
Search Options
• LDAP Search
• Service Mode Lock
• Auto Erase Memory Setting *2
• Erase All Memory *2
• Transfer Log Setting
• Data Security for Copying
*1
File Format Converter option must be installed.
*2 The DataOverwriteSecurity unit option must be installed.
173
Appendix
Copier / Document Server Features

❖ Reproduction Ratio
❖ Edit
❖ Stamp
❖ Input / Output
Printer Features
❖ List / Test Print

8 All the settings can be specified.
❖ Maintenance
• Menu Protect
• List / Test Print Lock
❖ System
• Print Error Report
• Auto Continue
• Memory Overflow
• Job Separation
• Initial Print Job List
• Memory Usage
• Duplex
• Copies
• Toner Saving
• Spool Image
• Blank Page Print
174
• Reserve Job Waiting Time

• Printer Language
• Sub Paper Size
• Paper Size
• Letterhead Setting
• Bypass Tray Setting Priority
• Edge to Edge Print
• Tray Switching
❖ Host Interface
❖ PCL Menu
❖ PS Menu *1
❖ PDF Menu *1
*1 The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
Scanner Features
❖ General Settings 8
❖ Scan Settings
❖ Send Settings
• Compression (Black & White)
• Compression (Gray Scale)
• High Compression PDF Level
• Print & Delete Scanner Journal
• E-mail Information Language
• Stored file E-mail Method
❖ Initial Settings
175
Appendix
Settings via Web Image Monitor

❖ Top Page
• Reset Printer Job
• Reset Device
❖ Device Settings
• System
Spool Printing
Protect Printer Operation Panel
Output Tray
Paper Tray Priority
Front Cover Sheet Tray
Back Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Cover Sheet Tray
Destination Sheet 1 Tray
Separation Sheet 1 Tray
• Paper
• Timer
• Date/Time
8 • E-mail
• Auto E-mail Notification
• On demand E-mail Notification
• File Transfer
• User Authentication Management
Machine Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Machine Administrator
176
• Program/Change Administrator
You can specify the following administrator settings as the machine ad-
ministrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Change Encryption Password
• LDAP Server
❖ Printer
• Basic Settings
• Tray Parameters (PCL)
• PS Settings *1
• PDF Settings *1
Duplex
Blank Page Print
PDF Group Password
Resolution
• Tray Parameters (PCL)
• Tray Parameters (PS)
• PDF Group Password
• PDF Fixed Password 8
*1
The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
• Parallel Interface
• USB
• Pict Bridge
❖ Network
• SNMPv3
❖ RC Gate
❖ Webpage
177
Appendix
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

❖ Device Information
• Reset Device
• Reset Current Job
• Reset All Jobs
❖ User Management Tool

• User Page Count
• Access Control List
• Reset User Counters
Tray Paper Settings

❖ Tray Paper Settings: Tray 1

• Paper Type
• Apply Auto Paper Select
8 ❖ Tray Paper Settings: Tray 2
• Paper Type
• Paper Size

• Paper Type
• Paper Size

• Paper Type
• Thick Paper Setting
178

• Paper Type

• Paper Type

• Paper Type
• Paper Size
❖ Tray Paper Setting: Interposer Upper Tray

• Paper Type
❖ Tray Paper Setting: Interposer Lower Tray

• Paper Type
179
Appendix
Network Administrator Settings

The network administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
• Network
• IEEE 1394 *1
• IEEE 802.11b *2
Note
❒ If [DHCP] is set to [On], the settings that are automatically obtained via
DHCP cannot be specified.
*1
The IEEE1394 interface board option must be installed.
*2
The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
❖ File Transfer
• SMTP Server
Server Name
8 Port No.
• E-mail Communication Port
• E-mail Reception Interval
• Scanner Resend Interval Time
• Number of Scanner Resends
• Auto Specify Sender Name
• Max. Reception E-mail size
• E-mail Storage in Server
Network Management
Network Administrator
You can specify the user name and change the full-control user’s authority.
Driver Encryption Key
Settings by SNMP V1 and V2
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption
180
Scanner Features
❖ Send Settings
• Max. E-mail Size
• Divide & Send E-mail

❖ Device Settings
• System
Device Name
Comment
Location
• E-mail
Reception
SMTP
E-mail Communication Port
You can specify the following administrator settings for the machine ad-
ministrator.
Login User Name
8
Login Password
Network Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Network Administrator
181
Appendix
❖ Interface
• Change Interface
• IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication Mode
SSID
Channel
WEP Setting
Authentication Type
WEP Key Status
Key
Confirm Key
• IEEE 1394 *2
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Bidirectional SCSI print
• Bluetooth *3
Operation Mode
*1 The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
*2
*3
The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
❖ Network
• IPv4
• IPv6
8 • NetWare
• AppleTalk
• SMB
• SNMP
• SNMPv3
• SSDP
• Bonjour
❖ Webpage
182
❖ Security
• Network Security
• Access Control
• IPP Authentication
• SSL/TLS
• ssh
• Site Certificates
• Device Certificates

❖ NIB Setup Tool

183
Appendix
File Administrator Settings

The file administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
File Management
File Administrator
Enhance File Protection
• Auto Delete File in Document Server
• Delete All Files in Document Server
Printer Features
❖ Maintenance
• Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
8 • Delete All Stored Print Jobs
❖ System
• Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
• Initial Print Job List
184
File Administrator Settings

❖ Top Page
Reset Printer Job
❖ Document Server
❖ Job
• Printer
Print Jobs *1
*1 The file administrator can select [Delete], [Delete Password], and [Unlock Job]. The
file administrator cannot print files.
❖ Device Settings
File Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for File Administrator
You can specify the following administrator settings for the file adminis-
trator.
Login User Name
Login Password
8
❖ Printer
• Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
• Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs
❖ Webpage
• Download Help File
185
Appendix
User Administrator Settings

The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
User Management
User Administrator
Restrict Use of Destinations
Restrict Adding of User Destinations
Encrypt Address Book
Password Policy
• Print Address Book: Destination List
• Address Book Management
• Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group
• Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Transfer Request
• Address Book: Change Order
8 • Address Book: Edit Title
• Address Book: Switch Title
186
User Administrator Settings

❖ Address Book
❖ Device Settings
The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
Login User Name
Login Password
❖ Webpage
• Download Help File

❖ Address Management Tool

8
❖ User Management Tool

• Restrict Access To Device
• Add New User
• Delete User
• User Properties
187
Appendix
Document Server File Permissions

The authorities for using the files stored in Document Server are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authori-
ties.
• Read-only
This is a user assigned “Read-only” authority.
• Edit
This is a user assigned “Edit” authority.
• Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned “Edit / Delete” authority.
• Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
• Owner
This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
• File Administrator
This is the file administrator.
❍ =Granted authority to operate.
- =Not granted authority to operate.
User Viewing Viewing Print/Tr Chang- Deleting Specify- Specify- Unlock-
Details Thumb- ansmis- ing In- Files ing File ing Per- ing Files
about nails sion formati Password mission
8 Stored
Files
on
about
s for Us-
ers/Gro
Stored ups
Files
Read-
❍ ❍ ❍ - - - - -
only
Edit ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ - - - -
Edit /
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ - - -
Delete
Full
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ - ❍ -
Control
Owner ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ ❍ -
File Ad-
minis- ❍ ❍ - - ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
trator
*1 This setting can be specified by the owner.
188
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book
The Privilege for User Account Settings in

the Address Book
The authorities for using the address book are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authori-
ties.
• Read-only
This is a user assigned “Read-only” authority.
• Edit
This is a user assigned “Edit” authority.
• Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned “Edit / Delete” authority.
• Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
• Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
• User Administrator
This is the user administrator.
❍ =You can view and change the setting.
U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Settings User User Ad-
ministra-
Registered
User
Full
Control
8
Read-only Edit Edit / De-
tor
lete
Registration No. U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Key Display U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Name U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Select Title U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
189
Appendix
Settings User User Ad- Registered Full

ministra- User Control
tor
lete
Auth. Info User Code - - - ❍ - -
Login User
- - - ❍ ❍ -
Name
Login
- - - ❍ *1 ❍ *1 -
Password
SMTP
Authenti- - - - ❍ *1 ❍ *1 -
cation
Folder
Authenti- U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -
cation
LDAP
Authenti- - - - ❍ *1 ❍ *1 -
cation
Available
- - - ❍ U -
Functions
Protection Use
U U U ❍ ❍ U
Name as
Protection
- - - ❍ *1 ❍ *1 -
Code
Protection
U U U ❍ ❍ U
Object
8 Protect
Dest.: Per-
missions - - - ❍ ❍ ❍
for Us-
ers/Groups
Protect
File(s): Per-
missions - - - ❍ ❍ ❍
for Us-
ers/Groups
E-mail E-mail
U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Address Address
190
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book
Settings User User Ad- Registered Full

ministra- User Control
tor
lete
Folder SMB/FT
U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Destination P/NCP
SMB: Path U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
FTP: Port
U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
No.
FTP:
Server U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Name
FTP: Path U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
NCP: Path U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
NCP:
Connec- U ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
tion type
*1
You can only enter the password.
191
Appendix
User Settings
If you have specified administrator authentication, the available functions and
settings depend on the menu protect setting.
The following settings can be specified by someone who is not an administrator.
❍ =You can view and change the setting.
U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Note
❒ Settings that are not in the list can only be viewed, regardless of the menu pro-
tect level setting.
Copier / Document Server Features

The default for [Menu Protect] is [Level 2].
Tab Names Settings Menu Protect
Off Level 1 Level 2
General Features Auto Image Density Priority ❍ ❍ U
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode ❍ ❍ U
Copy Orientation Duplex Mode ❍ ❍ U
Reservation Screen ❍ ❍ U
8 Auto-off Timer ❍ ❍ U
Max. Copy Quantity ❍ ❍ U
Original Counter Reset Key ❍ ❍ U
Text ❍ ❍ U
Text/Photo ❍ ❍ U
Photo ❍ ❍ U
Pale ❍ ❍ U
Generation Copy ❍ ❍ U
Dark Background ❍ ❍ U
Panel features Default ❍ ❍ U
Image Adjustment Priority ❍ ❍ U
Original Tray Display ❍ ❍ U
Special Original Display Defaults ❍ ❍ U
Tone: Original Counter Display ❍ ❍ U
Customize function:Copier ❍ ❍ U
Customize function:Document Server Storage ❍ ❍ U
192
User Settings

Off Level 1 Level 2
Reproduction Shortcut R/E ❍ ❍ U
Ratio
R/E Ratio ❍ ❍ U
R/E Ratio Priority ❍ ❍ U
Ratio for Create Margin ❍ ❍ U
Edit Font Margin: Left/Right ❍ ❍ U
Back Margin: Left/Right ❍ ❍ U
Front Margin: Top/Bottom ❍ ❍ U
Back Margin: Top/Bottom ❍ ❍ U
1 Side→2 Side Auto Margin: T to T ❍ ❍ U
1 Side→2 Side Auto Margin: T to B ❍ ❍ U
Keep Setting for Magazine ❍ ❍ U
Erase Border Width ❍ ❍ U
Erase Original Shadow in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Erase Center Width ❍ ❍ U
Font Cover Copy in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Copy Order in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Copy on Designating Page in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine ❍ ❍ U
❍ ❍
Copy in Designating Page in Combine U
8
Image Repeat Separation Line ❍ ❍ U
Double Copies Separation Line ❍ ❍ U
Separation Line in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Double Copies Position ❍ ❍ U
193
Appendix

Off Level 1 Level 2
Stamp Back- Size ❍ ❍ U
ground
Density
Num- ❍ ❍ U
bering
Preset Stamp Position: COPY *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp
Stamp Position: URGENT *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: PRIORITY *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: For Your Info. *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: PRELIMINARY *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: For Internal Use Only *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: CONFIDENTIAL *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: DRAFT *1 ❍ ❍ U

Stamp Language ❍ ❍ U
User Program / Delete Stamp ❍ ❍ U
Stamp
Stamp Format: 1 ❍ ❍ U
8 Date Font ❍ ❍ U
Stamp
Size ❍ ❍ U
Superimpose ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Setting ❍ ❍ U
194
User Settings

Off Level 1 Level 2
Stamp Page Stamp Format ❍ ❍ U
Num-
Font ❍ ❍ U
bering
Size ❍ ❍ U
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position ❍ ❍ U
Page Numbering in Combine ❍ ❍ U
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: P1, P2… *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5… *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: 1, 2… *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: -1-, -2-… *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: P.1,P.2... *1 ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2… *1 ❍ ❍ U

Superimpose ❍ ❍ U
Page Numbering Initial Letter ❍ ❍ U
Stamp Text Font
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Setting
Input / Output SADF Auto Reset ❍ ❍ U 8
Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode ❍ ❍ U
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart ❍ ❍ U
Sort/Stack Shift Tray Setting ❍ ❍ U
Retate Sort: Auto Paper Continue ❍ ❍ U
*1
You can adjust the print position but not specify it.
195
Appendix
Printer Functions
❖ Normal Printer Screen

Functions Menu Protect
Off Level 1 Level 2
Print Jobs ❍ ❍ ❍
❖ Printer Features
Off Level 1 Level 2
List/Test Print Multiple List ❍ ❍ ❍
Configuration Page ❍ ❍ ❍
Error Log ❍ ❍ ❍
Menu List ❍ ❍ ❍
PCL Configuration/Font Page ❍ ❍ ❍
PS Configuration/Font Page ❍ ❍ ❍
PDF Configuration/Font Page ❍ ❍ ❍
Hex Dump ❍ ❍ ❍
196
User Settings

Off Level 1 Level 2
System Print Error Report ❍ U U
Auto Continue ❍ U U
Memory Overflow ❍ U U
Job Separation ❍ U U
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs ❍ U U
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs ❍ U U
Initial Print Job List ❍ U U
Memory Usage ❍ U U
Duplex ❍ U U
Copies ❍ U U
Blank Page Print ❍ U U
Toner Saving ❍ U U
Spool Image ❍ U U
Resend Job Waiting Time ❍ U U
Printer Language ❍ U U
Sub Paper Size ❍ U U
Page Size ❍ ❍ U
Letterhead Setting ❍ U U
❍
Bypass Tray Setting Priority U U
8
Edge to Edge Print ❍ U U
Default Printer Language ❍ U U
Tray Switching ❍ U U
Host Interface I/O Buffer ❍ U U
I/O Timeout ❍ U U
197
Appendix

Off Level 1 Level 2
PCL Menu Orientation ❍ U U
Form Lines ❍ U U
Font Source ❍ U U
Font Number ❍ U U
Point Size ❍ U U
Font Pitch ❍ U U
Symbol Set ❍ U U
Courier Font ❍ U U
Extend A4 Width ❍ U U
Append CR to LF ❍ U U
Resolution ❍ U U
PS Menu *1 Data Format ❍ U U
Resolution ❍ U U
PDF Menu *1 Change PDF Password ❍ U U
PDF Group Password ❍ U U
Resolution ❍ U U
*1
The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
198
User Settings
Scanner Features
Off Level 1 Level 2
Switch Title ❍ ❍ U
Twain Standby Time ❍ ❍ U
Destination List Display Priority 1 ❍ ❍ U
Destination List Display Priority 2 ❍ ❍ U
Print & Delete Scanner Journal ❍ ❍ U
Delete Scanner Journal ❍ ❍ U
Scan Settings A.C.S Sensitivity Level ❍ ❍ U
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass ❍ ❍ U
Wait Time for Next Originals SADF ❍ ❍ U
Send Settings Compression (Black & White) ❍ ❍ U
Compression (Gray Scale) ❍ ❍ U
High Compression PDF Level ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Information Language ❍ ❍ U
Note of Digit for Single Page Files ❍ ❍ U
Stored File E-mail Method ❍ ❍ U
199
Appendix
System Settings
The settings available to the user depend on whether or not administrator au-
thentication has been specified.
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to the
user depend on whether or not “Available Settings” has been specified.
Tab Names Settings Admin- Administrator au-
istrator thentication has
authen- been specified.
tication
“Availa- “Availa-
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
General Features Program/Change/Delete User Text
Panel Key Sound ❍ ❍ U
Warm-up Beeper ❍ ❍ U
Copy Count Display ❍ ❍ U
Function Priority ❍ ❍ U
Print Priority ❍ ❍ U
Function Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Interleave Print ❍ ❍ U
8 Status Indicator ❍ ❍ U
Screen Color Setting ❍ ❍ U
Output: Copier ❍ ❍ U
Output: Document Server ❍ ❍ U
Output Tray Priority: Copier ❍ ❍ U
Paper Tray Priority: Printer ❍ ❍ U
System Status/ Job List Display Time ❍ ❍ U
Time Interval between Printing Jobs ❍ ❍ U
ADF Feed Speed ❍ ❍ U
Optimum for Thick Paper ❍ ❍ U
<F/F4> Size Setting ❍ ❍ U
Key Repeat ❍ ❍ U
Z-fold Position ❍ ❍ U
200
User Settings

tication
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Timer Settings Auto Off Timer ❍ ❍ U
Energy Saver Timer ❍ ❍ U
Panel Off Timer ❍ ❍ U
System Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Printer Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Scanner Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Set Date ❍ ❍ U
Set Time ❍ ❍ U
Auto Logout Timer ❍ ❍ U
Weekly Timer Code ❍ ❍ U
Weekly Timer ❍ ❍ U
201
Appendix

tication
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Inter- Network Machine IPv4 Address *1 ❍ ❍ U
face
Settings IPv4 Gateway Address ❍ ❍ U
Machine IPv6 Address *1 ❍ ❍ U
IPv6 Gateway Address ❍ ❍ U
IPv6 Stateless Address Configuration ❍ ❍ U
DNS Configuration *1 ❍ ❍ U
DDNS Configuration ❍ ❍ U
Domain Name *1 ❍ ❍ U
WINS Configuration *1 ❍ ❍ U
Effective Protocol ❍ ❍ U
NCP Delivery Protocol ❍ ❍ U
NW Frame Type ❍ ❍ U
SMB Computer Name ❍ ❍ U
8 SMB Work Group ❍ ❍ U
Ethernet Speed ❍ ❍ U
Ping Command ❍ ❍ U
Permit SNMP v3 Communication ❍ ❍ U
Permit SSL / TLS Communication ❍ ❍ U
Host Name ❍ ❍ U
Machine Name ❍ ❍ U
Parallel Parallel Timing ❍ ❍ U
Inter-
Parallel Communication Speed ❍ ❍ U
face *8
Selection Signal Status ❍ ❍ U
Input Prime ❍ ❍ U
Bidirectional Communication ❍ ❍ U
Signal Control ❍ ❍ U
202
User Settings

tication
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Inter- IEEE IP Address *1 ❍ ❍ U
face 1394 *5
Settings DDNS Configuration ❍ ❍ U
Host Name ❍ ❍ U
Domain Name *1 ❍ ❍ U
WINS Configuration *1 ❍ ❍ U
IP over 1394 ❍ ❍ U
SCSI print (SBP-2) ❍ ❍ U
Bidirectional SCSI print ❍ ❍ U
IEEE Communication Mode ❍ ❍ U
802.11b
*6
Transmission Speed ❍ ❍ U
SSID Setting ❍ ❍ U
Channel ❍ ❍ U
WEP WEP (Encryption) Setting *2 ❍ ❍ U
(Encryp-
tion) Transmission Speed ❍ ❍ U 8
Setting Return to Defaults ❍ ❍ U
Print
❍ ❍ U
List
203
Appendix

tication
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
File Transfer Delivery Option *3 ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Server ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Authentication *4 ❍ ❍ U
POP before SMTP ❍ ❍ U
Reception Protocol ❍ ❍ U
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings ❍ ❍ U
Administrator's E-mail Address ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Communication Port ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Reception Interval ❍ ❍ U
Max. Reception E-mail Size ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Storage in Server ❍ ❍ U
Default User Name / Password (Send) *4 ❍ ❍ U

Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message ❍ U U
8 Scanner Recall Interval Time ❍ ❍ U
Number of Scanner Recalls ❍ ❍ U
Auto Specify Sender Name ❍ ❍ U
204
User Settings

tication
has not
ble Set- ble Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Administrator Address Book Management U U U
Tools
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete
U U U
Group
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete
U U U
Transfer Request
Address Book: Change Order ❍ ❍ U
Address Book: Edit Title ❍ ❍ U
Address Book: Select Title ❍ ❍ U
User Authentication Management ❍ ❍ U
Administrator Authentication Management ❍ ❍ U
Key Counter Management ❍ ❍ U
Extended Security ❍ ❍ U
External Charge Unit Management ❍ ❍ U
Display / Clear / Print Counter per User ❍ ❍ U
Print Address Book: Destination List U U U 8
Auto Delete File in Document Server ❍ ❍ U
Delete All Files in Document Server ❍ ❍ U
Capture Priority *7 ❍ ❍ U
Capture: Delete All Unsent Files *7 ❍ ❍ U

AOF (Always On) ❍ ❍ U
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server *4 ❍ ❍ U
LDAP Search ❍ ❍ U
Firmware Version ❍ ❍ U
Data Security for Copying U U U
Transfer Log Setting U U U
Auto Erase Memory Setting *9 ❍ ❍ U
Erase All Memory *9 ❍ ❍ U

*1
If you select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], you can only view the setting.
*2
You can only view the encryption setting.
*3
You can only view Main Delivery Server IP Address and Sub Delivery Server IP Ad-
dress. 205
Appendix
*4
You can only specify the password.
*5
*6 The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
*7
File Format Converter option must be installed.
*8
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
*9 The data overwrite security unit option must be installed.
Web Image Monitor Setting

❖ Device Settings
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to
the user depend on whether or not “Available Settings” has been specified.
Category Settings Admin- Administrator au-
tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
System Device Name ❍ ❍ U
Comment ❍ ❍ U
8 Location ❍ ❍ U
Spool Printing ❍ ❍ U
Output Tray ❍ ❍ U
Paper Tray Priority ❍ ❍ U
Front Cover Sheet Tray ❍ ❍ U
Back Cover Sheet Tray ❍ ❍ U
Slip Sheet Tray ❍ ❍ U
Destination Sheet 1-9 Tray ❍ ❍ U
Separation Sheet Tray ❍ ❍ U
Tray1-7 ❍ ❍ U
Interposer Upper Tray ❍ ❍ U
Interposer Lower Tray ❍ ❍ U
206
User Settings

tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Date/Time Set Date ❍ ❍ U
Set Time ❍ ❍ U
SNTP Server Address ❍ ❍ U
SNTP Polling Interval ❍ ❍ U
Time Zone ❍ ❍ U
Timer Auto Off Timer ❍ ❍ U
Energy Saver Timer ❍ ❍ U
Panel Off Timer ❍ ❍ U
System Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Scanner Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Printer Auto Reset Timer ❍ ❍ U
Auto Logout Timer ❍ ❍ U
8
Weekly Timer Code ❍ ❍ U
Weekly Timer ❍ ❍ U
Logs Collect Job Logs ❍ ❍ U
Collect Access Logs ❍ ❍ U
Encrypt Logs ❍ ❍ U
207
Appendix

tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
E-mail Administrator E-mail Address ❍ ❍ U
Reception Protocol ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Reception Interval ❍ ❍ U
Max. Reception E-mail Size ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Storage in Server ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Server Name ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Port No. ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Authentication ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Auth. E-mail Address ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Auth. User Name ❍ ❍ -
SMTP Auth. Password *1 ❍ ❍ -
SMTP Auth. Encryption ❍ ❍ U
❍ ❍
8 POP before SMTP U
POP E-mail Address ❍ ❍ U
POP User Name ❍ ❍ -
POP Password *1 ❍ ❍ -
Timeout setting after POP Auth. ❍ ❍ U
POP3/IMAP4 Server Name ❍ ❍ U
POP3/IMAP4 Encryption ❍ ❍ U
POP3 Reception Port No. ❍ ❍ U
IMAP4 Reception Port No. ❍ ❍ U
SMTP Reception Port No. ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Notification E-mail Address ❍ ❍ U
Receive E-mail Notification ❍ ❍ -
E-mail Notification User Name ❍ ❍ -
E-mail Notification Password ❍ ❍ -
208
User Settings

tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Auto E-mail Notification Message ❍ ❍ U
Notification
Address List ❍ ❍ U
Call Service ❍ ❍ U
Out of Toner ❍ ❍ U
Toner Almost Empty ❍ ❍ U
Used Toner Bottle is Full ❍ ❍ U
Used Toner Bottle is Almost Full ❍ ❍ U
Add Staple ❍ ❍ U
Paper Misfeed ❍ ❍ U
Cover Open ❍ ❍ U
Out of Paper ❍ ❍ U
Almost Out of Paper ❍ ❍ U
Hole Punch Receptacle is Full ❍ ❍ U
8
Paper Tray Error ❍ ❍ U
Output Tray Full ❍ ❍ U
Unit Connection Error ❍ ❍ U
Duplex Unit Error ❍ ❍ U
Document Server Memory Full ❍ ❍ U
Detailed Settings of Each Item ❍ ❍ U
Sucked Toner Collection bottle is Full ❍ ❍ U
Sucked Toner Collection bottle is Almost Full ❍ ❍ U
Replace Cleaning Web ❍ ❍ U
Waste Staple Receptacle is Full ❍ ❍ U
209
Appendix

tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
On-demand E-mail Notification Subject ❍ ❍ U
Notification
Notification Message ❍ ❍ U
Restriction to System Config. Info. ❍ ❍ U
Restriction to Network Config. Info. ❍ ❍ U
Restriction to Printer Config. Info. ❍ ❍ U
Restriction to Supply Info. ❍ ❍ U
Restriction to Device Status Info. ❍ ❍ U
Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name ❍ ❍ U
E-mail Language ❍ ❍ U
File Transfer SMB User Name ❍ ❍ -
SMB Password *1 ❍ ❍ -
FTP User Name ❍ ❍ -
8 FTP Password *1 ❍ ❍ -
NCP User Name ❍ ❍ -
NCP Password *1 ❍ ❍ -
210
User Settings

tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
User Authenti- User Authentication Management ❍ ❍ U
cation Manage-
User Code Authentication - Printer Job Au-
ment ❍ ❍ U
thentication
User Code - Available Function ❍ ❍ U
Basic Authentication - Printer Job Authentication ❍ ❍ U
Windows Authentication - Printer Job Au-
❍ ❍ U
thentication
Windows Authentication - Domain Name ❍ ❍ U
Windows Authentication - Group Settings
❍ ❍ U
for Windows Authentication
LDAP Authentication - Printer Job Authentication ❍ ❍ U
LDAP Authentication - LDAP Authentication ❍ ❍ U
LDAP Authentication - Login Name Attribute ❍ ❍ U
LDAP Authentication - Unique Attribute ❍ ❍ U
Integration Server Authentication - Printer
8
❍ ❍ U
Job Authentication
Integration Server Authentication - Integra-
❍ ❍ U
tion Server Name
Integration Server Authentication - Authen-
❍ ❍ U
tication Type
Integration Server Authentication - Obtain URL ❍ ❍ U
Integration Server Authentication - Domain Name ❍ ❍ U
Integration Server Authentication - Group
Settings for Integration Server Authentica- ❍ ❍ U
tion
*1
You can only specify the password.
211
Appendix
❖ Printer
Category Settings Menu Protect
Off Level 1 Level 2
System Print Error Report ❍ U U
Auto Continue ❍ U U
Memory Overflow ❍ U U
Memory Usage ❍ U U
Duplex ❍ U U
Copies ❍ U U
Reserved Job Waiting Time ❍ U U
Toner Saving ❍ ❍ U
Sub Paper Size ❍ U U
Page Size ❍ ❍ U
Letterhead Setting ❍ U U
Bypass Tray Setting Priority ❍ U U
Edge to Edge Print ❍ ❍ U
Tray Switching ❍ ❍ U
Host Interface I/O Buffer ❍ U U
I/O Timeout ❍ U U
8 PCL Settings Orientation ❍ U U
Form Lines ❍ U U
Font Source ❍ U U
Font Number ❍ U U
Point Size ❍ U U
Font Pitch ❍ U U
Symbol Set ❍ U U
Courier Font ❍ U U
Extend A4 Width ❍ U U
Append CR to LF ❍ U U
Resolution ❍ U U
212
User Settings
Category Settings Menu Protect

Off Level 1 Level 2
PS Settings *1 Duplex ❍ U U
Data Format ❍ U U
Resolution ❍ U U
PDF Settings *1 Resolution ❍ - -

PDF Temporary Password ❍ - -
PDF Fixed Password ❍ - -
PDF Group Password ❍ - -
*1 The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
213
Appendix
❖ Interface
tica-
“Avail “Avail
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Change Interface ❍ ❍ U
IEEE 802.11b *1 Communication Mode ❍ ❍ U
Channel ❍ ❍ U
WEP Setting ❍ ❍ U
WEP Key Status ❍ ❍ U
Authentication Type ❍ ❍ U
Key ❍ ❍ U
Confirm Key ❍ ❍ U
❍ ❍ U
8 IEEE 1394 *2 IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2) ❍ ❍ U
Bidirectional SCSI print ❍ ❍ U
Bluetooth *3 Operation Mode ❍ ❍ U

Parallel Interface Parallel Timing ❍ ❍ U
*4
Parallel Communication Speed ❍ ❍ U
Selection Signal Status ❍ ❍ U
Input Prime ❍ ❍ U
Bidirectional Communication ❍ ❍ U
USB USB ❍ ❍ U
*1
The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
*2 The IEEE1394 interface board option must be installed.
*3
The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
*4
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
214
User Settings
❖ Network
tica-
“ Avail- “ Avail-
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
Protocol LPR ❍ ❍ U
RSH/RCP ❍ ❍ U
DIPRINT ❍ ❍ U
FTP ❍ ❍ U
IPP ❍ ❍ U
Bonjour ❍ ❍ U
NetWare ❍ ❍ U
AppleTalk ❍ ❍ U
SMB ❍ ❍ U
8
SNMP ❍ ❍ U
215
Appendix

tica-
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
IPv4 Host Name ❍ ❍ U
DHCP ❍ ❍ U
Domain Name ❍ ❍ U
IPv4 Address ❍ ❍ U
Subnet Mask ❍ ❍ U
DDNS ❍ ❍ U
WINS ❍ ❍ U
Primary WINS Server ❍ ❍ U
Secondary WINS Server ❍ ❍ U
Scope ID ❍ ❍ U
Default Gateway Address ❍ ❍ U
DNS Server ❍ ❍ U
❍ ❍ U
8 LPR
RSH/RCP ❍ ❍ U
DIPRINT ❍ ❍ U
FTP ❍ ❍ U
IPP ❍ ❍ U
IPP Timeout ❍ ❍ U
216
User Settings

tica-
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
IPv6 IPv6 Address ❍ ❍ U
Host Name ❍ ❍ U
Domain Name ❍ ❍ U
Stateless Address ❍ ❍ U
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration ❍ ❍ U
Default Gateway Address ❍ ❍ U
DNS Server ❍ ❍ U
LPR ❍ ❍ U
RSH/RCP ❍ ❍ U
DIPRINT ❍ ❍ U
FTP ❍ ❍ U
sftp ❍ ❍ U
IPP ❍ ❍ U
8
IPP Timeout ❍ ❍ U
NetWare NetWare ❍ ❍ U
Print Server Name ❍ ❍ U
Logon Mode ❍ ❍ U
File Server Name ❍ ❍ U
NDS Tree ❍ ❍ U
NDS Context Name ❍ ❍ U
Operation Mode ❍ ❍ U
Remote Printer No. ❍ ❍ U
Job Timeout ❍ ❍ U
Frame Type ❍ ❍ U
Print Server Protocol ❍ ❍ U
NCP Delivery Protocol ❍ ❍ U
217
Appendix

tica-
tion has
able able
not
Set- Set-
been
tings” tings”
speci-
has has not
fied.
been been
speci- speci-
fied. fied.
AppleTalk AppleTalk ❍ ❍ U
Printer Name ❍ ❍ U
Zone Name ❍ ❍ U
SMB SMB ❍ ❍ U
Workgroup Name ❍ ❍ U
Computer Name ❍ ❍ U
Comment ❍ ❍ U
Notify Print Completion ❍ ❍ U
Bonjour Bonjour ❍ ❍ U
Computer Name ❍ ❍ U
Location ❍ ❍ U
DIPRINT ❍ ❍ U
❍ ❍ U
8 LPR
IPP ❍ ❍ U
218
Functions That Require Options
Functions That Require Options

The following functions require certain options and additional functions.
• Hard Disk overwrite erases function
DataOverwriteSecurity unit
• Data security for copying function
Copy Data Security Unit
• PDF Direct Print function
PostScript unit
219
INDEX
A G
Access Control, 129 General Features, 172, 174
Access Permission, 85 General Settings, 175
Address Book, 187 Group Passwords for PDF Files, 134
Address Management Tool, 187
Administrator, 4 H
Administrator Authentication, 4
Administrator Tools, 173, 174, 180, 184, 186 Host Interface, 175
AppleTalk, 182
I
Authenticate Current Job, 154
Authentication and Access Limits, 3 Initial Settings, 175
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 108 Input / Output, 174
Available Functions, 121 Interface, 182, 214
Interface Settings, 172, 177, 180
B IPv4, 182
IPv6, 182
Bonjour, 182
C J
Configuration flow (certificate issued by a Job, 185

certificate authority), 140
L
Configuration flow (self-signed certificate), 140
List / Test Print, 174
D Locked Print, 78
Device Information, 178 Login, 4
Device Settings, 176, 181, 185, 187, 206 Logout, 4
Document Server, 185
M
Driver Encryption Key, 134, 151
Machine Administrator, 12, 117
E Maintenance, 174, 184
Edit, 174, 188, 189 Menu Protect, 117, 118
Edit / Delete, 188, 189 Methods of Erasing the Data, 108
Encrypt Address Book, 151
N
Encrypted Communication Mode, 145
Encryption Technology, 3 NetWare, 182
Enhance File Protection, 152 Network, 177, 182, 215
Erase All Memory, 108 Network Administrator, 12, 117
NIB Setup Tool, 183
F
O
File Administrator, 12, 117, 188
File Creator (Owner), 4 Operational Requirements
File Transfer, 172, 180 for Windows Authentication, 42
Full Control, 188, 189 Owner, 188
220
P U
Parallel Interface, 172 User, 4
Password for IPP Authentication, 134 User Administrator, 12, 117, 189
Password for Stored Files, 85 User Authentication, 4
Password Policy, 154 User Management Tool, 178
PCL Menu, 175
PDF Menu, 175 W
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 155
Printer, 177, 185, 212 Webpage, 177, 182, 185, 187
Printer Job Authentication, 63
PS Menu, 175
R
RC Gate, 177
Read-only, 188, 189
Registered User, 4, 189
Reproduction Ratio, 174
Reset Device, 176
Reset Printer Job, 176
Restrict Adding of User Destinations, 152
Restrict Display of User Information, 152
Restrict Use of Destinations, 151
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption, 153
S
Scan Settings, 175
Security, 183
Send Settings, 175, 181
Service Mode Lock, 159
Settings by SNMP v1 and v2, 153
SMB, 182
SNMP, 182
SNMPv3, 182
SSDP, 182
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 139
Stamp, 174
Supervisor, 12
System, 174, 184
System Settings, 180
T
Timer Settings, 172
Top Page, 176, 185
Type of Administrator, 117
221
MEMO
222 EN USA B235-7907

Copy/Document Server
Reference
1 Placing Originals
2 Copying
3 Connect Copy
4 Document Server
5 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes:
Caution:
Notes:
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see “Machine Types”, About This Machine.)
• Type 1: 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP 9000
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Power Source
208 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 20A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see “Power Connection”, Troubleshooting.
Power Supply
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the product and shall be easily accessible.

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.

ing, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual for explana-
❖ Troubleshooting
prevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for the
procedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and admin-
istrator authentication.

❖ Network Guide
i
❖ Other manuals
• UNIX Supplement
Note
dealer.
ii
What You Can Do with This Machine
Functions differ depending on machine type and options.
Reference
p.3 “Functions Requiring Optional Configurations”
Types of Duplex Copies

❖ 1-sided 2 Pages → 2-sided 1 Page
See p.76 “Duplex”.
❖ 2-sided 1 Page → 2-sided 1 Page

See p.76 “Duplex”.

See p.83 “Two-Sided Combine”.
GCBOOK0E
iii
ANP020S
A Front
B Back

GCSHVY5E
A Front
B Back

GCSHVY1E
iv
GCSHVY2E
A Front
B Back

GCSHVY6E
A Front
B Back
❖ Bound Originals → 2-sided Pages

See p.88 “Booklet/Magazine”.
v
❖ Front/Back Bound → Originals 2-sided Pages
❖ Mix 1 & 2 Sided

See p.94 “Mix 1 & 2 Sided”.
GCKONZ0J
Copying Book Originals

❖ 1-sided 4 Pages → Booklet
• Open to left
GCBOOK0E
vi
• Open to right
GCBOOK1E
❖ 2-sided 2 Pages → Booklet

• Open to left
GCAH010E
• Open to right
GCAH020E
❖ 1-sided → Magazine
• Open to left
GCBOOK3E
vii
• Open to right
GCBOOK4E
❖ 2-sided → Magazine
• Open to left
GCAH030E
• Open to right
GCAH040E
viii
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page
See p.80 “One-Sided Combine”.
GCSHVY7E
GCSHVY8J
GCSHVY3J
ix
❖ 2-sided 1 Page → 1-sided 1 Page
GCSHVYOJ
GCSHVYBJ
GCSHVY4J
x
Copying Originals Such as Books
See p.86 “Series Copies”.
CP2B0100

❖ Front/Back Bound Originals → 2-sided Pages

xi
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages
See p.86 “Series Copies”.
❖ 2-sided 1 Page → 1-sided 2 Pages
CP2B0200
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iii
Types of Duplex Copies ............................................................................................ iii
Copying Book Originals............................................................................................. vi
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page ......................................................... ix
Copying Originals Such as Books............................................................................. xi
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages........................................................... xii
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations....................................................3
Display Panel..........................................................................................................4
Simplified Display.......................................................................................................5
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document Server Features) ....................................6
1. Placing Originals
Originals ...............................................................................................................11
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals.......................................................11
Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) ......................12
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select .............................................................13
Sizes difficult to detect...........................................................................................14
Missing Image Area .................................................................................................15
Placing Originals..................................................................................................16
Original Orientation ..................................................................................................16
Reverse Orientation .................................................................................................18
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass.................................................................19
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder ......................................................20
Batch mode ..............................................................................................................21
SADF mode..............................................................................................................22
Mixed size mode ......................................................................................................23
Thin Mode ................................................................................................................24
Original size .............................................................................................................25
Regular sizes.........................................................................................................25
Custom sizes .........................................................................................................26
2. Copying
Basic Procedure...................................................................................................29
Interrupt Copy ..........................................................................................................30
Left Original Beeper .................................................................................................31
Copying onto Tab Stock...........................................................................................31
Surplus tab stock auto eject ..................................................................................33
When copying onto OHP Transparencies................................................................34
Auto Start .................................................................................................................34
xiii
Job Preset ................................................................................................................35
Job Preset display .................................................................................................35
To check job contents............................................................................................36
To change job contents after checking..................................................................36
To delete a job after checking its contents ............................................................37
Deleting a job.........................................................................................................37
Job List .................................................................................................................38
Job List screen .........................................................................................................38
Checking jobs in the print queue..............................................................................39
Changing the order of jobs.......................................................................................40
Holding print jobs .....................................................................................................41
Deleting jobs ............................................................................................................41
Checking Job History ...............................................................................................42
Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray .................................................................43
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) .............................................45
When copying onto Regular Size Paper ..................................................................46
When copying onto Custom Size Paper ..................................................................47
When copying onto Special Paper ...........................................................................48
Copier Functions .................................................................................................49
Adjusting Copy Image Density .................................................................................49
Auto image density ................................................................................................49
Manual image density............................................................................................50
Combined auto and manual image density ...........................................................50
Selecting the Original Type Setting..........................................................................51
Selecting Copy Paper ..............................................................................................52
Auto Paper Select..................................................................................................53
Manual Paper Select .............................................................................................53
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................54
Create Margin function ..........................................................................................56
Zoom ........................................................................................................................56
To select the ratio with [o] and [n].....................................................................57
To enter the ratio with the number keys ................................................................57
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ...............................................................................................58
Size Magnification ....................................................................................................59
Directional Magnification (%) ...................................................................................60
To enter the ratio with the number keys ................................................................61
To specify a ratio with [o] and [n] ......................................................................61
Directional Size Magnification (inch) ........................................................................62
Sort........................................................................................................................... 64
Sample copy..........................................................................................................65
Changing the Number of Sets ...............................................................................66
When memory is full ..............................................................................................66
Shift tray off in sort/stack .......................................................................................67
Separation .............................................................................................................67
Stack ........................................................................................................................68
Staple .......................................................................................................................69
Punch .......................................................................................................................72
3 Edges Full Bleed ...................................................................................................74
Z-fold ........................................................................................................................75
Using the Z-fold Support Tray ...............................................................................75
Z-fold positions and Z-folding Copies ....................................................................76
Duplex ......................................................................................................................76
Originals and copy orientation ...............................................................................79
xiv
One-Sided Combine.................................................................................................80
Two-Sided Combine.................................................................................................83
Series Copies...........................................................................................................86
Booklet/Magazine.....................................................................................................88
Creep Adjustment ....................................................................................................93
Mix 1 & 2 Sided ........................................................................................................94
Scanning Position ....................................................................................................95
Margin Adjustment ...................................................................................................97
Erase........................................................................................................................98
Border Erase (same width)..................................................................................100
Border Erase (different width)..............................................................................101
Center/Border Erase (same width) ......................................................................102
Center/Border Erase (different width)..................................................................103
Inside Erase.........................................................................................................104
Outside Erase......................................................................................................105
Background Numbering .........................................................................................106
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................107
Changing the stamp position, size and density ...................................................109
User Stamp ............................................................................................................110
Changing the user stamp position .......................................................................112
To program the user stamp .................................................................................113
To delete the user stamp.....................................................................................115
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................116
To change the format of date ..............................................................................118
To change the date stamp position .....................................................................119
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................119
Changing the stamp position ...............................................................................122
Specifying the first printing page and start number
(“P1,P2...”, “-1-,-2-...”, “P.1,P.2...”, “1,2...”) ........................................................122
Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1/5,2/5…”).........................123
Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1-1,1-2…”) ........................124
Stamp Text.............................................................................................................125
Changing the stamp position ...............................................................................126
Image Repeat.........................................................................................................127
Double Copies........................................................................................................128
Centering................................................................................................................130
Positive/Negative ...................................................................................................131
Covers....................................................................................................................132
Designate ...............................................................................................................134
Chapters.................................................................................................................135
Designation Sheet Copy ........................................................................................136
Blank Slip Sheets ...................................................................................................138
Slip Sheets .............................................................................................................139
Copy Face Up ........................................................................................................141
Storing Originals in the Document Server ......................................................142
Programs ............................................................................................................144
Storing a Program ..................................................................................................144
Changing a Stored Program ..................................................................................145
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................146
Recalling a Program...............................................................................................146
Programming Defaults in Initial Display .................................................................147
xv
3. Connect Copy
What is Connect Copy?.....................................................................................149
How It Works..........................................................................................................150
Machine Types and Options................................................................................150
Interrupt Copy......................................................................................................150
Before You Start ..................................................................................................151
Connect Copy Display Panel ............................................................................152
Display panel of the sub-machine ..........................................................................154
Using Connect Copy.......................................................................................... 155
Order of Copy Output.............................................................................................158
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy................................................................159
Auto Off ...............................................................................................................159
Exiting Connect Copy.............................................................................................159
Copying Stored Documents Using Connect Print ..................................................160
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy ..................................................................162
Connect Copy Job Flow .................................................................................... 164
When One of the Two Machines is Idle .................................................................164
Using the idle machine as the main machine (Connect Copy)............................165
Using the machine currently copying as the main machine (Connect Copy: Job Preset)....166
When Both Machines are in Use............................................................................166
When both machines are copying the same number of originals
(Connect Copy: Job Preset) ..............................................................................167
When one machines is copying a larger number of originals (Connect Copy: Job Preset) ...168
4. Document Server
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions ..................... 169
Document Server Display ......................................................................................170
Simplified Display...................................................................................................171
Preview Display......................................................................................................172
Using the Document Server.............................................................................. 174
Storing Data ...........................................................................................................174
To register or change a user name
(When using a user name registered to the Address Book)..............................176
(When using a user name not registered to the Address Book)........................177
(When no name is registered to the Address Book)..........................................178
To change a file name .........................................................................................178
To set or change a Password..............................................................................179
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored Document .................180
Checking the Details of a Stored Document ..........................................................181
Searching for a Stored Document..........................................................................182
To search by file name ........................................................................................182
To search by user name......................................................................................183
Printing a Stored Document ...................................................................................184
When Interrupting Printing...................................................................................185
Changing Number of Print Copies while Printing is in Progress..........................186
Sample Print ........................................................................................................186
Printing the First Page .........................................................................................187
Printing a Specified Page ....................................................................................188
Printing a Specified Range ..................................................................................188
xvi
Edit File ..................................................................................................................189
Combining Files...................................................................................................189
Inserting Documents............................................................................................190
Deleting Pages ....................................................................................................190
Copying Documents ............................................................................................191
Print Backup ........................................................................................................192
Deleting a Document..............................................................................................192
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor..................193
Downloading Stored Documents............................................................................194
5. Appendix
Function Compatibility ......................................................................................195
Supplementary Information .............................................................................. 197
INDEX....................................................................................................... 208
xvii
xviii
Notice
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, pass-
ports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no
responsibility for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions con-
cerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal
advisor.
1
Note
❒ For proper use of this product, be sure to read About This Machine first.
❒ Supplementary information about the copier mode is described in “Supple-
mentary Information”.
Reference
p.197 “Supplementary Information”
Symbols

Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these notes.
They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
2
Functions Requiring Optional
Configurations
Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows.
Shift Sort: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Stack: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Staple: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Staple (Center): Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Punch: Finisher SR5000 with punch unit
Z-fold: Finisher SR5000 and Z-folding Unit
Connect Copy: Copy Connector
Multi bypass tray: Multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
Note
3
Display Panel
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
❖ Initial copy display
APG060S
1. Original function, Image Density 5. Sort, Stack, Staple functions.

and Special Original function.
6. Displays available functions. Press
2. Operational status and messages. a function name to display its menu.
For example, press [Reduce/ Enlarge]
3. You can register up to two frequently
to switch the Reduce/Enlarge menu.
used reduce/enlarge ratios other than
the fixed reduce/enlarge ratios. See 7. A clip mark indicates the current-
“Reproduction Ratio”, General Set- ly selected function.
tings Guide.
4. Numbers of originals scanned into
memory, copies set, and copies made.
4
Simplified Display
APG044S
❖ Example of a simplified display
APG061S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and increase
the brightness of the display panel.
Note
5
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document
Server Features)
This section describes items that can be specified on the copier initial screen.
Copier initial screen can be displayed by pressing the {User Tools} key. For more
information about how to set up these items, see General Settings Guide.
Item Description
Auto Image Density Prior- You can set whether Auto Image Density is “On” or “Off” when
ity the machine is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
Original Orientation in You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
Duplex Mode
Copy Orientation in Du- You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
plex Mode
Reserve Job Mode You can set whether to reset the mode to the initial state or return
to the mode in use before the reserved operation was started when
you return to the initial screen after reserved copying finishes.
Reservation Screen Auto- You can set the time required until the display is switched to the
off Timer reserved first job display after reservation is set. If you select
“Switch”, use the numbers key to enter the time (10-99 seconds).
The default setting is 15 seconds.
Max. Copy Quantity The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 9999. The
default setting is 9999 sheets.
Manual Original Counter You can set whether to enable the document counter reset key.
Reset
Auto Tray Switching When the paper runs out during copying, it can be automatically
fed from a substitute paper feed tray, irrespective of the orienta-
tion of paper in that tray – provided it is the same size as that set
in the other paper feed tray during automatic paper selection. This
function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. You can set whether to
perform the Auto Tray Switching.
Text You can adjust the edge level of the finished image. The outline of
a character becomes soft when you select “Soft”. The outline of a
character can be sharply copied when you select “Sharp”.
Text / Photo You can select which has priority, photographs or characters,
when an original contains both. If you select “Normal”, character
and photo quality is balanced in the copy.
Photo You can adjust the quality of finished images according to the type
of photo original. “Printed photo” is set for magazine and catalog
photo originals. You can smooth photos by selecting “Printed
photo”. “Glossy Photo” is set for the silver-salt photos printed
from photo film. If you select “Normal”, you can finish characters
that exist together in a photo block.
Pale You can adjust the image quality of a pale original so the copy is
at normal density.
Generation Copy You can adjust the image quality to prevent characters in the copy
becoming too thick.
6
Item Description
Dark Background You can set whether “Deep document” can be selected as an orig-
inal type.
Panel Features Default You can set which items will appear as the function buttons on the
basic display.
Image Adjustment Priority You can set the items, to be preferentially displayed, to the func-
tion buttons on the basic display.
Paper Display You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown
on the initial display.
Original Type Display You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
Special Original Display You can set whether to show the original types on the initial display.
Special Original Display You can set up to three items for displaying on the initial display
Defaults from five items.
Tone: Original Remains You can set whether to use a buzzer to alert you when you forget
to remove an original.
Job End Call You can set whether to generate a buzzer sound (“pi”) when a
copy is completed. If “Panel key sound” when performing system
settings is set to “On”, the buzzer sounds four times if copying is
interrupted because the paper has run out or become jammed.
This notifies you that the copy job could not be completed.
Connect Copy Key Display You can set whether to display [Connect Copy]. If you select “Off”,
the key does not appear and a master unit cannot be obtained.
Switch Original Counter You can set whether to count the two-sided documents by number
Display of sheets or pages.
Customize Function: Copi- A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the
er function keys.
Customize Function: Doc- A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the
ument Server Storage function keys. Registered functions can also be changed.
❖ Reproduction Ratio
Item Description
Shortcut R / E You can register up to two frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios
other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown
on the initial display. You can also change registered Reduce/ En-
large ratios.
R / E Ratio You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear
if [Reduce/ Enlarge] is pressed on the copier screen.
R / E Ratio Priority You can set the ratio with priority when [Reduce/ Enlarge] is
pressed.
Ratio for Create Margin You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Mar-
gin in a shortcut key. Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range
of 90 to 99%). The ratio is set to 93% by default.
7
❖ Edit
Item Description
Front Margin: Left / Right You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies
in Margin Adjustment mode.
Back Margin: Left / Right You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies
in Margin Adjustment mode.
Front Margin: Top / Bot- You can specify top and bottom margins on the front side of cop-
tom ies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Back Margin: Top / Bot- You can specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies
tom in Margin Adjustment mode.
1 Sided→2 Sided Auto In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on
Margin: TtoT the back side. The margin is set to the same value of “Back Margin:
Left / Right”.
1 Sided→2 Sided Auto In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on
Margin: TtoB the back side. The value set for “Back Margin: Top / Bottom” is
used.
Creep Setting for Maga- You can specify the creep binding margin width.
zine
Erase Border Width You can specify the width for erasing border in the range of “2 to
99 mm” (in units of 1 mm).
Erase Original Shadow in In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1"
Combine boundary margin around all four edges of each original.
Erase Center Width You can specify the width of the erased center margins with this
function.
Front Cover Copy in Com- You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you
bine select Front Cover mode.
Copy Order in Combine You can set the copy order in Combine mode.
Orientation: Booklet, Mag- You can select the orientation of copies to open when using Book-
azine let or Magazine mode.
Copy on Designating Page You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted
in Combine slip sheets in Desig./Chapter mode.
Image Repeat Separation You can select a separation line from: None, Solid, Broken A, Bro-
Line ken B, or Crop Marks.
Double Copies Separation You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function
Line from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
Separation Line in Com- You can select a separation line using the Combine function from:
bine None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
Copy Back Cover When copying the back cover, you can specify whether to have the
back cover outside (outside page) or inside (inside page).
Double Copies Position You can select the copy position of bottom or left page according
to top or right page as the original image position.
8
❖ Stamp
Item Description
Size You can set the size of the numbers.
Density You can set the density of the numbers.
Preset Stamp
Stamp Language You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp
mode.
Stamp Priority You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp]
is pressed.
Stamp Format You can specify how each of stamp is printed.
User Stamp
Program / Delete Stamp You can register, change, or delete these designs as user stamps. You
can register up to five custom stamps with your favorite designs.
Stamp Format: 1-5 You can specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 5 is printed.
Date Stamp
Format You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
Font You can select the Date Stamp font.
Size You can set the Date Stamp size.
Superimpose You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps
black parts of the image.
Stamp Setting You can specify how Date Stamp is printed.
Page Numbering
Stamp Format You can select the page number format given priority when [Page
Numbering] is pressed.
Font You can select the font in Page Numbering mode.
Size You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering
mode.
Duplex Back Page Stamp- You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed
ing Position in Duplex mode.
Page Numbering in Com- You can set page numbering when using the Combine function
bine and the Page Numbering function together.
Stamp Position on Desig- You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when us-
nating Page ing the Designate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering
function together.
Stamp Position You can specify how each of stamp is printed.
Superimpose You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap
Page Numbering Initial Switch the page print language.
Letter
Stamp Text
Font You can select the font in Stamp Text mode.
9
Item Description
Size You can set the size of the stamp printed in Stamp Text mode.
Superimpose You can have the Stamp Text printed in white when it overlaps
Stamp Setting You can specify how Stamp Text is printed.
❖ Input / Output
Item Description
SADF Auto Reset In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time af-
ter the previous original has been fed. You can adjust this time
from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second. The timing is set
to “5 second(s)” by default.
Copy Eject Face Method in You can specify the way in which copies are delivered when copy-
Glass Mode ing an original placed on the exposure glass.
Memory Full Auto Scan When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the ma-
Restart chine can make copies of scanned originals first, and then auto-
matically proceed scanning remaining originals.
Sort / Stack Shift Tray Set- You can specify whether to shift the Shift Tray in sort mode or
ting stack mode.
Insert Separation Sheet You can specify the number of copy pages for inserting the Sepa-
ration Sheet from 1 to 999 pages in increments of 1 page.
Staple Position Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display
with priority. The optional Finisher SR5000 is required to use this
function.
Punch Type Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be
shown on the initial display. The optional Finisher SR5000 and
Multi-hole Punch Unit are required to use this function.
Finisher: Staple Position Specify the stapling position. The optional Finisher SR5000 is re-
quired to use this function.
Finisher: Punch Type Specify the punch type. The optional Finisher SR5000 and Multi-
hole Punch Unit are required to use this function.
Simplified Screen: Finish- You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for
ing Types “Finishing Types” on the Simplified Screen.
Item Description
Menu Protect Using Menu Protect, you can limit the settings available to users
other than the administrator.
10
1. Placing Originals
This chapter describes the types of originals you can set and how to place originals.
Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed, paper sizes that
are automatically detected, and missing image area.
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

The following describes recommended paper sizes and non-recommended orig-
inals for the ADF.
❖ Metric version
Original location Original size Original weight
Exposure glass Up to A3 -
ADF One-sided originals:A3L - A5KL 52-128 g/m2
(45-110 kg)
Two-sided originals: A3L-A5KL 52-105 g/m2
(45-90 kg)
Thin Paper mode: A3L-A5KL 40-128 g/m2
(35-110 kg)
❖ Inch version
Original location Original size Original weight
Exposure glass Up to 11" × 17" -
ADF One-sided originals: 14-34 lb.
11" × 17"L-51/2" × 81/2"KL
Two-sided originals: 14-28 lb.
11" × 17"L-51/2" × 81/2"KL
Thin Paper mode: 11-34 lb.
11" × 17"L-51/2" × 81/2"KL
Note
❒ The maximum number of originals that can be placed in the ADF is about 100
(paper weight is 80 g/m2, 20 lb.).
❒ The weight range for originals when using Mixed Size mode is 52-81 g/m2
(13.8-21.5 lb.).
11
Placing Originals
Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Placing the following types of originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds or
light & black lines or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on
1 the exposure glass instead.
• Originals other than those specified on “Sizes and Weights of Recommended
Originals”.
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, alu-
minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin, highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals that are still wet with ink or white-out.
Note
❒ The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.
12
Originals
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select

Sizes detectable by the exposure glass and ADF are:
❖ Metric version 1
Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 A5 B6 11" 81/2" 81/2" 8K 16K
L JIS K JIS K L JIS × × × L *2 K
L L K K 17" 13" 11" L *2
Original L L L L *1 K
location L
Exposure × × × × × ×
glass
ADF
*1 You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13", and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-
tem Settings). See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
*2
8K: 390 mm - 267 mm, 16K: 267 mm - 195 mm
❖ Inch version
Size A3 A4 11" 81/2" 81/2" 51/2" 51/2" 81/2" 11" 10" 8" 8" 81/4"
L K × × × × × × × × × × ×
L 17" 14" 11" 81/2" 81/2" 13" 15" 14" 10" 13" 13"
Original L L K K L L *1 L L L L L
location L
Exposure × × × × × × × × ×
glass
ADF × × ×
*1 You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13", and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-
tem Settings). See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
13
Placing Originals
❖ Exposure glass
CP01AEE
❖ ADF
AAE044E
Note
❒ If you want to use the ADF to copy custom size originals that are between 432 mm
and 1260 mm in length, contact your service representative.
❒ When you copy custom size originals, make sure you specify the size of the
originals. If not, the image may not be copied properly.
Reference
p.26 “Custom sizes”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
Sizes difficult to detect

It is difficult for the machine to automatically detect the sizes of the following
types of originals, so select the paper size manually.
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
• Originals which partially contain a solid image
• Originals which have solid images at their edges
14
Originals
Missing Image Area

Even if you place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass correctly, 3 mm
(0.1") margins on all four sides might not be copied.
1
GCGENK2E
A 2 ± 1.5mm, 0.08" ± 0.06"

B 2 n 2 mm/2 o 1.7mm, 0.08" n 0.08"/0.08" o 0.07"
C 2 ± 1.5 mm, 0.08" ± 0.06"
D 4 ± 2 mm, 0.16" ± 0.08"
15
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass
and in the ADF.
1 Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely
dried. Not taking this precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that
will be copied onto paper.
Note
❒ For original sizes you can set, see “Originals”.
Reference
p.11 “Originals”
Original Orientation
When using the ADF, place the original face up.
When using the exposure glass, place the original face down.
ZGVX010E
A ADF
B Exposure glass
16
Placing Originals
When copying A3K, 11" × 17"K, or B4 JISK size originals, select as the
Original Orientation. The machine then rotates copy image by 90°. This is useful
for copying large originals using the Staple, Duplex, Combine, or Stamp functions.
For example, to copy A3K or 11" × 17"K originals with the Staple function se-
lected: 1
AMG017S
A Select the original orientation ([ ] or [ ]).

Note
❒ It is recommended that you use the Original Orientation function with the
Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
17
Placing Originals
Reverse Orientation
This function rotates the copy image by 180° ( or ).
This is useful for copying torn originals. For example, if the left side of the orig-
1 inal is damaged and is difficult to set, position it as shown below.
APG004S
A Press [Reverse Orientation].

Note
❒ It is recommended you use this function together with the Auto Paper Se-
lect or Auto Reduce/Enlarge function.
❒ Copy results may differ depending on the combination of selected functions.
18
Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

Place originals on the exposure glass.
Important 1
❒ Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or
be damaged.
A Lift the ADF.

Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the
original might not be detected correctly.
B Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be
aligned to the rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be copied.
APF022S
A Positioning mark
B Left scale
C Lower the ADF.

Note
❒ When you place originals on the exposure glass, you can specify the way
copies are delivered.
Reference
“Input/Output”, General Settings Guide.
19
Placing Originals
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Place originals in ADF.
There are four types of special originals. Setting should be made in the following situations:
1
❖ When placing originals consisting of more than 100 pages:
See “Batch mode”.
❖ When placing originals one by one:

See “SADF mode”.
❖ When placing originals of various sizes:

See “Mixed size mode”.
❖ When placing custom size originals:

See “Custom sizes”.
❖ When copying originals onto thin paper:

See “Thin mode”.
A Adjust the guide to the original size.

B Set the aligned originals face up into the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The last page should be on the bottom.
Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may
cause the machine to detect the size of the scanned image incorrectly or dis-
play a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place originals or other ob-
jects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
APF023S
A Limit mark
B Document guide
Note
❒ Straighten curls in the originals before placing them on the ADF.
❒ To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the original before placing it on the ADF.
❒ Set the original squarely.
20
Placing Originals
Reference
p.21 “Batch mode”
p.22 “SADF mode”
p.23 “Mixed size mode”
p.24 “Thin Mode”
1
p.26 “Custom sizes”
Batch mode
In Batch mode, the machine copies an original of more than 100 pages as one
document, even if it is placed on the ADF in parts.
Important
❒ Place special originals, such as translucent paper, one by one.
A Press [Batch].
B Place the first part of the original, and then press the {Start} key.
C After the first part of the original has been fed, place the next part, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If [Batch] is not displayed on the screen, set [Batch] with [Special Original Dis-
play Defaults]. See “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings
Guide.
❒ When [SADF] is displayed in step A, set [SADF] with [Special Original Display
Defaults]. See “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings
Guide.
❒ To copy subsequent originals in this mode, repeat step C.
❒ When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided→2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
Reference
“Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings Guide
21
Placing Originals
SADF mode
In SADF mode, even when an original is placed page by page in the ADF, each
page is automatically fed when placed.
1
Important
❒ You should make a setting so that [SADF] is displayed. See “Copier/Docu-
ment Server Features”, General Settings Guide.
A Press [SADF].
B Place one page of an original, and then press the {Start} key.
C When the machine instructs you to place another original, place the next page.
The second and subsequent pages will be fed automatically without pressing
the {Start} key.
APF027S
Note
❒ If [SADF] is not displayed on the screen, set [SADF] with [Special Original Dis-
play Defaults]. See “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings
Guide.
When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided→2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
Reference
“Input/Output”, General Settings Guide
22
Placing Originals
Mixed size mode

In Mixed size mode, you can place originals of various sizes in the ADF at the
same time if their widths are the same.
1
Important
❒ When placing originals of different sizes in the ADF and making copies with-
out using the Mixed size mode, paper might become jammed or parts of the
original image might not be copied.
❒ You can place originals that weigh 52-81 g/m2 (45-70 kg).
❒ The sizes of the originals that can be placed in this mode are follows:
• Metric version
A3L and A4K, B4 JISL and B5 JISK, A4L and A5K
• Inch version
11" × 17"L and 81/2" × 11"K, 81/2" × 11"L and 51/2" × 81/2"K
❒ You can place two different sizes of originals in the ADF at the same time.
A Press [Mixed Sizes].
B Align the rear and left edges of the originals as shown in the illustration.
ANP073S
A Place the originals into the ADF

B Vertical size
C Adjust the guide to the original size.

D Place the originals in ADF.
E Press the {Start} key.
23
Placing Originals
Note
❒ If [Mixed Sizes] is not displayed on the screen, set [Mixed Sizes] with [Special
Original Display Defaults]. See “Copier/Document Server Features”, General
Settings Guide.
1 Reference
Thin Mode
A Press [Thin Paper].
B Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ If [Thin Paper] is not displayed on the screen, set [Thin Paper] with [Special
Settings Guide.
Reference
24
Placing Originals
Original size
Specify the size of the originals.
Regular sizes
1
Select the size of the originals from the regular sizes.
A Press [Original Size].
B Press [Regular Size].
C Select the size of original, and then press [OK] .

D Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
25
Placing Originals
Custom sizes
When placing custom size originals in the ADF, specify the size of the originals.
1 Important
❒ Paper that has a vertical length of 128–297 mm (5.1"-11.6") and a horizontal
length of 128–432 mm (5.1"-17") can be placed with this function.
A Press [Original Size].
B Press [Custom Size].

C Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
D Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
E Press [OK].
F Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
26
Placing Originals
Note
❒ If [Original Size] is not displayed on the screen, set [Original Size] with [Special
Settings Guide.
❒ If you make a mistake in step C or D, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key, and 1
then enter the value again.
❒ To register the custom size you have entered, press [Program]. A confirma-
tion message appears. Press [Yes]. Press [Recall] to specify a registered cus-
tom size.
Reference
27
Placing Originals
28
2. Copying
This chapter describes the procedure for making copies in various modes.
Basic Procedure
This section describes the basic procedure for making copies.
Important
❒ When User Code Authentication is set, enter your user code (up to eight dig-
its) with the number keys so that the machine accepts copy jobs. See “Admin-
istrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentica-
tion, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter your login user name
and user password so that the machine accepts copy jobs. Ask the user ad-
ministrator for the login user name and login password. For details, see
“When the Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine.
A Make sure “Ready” appears on the screen.

If any other function is displayed, press the {Copy} key on the left side of the
control panel.
• Initial copy screen
B Make sure no previous settings remain.

When there are previous settings remaining, press the {Clear Modes} key and
enter the setting again.
C Place your originals.

D Make desired settings.
E Enter the number of copies using the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be set is 9999.
29
Copying

The machine starts copying.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
Copies are delivered face down.
Note
2 ❒ Always log off when you have finished using the machine to prevent un-
authorized users from using the machine.
❒ You can specify whether copies are output face up or face down.
❒ To stop the machine during a multi-copy run, press the {Stop} key.
❒ To cancel all copy jobs and return the machine to the default condition,
press the {Clear Modes} key.
❒ To clear entered values, press the {Clear} key or [Cancel] on the screen.
❒ To confirm settings, press [Check Modes].
Reference
“When the Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine
“Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide
Interrupt Copy
Use this function to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently needed copies.
A Press the {Interrupt} key.
APG050S
B The machine stops scanning. Remove the originals that were being copied.
C Place the originals you want to copy.
The machine starts making copies.
E When copying is complete, remove the originals and copies.

30
Basic Procedure
F Press the {Interrupt} key again.

The interrupt key indicator goes off.
G Replace the originals that you were copying, and then press the {Start} key.
Following message “Reset x original(s).”, replace the originals that you
were copying.
Note
❒ The previous copy job settings are restored. Simply press the {Start} key to
2
continue copying from where it left off.
Left Original Beeper

The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your orig-
inals on the exposure glass after copying.
Note
❒ For details, see “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings Guide.
Reference
Copying onto Tab Stock

You can copy onto tab stock.
GCINDX0E
31
Copying
Important
❒ Before using this function, set the tray for tab stock and set the position of the
index tab. See “Items of Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
GCINDX1E
❒ You can set the tab stock in the Large Capacity Tray (trays 4-5), Wide Large
Capacity Tray (trays 4-6) and multi bypass tray (tray 7).
❒ Set the tab stock in the tray placing the tab side outwards.
❒ When setting tab stock, always use the tab sheet fence.
• Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
APF081S
• Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
APF054S
A Select the paper tray where the tab stock is set.

B Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
32
Basic Procedure
Note
❒ Check the position of the index tab to avoid cropping the image.
❒ Set the tab stock with the side to be copied facing down.
❒ Tab stock is always fed starting from the top tab.
GCINDX2E
AOriginals
B Tab stock
C Copies
❒ When a paper jam has occurred, check the order of originals and tab stock,
and then restart copying.
Reference
“Items of Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide
Surplus tab stock auto eject

When copying onto tab stock but not using all the tab stock for each copy, re-
maining sheets of tab stock are automatically ejected.
Before using this function, specify the number of sheets of tab stock (Number of
Tabs) in one set. For details, see “Items of Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
For example, if you use three of five tabs that form a set in a tray and insert slip
sheets using the Designate function, the unused 4th and 5th tab sheets are auto-
matically ejected when the first copy is completed.
APG048S
33
Copying
Note
❒ If you set [Number of Tabs] to [Off], surplus tab stock sheets for each copy are
not ejected.
Reference
2 When copying onto OHP Transparencies

When copying onto OHP transparencies, select the type and size of paper.
Important
❒ We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.
❒ OHP transparencies must be loaded face up in the tray with the notched cor-
ner of the sheet in the appropriate corner of the tray.
❒ To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it
on the tray.
❒ When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets one by one.
A Select the paper tray where OHP transparencies are set.

C When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Auto Start
Copying starts immediately when the machine is ready.
A Make your settings while “Select copy mode, then press the Start
key.” and “Scanning originals can be started.” are displayed alternately.
B Place the originals.

The machine scans the original.
Copying starts automatically once the machine is ready.
34
Basic Procedure
Job Preset
You can set up the next copy job in the document server while the current one is
processing.
When the current copy job is finished, the next copy job will start automatically.
A Press [New Job] when “Copying...” appears.

2
B Be sure message “Ready” appears, and then set up the next copy job.
C Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
All originals are scanned.
After the current copy job, the next copy job starts automatically.
Job Preset display

The preset jobs appear as shown below.
APG070S
1. Job being printed 3. Waiting Job

2. Job number
Note
❒ When more than ten jobs are set up including jobs for other functions, scroll
keys appear. 35
Copying
To check job contents

You can check and change the contents of preset jobs. You also can delete preset
jobs.
A Select the job number you want to check.

B Press [Change Job].
2
C Check contents.
D Press [OK].
To change job contents after checking
You can change the contents of preset jobs.
A Select the job number you want to change.

C Check job contents.

D Change contents, and then press [OK].
E Press [Change] in the confirmation dialog box.
36
Basic Procedure
To delete a job after checking its contents

You can delete the contents of preset jobs.
A Select the job number you want to change.

2
C Check job contents.

D Press [Delete Job].
E Press [Yes].
Deleting a job
A Select the job number you want to delete.

To interrupt copying, press [Stop Printing] at the right bottom of the display,
and then proceed to step C.
B Press [Delete Job].
C Press [Delete] in the confirmation dialog box.
37
Copying
Job List
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server, or Printer mode are temporarily
stored in the machine, and then executed in order. The Job List function allows
you to manage these jobs. For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or
print an urgent document.
2 Note
❒ You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
Job List screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether [Job Order] is selected with
Print Priority for the System Settings. For details about the setting procedure, see
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❖ When [Job Order] is not selected:

The job list is displayed for each of the functions.
APG017S
❖ When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.
APG018S
38
Job List
A Switches between job lists for each function.

B Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
C Displays reserved job numbers.
D Displays the function used to print jobs.
: Job printed using copy function.
: Job printed using printer function.
: Job printed using Document Server function.
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder. 2
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
Checking jobs in the print queue

You can check the contents of jobs in the print queue.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to check.
C Press [Details], and then check the contents.

D Press [Exit].
39
Copying
Changing the order of jobs

You can change the order in which print jobs in the job list are served:
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job whose order you want to change.
2
C Press [Change Order].

D Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].
E Press [OK].
40
Job List
Holding print jobs

The machine holds jobs that are queued and currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job(s) to hold.
2
C Press [Suspend Printing].
Deleting jobs
You can delete job that is queued or currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to delete.
C Press [Delete Reservation].

D Press [OK].
Note
❒ To delete multiple print jobs, select them in step B.
41
Copying
Checking Job History

You can view the history contents of printed jobs.
A Press [Job List].

B Press [Job History].
2 A list of completed print jobs appears.
C Press [Details] to check the contents of the displayed jobs.

D Press [Exit].
42
Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray

The multi bypass tray allows you to copy non-standard paper.
Important
❒ Following paper sizes can be copied from the multi bypass tray:
• When using the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Vertical: 100-305.0 mm (3.9"-12"), Horizontal: 140-458 mm (5.5"-18") 2
• When using the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
Vertical: 100-330.2 mm (3.9"-13"), Horizontal: 140-458 mm (5.5"-18")
❒ The machine can detect the following sizes as regular size copy paper:
A3L, B4 JISL, A4K, B5 JISK, A5L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
8" × 13"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL,12" × 18"L. If you want to use the size of paper
other than the above, be sure to specify the size.
❒ The maximum number of sheets you can load into the multi bypass tray de-
pends on paper type. The number should not exceed the upper limit.
A Set the side fences to the paper size.

B Place paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
APF028S
C Adjust the side fences again to ensure they properly fit the paper size.
D Set the end fence.
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right by pressing the stopper down.
APF029S
43
Copying
E Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
2
APF030S
The green lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the original table is
going up and down, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down the original table if you want to either
add paper or remove jammed ones.
F Select the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) on the control panel.

G Press the {q} key.
H Select paper size and type.
I Press [OK].
J Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
K When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ When the Sort function is selected, press the {q} key after all originals
have been scanned.
Reference
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine
44
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7)

A Set the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), and fit the side fences to
the tab stock.
APF031S
B Attach the back fence to the end fence, and then set the end fence.
APF032S
C Select [Tab Stock] in special paper settings.

Reference
p.31 “Copying onto Tab Stock”
45
Copying
When copying onto Regular Size Paper

Makes copies onto regular size paper from the multi bypass tray.
A Fit the side fence to the paper size, and then place paper in the multi bypass
tray (Tray 7).
2 B Fit the end fence to the paper, and then press the elevator switch on the
multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
C Select the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) on the control panel.

D Press the {q} key.
E Press [Select Regular Size].
F Select the paper size.

G Press [OK] twice.
46
When copying onto Custom Size Paper

Makes copies onto custom size paper from the multi bypass tray.
A Fit the side fence to the paper size, and then place paper in the multi bypass
tray (Tray 7).
B Fit the end fence to the paper, and then press the elevator switch on the 2

E Press [Program Custom Size].
F Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press [q].
G Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
[q].
H Press [OK] twice.

Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step F or G, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key, and
then enter the value again.
❒ To register the custom size entered in G, press [Program] and then press [Ex-
it] in the confirmation screen.
47
Copying
When copying onto Special Paper

To copy onto OHP transparencies, tracing paper, thick paper, or tab stock, you
must first specify their type and size.
To prevent paper jams when placing multiple sheets at once, fan the sheets be-
fore placing them on the tray.
2 A Fit the side fence to the paper size, and then place paper in the multi bypass
tray (Tray 7).
B Fit the end fence to the paper, and then press the elevator switch on the

E Select the paper type: [OHP (Transparency)], [Translucent Paper], [Thick Paper], or
[Tab Stock].
If you select [Tab Stock], specify the shift value using [←] or [→]. If you select
[On], use the number keys to specify the tab stock value, and then press the
{q} key.
F Select the paper size.

G Press [OK] twice.
H Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
I When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ If you have selected thick paper in “Special Paper”, you cannot have copies
delivered face down.
48
Copier Functions
Copier Functions
This section describes the copy functions.
Adjusting Copy Image Density

There are three types of adjustment available. 2
❖ Auto Image Density
The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densi-
ties of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper)
will be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
❖ Manual image density

You can adjust the general density of the original in nine increments.
❖ Combined auto and manual image density

Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
Auto image density

The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities
of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper) will
be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
A Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.
49
Copying
Manual image density

You can adjust the general density of the original in nine increments.
A [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to cancel it.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the image density. The density indicator “{”
moves.
2
Combined auto and manual image density

Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
A Make sure [Auto Density] is selected.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the image density. The density indicator “{”
moves.
50
Copier Functions
Selecting the Original Type Setting

Select one of the following 6 types to match your originals:
❖ Text
When originals contain only text (no pictures).
❖ Text/Photo 2
When originals contain photographs or pictures alongside the text.
❖ Photo
When you want to reproduce the delicate tones of photographs and pictures.
• When copying developed photographs:
• When copying photographs or pictures that are printed on paper (e.g. magazines):
• When copying copies or originals generated by printers:
❖ Pale
When you want to reproduce originals that have lighter lines in pencil, or
faintly copied slips. Faint lines are copied with greater clarity.
❖ Generation Copy
When originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can be repro-
duced sharply and clearly.
❖ Dark Background
When you copy originals with dark background such as color tab stock (or-
ange, green, or blue), you can remove the background color in three levels.
A Select the original type, and then press [OK].
Note
❒ To select the original type when [Original Type Display] is set to [Display] un-
der Copier and Document Server Features, press [Original Type].
❒ To display [Dark Background], you must set [Dark Background] to [On] and
[Original Type Display] to [Hide] under Copier/Document Server Features,
and then press [Original Type].
❒ If you select [Dark Background], the auto image density function is disabled,
but the manual image density function is enabled.
51
Copying
Reference
Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:
2 ❖ Auto Paper Select
The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio.
❖ Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray,
multi bypass tray, Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capacity Tray
(Wide LCT).
The following table shows copy paper sizes and directions that can be used with
Auto Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
❖ Metric version
Original location Paper size and orientation
Exposure glass A3L, A4KL, A5K, 8" × 13"L
ADF A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, B6 JISKL,
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
❖ Inch version
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 8" × 13"L
ADF A3L, A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, A5KL, 8" × 13"L
Note
❒ Only the paper trays set to [Do not Display] or [Recycled Paper] for Paper Type
and also set to [Yes] for Apply Auto Paper Select in Tray Paper Settings can
be selected in Auto Paper Select mode.
Reference
p.12 “Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)”
52
Copier Functions
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio.
A Make sure that Auto Paper Select is selected.

Trays with a key mark ( ) will not be automatically selected. See “Items of
Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide. 2
Reference
Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray, multi
bypass tray (Tray 7), Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capacity Tray
(Wide LCT).
A Select the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray,
multi bypass tray (Tray 7), Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capac-
ity Tray (Wide LCT).
The indicator corresponding to the selected paper tray is highlighted. See
“Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray”.
53
Copying
Note
❒ If the direction in which your original is placed (K or L) is different from
that of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original
image by 90° and fits it on the copy paper (rotated copy).
2
GCROTA0E
❒ The rotated copy function works when [Auto Paper Select] or [Auto Reduce /
Enlarge] is selected. See “Auto Paper Select” and “Auto Reduce/Enlarge”.
❒ The default setting for Auto Tray Switching is [With Image Rotation]. You
cannot use the Rotated Copy function if this setting is changed to [Without
Image Rotation] or [Off]. See “Auto Tray Switching”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When using Finisher SR5000, you cannot use the Rotated Copy function if
Slant, Top 2, Left 2 or Center for stapling, Punch, or Z-fold is selected.
Reference
p.43 “Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray”
p.58 “Auto Reduce/Enlarge”
p.69 “Staple”
p.72 “Punch”
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges images. You can select a preset ratio for copying.
54
Copier Functions
❖ Base Point
The base point of Reduce/Enlarge differs depending on how the original is
scanned. When the original is set on the exposure glass, the upper left corner
will be the base point. When it is set to ADF, the bottom left corner of the orig-
inal will be the base point.
Shown below are the resulting copy images that differ depending on how the
original is scanned.
GCKA031e
A Base point when placed on the exposure glass.

B Base point when placed in the ADF.
A Press [Reduce/ Enlarge].
B Select a ratio, and then press [OK].

Note
❒ To select a preset ratio on the initial display in step A, press the shortcut
reduce/enlarge key and go to step C.
Reference
“Reproduction Ratio”, General Settings Guide
55
Copying
Create Margin function

Use Create Margin to reduce the image to 93% of original size using the center
as reference. By combining it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, you can also
provide the Reduce/Enlarge copy with a margin.
A Press [Create Margin] displayed on the initial display.

2
B If you do not wish to combine it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, place

your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
Zoom
You can change the reproduction ratio in increments of 1%.
56
Copier Functions
To select the ratio with [o] and [n]

Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio.

C Specify the ratio using [o] or [n].
Pressing [o] or [n] changes the ratio in increments of 10%. Pressing and
holding down the relevant key changes the ratio in increments of 10%.
D Press [OK].
E Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in C, readjust it with [o] or [n].
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Number keys].

C Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D Press [OK] twice. 57
Copying
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine automatically chooses an appropriate reproduction ratio based on
the paper and original sizes you select.
Important
❒ You cannot use the multi bypass tray with this function.
❒ When using Auto Reduce/Enlarge, see the following table for original sizes
and orientations you can use:
❖ Metric version
Original location Original size and orientation
Exposure glass A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5K
ADF A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11 × 17L,
81/2" × 11"KL
❖ Inch version
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
ADF A3L, A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
51/2" × 81/2"KL, 10" × 14"L, 71/4" × 101/2"L
58
Copier Functions
A Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
B Select the paper type.

Reference
p.12 “Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)”
Size Magnification
You can calculate an enlargement or reduction ratio based on the lengths of the
original and copy.
ANP059S
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing “A” with
“a”.
59
Copying
B Press [Size Magnification].

C Enter the length of the original with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
• Metric version: 1 - 999 mm (increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0.1" - 99.9" (increments of 0.1")
D Enter the length of the copy with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ To change the length after pressing the {q} key in D, select [Original] or
[Copy], and then enter the desired length.
Directional Magnification (%)

Specify the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image at dif-
ferent reproduction ratio. Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different repro-
duction ratios horizontally and vertically.
CP2P01EE
a: Horizontal ratio
b: Vertical ratio
60
Copier Functions
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [Horizontal].
D Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [Vertical].
F Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.
H Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
To specify a ratio with [o] and [n]
Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [[n][o] keys].
D Press [Horizontal]. 61
Copying
E Specify the desired ratio using [n] or [o].

Pressing [n] or [o] changes the ratio in increments of 1%. Pressing and hold-
ing down the relevant key changes the ratio in increments of 10%.
F Press [Vertical].
G Specify the desired ratio using [n] or [o].
2 H Press [OK] twice.
I Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in steps E or G, readjust it with [n]
or [o].
Directional Size Magnification (inch)

A suitable reproduction ratio is automatically selected when you enter the hori-
zontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image you require.
CP2M01EE
A Horizontal original size: A mm (inch)

B Vertical original size: B mm (inch)
C Horizontal copy size: a mm (inch)
D Vertical copy size: b mm (inch)
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing “A” with
“a” and “B” with “b”.
62
Copier Functions
B Press [Dir. Size Mag. Inch].

C Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes between 1 to 999 mm (0.1" to 99.9") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
D Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
E Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
You can enter sizes between 1 to 999 mm (0.1" to 99.9") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
F Enter the vertical size of the copy with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.

Note
❒ To change a length in steps C to F, press the key you wish to change and
enter the new value.
63
Copying
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
❖ Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.
A Select [Sort / Stack].
B Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.

C Set the originals.
When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be
copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is on the
bottom.
When placing an original on the exposure glass or in the ADF using Batch,
press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.

Note
❒ You can select whether to shift or not. See “Input/Output”, General Set-
tings Guide.
❒ To confirm the type of finishing, press the {Sample Copy} key in step C.
Reference
“Input/Output”, “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings
Guide
64
Copier Functions
Sample copy
You can use this function to check the copy settings before making a long copy
run.
Important
❒ This function can be used only when the Sort function is turned on.
A Select Sort and any other necessary functions, and the place the originals. 2
B Press the {Sample Copy} key.
One copy set is delivered as a sample.
APG052S
C If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].

The number of copies made is the number specified, minus one for the proof
copy.
Note
❒ If you press [Suspend] after checking the results, you can return to step A.
You can change the settings for Staple, Punch, Duplex (1 Sided → 1 Sided,
1 Sided → 2 Sided), Orientation, Margin Adjust., Cover Sheet, and Desig-
nate. However, depending on the combination of functions, you may not
be able to change some settings.
65
Copying
Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
Important
❒ This function can be used only when the Sort function is turned on.
A While “Copying...” is displayed, press the {Stop} key.

2
B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
D Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.
Note
❒ The range of print copies enterable in step C depends on when the {Stop}
key is pressed.
When memory is full

If the amount of data of the scanned originals exceeds the capacity of memory,
scanning is interrupted.
A Press the {Start} key.

All scanned pages are copied, and data stored in memory are cleared.
B Remove the copies, and then continue copying following the instructions
on the display.
Note
❒ The number of pages that can be stored in memory is about 2000 pages of
A4 size originals. It depends on the type of originals or memory settings.
❒ In Sort mode, you can complete scanning and copying by copying the
scanned pages stored in memory until it becomes full, and then scanning
and copying the remained originals.
66
Copier Functions
Reference
Shift tray off in sort/stack
A Press [Output/ Customize Function/ Finisher].

B Make sure [Output/ Cstmz.] is selected, and then press [Sort/ Stack Shift Tray Off]. 2
C Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Reference
Separation
Use this function to have separation sheets inserted between sets.
Important
❒ Before selecting this function, set the tray for separation sheets. See “Tray Pa-
per Settings”, General Settings Guide.

B Press [Output/ Cstmz.].
C Press [Insert Separation Sheet Per 1 set(s)] or [Insert Separation Sheet Per Job].
D Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
67
Copying
Note
❒ You can select to have separation sheets inserted between every set, or ev-
ery so many sets.
Reference
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide
2 Stack
This function groups together copies of each page in a multi-page original.
If a finisher is installed, each time the copies of one page are delivered, the next
copy is shifted when delivered so you can separate each job by page.
A Press [Sort / Stack].
B Enter the number of copies with the number keys.

Note
❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to
be copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is
on the bottom.
❒ When placing originals on the exposure glass or in the ADF using batch
mode, press the {q} key after all have been scanned.
❒ You can disable the Shift Tray setting.
Reference
p.67 “Shift tray off in sort/stack”
68
Copier Functions
Staple
Individual copy sets can be stapled.
Important
❒ If you try to select [Staple: Center] when there is no Booklet processor or stapler
cartridge installed in Booklet Finisher BK5000, a message telling you there are
no staples or a staple jam has occurred appears.
69
Copying
❖ Original orientation and stapling position

Place originals in the ADF in the orientation in which they can be read nor-
mally. When placing the original on the exposure glass, keep the same orien-
tation, but set the original facing downwards.
When there is copy paper that is identical in size and orientation to your orig-
inal, the original orientations and staple positions are as follows.
❖ Finisher SR5000
2
APG059S
❖ Booklet Finisher BK5000
APG064S
This table shows the stapling positions, not the orientation of delivery.
Not available for vertical Left 2 and horizontal Top 2 for A3, 11" × 17", B4 JIS, or
81/2" × 14"size paper.
70
Copier Functions
A Select one of the stapling positions.
When you select a stapling position, Sort mode is automatically selected.
B Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.

Note
on the bottom.
❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass or in the ADF using Batch,
Reference
71
Copying
Punch
You can make punch holes in copies.
❖ 2 holes
GCPNCH1E
❖ 3 holes
GCPNCH3E
Important
72
Copier Functions
❖ Original orientation and punch hole positions

The relationship between the orientation in which you place the original and
the punch hole positions is as follows:
Orientation in which original is set Punch hole
Exposure glass ADF positions
K
2
L
2 holes
K
L
Standard
L
3 holes
K
L
2 holes
K
L
90º Turn
L
3 holes
K
73
Copying
This table shows the punch hole positions, not the orientation of delivery.
Not available for vertical 2 hole left and horizontal 2 hole top for A3, 11" × 17",
or B4 JIS size paper.
A Select one of the punch hole positions.

Note
3 Edges Full Bleed

You can make full image copy by cutting down the margin of top, bottom, and
right sides. This function is useful for originals full of image.
GCBLEE1E
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Edit Image].
C Press [3 Edges Full Bleed].
D Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
74
Copier Functions
Z-fold
Makes two parallel folds, one of which faces in and the other facing out.
ACC010S
Note
Reference
Using the Z-fold Support Tray

When using the Z-fold function together with the Staple function, attach the Z-
fold support tray to the upper tray or the shift tray of Finisher SR5000.
Note
❒ Remove the Z-fold support tray when outputting prints to the finisher's shift
tray without using the Z-fold function. If you leave the Z-fold support tray in
place, prints are not stacked properly.
Reference
“Removing Jammed Paper”, Troubleshooting
75
Copying
Z-fold positions and Z-folding Copies
2
APG023S
The above table shows Z-folding positions. The orientation of the paper does not
indicate direction of delivery.
A Select the folding direction.
Duplex
There are two types of duplex copies:
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sides
Copies 2 one-sided pages onto 1 two-sided page.
76
Copier Functions
❖ 2 Sided → 2 Sided
Copies 1 two-sided page onto 1 two sided page.
❖ Original orientation and completed copies

Copy images differ according to the orientation in which you place the origi-
nals (K or L).
The table shows the orientation of images on the front and back of copies, not
the orientation of delivery.
APG049S
77
Copying
A Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].
B Select [1 Sided→2 Sided] or [2 Sided→2 Sided].
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ The maximum paper weight that can be used with duplex copying is 52-
216 g/m2 (14-57.4 lb.).
on the bottom.
❒ To change originals and copy orientation in step B, press [Orientation].
Reference
p.97 “Margin Adjustment”
“Edit”, General Settings Guide.
78
Copier Functions
Originals and copy orientation

The orientation can be selected when copying Duplex job.
• Top to Top
2
Duplex1
• Top to Bottom
Duplex2
A Press [Orientation].
B Select orientation [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom], and then press [OK].
Note
❒ The default setting is [Top to Top]. You can change the default orientation
with Copier/Document Server Features.
Reference
79
Copying
One-Sided Combine
Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.
There are six types of One-Sided Combine.
❖ 1 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side

Copies 2 one-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2
GCSHVY7E

GCSHVY8J

GCSHVY3J
80
Copier Functions
❖ 2 Sided 1 Page → Combine 1 Side

Copies 1 two-sided original to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVYOJ

Copies 2 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVYBJ

Copies 4 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY4J
❖ Orientation of the original and combine image position

Open to left (K) originals
GCSHUY1E
81
Copying
Open to top (L) originals
GCSHUY2E
Placing originals and copying

2
• Originals read from left to right
Combine5
• Originals read from top to bottom
Combine6
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for original, and then press [Combine 1 Side] for Copy.
D Select the number of originals to combine.

82
Copier Functions
E Select the paper.

F Press [OK].
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can erase a 3 mm (0.1 inch) boundary magazine around all four edges
of originals in Combine mode. 2
❒ You can set the copy order in Combine mode.
Reference
p.79 “Originals and copy orientation”
“Edit”, General Settings Guide
Two-Sided Combine
Combine various pages of originals into one sheet with two sides.
There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.
❖ 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sides

Copies 4 one-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCBOOK1E

Copies 8 one-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVYAE
A Front
B Back
83
Copying

Copies 16 one-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY5E
A Front
B Back

Copies 2 two-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCSHVY1E

Copies 4 two-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVY2E
A Front
B Back
84
Copier Functions

Copies 8 two-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY6E
A Front
B Back
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for Original, and then press [Combine 2 Sides] for
Copy.
D Select the number of originals to combine.

E Press [OK].
85
Copying
Note
❒ You can erase a 3 mm (0.1 inch) boundary magazine around all four edges
of originals in Combine mode.
❒ You can set the copy order in Combine mode.
Reference
p.79 “Originals and copy orientation”
2 “Edit”, General Settings Guide
Series Copies
This function copies the front and back of a two-sided original separately, or the
two facing pages of a bound original onto two sheets.
There are two types of Series Copies.
Important
❒ You cannot use the Series Copies function with the ADF.
❒ The following table shows the paper sizes of two facing pages of a bound
original (book) and one-sided copy (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
❖ Metric version
AMA020S
❖ Inch version
AMA027S
86
Copier Functions
❖ Book → 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two facing pages of a bound original (book).
CP2B0100
❖ 2 Sided → 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
B Press [Series].
C Select [2 Sided→1 Sided] or [Book→1 Sided], and then press [OK].
If you selected [2 Sided→1 Sided], you can change the orientation.
D Press [OK].
E Place the original on the exposure glass, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you selected [Book→1 Sided], press the {q} key after all originals have
been scanned.
87
Copying
Booklet/Magazine
Copies two or more originals in page order.
There are six types of Booklet/Magazine.
The following table shows the paper sizes of two-sided original and two-sided
copy (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
2 ❖ Metric version
APG046S
❖ Inch version
APG047S
❖ 1 Sided → Booklet
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown.
• Open to left
GCBOOK0E
• Open to right
GCBOOK1E
88
Copier Functions
❖ 2 Sided → Booklet
Make two-sided originals to copies in page order for a folded booklet as
shown.
• Open to left
GCAH010E
• Open to right
GCAH020E
❖ 1 Sided → Magazine
Copies two or more originals to make copies in page order when they are
folded and stacked.
• Open to left
GCBOOK3E
89
Copying
• Open to right
2
GCBOOK4E
❖ 2 Sided → Magazine
Copies two or more originals of two-sided to make copies in page order when
they are folded and stacked.
• Open to left
GCAH030E
• Open to right
GCAH040E
90
Copier Functions
❖ Book → 2 Sided
Copies a two-page spread original onto one sheet with one page per side.
You cannot use the multi bypass tray with “Book→2 Sided” or “Front&Back→2
Sided”.
❖ Front & Back → 2 Sided

Copies each two-page spread original as it is onto both sides of a sheet.
❖ How to fold and unfold copies to make a booklet

As shown below, fold a copy along the centerline, and open.
GCBOOK2E
A Open to left
B Open to right
91
Copying
❖ How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine

As shown below, fold and stack copies to make a magazine, and open.
• Open to left
GCBOOK5E
• Open to right
GCBOOK6E
Important
❒ Select [Open to Left] or [Open to Right] with [Orientation: Booklet, Magazine] in ad-
vance. See “Edit”, General Settings Guide.
B Press [Book].
C Select a book type separately for the original ([1 Sided] or [2 Sided]) and copy
([Booklet] or [Magazine]), or select a book type from [Book→2 Sided] and
[Front&Back→2 Sided].
D Press [OK].
92
Copier Functions
Note
❒ The machine automatically selects the reproduction ratio automatically to
the paper size.
Reference
“Edit”, General Settings Guide 2
Creep Adjustment
To adjust the creep between the center and the edge of the page, select [Magazine]
for copying.
B Press [Book].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the original.
D Press [Magazine].
E Press [Creep Adjust.].
F Specify the creep value using [o] or [n].
G Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ You can adjust the creep value between 0 to 99 mm (0" to 3.9") in 1 mm
(0.1") steps.
❒ If you select [Staple: Center] for a magazine, set the creep value between the
center and the edge of page. For example, specify 2 mm for 15 sheets.
❒ If you make a mistake in step F, press [o] or [n] to set a new value.
93
Copying
Mix 1 & 2 Sided

You can copy two types of original, one-sided and two-sided, onto one or both
sides of a sheet.
GCKONZ0J

B Press [Mix 1&2 Sid.].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the original.
If you select [2 Sided], you can select the orientation.
D Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the copy.

F If you have selected [1 Sided] for the original and [2 Sided] for the copy, press
[Change Setting] to you specify an odd number of originals or if you want to
change the copy page manually.
Place the next originals, and then repeat steps C to E.
Note
94
Copier Functions
Scanning Position
You can move the scanning position of originals.
A Point from which the machine begins scanning

Note
❒ You can move the scanning position upward, downward, to left and to right
up to 30 mm (1.2") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
A Top: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2"

B Right: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2"
C Bottom: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2"
D Left: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2"
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Scan Position].
C Set the scanning position for the front of the original. Press [↑] or [↓] to set
the top or bottom position. Press [←] or [→] to set the left or right position.
95
Copying
D Set the scanning position for the back of the original. Press [↑] or [↓] to set
the top or bottom position. Press [←] or [→] to set the left or right position.
Then press [OK].

Note
❒ If you have incorrectly set the position, readjust with [↑], [↓], [←] or [→] .
2 ❒ If you don't need to set the scanned position of the back of the original in
step D, press [OK] and go to step E.
❒ The scanning position for the back is valid only when you are copying 2-
sided originals.
96
Copier Functions
Margin Adjustment
You can make a binding margin.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Margin Adj.].

C Set a binding margin for a front page. Press [←] and [→] when setting the
left and right margins, and [↓] and [↑] when setting the top and bottom margins.
D Set a binding margin for the back side pages. Press [←] and [→] when set-
ting the left and right margins, and [↓] and [↑] when setting the top and bot-
tom margins, and then press [OK].
Margin on the back side of the page is valid when [1 Sided→2 Sided] or [Com-
bine 2 Sides] is selected.

Note
❒ You can set the binding margin up to 30 mm (1.2") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
❒ If you make a mistake, press [←], [→], [↓], [↑], or press [Clear] to set a new
value.
❒ If you do not need to specify the margins for the back side pages in step D,
press [OK] and proceed to step E.
Reference
97
Copying
Erase
You can erase the center and/or all four sides of the original image.
This function comes in the following modes:
❖ Border
Erases the original's edge margin from the copy.
2
❖ Center
Erases the original's center margin from the copy.
❖ Center/Border
Erases both the original's center and edge margins from the copy.
❖ Inside
Erases a designated area of the copy image.
❖ Outside
Erases all areas of the copy image other than the area you have selected.
98
Copier Functions
Note
❒ The relationship between the original orientation and the erased part is as follows:
L original K original
A Erased part
B 2-99 mm (0.1"-3.9")
❒ The erase width is set to 10 mm (0.4 inch) as a default. You can change this
setting using the Edit menu in Copier/Document Server Features.
Reference
99
Copying
Border Erase (same width)

This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Border].

C Press [Same Width].
D Set an erase border width with [n] or [o].
Pressing [n] or [o] changes the width in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inch).
Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the width in increments
of 10 mm (0.4 inch).
If you select to erase the image on the back of the original, press [2 Sided Set-
ting] and [Back].
Erasing the image on the back is valid when you copy 2-Sided originals.
E Press [OK].
Note
❒ To change the value entered in step D, press [n] and [o] to set a new value.
100
Copier Functions
Border Erase (different width)

This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Border].

C Press [Different Width].
D Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
ting] and [Back].
E Press [OK].
101
Copying
Center/Border Erase (same width)

This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Cntr/Brdr].

C Press [Same Width].
D Press [Center], and then set the erase center width with [n] and [o].
ting] and [Back].
E Press [Border], and then set the erase border width with [n] and [o].
F Press [OK].
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
102
Copier Functions
Center/Border Erase (different width)

This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Cntr/Brdr].

C Press [Different Width].
D Press the key for the order you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
ting] and [Back].
E Press [OK].
103
Copying
Inside Erase
A Specify the point where the machine starts scanning (X1, Y1) and where it
stops scanning (X2, Y2).
You can input lengths of 0 – 432 mm, 0 – 17".
B Press [Edit].
2
C Press [Erase Area].
D Press [Erase Inside 1] – [Erase Inside 5].
E Enter the value of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
F Enter the value of [Y1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
G Enter the value of [X2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
ting] and [Back].
I Press [OK].
If you want to go on to erase another area, repeat from steps D to I.
J Press [OK].
K Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
104
Copier Functions
Outside Erase
A Specify the point where the machine starts scanning (X1, Y1) and where it
stops scanning (X2, Y2).
You can input lengths of 0 – 432 mm, 0 – 17".
B Press [Edit].
2
C Press [Erase Area].

D Press [Erase Outside].
E Enter the value of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
F Enter the value of [Y1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
G Enter the value of [X2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
ting] and [Back].
I Press [OK] twice.

J Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
105
Copying
Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies. If this
function is used in conjunction with Sort, same numbers are printed on a depart-
ment basis, helping you to keep track of confidential documents.
GCSTMP2E
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Backgrnd No.].

C Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.

Note
❒ To change the value entered in step C, press the [Clear] or the {Clear} key
to set a new value.
Reference
“Stamp”, General Settings Guide
106
Copier Functions
Preset Stamp
Frequently used massages can be stored in memory and stamped on copies.
Important
❒ Only one message can be stamped at a time.
2
GCSTMP1E
• The following eight messages are available for stamping.

“COPY”, “URGENT”, “PRIORITY”, “For Your Info.”, “PRELIMINARY”,
“For Internal Use Only”, “CONFIDENTIAL”, “DRAFT”
107
Copying
❖ Stamp position and original orientation

The stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place
your originals.
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Preset Stamp].

C Select the desired message.
You can change the position, size, and density of the stamp.
108
Copier Functions
D Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.
E After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].

Reference
Changing the stamp position, size and density

Changes the stamp position, size and density.
A Press [Change] under Position/Size/Density.

B Select the position for print, size, and density, and then press [OK].
109
Copying
User Stamp
Prints a registered stamp onto copies. Letters or images you use frequently can
be registered.
Important
❒ You have to program a user stamp before using this function.
2 ❒ Only one message can be stamped at a time.
GCSTMP0E
110
Copier Functions

The user stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
place your originals.
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [User Stamp].

C Select the desired stamp type.
You can change the stamp position.
111
Copying

Reference
Changing the user stamp position

Changes the stamp position.
A Press [Change] under Stamp Position.

B Select the desired position, and then press [OK].
112
Copier Functions
To program the user stamp

This function scans an image that is used as a user stamp.
The range of stamp images for readability is 10–297 mm (0.4"-11.7") high and 10–
432 mm (0.4"-17.0") wide. However, if the value exceeds the maximum value of
the area (5,000 mm2, 7.75 inch2), it is corrected within the range of the area automatically.
ZGVX040E
Important
❒ Up to four frequently used images can be stored in memory.
A Make sure that the machine is in copier mode.

APG053S
C Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
D Press [Stamp].
E Press [User Stamp].
F Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
113
Copying
G Press [mProgram], and then press the stamp number you want to program.
H Enter the user stamp name (up to ten characters) with the letter keys, and
then press [OK].
I Enter the horizontal size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
2 J Enter the vertical size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
K Place the original for user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press [Start
Scanning].
The original will be scanned, and the stamp will be registered.
L Press [Exit].
M Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools menu screen.
N Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
Note
❒ Stamp numbers with m already have settings in them. Stamp numbers
that are not registered yet are marked with “Not Programmed”.
❒ If the user stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you
if you want to overwrite it. To overwrite it, press [Yes]; otherwise, press
[Stop].
❒ Originals cannot be scanned from the ADF when programming the user
stamp.
114
Copier Functions
To delete the user stamp

Deletes an image registered as a user stamp.
You cannot restore a deleted stamp.
A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode.

B Press the {User Tools} key. 2
APG053S
C Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
D Press [Stamp].
E Press [User Stamp].
F Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
G Press [Delete], and then press the stamp number you want to delete.
H Select [Yes], and then press [Exit].
I Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools menu screen.
J Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
115
Copying
Date Stamp
You can use this function to print dates onto copies.
ANP055S
The following five date print styles are available.

• MM/DD/YYYY
• MM.DD.YYYY
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
116
Copier Functions

The date stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
Important
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Date Stamp].

C Select the stamp format.
You can change the Stamp, style and position of the date to be stamped. 117
Copying

Reference
To change the format of date

Changes the style of date to be stamped.
A Press [Change Format] under Current Date.
B Select the date format, and then press [OK].
118
Copier Functions
To change the date stamp position

Page Numbering
You can use this function to print page numbers onto copies.
CP2G0100
119
Copying
There are six types of page numbering.

• P1,P2,…
• 1/5,2/5,…
• -1-,-2-,…
• P.1,P.2,…
• 1, 2, …
2 • 1-1,1-2,…
❖ Original orientation and stamp position

The page stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
Important
120
Copier Functions
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Page Nmbr.].

C Select the format.
You can specify the stamp, position, pages to be stamped, and numbering.
D After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].

Reference
121
Copying
Changing the stamp position


2
Specifying the first printing page and start number (“P1,P2...”, “-1-,-2-...”, “P.1,P.2...”,
“1,2...”)
Below explains the example when “P1,P2...” is selected. The steps are the same
for other cases.
A Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
B Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing from, and then press the {q} key.
122
Copier Functions
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering from with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
The example below shows when the first printing page is “2” and the start
number is “3”.
2
GCANPE2J
D Press [Last Number], enter the number of the page at which to stop number-
ing with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1/5,2/5…”)

B Press [First Printing Page]. Enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the original sheet number from which
to start printing.
123
Copying
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering from with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D To change the number to end numbering, press [Last Number], enter that
number with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
Proceed to step E when not changing.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
2 The last number is the last page number to print. For example, if Total Pages
is ten, if you want to print up to seven pages and do not want to print from
page 8 on, enter “7” for Last Number. Normally, you do not need to enter the
number.
E Press [Total Pages], enter the total number of original pages with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
F When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Note
❒ To change the number entered in step B, press the [Clear] or the {Clear} key,
and then enter a new number.
❒ To change the settings (the first printing page, the number of page from
which to start numbering, or total number of pages) after pressing [OK] in
step F, press [Change] and then enter the numbers again.
❒ To change a page number, press [StartPage], and then enter the number
with number keys.
Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1-1,1-2…”)

B Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing, and then press the {q} key.
C Press [First Chapter No.], enter the chapter number from which to start num-
bering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the chapter number from which to start
numbering.
124
Copier Functions
D Press [First Printing Number], enter the page number from which to start print-
ing with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Note
❒ To change the number entered in step B, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key,
and then enter a new number.
❒ To change the settings (the first printing page, the chapter from which to 2
start numbering, or the page from which to start numbering) after pressing
[OK] in step E, press [Change] and then enter the numbers again.
Stamp Text
You can stamp important text on copies up to 64 letters.
GCSTMT0E
AFU109S
125
Copying
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Stamp Text].

C Press [Change Text].
D Enter stamp text, and then press [OK].
E Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.
F Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If the Main Power is turned off, the text is cleared. To save the typed text,
you can program them.
Reference
Changing the stamp position

126
Copier Functions
Image Repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.
The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. For example, see the following table.
❖ Original: 51/2" × 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" × 11"K or Original: 51/2" × 81/2"L/Copy

paper 81/2" × 11"L
4 repeats (65%) 16 repeats (32%)
Repeat1 Repeat2
❖ Original: 51/2" × 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" × 11"L or Original: 51/2" × 81/2"L/Copy

paper 81/2" × 11"K
2 repeats (100%) 8 repeats (50%) 32 repeats (25%)
Repeat5
Repeat3 Repeat4
127
Copying
A Select the size of copy paper and the reproduction ratio.

B Press [Edit].
C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Image Repeat].
E Press [OK].
Reference
Double Copies
One original image is copied twice onto one sheet, as shown.
Important
❒ Originals with a size of A5L, B6 JISKL, 51/2" × 81/2"L cannot be detected
properly on the exposure glass. Be sure to select the copy paper manually or
place the originals in the ADF.
❒ The following table shows original and copy paper sizes (when copying at a
ratio of 100%).
128
Copier Functions
❖ Metric version
AMG015S 2
❖ Inch version
AMG016S
A Press [Edit].

C Press [Double Copies].
D Press [OK].
E Select the paper.
Reference
“Edit”, General Settings Guide.
129
Copying
Centering
You can make copies with the image moved to the center of the copy paper.
GCCNTR0E
Important
❒ The paper sizes and directions for centering are listed below.
❖ Metric version
Exposure glass A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, 8" × 13"L
ADF A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
❖ Inch version
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
ADF A3L, A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
51/2" × 81/2"KL, 10" × 14"L, 71/4" × 101/2"L
A Select the paper.

B Press [Edit].
130
Copier Functions
C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Centering].
E Press [OK].
Positive/Negative
2
If your original is black and white, copy images are inverted.
GCHATN1E
A Press [Edit].

C Press [Positive / Negative].
D Press [OK].
E Select the paper.
131
Copying
Covers
You can use this function to create cover sheets by adding additional pages of
different paper, or copying existing pages onto different paper.
Important
❒ You cannot select the interposer as the copy paper.
2 Covers function includes Front Cover and Front/Back Covers.
❖ Front cover
The first page of your originals is copied on specific paper sheet for covers, or
a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy.
• Copy
• Blank
❖ Back Cover
The last page of originals is copied onto a specified cover sheet paper, or a
cover sheet is inserted after the last page.
• Copy
ADB001S
132
Copier Functions
• Blank
ADB002S
2
❖ Front/Back Covers
The first and last pages of your original are copied on separate paper for use
as covers, or a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy and after the last
copy.
• Copy
GCCOVE0J
• Blank
A Set the tray for the front cover or back cover sheet.
You can select the tray for the front or back cover sheet using the Tray Paper
Settings.
The cover sheet should be the same size and direction as the copy paper.
B Press [Cover/ Slip Sheet].
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the front or back cover sheet, and then press [OK].
133
Copying
D Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
Reference
2 Designate
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip sheets
or to insert a slip sheet for each page specified.
Important
❒ You can select any tray for slip sheets, except the copy paper trays.
❒ You cannot select the interposer as the copy paper.
A Set the tray you want to use for slip sheets.

The paper for slip sheets should be of the same size as the copy paper and also
be set in the same direction.
C Press [Designate / Chapter].

D Select [Designate: Copy] or [Designate: Blank].
E Press the key to select the chapter number.
To select pages 21 to 40 (chapter), press [21-40].
134
Copier Functions
F Enter the page number of the original's location you want to copy onto a
slip sheet with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
G To specify another page location, repeat steps E to F.

Up to 100 pages can be specified.
H Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
I When you finish specifying pages, press [OK] twice. 2
J Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
Chapters
The pages you specify with this function will appear on the front of copy sheets.
GCSHOWOJ
Important
❒ Before selecting this function, press [Dup./ Combine/ Series] and select “1 Sided→2
Sided” or “Combine”.
❒ This function can be used only when you use the Duplex (1 Sided→2 Sided)
or Combine function.
A Press [Cover/ Slip Sheet].
B Press [Designate / Chapter]. 135

Copying
C Press [Chapter].
D Press the key to select the chapter number.
To select pages 21 to 40 (chapter), press [21-40].
E Enter the page location of the first page of the first chapter with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
2 Up to 100 chapter locations can be specified.
F To specify another page location, repeat steps D to E.

G Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
H When you finish specifying page location, press [OK] twice.
I Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Designation Sheet Copy

You can copy designated pages onto slip sheets.
A Set the tray for the slip sheets.


136
Copier Functions
D Press [Designation Sheet Copy].
E Enter the sheet number of the first original using the number keys, and
then press the {q} key.
F Press [Page to Page].

G Enter the sheet number of the last original using the number keys.
H Select the tray for designate sheet are set, and then press the {q} key.
I To specify another page location, repeat step E to H.
J Select the tray for main sheets.
K After all settings, press [OK] twice.
L Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ When this function is combined with the 2 Sided function, the first page of
the designated pages is copied on the front side of a slip sheet.
❒ You can specify up to 100 locations.
Reference
137
Copying
Blank Slip Sheets

You can insert a blank slip sheet before or after a specified page.
A Set the tray for the blank slip sheet.


D Press [Insert Sheet].
E Press the key to select the chapter number.
F Select the paper tray for slip sheets.
G Select [Before] to insert slip sheets before the desired page. Select [After] to
insert slip sheets after the desired page. Enter the page number with the
number keys.
H Press [Number of Sheets], and use the number keys to enter the number of
sheets you wish to insert.
I To specify another location where to insert sheets, repeat steps E to H.

J Select the paper tray containing the paper to copy the originals onto.
138
K When you have finished specifying all settings, press [OK] twice.
Copier Functions
L Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Reference
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Slip Sheets
Every time an original page changes, a slip sheet is inserted. This function can 2
be used to automatically insert a slip sheet between OHP transparencies, or as a
stacking function.
You can also copy onto slip sheets.
Important
❒ If [1 Sided→2 Sided] is set, change it to [1 Sided→1 Sided].
❖ When placing OHP transparencies in the multi bypass tray

• Copy
• Blank
139
Copying
A Set the tray for the slip sheet.

C Select [Copy] or [Blank], and then press [OK].

D Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
When using OHP transparencies, open the multi bypass tray.

Note
❒ When loading OHP transparencies, press the {q} key and then select
[OHP (Transparency)] in the special paper settings.
Reference
p.34 “When copying onto OHP Transparencies”
140
Copier Functions
Copy Face Up
When using this function, copies are delivered in the reverse order from the
originals.
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided
ANO060S
• 2 Sided → 2 Sided
ANO061S

B Press [Output/ Cstmz.].
C Press [Reverse Ejection].
D Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
141
Copying
Storing Originals in the Document Server

Using the Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the
copy feature on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print them later ap-
plying necessary conditions.
Important
2 ❒ Machine failure can result in data loss. Important data stored on the hard disk
should be backed up. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any dam-
age that might result from loss of data.
A Press [Store File].
B Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.
C Press [OK].
D Place your originals.
142
Storing Originals in the Document Server
E Make scanning settings for the original.

Copies are delivered and scanned data is stored in the hard disk.
Note
❒ When interrupting the scan, press the {Stop} key. Pressing [Continue] from
the confirmation screen resumes the scan. Pressing [Stop] deletes the
scanned images and the original on the automatic document feeder (ADF)
will be ejected.
❒ When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
❒ According to the factory default, the documents stored on the Document
Server are deleted three days (72 hours) after the storing date. You can can-
cel the automatic document deletion or select other period than three days
for the automatic deletion. For more information about changing settings,
see “Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
❒ To check if a document has been stored, press the {Document Server} key to
display the document selection screen.
❒ If you want to store another document, do so after copying is complete.
❒ For further information about the Document Server, see “Document Server”.
❒ For details about printing stored documents, see “Printing a Stored Document”.
❒ For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see “Storing
Data”.
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Access Privileges] is displayed instead
of [User Name].
❒ For details about procedure for setting [Access Privileges], ask the administrator.
Reference
p.174 “Using the Document Server”
p.184 “Printing a Stored Document”
p.174 “Storing Data”
“Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
143
Copying
Programs
You can store the frequently used copy job settings in the machine memory and
recall them for future use.
You can store up to 25 programs.
Note
2 ❒ Paper settings are stored based on paper size. So if you place more than one
paper tray of the same size, the paper tray prioritized with the Copier/Docu-
ment Server Features will be selected first. See “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
❒ Programs are not cleared by turning the power off or by pressing the {Clear
Modes} key.
Reference
p.147 “Programming Defaults in Initial Display”
Storing a Program
Stores a program.
A Edit the copy settings.

B Press the {Program} key.
APG051S
C Press [Program].
144
Programs
D Press the program number you want to store.

E Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 40 characters.
F Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by
the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
❒ Program numbers with m against them already have settings made for them.
Changing a Stored Program

Changes program settings.
A Check the program settings.

B Set the contents of a program.
C Press the {Program} key.
D Press [Program].
E Press the program number you want to store.
F Press [Yes].
G Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 40 characters.
H Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by
the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
❒ When you want to check the contents of a program, recall the program.
❒ When it is overwritten, the previous program is deleted.
145
Copying
Deleting a Program
Erases the contents of program.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Delete].
2
C Press the program number you want to delete.

D Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the screen returns to the copy screen.
Recalling a Program
Recalls a stored program and copies its contents.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Recall].
C Press the program number you want to recall.

The stored settings are displayed.

Note
❒ Only programs with m against them contain a program in step C.
146
Programs
Programming Defaults in Initial Display

This section describes how to program defaults for the initial display when
modes are cleared or reset, or immediately after the operation switch is turned.
The default settings you can program are Paper Tray, Original Type, Density,
Special Original, Original Orientation, Cover/Slip Sheet, Dup./Combine/Se-
ries, Reduce / Enlarge, Finishing.
2
A Specify scan settings and any other settings you require in the initial display.
B Press the {Program} key.
C Press [Program as Defaults].
D Press [Program].
E Press [Yes].
The current settings are programmed as defaults. The screen returns to the
initial display.
Note
❒ To restore the factory default settings on the initial display, press [Restore
Factory Defaults].
❒ The default settings can be programmed separately for the normal screen
and simplified screens.
147
Copying
148
3. Connect Copy
This section explains how to make copies using two machines connected via the
Copy Connector (optional).
What is Connect Copy?

Connect Copy allows you to connect two machines together via a cable. When
you set up a copy job on one machine (the main machine), data is transferred to
the other (the sub-machine) so copies can be made on both simultaneously.
❖ High-speed copying for greater productivity

Large volume copy runs can be completed in shorter time. For instance, when
two 135 copies/minute machines are connected together, a speed of 270 cop-
ies/ minute can be achieved (paper size of A4K, 81/2" × 11"K).
❖ Reducing time loss

Even if one machine stops due to a paper jam, or runs out of toner or paper,
the other machine can automatically take over and finish the job.
APF033S
149
Connect Copy
How It Works
After the original is scanned, the data is stored on the hard disk of the main ma-
chine. As soon as the main machine starts copying, the data is transferred to the
hard disk of the sub-machine, and the sub-machine then starts copying.
In this manual, the two machines connected are referred to as main machine and
sub-machine.
APG024S
A Main machine
B Sub-machine
The main machine is the one on which you press [Connect Copy] to make Connect
Copy settings. The other machine becomes the sub-machine.
Machine Types and Options

• Both machines need not be of the same type.
• You can still use Connect Copy without an optional finisher or Large Capac-
ity Tray (LCT). However, to use the Staple and Punch functions, the optional
Finisher SR5000 and punch unit must be installed on both machines. To select
[Staple: Center], the optional Booklet Finisher BK5000 must be installed on
both machines. To use the Z-fold function, the optional Z-folding unit and
Booklet Finisher BK5000 must be installed on both machines.
Interrupt Copy
• You can use the Interrupt function on the sub-machine, but not on the main
machine.
• You cannot use Connect Copy when a job has been paused using the Inter-
rupt function.
150
What is Connect Copy?
Before You Start

Both machines must have paper trays loaded with paper of the same size, type
and orientation.
To ensure the same copy results from both machines,
• Copy Quality settings in the User Tools should be the same on each machine.
• Both main and sub machines should be installed with the same type of finish-
er.
Reference
“Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings Guide 3
151
Connect Copy
Connect Copy Display Panel

The display panel shows machine status, error messages and function menus.
❖ Initial copy display
APG065S
1. [Connect Copy] 4. Number of sets

Press to switch from the initial copy dis- Displays the number of sets of copies.
play to the Connect Copy display.
5. Number of copies
2. Paper Select Display the number of copies for the main
Displays the size, type and orientation of machine.
the paper set on both machines. Press this part of the display to display the
3. Numbers of originals total number of copies for two machines.
Displays the number of originals scanned
into memory of the main machine.
Note
❒ The connect copy function is not available from the simplified display.
152
Connect Copy Display Panel
❖ Display during Connect Copy
APG066S
1. Sub-machine status appears on the

second line of main machine's display.
153
Connect Copy
Display panel of the sub-machine

Even if Connect Copy has been selected on the main machine, the sub-machine
will still continue to show the initial copy display. To switch to the Connect
Copy initial display, follow the procedure below.
A Press the {Other Function} key.
APG054S
B The Connect Copy initial display is shown on the sub-machine.
154
Using Connect Copy
Using Connect Copy

You can select Connect Copy from either machine by pressing [Connect Copy].
The machine on which you pressed [Connect Copy] and made Connect Copy set-
tings becomes the main machine, and the other the sub-machine.
Important
❒ When user authentication is set, use the number keys to enter a user code (up
to 8 digits) that is registered on the main machine, and then press the {q}
key. For details, see “Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentica- 3
tion, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter a login user name and
the login password. For the login user name and the login password, contact
your Administrator. For details, see “When the Authentication Screen is Dis-
played”, About this Machine.
❒ In Connect Copy mode, use the main machine to perform this function. See
“Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings Guide.
A Make sure [Connect Copy] is shown on the display.
155
Connect Copy
B Press [Connect Copy] on the machine that you want to use as the main.
[Connect Copy] becomes highlighted, and the two machines are connected.
• Main machine
• Sub-machine
C Set the originals on the main machine.

D Make the necessary settings using the main machine.
If you have made any copy settings before using Connect Copy, the settings
remain effective. However, if optional finishers are not installed on both main
and sub machines, the Stack, Staple, Punch and Z-fold functions are automat-
ically disabled.
E Enter the required number of copies using the number keys.

When the number of originals or copies is small, copying will be done on only
the main machine.
F Press the {Start} key on the main machine.

When placing originals page by page on the exposure glass, press the {q}
key after you have finished scanning all the originals.
When placing multiple originals in the ADF, wait till an original has been fed
before placing the next.
Copying starts if the main machine is not in use. The sub-machine starts copy-
ing after data transfer from the main machine is completed.
156
Using Connect Copy
G Collect your copies from both the main and sub machines.
Note
❒ If you cancel Connect Copy mode, press [Connect Copy], which is highlight-
ed on the main machine.
❒ The number of copies might differ on the main and sub machines.
❒ Both machines may not finish copying at the same time.
❒ When using the Sort/Staple function, copying is divided between the two
machines by the number of sets. If a paper misfeed occurs when processing
a set of copes, it is not possible for the other machine to take over the re-
mainder of that particular set. 3
❒ To interrupt ADF scanning, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and
then select [Stop] in response to the message that appears.
❒ To stop copying, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then select
[Stop] in response to the message that appears.
❒ If the memory required to store originals exceeds the memory limit, an er-
ror message appears. For details, see “When You Cannot Make Copies As
Wanted”, Troubleshooting.
Reference
p.21 “Batch mode”
“When the Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About this Machine
“When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted”, Troubleshooting
157
Connect Copy
Order of Copy Output

❖ When copying with the Sort/Staple function
(Example) Copying 6 sets of a three-page original
APG028S
A Main machine
B Sub-machine
Copies are delivered face-down on both the main and sub machines.
When using the Sort/Staple function, the processing of one copy set cannot
be divided between the two machines.
❖ When copying with the Stack function

(Example) Making 2 copies of each page of a six-page original
APG029S
A Main machine
B Sub-machine
Copies are delivered face-down on both the main and sub machines.
Copies are delivered as shown in the above illustration.
158
Using Connect Copy
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy

The machine exits Connect Copy mode automatically and returns to the initial
condition after a certain period of time has lapsed after job completion. This is
called “Auto Reset”.
Note
❒ When the Auto Reset time of the sub-machine lapses when it is processing an
Interrupt Copy job, the sub-machine will return to its original position and
the Interrupt Copy job will be cancelled.
Reference 3
Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself after a certain period of time has lapsed
after job completion. This is called “Auto Off”. In Connect Copy mode, the sub-
machine will not turn off automatically.
Reference
Exiting Connect Copy

This section explains how to cancel Connect Copy mode and return to standard
copying mode.
A Press [Connect Copy] on the main machine.

The machine returns to standard copying mode.
Note
❒ Settings made on the main machine during Connect Copy mode remain effective.
❒ If you press the {Clear Modes} key on the main machine, Connect Copy
mode is cancelled and the main machine returns to its initial condition.
159
Connect Copy
Copying Stored Documents Using Connect Print

You can print a document stored in the Document Server using the Connect
Print function.
Note
❒ The main machine is the one on which the document is stored.

B Select the document to be printed.
3 The selected document is highlighted.
C Repeat step if you want to select more documents.

The documents will be printed in the order that they have been selected.
D If you need to change the print settings, press [To Printing Screen].
If you do not need to change any settings, proceed to step E.
E Press [Connect Print].

The key is highlighted and the two machines are connected.
F Enter the required number of copies using the number keys.

G Press the {Start} key.

160
Using Connect Copy
Note
❒ Some documents may not be displayed, depending on the security func-
tion settings.
❒ To change the printing order, press the highlighted documents to cancel
your selection. Select again in the desired order.
❒ You can also cancel all your selections by pressing the {Clear Modes} key.
❒ To register new print conditions or numbers of copies in step D, press [Save
Print Settings].
❒ If you are selecting multiple files, you can check the file names and print-
ing order by pressing [T] and [U] to scroll through the list.
3
❒ Press [Select File] to return to the Select Files to Print display.
❒ If you have entered a wrong value, press the {Stop} key and enter again.
❒ When using the Sort function, you can check the print results by making a
sample copy on the main machine. See “Sample copy”.
❒ Sample copies can be made on the main machine only.
❒ The main machine begins printing from the document stored in the Docu-
ment Server. Printing on the sub-machine starts when the document is
transferred from the main machine.
❒ To stop the printing, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then
follow the instructions on the display.
❒ The number of copies might differ on the main and sub machines.
❒ Both machines may not finish printing at the same time.
Reference
p.65 “Sample copy”
161
Connect Copy
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy

You can make settings for the next Connect Copy job when the current job is still
in progress on the main machine. When the current job finishes, the next job be-
gins automatically.
A On the main machine, confirm that “Press [New Job] to make reserva-
tion.” is displayed, and then press [New Job].
B Confirm that “Ready” is displayed, and then press [Connect Copy].
C Place the originals in the main machine.

D Confirm that “Ready” is displayed, and then make settings for the job.
162
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy
E Press the {Start} key on the main machine.

Press the {q} key when you have finished scanning all the originals.
When placing multiple originals in the ADF, wait till the first original has
been fed before placing the next.
Scanning begins. As soon as the current job is finished, the next job starts au-
tomatically.
Note
❒ You can preset a maximum of 10 jobs.
❒ Preset jobs in Connect Copy mode can only be changed when the main ma-
chine has finished scanning the originals. 3
❒ Preset jobs in Connect Copy mode can only be changed when copying has
yet to begin on either machine.
Reference
p.35 “Job Preset”
163
Connect Copy
Connect Copy Job Flow

The job flow depends on the status of the two machines.
When One of the Two Machines is Idle

One of the machines is copying Original A.
APF037S
164
Using the idle machine as the main machine (Connect Copy)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original B on machine <2> (the idle machine).
3
APG030S
B Machine <2> begins copying Original B. Machine <1> also starts copying
Original B when it has finished with Original A.
APG031S
A Sub-machine
B Main machine
165
Connect Copy
Using the machine currently copying as the main machine (Connect Copy: Job Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original B on machine <1> (the machine
currently in use).
APG032S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, Connect Copy is activat-
ed and both machines begin copying Original B.
APG033S
A Sub-machine
B Main machine
When Both Machines are in Use

One machine is copying Original A and the other Original B.
APF042S
166
When both machines are copying the same number of originals (Connect Copy: Job
Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original C on machine <1> .
APG034S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, it begins copying Origi-
nal C.
APG035S
C When machine <2> has finished with Original B, it also begins copying
Original C.
APG036S
A Sub-machine
B Main machine
167
Connect Copy
When one machines is copying a larger number of originals (Connect Copy: Job
Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original C on machine <1> .
APG037S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, it begins copying Origi-
nal C. If machine <1> finishes copying it allotment of Original C before
machine <2> finishes with Original B, machine <1> will take over to copy
the remainder of Original C.
APG038S
A Sub-machine
B Main machine
168
4. Document Server
Using the Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the
copy feature on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print them later ap-
plying necessary conditions.
Relationship between Document Server

and Other Functions
State of the Document Server varies depending on the function used.
❖ Copier Functions
• Storing method: Copy/Document Server
• List display: Available
• Printing: Available
• Transmission: Unavailable
❖ Printer Functions
• Storing method: Personal computer
• List display: Available
• Printing: Available
• Transmission: Unavailable
❖ Scanner Functions
• Storing method: Scanner
• List display: Unavailable
When documents are stored with the scanner feature, you can confirm
them from the scanner feature screen. See “Displaying the List of Stored
Files”, Scanner Reference.
• Printing: Unavailable
• Transmission: Available
Transmission is done by use of the stored document transmission of the
scanner feature. See “Sending Stored Files”, Scanner Reference.
Reference
“Displaying the List of Stored Files”, “Sending Stored Files”, Scanner Refer-
ence
169
Document Server
Document Server Display

Following explains the screens and icons displayed in the Document Server
function.
❖ Document Server initial display
APG062S
1. The operational status or message 4. Keys for the operation are displayed.
is displayed.
5. An icon that corresponds to a
2. The currently selected screen's title stored function is displayed.
is displayed.
3. The number of the originals being
read with the memory as well as the
number of paper set and copied are
displayed.
The list display of the Document Server shows the following icons depending on
the stored function selected.
Function Copying Printer
Icons
Note
❒ All the stored documents may not be displayed depending on the security
function specified.
170
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
Simplified Display
APG044S
4
❖ Example of a simplified display
APG063S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and in-
crease the brightness of the display panel.
Note
171
Document Server
Preview Display
Following explains the preview display displaying procedure and the items dis-
played on this screen.
The Preview Display appears after scanning completes. You can also display
stored documents on the preview display. For details, see “Displaying the List
of Stored Files”, Scanner Reference.
The preview display denotes the screen that allows confirming contents of the
scanned documents.
❖ Preview Display
APG041S
1. [←][→][↑][↓] 5. Display Page

Used to move the portion to be displayed. Used to display the currently opened
page number, total number of pages, and
2. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In] page size.
Used to scale up or down the document
to be displayed. 6. [Switch]
Used to turn the page of the selected document.
3. [Exit]
Used to exit the preview display. 7. Display Position
When the image is enlarged, the position
4. Display File on the document is displayed.
Used to display the document name.
[Switch] is displayed on the preview
screen for the stored documents. It is
used to switch the document to be dis-
played in the preview.
172
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
Note
❒ When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview
screen function may become unusable.
❒ The preview display is also not available when the paper size is larger than
A3.
❒ If the image file is corrupt, store it again.
Reference
“Displaying the List of Stored Files”, Scanner Reference
173
Document Server
Using the Document Server

Following describes how to use the Document Server.
Storing Data
Following describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document
Server.
Important
❒ Data stored in the machine might be lost if some kind of failure occurs. The
manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from loss of
data.
4 ❒ Be careful not to let anyone know your password, especially when entering a
password or recording it. Keep any record of your password in a secure place.
❒ Avoid using a single number or consecutive numbers for a password such as
“0000” or “1234”, since the numbers like this are easy to guess, so using them
will not provide a worthwhile level of security.
❒ A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after op-
erations are complete, and it can be accessed by other users. To stop this, be
sure to press the {Clear Modes} key to cancel the document selection.
❒ The user name used when adding a document to the Document Server is to
identify the document creator and type. It is not to protect confidential docu-
ments from others.
❖ File Name
Stored documents are automatically named “COPY0001”, “COPY0002”. You
can change assigned file names.
❖ User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the
documents. To assign it, you can register the user name using the name as-
signed to the user code, or by entering the name directly.
❖ Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can set a password for any stored file.
A protected file can only be accessed if its password is entered. When a pass-
word is set for the documents, the lock icon appears next to the documents.
174
APG055S
B Press [Scan Original].

4
C Above operation sets up the user name, document name and password.
When not changing a document name, the name will be automatically set.
D Set the original.

E Specify the original scanning conditions.

The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
175
Document Server
Note
❒ Enter a four- to eight-digit password.
❒ By default, data stored in the Document Server is deleted after three days
(72 hours). You can specify the time taken for the stored data to be deleted
automatically. See “Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
❒ If you do not want stored data to be automatically deleted, select [Off] in
Auto Delete File before storing a document. If you select [On] later, data
stored after will be automatically deleted.
❒ When the machine is printing a document stored using the copier function,
wait until printing has finished before you store a document in the Docu-
ment Server.
❒ To stop scanning, press the {Clear/Stop} key. To restart a paused scanning
job, press [Continue] in the confirmation display. To delete saved images
4 and cancel the job, press [Stop].
❒ When a password is set, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file
name.
❒ After scanning, stored documents appear on the Select Files to Print dis-
play. If this display does not appear, press [Scanning Complete].
❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass, press [Scanning Complete]
after all the originals have been scanned.
Reference
To register or change a user name (When using a user name registered to the Address
Book)
Following describes the procedure for registering or changing a user name to be
attached to a stored document.
A Display the original scan screen.

B Press [User Name].
The user name input screen will appear
C Select the user name and then press [OK].

176
To register or change a user name (When using a user name not registered to the
Address Book)

C Select the user name and then press [Manual Entry].
The user name change screen will appear.
D Enter the user name and then press [OK].
177
Document Server
To register or change a user name (When no name is registered to the Address Book)

The user name input screen will appear.
C Enter the user name and then press [OK].

To change a file name
Following describes the procedure for changing a name to be attached to a
stored document.

B Press [File Name].
The document name change screen will appear.
C Press [Delete All] to delete the document name to be automatically set.

D Enter the document name and then press [OK].
178
Note
❒ In step C, pressing [Backspace] allows you to delete up to any desired location.
❒ You can enter up to 20 characters for a document name. In the list, however,
up to 16 characters are displayed as the document name. If above limits are
exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters for the document name.
To set or change a Password

Following describes the procedure for setting or changing a password to be at-
tached to a stored document.

B Press [Password].
4
C Enter the password from the number keys and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for specifying the password.
D For double-check, enter the password again and then press [OK].
179
Document Server
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored

Document
Following describes the procedure for changing a user name, document name or
password.

B Select the document whose user name, document name or password is to
be changed.
When a password is set, enter it and then press [OK].

D Press [Change User Name], [Change File Name] or [Change Password].
E From the respective change screens, enter the new user name, document
name or password and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Change Access Priv.] is displayed in-
stead of [Change User Name].
❒ For details about procedure for setting [Change Access Priv.], ask the administrator.
180
Checking the Details of a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for displaying details of a stored document.

B Select the document whose details are to be displayed.
C Press [Details].
Details of the document will be displayed.
Note
❒ When you have selected two or more documents, you can view the infor-
mation of the documents in the order of [U][T].
❒ Pressing [Exit] restores the document selection screen.
181
Document Server
Searching for a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from user
name or document name.
You can rearrange the currently chronologically ordered documents in any de-
sired order.
❖ To search by file name

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from the
document name.
❖ To search by user name

user name.
4
Note
❒ Installing Ridoc Desk Navigator enables search and reordering of stored doc-
uments from PC.
❒ For more information about Ridoc Desk Navigator, see Instruction Manual
and Help of Ridoc Desk Navigator.
To search by file name

document name.

B Press [File Name].
C Enter the document name to be searched and then press [OK].

A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
❒ Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
182
To search by user name

user name.

C When specifying a registered user name, select the user name and then
press [OK].
When using a not-registered user name, proceed to the next step.
D When the user name is not registered, press [Manual Entry] and then enter the
user name to be displayed from the input screen. Then press [OK].
E Press [OK].
A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
❒ Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
183
Document Server
Printing a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for printing a stored document.
Using Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Docu-
ment Server from your PC.

B Select the document to be printed.
C When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat the operation in B.

Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4 D When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen].
The printing condition screen will appear. User name of the document, doc-
ument name and the order of printing of this document will be displayed.
E Enter the number of print copies from the number keys.
Up to 9999 copies are specifiable.

Printing will be started.
184
Note
❒ You can search the target document using, in step B, [User Name] or [File
Name] situated in the left side of the screen.
❒ Some of the selected document may not be printed due to the difference in
the size or resolution.
❒ When changing the printing order, cancel the highlight and then specify
the order correctly.
❒ Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
❒ The copy and printer features holds the specified printing conditions after
the operation is over and applies them at the next printing.
❒ When two or more documents are specified, the printing conditions are
stored on the first document but not on the succeeding documents.
❒ Following settings are available for the printing conditions. For respective 4
printing results, see “Copier Functions”.
• Book binding style (2 Sided Top to Top, 2 Sided Top to Bottom, Maga-
zine, Booklet)
• Treatment of front cover (Cover/Slip Sheet, Edit / Stamp)
• Finish (Sort, Rotate Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch)
❒ When printing two or more copies while selecting the sort function, you
can confirm the finish by printing only one copy.
❒ When printing two or more documents at a time, you can print them as a
single continuous document by specifying the order of their printing.
❒ When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions
set for the first document are applied to all the remaining documents.
❒ When two or more documents are selected, pressing [U][T] allows you to
confirm the user name, document name and printing order of the docu-
ment selected in step B.
❒ Pressing [File List] restores the document selection screen.
Reference
p.49 “Copier Functions”
When Interrupting Printing

Following describes the procedure for interrupting printing work.
A Press the {Stop} key

B Press [Suspend].
185
Document Server
Changing Number of Print Copies while Printing is in Progress

Following describes the procedure for changing the number of print copies after
printing is stared.
Important
❒ This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing con-
ditions.
A Press the {Stop} key.

B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of print copies anew from the number keys.
4 D Press the {q} key.
E Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.
Note
❒ The range of print copies enterable in step C depends on the timing of your
pressing the {Stop} key.
Sample Print
When print copies are massive, you can print a single copy in advance to check
appropriateness of the printing order of the selected documents and the printing
conditions.
Important
❒ This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
A Select the document to be printed.
B Press [To Printing Screen].

C Press the {Sample Copy} key.
186 Only one copy will be printed.
D Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.
Note
❒ You can search the target document using, in step A, [User Name] or [File
❒ In the display order field of step A, you can sort the documents by [User
Name], [File Name], [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
❒ To cancel the selection in step A, press the highlighted document again.
❒ To cancel the printing, press [Suspend]. The print screen will appear, en-
abling to set another item.
Printing the First Page

4
In order to confirm the print results, you can print the first page alone of the doc-
ument selected from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the respective doc-
uments is printed.
A Select the document to be printed (confirmed).

B Press [Print Specified Page].

C Press [1st Page].

Note
Name] situated in the upper left side of the screen.
187
Document Server
Printing a Specified Page

You can print the specified page alone of the document selected from the docu-
ment selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the specified page of the respective
documents is printed.


C Press [Specified Page].
4
D Specify the page to be printed from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
E Press the {Start} key.

Note
Printing a Specified Range

You can print the pages in the specified range alone of the document selected
from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, pages in the specified range of the
respective documents is printed.


188
C Press [Specify Range].
D Specify the printing start page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
4
E Specify the printing end page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.

Note
Name] situated in the upper left side of the screen.
Edit File
You can edit documents stored in the Document Server.
Combining Files
You can combine two or more files stored in the Document Server.
Important
❒ You cannot recover the original files from the new file.
❒ You cannot combine files if they are currently being used by another function.

B Select documents you want to combine.
If a password has been set for the document, enter it, and then press [OK].
The files are combined in the order of being selected.

D Press [Combine Files].
189
Document Server
E Enter the new file name.

F Press [OK].
Note
❒ You can combine up to 30 files.
❒ The print settings for the file selected first are stored.
❒ If you do not set the file name in step E, the name of the file selected first
will be the name of the combined file.
Inserting Documents
You can insert a file into files already stored in the Document Server.
4 Important
❒ You cannot recover the original file from the new file.
❒ You cannot insert files into a file that is currently being used by another function.

B Select the document to be inserted in.

D Press [Insert File].
E Select the document you want to insert into.
F Enter the page number to insert the file using the number keys.
G Press [Before Specify Page] or [After Specify Page].
H Press [OK].
Deleting Pages
Follow the procedure below to delete pages from a file stored in the Document
Server.
Important
❒ To check the page numbers, print the file.

B Select the document containing the pages you want to delete.

190
D Press [Delete Pages].

E Enter the number of the page you want to delete using the number keys.
F If you want to delete a series of pages, press [Page to Page], and then enter
the number of the last page you want to delete.
G Press [OK].
H Press [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
Note
❒ If you want to delete only one page in step F, proceed to step G.
❒ If you enter every page in step F, the whole file is deleted.
Copying Documents
4
You can copy documents that are stored in the Document Server.
Important
❒ You cannot copy a selected document that is currently being used by another
function.

B Select the document you want to copy.

D Press [Duplicate File].
E Press [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
Note
❒ If you select [No] in step E, the selected document is not copied.
❒ If you press [Stop Duplicating] while copying, the selected document is not
copied. However, if you select multiple documents, some of them might be
copied.
❒ The “~” mark is added to the beginning of the copied document's name.
191
Document Server
Print Backup
You can store registered documents to an external device.
Important
❒ You must prepare the extended data conversion board.
❒ You cannot copy a selected document that is currently being used by another
function.

B Select the document you want to copy.
4 C Press [Edit File].

D Press [Print Backup].
E Press [Yes].
You can select the file format, resolution, and the recipient's name.
F Press [OK].
Note
❒ You can specify the default setting under [Print Backup: Default User Name],
[Print Backup: Default Format], and [Print Backup: Default Resolution] using Ad-
ministrator Tools for System Settings.
❒ If you select [PDF (Single Page)] or [PDF (Multi-page)], you can make encoding
and privilege settings under [Security Settings].
❒ You can specify the recipient's name under [Print Backup: Default User Name]
using Administrator Tools for the System Settings.
Deleting a Document
Following describes the procedure for deleting a stored document.
Important
❒ The Document Server can store up to 3000 documents. As the number of
stored documents reaches 3000, storing of a new document becomes unavail-
able. Thus, you should delete unnecessary documents as much as practicable.

B Select the document to be deleted.
192
C Press [Delete File].
D Press [Yes].
Note 4
❒ You can delete the stored documents at a time. See “Administrator Tools”,
❒ Using Web Image Monitor allows you to delete a document stored in the
Document Server from your PC.
❒ It is also possible to select two or more documents and delete them.
❒ You can search the target document using [File Name] or [User Name] situat-
ed in the left side of the screen.
❒ In the display order field, you can sort the documents by [User Name], [File
Name], [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
❒ When you could not identify the target document from the document
name, print the first page alone of the document in order to confirm the
print results.
❒ To cancel your selection, press the highlighted document again.
❒ For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, see “Displaying a Docu-
ment in Document Server with Web Image Monitor”.
Reference
p.193 “Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Mon-
itor”
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image

Monitor
Following describes the procedure for confirming contents of a stored document
on the PC screen by use of Web Image Monitor.
A Start Web browser.

B Enter “http:// (IPv4 address of this machine) /” to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
193
Document Server
C Click [Document Server].

The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.
D Click of the document you want to confirm.

Information of the document will be displayed.
E Confirm contents of the document.

Note
❒ You can change the document list display format in step C. Click
(Thumbnails), (Icons), or (Details) for the display format.
❒ When you want to enlarge the preview display in step E, click [Enlarge Image].
4 Downloading Stored Documents

Following describes the procedure for downloading a stored document to the
PC by use of Web Image Monitor.
Important
❒ When downloading a document stored with the copy feature, you must pre-
pare the extended data conversion board.
A Start Web browser.

B Enter “http://(IPv4 address of this machine)/” to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
C Click [Document Server].

List of the documents will be displayed.
D Click of the document you want to download.

E Select [PDF], [JPEG], or [Multi-page TIFF] for the file format.
F Click [OK].
G Click [OK] in the confirmation window.
Note
❒ You can change the document list display format in step D. Click
(Thumbnails), (Icons), or (Details) for the display format.
❒ In step E, you cannot select [JPEG] for a document being stored with the
scanner.
❒ In step E, you cannot select [Multi-page TIFF] for a document being stored
with the copy or printer.
❒ When downloading a document with [Multi-page TIFF] in step E, you must
prepare a Printer/Scanner Unit and File Format Convertor.
194
5. Appendix
Following describes the copy machine's specifications and the function compat-
ibility.
Function Compatibility
A given combination of the copy features may or may not be available depend-
ing on the order of its setup.
Blank space: Combination available
×: Combination unavailable (Precedence is given to the function selected earlier)
•: Combination unavailable (Precedence is given to the function selected later)
Following lists the combinations of functions.
APG069S
195
Appendix
The following combinations are not possible:

*1 Front/Back Cover with 2 Sided → 1 Sided
*2
Back Cover with Auto Paper Select, except in the printing condition screen in Docu-
ment Server.
*3
Designate/Chapter with 2 Sided → 1 Sided
*4 Combine with Designate/Chapter with Document Server
*5
Slip Sheets with Book → 2 Sided
*6
Document Server with Front&Back → 2 Sided
*7 Left of Punch with Right/Top/Center of Staple
Top of Punch with Bottom/Slant/Center/Top 2/ Left 2 of Staple
Right of Punch with Left/Top/Center of Staple
*8 Right Z-fold with Right/Top/Center of Staple
Bottom Z-fold with Bottom/Left 2/Top 2/Center/Slant of Staple
196
Supplementary Information
Following describes the detailed specifications of the respective functions.
❖ Mixed Size Mode

• Since small originals may not be correctly aligned with the original guide,
the copy image may be slanted.
• You can place originals of two different sizes at a time.
• Copying speed and scanning speed will be reduced.
❖ Multi Bypass Tray Copy

• Following paper sizes can be selected as the standard sizes:
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, A6L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, B6 JISL, 12" × 18"L,
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/4" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL,
71/4" × 101/2"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 11" × 15"L,
10" × 14"L, 8" × 10"L
5
❖ Preset Enlarge/Reduce
• You can select one of 12 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ratios).
• Following shows the relation between the original's size and copied-to pa-
per size at respective scaling factors.
• Metric version
400% (Area ratio 16 times):-
200% (Area ratio 4 times): A5 → A3, A6 → A4, B6 JIS → B4 JIS
141% (Area ratio 2 times): A4 → A3, A5 → A4, A6 → A5, B5 JIS → B4 JIS,
B6 JIS → B5 JIS
122%: F → A3, A4 → B4 JIS
115%: B4 JIS → A3
93%:-
82%: F → A4, B4 JIS → A4
75%: B4 JIS→F4, B4 JIS→F
71% (Area ratio 1/2times): A3 → A4, A4 → A5
65%: A3→F
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): A3 → A5, F → A5
25%:-
197
Appendix
• Inch version
400% (Area ratio 16 times): -
200% (Area ratio 4 times): 51/2" × 81/2"→11" × 17"
155% (Area ratio 2 times): 51/2" × 81/2"→81/2" × 14"
129%: 81/2" × 11"→11" × 17"
121%: 81/2" × 14"→11" × 17"
93%: -
85%: F→81/2" × 11"
78%: 81/2" × 14"→81/2" × 11"
73%: 11" × 15"→81/2" × 11"
65%: 11" × 17"→81/2" × 11"
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): 11" × 17"→51/2" × 81/2"
25%: -
❖ Zoom
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 - 400%.
• You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
5 With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear on copies.
❖ Auto Reduce/Enlarge
❖ Size Magnification
❖ Directional Size Magnification

• When entering a percentage ratio, you can specify any value in the permit-
ted range, regardless of original or copy paper size. However, depending
on settings and other conditions, part of the image may not be copied, or
margins will appear on copies.
• When entering a size in mm, if the calculated ratio is over maximum or un-
der minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range.
However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or mar-
gins will appear on copies.
❖ Sort, Stack
• Following shows the stackable paper sizes and the orientation.
Finisher SR5000:
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18", 13" × 19"
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Rotate Sort function are
A4KL, B5 JISKL and 81/2" × 11"KL.
• Following numbers of copied paper are stackable on the output tray. If the
number of copied paper exceeded the limits listed in the following table,
be sure to remove the copied paper once.
198
❖ Sort
The following table shows you the numbers of copies that the tray can hold.
Remove copies from the tray when the maximum is exceeded.
• Finisher SR5000 (upper tray)
Paper size Number of copies
A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller 500 sheets
B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger 250 sheets
• Finisher SR5000 (shift tray)

Paper size and orientation Number of copies
A4K, B5 JISK, 81/2" × 11"K 3000 sheets
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 1500 sheets
81/2" × 11"L
12" × 18", 13" × 19" 1000 sheets
A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K 500 sheets 5
A5L, 51/2" × 81/2"L 100 sheets
• Paper weight is 80 g/m2 (20 lb.).

• When using the Rotate Sort or Staple functions, the capacity may be reduced.
❖ Staple
• The following types of paper cannot be stapled:
• Postcard
• Translucent paper
• OHP transparencies
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• Curled paper
• Paper of low stiffness
• Paper of mixed sizes
• In the following cases, copies will be delivered to the shift tray without sta-
pling:
• When the number of sheets for one set is over stapler capacity.
• When memory reaches 0% during copying.
• When using Double Copies, or [1 Sided→1 Sided], [1 Sided→2 Sided], [2
Sided→1 Sided] or [2 Sided→2 Sided]in Combine mode, select K original for
L and L original for K copy.
• When using the Staple function [Staple: Left 2] or [Staple: Top 2] with the
Combine function [1 Sided→1 Sided], [1 Sided→2 Sided], [2 Sided→1 Sided], [2
Sided→2 Sided], or [Double Copies], select K paper for L original and L pa-
per for K original.
199
Appendix
• If you use the Auto Paper Select function in Mixed Size mode, the machine
selects the proper size of paper and staples it even if you place different siz-
es of originals. Set the size of paper you want to use in the paper tray be-
forehand. The sizes of the paper you can staple in Mixed Size mode are as
follows:
• A3L and A4K
• B4 JISL and B5 JISK
• A4L and A5K
• 11" × 17"L and 81/2" × 11"K
• 81/2" × 11"L and 51/2" × 81/2"K
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Staple function and the
stapler capacity are as follows:
Finisher SR5000
Paper sizes and orientation Stapler capacity (sheets)
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L 50 sheets
5 A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" × 11"KL 100 sheets
Booklet Finisher BK5000

Paper sizes and orientation Stapler capacity (sheets)
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, 12" × 18", 11" × 17"L, 15 sheets
81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L
• When stapling B4 JISL, A3L, Legal 81/2" × 14"L, 11" × 17"L, be sure to
extend the paper support plate of the finisher tray.
• When the number of copies exceeds tray capacity, copying stops. If this
happens, remove copies from the tray, and then resume copying. The tray
capacity for the stapled sheets is as follows (paper weight: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
Finisher shift tray without Z-folding
Paper sizes and orientation Number of sheets
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L 2- to 9-leaf binding: 150
10- to 50-leaf binding:
150 to 30
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" × 11"KL 2- to 9-leaf binding: 150
10- to 100-leaf binding:
200 to 30
• You cannot change stapling positions during copying.

• When the original image is rotated, the staple orientation changes by 90°.
• When using [Staple: Slant], [Staple: Left 2], [Staple: Top 2] with Combine, Dou-
ble copies or Auto Reduce / Enlarge function, the message “Blank part
will appear. Check orientation.” may appear depending on the ori-
entation of originals and paper you placed. In this case, change the paper
orientation.
200 • With certain stapling settings, you cannot use the Rotate function.
• When [Staple: Center] is selected, copies are stapled using the saddle stitch
stapler, folded in half and then delivered.
• When [Staple: Center] is selected with the Booklet or Magazine function,
copies are stapled using the saddle stitch stapler, folded like a magazine
and then delivered.
❖ Punch
• With certain Punch function settings, the Rotate function cannot be used.
• Since punch holes are made in each copy, positions vary slightly.
• Punchable paper sizes are as follows:
Punch unit type Direction Paper size
2 holes type L A3-A6, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
3 holes type L A3, B4 JIS, 11" × 17"
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2" × 11"
K
5
❖ Z-fold
• You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
• Special paper
• Letterhead
• Thick paper
• Tab stock
• Postcards
• Paper sizes that can be Z-folded are as follows:
• Finisher upper tray/ shift tray
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L
• The number of Z-folded copies that can be stacked on the finisher trays are
as follows. When the number of copies exceeds capacity, remove them
from the trays.
• Finisher upper tray/Finisher shift tray: 30 sheets
• The paper sizes that can be stapled after being Z-folded are A3L, B4 JISL
and 11" × 17"L.
201
Appendix
• Even if you place different size originals in the ADF, appropriate size of
copy paper can be automatically selected and stapled using the Mixed Size
mode and Auto Paper Select function. Load the paper you want to use in
the paper trays beforehand. Paper sizes that can be stapled when using the
Mixed Size mode are as follows:
• A3L and A4K
• B4 JISL and B5 JISK
• 11" × 17"L and 81/2" × 11"K
ACC013S
• Depending on the Z-fold settings, you may not be able to use Rotate Sort.
• Even if you have selected [Face Up] for Eject Copy Face up/Down in Glass
5 Mode, the copies will be delivered face down.
❖ Duplex
• Following types of paper sizes and directions allow the double-side copy.
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL
• You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
• Paper of a size smaller than A5, 51/2" × 81/2"
• Paper thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb.
• Paper thinner than 64 g/m2, 17 lb.
• Postcards
• Tab stock
• When an odd number of originals is placed in the ADF, the back of the last
page of copied paper is blank.
• During copying, the image is shifted to allow for the binding margin.
• Front and back image quality of copies may differ.
202
❖ Combine
• In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically.
This reproduction ratio depends on copy paper sizes and the number of
originals.
• If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically ad-
justed to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
• You cannot use custom size paper.
• If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.
• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for com-
bining, the last page segment is left blank as shown.
❖ Booklet/Magazine
• The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet the paper
size and copies the originals together onto the paper.
• If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically ad-
justed to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
• If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.
• You cannot copy with originals different in size and orientation.
• If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page
is copied blank.
• In Magazine mode, the copying may take some time after scanning originals.
• When the optional booklet finisher is installed, if you select [Staple: Center]
in Magazine mode, the machine staples and folds the paper in the center,
then delivers the paper folded.
❖ Image Repeat
• Depending on the paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated im-
ages may not be copied.
❖ Centering
• Though the original is set to a different orientation from the paper loaded,
the machine will not rotate the image by 90° (Rotate copy).
203
Appendix
❖ Erase
• The width of the erased margin varies depending on the reproduction ratio.
• If the size of the original is different from sizes listed in the following chart,
the erased margin might be shifted:
• Metric version
Exposure glass: A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5L
ADF: A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, A5KL
• Inch version
Exposure glass: 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
ADF: 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"L
• By combining “Erase Inside 1” - ”Erase Inside 5”, you can erase up to 5 ar-
eas at the same time.
❖ Background Numbering
• The numbers appear to overlap the copied image in some cases.
5 ❖ Margin Adjustment
• If you set a binding margin that is too wide, part of the image may not be
copied.
• When making copies in the Combine mode, the binding margin is added
to the copies after the combination is finished.
❖ Preset Stamp
• You can change the size and density of the stamp with User Tools. De-
pending on the setting, density may change.
• Depending on paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp
might not be printed.
• When you use this function with the Magazine or Booklet function, you
can print the stamp only on the first page.
❖ Date Stamp
• When using Combine mode, the date stamp is printed as follows:
• With the Combine function
AMG026S
• With the Magazine or Booklet function
AMG027S
204
❖ Page Numbering
• When page numbering is used with Combine mode, page numbers are
printed as follows:
• Page Numbering per original:
With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE0E
With the Magazine or Booklet function
5
GCANPE1E
• Page Numbering per copy:

With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE2E
• If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function and se-
lect [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...], page numbers on the back are printed as follows:
GCSTMPBE
A Front
B Back
❖ Stamp Text
Certain stamp positions can cause text to disappear.
205
Appendix
❖ Front Cover, Front/Back Cover

• If Blank mode is selected, the cover is not be counted as a copy.
• Front and back covers are two-sided copied depending on the settings
made in Display Time in Cover Sheet Tray of User Tools (System Settings).
• At Mode Selected… Depends on the setting done from Cover Sheet
Tray.
• Full Time… Depends on the setting done from Paper Type.
See “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❖ Designate
• When [Combine (1 Sided→2 Sided)] has been selected, specified pages will al-
ways be copied on the front of copies, as in Chapters mode.
• In “Tray Paper Settings”, if you selected [At Mode Selected] for [Display Time],
the machine refers to the settings in “Tray Paper Settings” to ascertain
whether the front and back covers are copied one-sided or two-sided. If
you selected [Full Time] for [Display Time], the machine refers to the settings
5 in “Paper Type” to ascertain whether the front and back covers are copied
one-sided or two-sided. See “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
• If Blank mode is selected, the designate sheet is not counted as a copy.
❖ Slip sheet
• Tab stock are possible to use as slip sheets.
• If you do not copy onto slip sheets, they are excluded from the number of
copies counted.
206
❖ Connect Copy
Important
❒ Do not use the connecting cable with other equipment.
❒ Always turn off the main power of the main and sub-machines when be-
fore disconnecting the cable. Otherwise it might lead to malfunctioning of
the two machines.
• You can store on a program whether or not to use Connect Copy.
• Select the copy paper using the main machine.
• When [Connect Copy] is pressed, only the paper trays common to both
machines will be displayed. The other paper trays appear faded out and
cannot be selected.
• When two or more trays hold the desired paper size, the paper tray will
be selected according to the Paper Tray Priority settings made on the re-
spective machine. See “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• If the {Clear Modes} key is pressed on the main machine while you are mak-
ing settings, Connect Copy will be cancelled. 5
• Even if the sub-machine is in Energy Saver mode, the main machine can
still connect to make copies.
• When an Interrupt job on the sub-machine has finished, press the {Inter-
rupt} key.
• Connect Copy jobs are displayed on the Job List of the sub-machine. How-
ever, they cannot be deleted from the sub-machine.
• In Connect Copy, both machines follow the user authentication settings of
the main machine.
• You cannot manage the number of copies according to machine. The
number of copies is shown as a total of the two machines, and is moni-
tored on the main machine
• Even if user codes are set and you enter a user code before using the
sub-machine, you cannot manage the number of copies made on the
sub-machine.
• If user codes are set on only the sub-machine, you need not enter a user
code in order to use the sub-machine for Connect Copy. In this case, you
cannot manage the number of copies according to user.
207
INDEX
C
1 Sided 16 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Center, 102, 103, 130
1 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side, 80 Center/Border Erase, 98, 102, 103
1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 1 Side, 80 Center Erase, 98
1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Centering, 130, 197
1 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 1 Side, 80 Changing a Stored Program, 145
1 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Changing Number of Print Copies
1 Sided → 2 Sides, 76 while Printing is in Progress, 186
1 Sided → Booklet, 88 Changing the Number of Sets, 66
1 Sided → Magazine, 88 Changing the order of jobs, 40
2 Sided 16 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Changing the stamp position, 126
2 Sided 1 Page → Combine 1 Side, 80 Changing User Name, File Name or
2 Sided 2 Page → Combine 1 Side, 80 Password of a Stored Document, 180
2 Sided 4 Page → Combine 1 Side, 80 Chapters, 135
2 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Checking Job History, 42
2 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 2 Side, 83 Checking jobs in the print queue, 39
2 Sided → 1 Sided, 86 Checking the Details of a Stored Document, 181
2 Sided → 2 Sided, 76 Check the copy, 65
2 Sided → Booklet, 88 Combine, 197
3 Edges Full Bleed, 74 Combined auto and
manual image density, 49, 50
A Combining Files, 189
Connect Copy, 149, 150, 154, 158, 164,
Adjusting Copy Image Density, 49 165, 166, 197
Administrator Tools, 6 Connect Copy: Job Preset, 166, 167, 168
Auto Document Feeder, 12 Connect Copy Display Panel, 152
Auto image density, 49 Connect Copy Job Flow, 164
Auto Off, 159 Copier Functions, 49, 169
Auto Paper Select, 52, 53 Copy Face Up, 141
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 58, 197 Copying, 29
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy, 159 Copying 2-Sided Pages, xii
Auto Start, 34 Copying from the multi bypass tray, 43
Copying onto OHP Transparencies, 34
B Copying onto Special Paper, 48
Copying onto Tab Stock, 31
Background Numbering, 106, 197
Copying onto Thin Paper, 34
Basic Procedure, 29
Copying Originals Such as Books, xi
Batch mode, 21
Copying Stored Documents Using
Before You Start, 151
Connect Copy, 160
Binding margin, 97
Covers, 132
Blank Slip Sheets, 138
Create Margin function, 56
Book → 1 Sided, 86
Creep Adjustment, 93
Book → 2 Sided, 88
Custom size, 47
Booklet, 88
Custom sizes, 26
Booklet/Magazine, vi, xi, 88, 197
Border Erase, 98, 100, 101, 102, 103
208
D H
Date, 118, 119 Holding print jobs, 41
Date Stamp, 116, 197 How to fold, 88
Default, 147 How to fold and unfold copies to
Deleting a Document, 192 make a booklet, 88
Deleting a job, 37 How to fold and unfold copies to
Deleting a Program, 146 make a magazine, 88
Deleting jobs, 41 How to Read This Manual, 2
Deleting Pages, 190 How to unfold, 88
Density, 109
Designate, 134, 197 I
Designation Sheet Copy, 136
Image density, 49
Detect, 14
Image Repeat, 127, 197
Different sizes, 23
Initial Display, 147
Directional Magnification, 60, 61
Input / Output, 6
Directional Size Magnification (mm), 62
Inserting Documents, 190
Display, 4
Inside Erase, 104
Displaying a Document in Document
Interrupt Copy, 30, 150
Server with Web Image Monitor, 193
Interrupting Printing, 185
Display panel of the sub-machine, 154
Invert, 131
Document Server, 169
Document Server Display, 170
J
Double Copies, 128
Downloading Stored Documents, 194 Job List, 38
Duplex, iii, 76, 197 Job List screen, 38
Job Preset, 35
E Job Preset display, 35
Edit, 6
K
Edit File, 189
Erase, 98, 197 Key Color, 5
Exiting Connect Copy, 159
L
F
Last Number, 122, 123
First printing number, 122, 123, 124 Left Original Beeper, 31
First printing page, 122, 123, 124
Format of date, 118 M
Front & Back → 2 Sided, 88
Front/Back Covers, 132 Machine Types and Options, 150
Front cover, 132 Magazine, 88
Front Cover, Front/Back Cover, 197 Manual image density, 50
Function Compatibility, 195 Manual Paper Select, 53
Manuals for This Machine, i
G Map, 51
Margin Adjustment, 97, 197
General Features, 6 Missing image area, 15
Generation Copy, 51 Mix 1 & 2 Sided, 94
Mixed size mode, 23, 197
Multi bypass tray, 46, 47
Multi Bypass Tray Copy, 197
209
N R
Notice, 1 Ratio, 57
Number keys, 57, 61 Recalling a Program, 146
Regular sizes, 25
O Repeat, 127
Reproduction Ratio, 6
One-Sided Combine, ix, 80 Revers, 131
onto 1-Sided Pages, xii
Reverse orientation, 18
Option, 3
Rotate Sort, 64
Order of Copy Output, 158
Orientation, 110 S
Original, 11
Original Orientation, 16 SADF, 22
Original orientation, 69, 107, 110, 116, 119 SADF mode, 22
Original orientation and completed copies, 76 Sample copy, 65
Original orientation position, 73 Sample Print, 186
Originals, 11, 15 Scanner Functions, 169
Originals and copy orientation, 79 Scanning Position, 95
Original size, 25 Searching for a Stored Document, 182
Outside Erase, 105 Selecting Copy Paper, 52
Separation, 67
P Series Copies, 86
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray, 45
Page Numbering, 119, 122, 123, 124, 197
Shift tray off in sort/stack, 67
Pale, 51
Simplified Display, 171
Photo, 51
Simplified display, 5
Placing, 11
Simplified Display key, 5
Placing Originals, 16
Size, 109
Placing Originals in the
Size Magnification, 59, 197
Auto Document Feeder, 20
Sizes, 14
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass, 19
Sizes and Weights of
Position, 69, 110 Recommended Originals, 11
Positive/Negative, 131
Sizes Detectable, 13
Preset Enlarge/Reduce, 197 Slip Sheet, 197
Preset Reduce/Enlarge, 54 Slip Sheets, 139
Preset Stamp, 107, 109, 197
Sort, 64, 197
Preview Display, 172 Specified Area Repeat, 127
Printer Functions, 169 Stack, 68, 197
Printing a Specified Page, 188
Stamp, 6
Printing a Specified Range, 188
Stamp position, 107, 109, 110, 112, 116,
Printing a Stored Document, 184
119, 122
Printing the First Page, 187
Stamp Text, 125, 197
Program, 113, 147
Staple, 69, 197
Programs, 144 Stapler, 69
Punch, 72
Storing a Program, 144
Punch holes, 72
Storing Data, 174
Storing Originals in the Document Server, 142
Symbols, 2
210
T V
Tab stock, 31 Various sizes, 23
Text, 51
Text/Photo, 51 W
Thin mode, 24
Thin Paper, 24 What You Can Do with This Machine, iii
When both machines are copying the
To change a file name, 178
same number of originals, 167
To change job contents after checking, 36
When Both Machines are in Use, 166
To check job contents, 36
When copying onto Regular Size Paper, 46
To delete a job after checking its contents, 37
When memory is full, 66
To delete the user stamp, 115
When no name is registered to the
To register or change a
Address Book, 178
user name, 176, 177, 178
When one machines is copying a
To search by file name, 182
larger number of originals, 168
To search by user name, 183
When One of the Two Machines is Idle, 164
To set or change a Password, 179
When using a user name
Two-Sided Combine, 83
not registered to the Address Book, 177
When using a user name
U
registered to the Address Book, 176
User Stamp, 110, 112, 113, 115 Whole Area Repeat, 127
Using Connect Copy, 155
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy, 162 Z
Using the Document Server, 174
Z-fold, 75, 197
Using the idle machine
Z-folding Copies, 76
as the main machine, 165
Z-fold positions, 76
Using the machine currently copying
Zoom, 56, 197
as the main machine, 166
Using the Z-fold Support Tray, 75
211
212 EN USA B235-7657
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
PostScript®, Acrobat® are registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Copyright © 2005
Operating Instructions Copy/Document Server Reference
EN USA B235-7657

MP 9000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP 9000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP 9000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

About This Machine

❖ About This Machine

❖ General Settings Guide

❖ Copy/ Document Server Reference

Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions

• Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users

Notice to Users in EEA Countries

Indicates important safety notes.

Indicates important safety notes.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

Safety During Operation

• Dispose of the used toner container in accordance with the local

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of

❖ Off Mode (Copier only)

❖ Sleep Mode (Printer, Scanner installed)

Duplex priority One-sided→One-sided

This section describes how to start using this machine.

1. Exposure glass 6. Front cover

1. Finisher SR5000 5. A3/11" × 17" tray unit

1. Status indicator 2. Operation switch

6. {Interrupt} key 17. Data In indicator (printer mode)

When the Authentication Screen is

User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].

B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Login (Using a Printer Driver)

Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)

Turning On the Power

Turning On the Main Power

Turning On the Power

1 A Press the Operation switch.

Turning Off the Power

A Press the Operation switch.

Turning Off the Main Power

A Make sure the On indicator is not lit.

This section describes how to enter characters.

How to Enter Text

A Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.

A Press [Symbol Entry] to enter into the Symbols mode.

B Press the symbols you want to enter.

Selecting a User Text

2 A Press [User Text].

B Select the User Text you want to use.

Dos and Don'ts

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-

3 ❖ Font Manager 2000

❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

❖ DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

❖ Printer Utility for Mac

Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM

A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].